# Full text of "Analytical Geometry of Three Dimensions"

## See other formats

NTALYTICAL

GEOMETRY

OF

THREE

DIMENSIONS

SOMMERVILLE

I **" v- 4 UU.v

CAJIBRIDGE

ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY

OF
THREE DIMENSIONS

CAMBRIDGE

UNIVERSITY PRESS

LONDON : BENTLEY HOUSE

NEW YORK, TORONTO, BOMBAY
TOKYO : MARUZEN COMPANY LTD

ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY

OF

THREE DIMENSIONS

BY

D. M. Y. SOMMERVILLE

M.A., D.Sc, F.N.Z.Inst.

PROFESSOR OF PORE AND APPLIED MATHEMATICS

VICTORIA UNIVERSITY COLLEGE

WELLINGTON, N.Z.

CAMBRIDGE

AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS

x 939

First Edition 1934
Reprinted 1939

PRINTED IN GREAT BRITAIN

CONTENTS
Preface page xv

Chap. I. Cartesian coordinate-system

1-1. Cartesian coordinates; 1-11. Convention of signs, right-
handed system I

1-2. Radius- vector, direction-angles; 1-21. Direction-cosines; 1-22.
Radius- vector in terms of coordinates; 1-23. Identity con-
necting the direction-cosines 2

1-3. Change of origin 3

1-4. Distance between two points a

1-5. Angle between two lines, actual direction-cosines ; 1-51. Num-
bers proportional to the direction-cosines ; 1-52. Expression
for sin 2 4

1-6. Perpendicularity and parallelism; 1-61. Condition for per-
pendicularity; 1-62. Conditions for parallelism 5

1-7. Position-ratio of a point w.r.t. two base-points; 1-71. Another
set of section-formulae; 1-72. Mean point of two points;
1-78. Mean point of three points 6

1-8. General cartesian coordinates; 1-81. Radius-vector in terms of
coordinates; 1-82. Identity connecting direction- ratios ;
1-83. Distance between two points; 1-84. Angle between
two lines y

1-9. Examples 8

Chap. II. The straight line and plane

2-1. Degrees of freedom; 2-11. Equations of a straight line; 2-111.
Freedom-equations; 2-112. Standard form; 2118. Another
form of freedom-equations; 2-12. Equation of a plane;
2-121. Freedom-equations; 2-122. Determinant form;
2-128. Equation of first degree represents a plane; 2-124.
Orientation of a plane, normal equation of plane; 2-125.
Intercept-equation; 2-13. Intersection of two planes;
2-14. Note on vectors lx

2-2. Angles „

2-81. Intersection of a straight line and a plane; 2-82. Points, lines
and plane at infinity; 2-33. Homogeneous cartesian co-
ordinates; 2-84. Freedom-equations of a line in homo-
geneous coordinates; 2-341. Matrices; 2-85. Equation of a
plane in homogeneous coordinates; 2-351. Freedom-
equations of a plane in homogeneous coordinates; 2-86.
Point, line and plane at infinity represented analytically i6

2-41. Intersection of three planes; 2-42. Pencil of planes; 2-43.
Condition that three lines through the origin should lie in
one plane; 2-44. Intersection of two straight lines ji

2-5. Number of data which determine a point, a plane and a straight
line; 2-51. Coordinates of a plane; 2-511. Notation; 2-52.
Coordinates of a line; 2-521. Identical relation; 2-522.
Line determined by a set of coordinates satisfying the
identical relation; 2-528. Relations between the two sets of
line-coordinates; 2-524. Condition that two lines should
intersect 2 ±

vi CONTENTS

2-6. Imaginary elements _ page 30

2-71. Distance from a point to a plane ; 2-72. Distance of a point

from a straight line ; 2-78. Shortest distance between two

straight lines; 2-731. Moment of two lines 31

2-8. Volume of tetrahedron ; 2-81. in terms of coterminous edges;

2-82. in terms of six edges 34

2-9. Transformation of coordinates ; 2-91. Euler's equations; 2-92.

Modulus of transformation; 2-95. Examples 37

Chap. III. General homogeneous or projective
coordinates

8*1. Projective geometry; 8-11. Primitive geometrical elements and

forms 46

8-2. One-to-one correspondence; 8-21. Cross-ratio, metrical defi-
nition; 8-22. Coordinate of a point on a line 47
8-8. Cross-ratio of four parameters; 3-31 . The six cross-ratios of p
four numbers ; 8-811 . Harmonic and equianharmonic sets ;
8-82. Representation of a pair by a quadratic equation;
8-321. Condition that two pairs should be harmonic;
8-322. In a harmonic set at least one of the pairs must be
real ; 8-823. Cross-ratio of two pairs ; 3-324. Condition that
cross-ratio should be real ; 3-325. and positive 49
8-41. Geometrical cross-ratio; 3-42. Harmonic set; 8-48. Projective
ranges; 8-44. Fundamental theorem of projective geo-
metry; 8-46. Cross-ratio property of conic S3
8-5. Homography, double-points; 3-51. Involution; 8-52. Involu-
tion determined by two pairs of elements ; 3-521. Involu-
tion determined by a quadrangle 55
8-6. Geometrical cross-ratio as a number; 8-61. Identification with
the cross-ratio of the parameters; 3-82. Harmonic set;
8-63. Rational net; 3-64. Projective coordinates in two di-
mensions; 3-65. The unit-point; 8-68. Projective coordi-
nates in three dimensions; 3-67. in n dimensions 58
8-71. Cross-ratios of different geometrical forms; 3-72. Polar plane

of a point w.r.t. a tetrahedron 63

8-81. Transition from projective to metrical geometry; 3-82. Dis-
tance in metrical geometry of one dimension; 3-88. Dis-
tance in two dimensions; 3-84. The Absolute; 3-85.
Metrical coordinates referred to a tetrahedron; 8-851.
8-853. Barycentric coordinates; 8-86. Plane at infinity;
8-861. Cartesian coordinates 64

8-91. Analytical representation of a homography; 3-92. Determina-
tion of an involution by two pairs ; 8-921. If both pairs are
real, the involution is elliptic or hyperbolic according as
the cross-ratio is negative or positive ; 3-922. If one pair is
imaginary, the involution is hyperbolic; 3-93. Two in-
volutions on the same line have a unique common pair 70
8-95. Examples 71

Chap. IV. The sphere

4.1. Equation in terms of centre and radius; 4-11. Centre and
radius, virtual sphere and point-sphere; 4-12. Sphere of

4-2. Power of a point w.r.t. a sphere; 4-21. Positive, negative and
zero power; power w.r.t. a point-sphere; 4-22. Power
w.r.t. a plane 75

CONTENTS vii

4»8. Sphere through four given points; 4-31. Condition that five

points should lie on a sphere page 76

4-41. Intersection of sphere and plane; 4-42. Intersection of two
or more spheres; 4-421. Radical plane of two spheres;
of four spheres ; 4-43. Angle of intersection of two spheres ;
4-481. Condition that two spheres should be orthogonal;
4-482. Sphere orthogonal to four given spheres 77

4-5. Pole and polar w.r.t. a sphere; 4-51. Jacobianof four spheres 79

4-6. Linear systems of spheres; 4-61. One-parameter system, co-
axial system or pencil; 4-62. Two-parameter system ; 4-63.
Three-parameter system; 4-64. Linear relations connecting
the coefficients 81

4-7. Inversion in a sphere; 4-71. Inverse of a sphere; 4-72. In-
variance of angles; 4-78. Stereographic projection; 4-74.
Inversion as a geometrical transformation 84

4-8. The circle at infinity; 4-81. Isotropic lines and planes 86

4-9. Examples 89

Chap. V. The cone and cylinder

5-1. Equation of a cone; 5-11. General equation of quadric cone
with vertex at origin ; 5-12. Circular cone or cone of revo-
lution; 5-122. Conditions for circular cone; 5-128. The
conic at infinity on a circular cone has double contact with
the circle at infinity 94

5-2. Intersection of a cone and a plane through the vertex; 5-21.
Tangent-plane, tangential equations ; 5-22. Condition that
two generators should be at right angles ; 5-23. Angle be-
tween two generating lines; 5-231. Condition that lines of
intersection should be real 97

5-8. Polar of a point w.r.t. a cone 100

5-4. Reciprocal cones; 5-41. Reciprocal of a cone 100

5-5. Rectangular generators; 5-51. Three mutually rectangular

generators ; 5-52. Rectangular cone ; 5-58. Orthogonal cone 102

5-6. Relation between geometry of cones and geometry of conies 104

5-7. Cylinders; 5-71. Classification of cylinders ; 5-72. Tangential

equations of a cylinder; 5-78. Reciprocal of a cylinder;

5-74. Developables >. 105

5-9. Examples 107

Chap. VI. Types of surfaces of the second order

6-1. Surfaces of revolution; 6-11. Oblate and prolate spheroids;
6-12. Hyperboloids of revolution; 6-121. of two sheets;
6-122. of one sheet; 6-13. Paraboloid of revolution; 6-14.
Other surfaces of revolution, the anchor-ring ; 6-15. Circu-
lar cone and cylinder no

6-21. Ellipsoid ; 6-22. Hyperboloid of two sheets ; 6-23. Hyper-
boloid of one sheet; 6-24. Elliptic paraboloid; 6-25. Hyper-
bolic paraboloid ; 6-251. Alternative equation 113

6-8. Ruled surfaces; 6-81. Hyperboloid generated by revolving line;
6-82. Hyperboloid with its two sets of generating lines;
6-83. Hyperbolic paraboloid 114

6-4. Imaginary generating lines of ellipsoid, etc. ; 6-41. The elliptic

paraboloid 117

6-5. Examples 119

viii CONTENTS

Chap. VII. Elementary properties of quadric
surfaces derived from their simplest equa-
tions

7-1. The canonical equations; 7-11. Symmetry page lai

7-2. Tangential properties ; 7-21. Intersection of a straight line with
a quadric; 7-22. Tangent at a point; 7-221. Direction-
cosines of normal; 7-222. Tangent-plane to central quad-
ric; 7-223. Tangent-plane to paraboloid; 7-28. Tangential
equation; 7-231. of paraboloid 122

7-8. Pole and polar; 7-81. Definition of polar-plane; 7-32. Con-
jugate points ; 7-33. Pole of a plane ; 7-34. Conjugate planes ;
7-35. Tangent-cone ; 7-351. Rectangular hyperboloid ; 7-352.
Orthoptic sphere; orthogonal hyperboloid; 7-353. En-
veloping cylinder; 7-36. Polar of a line ; 7-87. Polar tetra-
hedra; 7-38. Conjugate lines; 7-381. Self-conjugate tetra-
hedra; 7-382. Tetrahedra in perspective 124

7-4. Diametral planes ; 7- 41 . Centre of a plane section ; 7- 41 1 . Alter-
native method; 7-412. Section with a given centre; 7-413.
Diametral plane conjugate to a given direction; 7-414.
Locus of mid-points of chords through a fixed point ; 7-42.
Conjugate diameters; 7-421. Sum of squares of conjugate
diameters; 7-422. Volume of parallelepiped on three con-
jugate diameters ; 7-48. Principal diametral planes and
axes 131

7-5. The hyperboloids 136

7-6. Quadric referred to conjugate diameters 137

7-7. Normals; 7-71. Everynormal is perpendicular to its polar;
7-72. Number of normals from a given point; 7-78. Lines of
curvature 137

7-8. The paraboloids; 7-81. Diametral planes; 7-82. Normals 139

7-9. Examples 140

Chap. VIII. The reduction of the general equa-
tion of the second degree

8-1. General equation; 8-11. Quadric through nine points; 8-12.
two conies 144

8-2. Conjugate points; 8-21. Polar-plane; 8-22. Generating lines;
8-23. Tangent-plane; 8-231. Tangent-plane meets surface
in two generating lines ; 8-24. Hyperbolic, parabolic and
elliptic points; 8-25. Polar-lines 147

8-8. Invariants; 8-81. Discriminant, condition for a cone; 8-811.
Degenerate quadrics; 8-82. Absolute and relative in-
variants, modulus of transformation; 8-38. Definition of
invariant; 8-831. Lemma on determinants; 8-882. An in-
variant is transformed by multiplying by a power of the
modulus; weight of an invariant; 8-34. Projective in-
projective invariant; 8-842. A quadric has only one pro-
jective invariant ; 8-85. Condition for real generating lines 149

8-4. Polarity; 8-41. Correlations; 8-42. Condition for a polarity;
8-43. Null-system ; 8-481. Null-system in statics ; 8-432. The
linear complex 154

CONTENTS ix

8-61. Canonical equation of a quadric; 8-52. Specialised and de-
generate quadrics ; 8-58. Projective classification of conies ;
8-64. Projective classification of quadrics page 158

8-6. Metrical aspect of a quadric; 8-61. Diametral planes; 8-62.
The centre; 8-83. Conic at infinity on a quadric; 8-84.
Metrical classification of quadrics; 8-85. Principal dia
metral planes 162

8-7. The discriminating cubic; 8-71. Roots all real; 8-72. Multiple
roots; 8-721. Lemma on determinants; 8-722. Relation
between multiple roots and rank of matrix; 8-78. The
principal directions ; 8-74. Principal axes in relation to the
circle at infinity 167

8-8. Transformation of rectangular coordinates ; 8-81. Reduction to
axes through the centre; 8-82. Rotation of axes, invariants;
8-88. Reduction to the principal axes; 8-84. Reduction of
the paraboloid; 8-85. Elliptic and hyperbolic cylinders;
8-86. Parabolic cylinder 170

8-9. Quadrics of revolution ; 8-95. Examples 175

Chap. IX. Generating lines and parametric re-
presentation

9-1. Lines on a surface; 9-11. Two systems of generators of a

9-2. Equation of quadric when two generators are opposite edges
of the tetrahedron of reference ; 9- 21 . Equations of the gene-
rating lines ; 9-22. Generators of the paraboloid parallel to
one or other of two planes 182

9.3. Regulus generated by two projective pencils of planes; 9-31.
Quadric generated by transversals of three skew lines;
9-32. Quadric with two given generators of different
systems 183

9-4. Lines meeting one, two, three or four fixed lines ; 9-41. Com-
mon transversals of two pairs of polars w.r.t. a quadric 185

9-51 . Freedom-equations of hyperboloid of one sheet ; 9-52. Hyper-
bolic paraboloid 188

9-6. Parametric equations of a curve; 9-61. The conic; 9-62. The
space-cubic; 9-83. Every conic can be represented by
rational freedom-equations ; 9-84. Every non-plane cubic
curve is rational 188

9-7. Parametric equations of a surface; 9-71. Representation on a
plane; fl-72. Stereographic projection; 9-73. Order of the
surface represented by parametric equations; 9-731.
Surfaces represented by quadratic equations 191

9-9. Examples 195

Chap. X. Plane sections of a quadric

10-1. Species of sections 199

10-2. Centre of a plane section; 10-21. The paraboloid 200
10-81. Axes of a central plane section; 10-32. Non-central section;

10-88. Asymptotes of plane section 200

10-4. Circular sections; 10-41. Central quadrics; 10-42. Paraboloids 204

10-5. Models 205

10-6. Sphere containing two circular sections 207

10-7. Umbilics; 10-71. Configuration of the umbilics 207

10-9. Examples 209

x CONTENTS

Chap. XL Tangential equations

11-1. Homogeneous point- and plane-coordinates page 212

11-21. Tangent-plane of a surface; 11-22. Point of an envelope 212
11-8. Tangential equation derived from point-equation, and vice

versa ; 11-31. Tangential equation of quadric 213

11-4. Some special forms of the tangential equation of a quadric 214
11-5. Order and class of a surface; 11-61. Plane curve dual to cone;

11-52. Tangential equation of a plane curve 215

11-6. Tangential equations of a cone 217
11-7. Equations in line-coordinates ; 11-71. Line-equation of aconic;

11-74. Another form of the line-equation 218

11-9. Examples 222

Chap. XII. Foci and focal properties

12-1. Foci of a conic; 12-11. Focal axes of a quadric; 12-12. Foci of

12-2. Analytical treatment; 12-21. Focal axes; 12-22. Focal conies;
12-23. Foci; 12-24. Relation to the circular sections,
directrices; 12-25. Relation of the focal conies to one
another 227

12-31. Metrical property of foci; 12-32. Sections normal to a focal
conic; 12-33. Quadrics having ring-contact; 12-34. Dande-
lin's theorem 233

12-4. Confocal quadrics; 12-41. Confocals through a given point;
12-42. Triple orthogonal system; 12-43. Confocal quadrics
in tangential coordinates; 12-431. The focal developable;
12-44. Confocals touching a given line 235

12-5. The paraboloids; 12-51. Confocal paraboloids 239

12-61. Foci of a cone; 12-62. Cylinder; 12-63. Confocal cones;

12-64. Confocal cylinders 241

12-7. Conjugate focal conies 244

12-8. All quadrics of a confocal system have the same foci and focal
axes; 12-81. The focal axes are generators of quadrics of
the confocal system 246

12-9. Deformable framework of generating lines of a quadric;

12-91. The paraboloid; 12-95. Examples 247

Chap. XIII. Linear systems of quadrics

13-1. Linear one-parameter system or pencil of quadric loci; 18-11.
Base-curve; 13-12. One quadric through each point; 13-13.
Involution on a line ; 13-14. Two quadrics touching a given
line; 13-15. Three quadrics touching a given plane; 1316.
Common self-polar tetrahedron of two quadrics; 13-17.
Four cones in a pencil of quadrics 251

13-2. Linear tangential one-parameter system; 13-21. Tangent-
developable; 13-22. One quadric touching a given plane;
13-23. Two touching a given line; 13-24. Three passing
through a given point ; 13-25. Four quadric-envelopes of a
pencil are conies 253

18-8. Confocal quadrics; 13-81. Curves of intersection of confocal
quadrics, lines of curvature ; 13-32. The indicatrix, lines of
curvature through an umbilic; 13-33. Lines of curvature
projected into confocal conies ; 18-84. Lines of curvature of
a cone or a cylinder; 13-85. Sphero-conics ; 13-36. Con-
focal conies in non-euclidean geometry 254

CONTENTS a

18-4. Polar properties of pencil of quadrics ; 13-41. The polar-planes
of a given point all pass through one line ; 13-42. The polar
complex of lines ; 13-48. Locus of points corresponding to
coplanar lines of the complex; 13-431. The poles of a given
plane generate a cubic curve ; 13-44. The polars of a given
line generate a regulus; 13-45. The tetrahedral complex page 261
18-5. Polar properties of a tangential system of quadrics 264

13-61. Quadrics through eight fixed points; 18-62. Set of eight

associated points 265

18-7. Paraboloids and rectangular hyperboloids in a linear system 266
18-8. Classification of linear systems; 13-81. General case;
13-811. Double-contact; 13-812. Ring-contact; 13-813.
Quadruple-contact; 18-82. Simple contact, base-curve a
nodal quartic; 18-821. Stationary contact; 13-822. Triple-
contact; 18-828. Contact along two lines; 13-83. Base-curve
a space-cubic and a chord; 13-831. Contact along a double
generator ; 13-84. Stationary contact, base-curve a cuspidal
quartic; 13-841. Base-curve a conic and two lines inter-
secting on it; 18-85. A space-cubic and a tangent; 13-86.
Invariant-factors; 18-87. Singular case 267

18-9. Examples 274

Chap. XIV. Curves and developables

14-1. Curves and their representation; 1411. Order of a curve;
14-12. Parametric representation ; 14-18. Luroth's theorem ;
14-14. Intersection of two surfaces 277

14-21. Complex of secants and congruence of bisecants; 14-22.
Apparent double-points; 14-28. Maximum number of
double-points of a plane curve; 14-231. Rational plane
curves; 14-232. Unicursal curves have zero deficiency or
genus; 14-24. Genus of a space-curve 281

14-3. Tangents and osculating planes 284

14-4. Developables; 14-41. Edge of regression; 14-42. Significance

of term "developable"; 14-43. Cuspidal edge 284

14-51. Order, class and rank of a curve or developable; 14-52. Equa-
tions determining the rank and class 286

14-6. The Space-Cubic; 14-61. Intersection of quadric cones; 14-62.
Secants and bisecants; 14-631. Projective construction;
14-632. Tangents and osculating planes; 14-64. Quadrics
containing a cubic curve ; 14-641 . Intersection of cubic and
conic lying on quadric ; 14-642. Involution on a cubic curve ;
14-648. Common generator of two quadrics containing a
cubic curve; 14-651. One bisecant through every point in
space; 14-652. Class and rank of a cubic curve; 14-66.
Cubic curve through six points; 14-671. Intersection of
two cubic curves lying on a quadric; 14-672. Through five
given points on a quadric pass two cubics lying on the
surface; 14-681. Line-coordinates of a tangent; 14-682.
Osculating planes ; 14-683. Linear complex containing the
tangents ; 14-69. Metrical classification of cubic curves 287

14-7. Quartic Curves, two species 295

14-71. Quartics of First Species, complete intersection of two
points ; 14-712. Partial intersection of a quadric and a cubic
surface ; 14-718. No trisecants, no apparent double-points,
not rational; 14-714. Parametric representation by elliptic
{ functions; 14-715. Nodal quartic; 14-7151. Rational para-

metric representation of nodal quartic; 14-716. Cuspidal
quartic ; 14-717. Class and rank of quartics of first species ;
14-718. Tangent-developable of two quadrics 296

Chap. XVI. Line geometry

3°9

xii CONTENTS

14-72. Quartics of Second Species; 14-721. Intersection of a
quadric surface and a cubic cone having a double-line
coinciding with a generator of the quadric; 14-722. Inter-
section of a quadric and a cubic surface having two skew
lines in common; 14-723. Trisecants; 14-724. Parametric
representation; 14-725. Three types of quartics of Second
Species page 301

14-8. Number of intersections of two curves (conies, cubics or

quartics) lying on a quadric surface 303

14-9. Curve of striction of a regulus; 14-95. Examples 304

Chap. XV. Invariants of a pair of quadrics

15-1. Simultaneous invariants of two quadrics; 15-11. Simplified
forms

15-2. Geometrical meanings for the vanishing of the invariants;
15-21. 6' = o; co 3 tetrahedra inscribed in S and self-polar
w.r.t. 2', S outpolar to 2'; 15-211. 00 s tetrahedra circum-
scribed to 2' and self-polar w.r.t. S, 2' inpolar to S;
15-212. Examples: eight associated points; 15-22. * = o,
co tetrahedra self-polar w.r.t. S' and having edges
touching S 310

15-81. Relation of * to the line-equations of the two quadrics;
15-32. Invariants for the reciprocal system ; 15-33. Absolute
invariants; 15-34. Examples of invariant equations; 15-35.
is a cone; 15-37. or a conic 313

15-4. Metrical applications; 15-41. Affine transformation; 15-42.
Orthogonal transformation ; 15-43. Simultaneous invariants
of circle at infinity and conic at infinity on quadric; 15-44.
Conditions for rectangular and orthogonal hyperboloids ;
15-45. Orthocyclic hyperboloids; 15-46. Orthofocal hyper-
boloids 321

15-51. Contravariants ; 15-52. Tangential equation of curve of inter-
section of two quadrics; 15-53. Covariants; 15-54. Co-
variants and contravariants viewed as invariants 325

15-61. Reciprocal quadrics; 15-62. Expression of reciprocal as a

covariant 328

16-7. Harmonic complex of two quadrics 329

15-81. Line-equation of curve of intersection of two quadrics;
15-82. The various equations of a curve and its develop-
able; 15-83. Point-equation of developable belonging to
curve of intersection of two quadrics 331

15-91. Conjugate generators; 15-92. Rectangular hyperboloids in

non-euclidean geometry; 15-95. Examples 333

16-11. Pliicker's coordinates; 16-12. Condition for intersection of
two lines; 1613. Complex, congruence, and line-series;
16-14. Lines through a given point or in a given plane;
16-15. Degree of a complex; 16-16. Linear complex; pole
and polar-plane, polar-lines 337

16-2. Geometry of four dimensions; 16-21. Linear equations and
loci; 16-22. Quadrics in S 4 ; conjugate points; 16-23. Lines
on a quadric F ? 2 ; 16-24. Hypercones ; 16-25. The complete
system of <»• lines on a K>* 340

16-8. Geometry of five dimensions; 16-31. Linear spaces; 16-32.
Quadrics in S t ; 16-38. Two systems of co 8 planes on a V,* ;
16-34. Intersection of a quadric with a linear space; tan-
gents and polars 343

CONTENTS aii

16-4. Representation of lines in ordinary space by points on a V t %
(o>); notation; 16-41. Condition for intersection of two
lines; 16-42. The planes of to: field-planes and bundle-
planes; 16-48. The lines of to page 345

16-5. The linear complex ; 16-51. Its invariant; 16-52. Special or
singular linear complex; 16-58. Linear congruence;
16-581. Singular linear congruence; 16-532. Parabolic linear
congruence; 16-54. Linear series or regulus; 16-55. Deter-
mination of a linear complex by five lines 346

18-6. Polar properties of a linear complex; 16-61. Pole and polar-
plane; 16-611. Change of notation; 16-621. Condition for
a singular complex; 16-622. Singular congruence ; 16-623.
Degenerate regulus; 16-63. Polar lines; 16-64. Conjugate
linear complexes; 16-65. Homographies and involutions
determined by two linear complexes 34^

16-7. Canonical equation of a quadric in S s 35*

16-8. The quadratic complex; 16-81. Four lines in common with any
regulus; 16-82. Singular points and planes; singular sur-
face; 16-88. Polar of a line w.r.t. a quadratic complex;
polar congruence; 16-831. Tangent linear congruence;
16-84. Singular lines ; 16-85. Order and class of the singular
surface; 16-86. Co-singular quadratic complexes _ 353

16-9. Special types of quadratic complexes; general type with
singular surface a Kummer Surface; 16-91. Complex of
tangent-lines to a quadric ; 16-92. Complex of tangent-lines
to a cone; 16-93. Tetrahedral complex; 16-94. Harmonic
complex; tetrahedroid, Fresnel's wave-surface 358

16-95. Examples 3°*

Chap. XVII. Algebraic surfaces

17-1. Definition, reducible and irreducible surfaces; 17-11. Order
of a surface; 17-12. Tangent-plane; 17-18. Section by
tangent-plane at O has a double-point at O; 17-14. In-
flexional tangents; hyperbolic, elliptic and parabolic
points; 17-15. Equation determining the points in which a
fine cuts the surface; 17-16. Equation of the tangent-plane
at a point; 17-17. Conjugate tangents, stationary plane,
point of osculation 364

17-2. Curvature; 17-21. Meunier's theorem; 17-22. Gaussian mea-
sure of curvature, mean curvature 366

17-3. Polars; 17-81. First polar passes through points of contact of

tangent-planes ; 17-32. The Hessian ; 17-33. The Steinerian 369

17-4. Constant-number of an algebraic surface; 17-41. Class of a

surface; 17-42. Reciprocal surfaces 37a

17-5. Double-points; 17-51. Node or conical point; 17-52. Dis-
criminant; 17-58. Binode and unode; 17-531. Reduction of
class for a node, binode or unode; 17-54. Trope, double
tangent-plane; 17-55. Tritangent-planes ; 17-56. Bitangent
developable ; 17-57. Triple-points, double or nodal curve 373

17-6. Lines and conies lying on a surface 378

17-7. Ruled Surfaces; 17-71. Intersection of three complexes;
17-72. Tangent-plane through a generator; 17-73. Degree
of a ruled surface; 17-74. Rank of a surface; 17-75. Genus;
17-761. Double-curve; 17-762. Bitangent developable;
17-768. Order of the double-curve ; 17-77. Directrix curves ;
17-78. Ruled cubics; 17-781. Cayley's ruled cubic; 17-79.
Ruled quartics; 17-791. Quartic developable ; 17-792. Non-
developable ruled quartics 379

»v CONTENTS

17-8. Cubic Surfaces; 17-81. Generated by point common to
corresponding planes of three related bundles; 17-811.
Geometrical determination of correlation between bundles
of planes; 17-82. Every cubic surface is rational; 17-83.
Double and triple tangent-planes ; 17-84. Through every
line of the surface pass five tritangent planes; 17-85.
Through a double-point pass six lines; 17-881. A cubic
surface without double-points has twenty-seven lines;
17-882. Forty-five tritangent planes; 17-868. Schlgfli's no-
tation ; 17-87. The double-six; 17-88. Classification of cubic
surfaces according to the reality of the twenty-seven
lines ; 17-89. Projective classification according to double-
points page 388

17-9. Quartic Surfaces; 17-91. Lines on a quartic surface; 17-911.
The Weddle surface; 17-92. Rational quarries; 17-921.
Monoids; 17-93. The Steiner surface ; 17-931. Parametric
equations; 17-932. Possesses fourtropes; 17-933. oo 4 conies;
17-934. Tangential equation; 17-935. Parametric equations
of second degree represent a Steiner surface ; 17-94. The
surface of Veronese, ■ PV; 17-941. Possesses oo a conies;
17-942. Envelope of four-flats, Af 4 a , which cut the surface
of Veronese in pairs of conies; 17-943. Tangent-plane at a
point on K 2 4 ; 17-944. V t * is a double surface on M, s ;
17-95. Normal varieties ; 17-951. Anormal variety is rational ;
17-952. has no double-points; 17-96. Projections of the
surface of Veronese on space of three dimensions; 17-97.
Rational quartic surface with a double-line ; 17-98. Rational
quartic surface with a double-conic; 17-981. Cyclides;
17-982. Projection of the surface of intersection of two

17-99. Examples 408

Index 411

PREFACE

Until recent years there has been a tendency, in England at
least, to regard Geometry as if it were a mine which had been
worked out and exhausted. Mathematical interest was largely
transferred to analysis. The great stimulus given by Cayley,
Salmon and Clifford in the 'sixties and 'seventies of last century
appeared. But if their influence in Britain had become weakened,
it grew upon the Continent, especially in Italy, and it is from
Italy, largely through the medium of Professor H. F. Baker, that
once more a renewed interest in geometry has arisen and is
flourishing in England.

It is seventy-one years since Salmon's Treatise on the Analytic
Geometry of Three Dimensions was first published. It has been
translated into German, French and Italian, and has been
expanded into two volumes in later English editions.* In its
first form it embodied the results of many very recent researches,
and, brought up to date and including several new topics, it is
still recognised as the standard work in the English language.
There seems, however, to be room for a text-book written more
in accordance with the tendencies of the present ' ' cosmic epoch ' ' ,
to apply a suggestive term of Whitehead's. Fashions in mathe-
matics, as in other things, alter. The facts remain but their values
change. Rather, perhaps, new principles, wider and more
unifying, are discovered, leading to different treatment and a
different emphasis being put on the various developments.

In some ways the present text-book should be regarded as an
introduction to Professor Baker's inspiring volumes on the
Principles of Geometry. This work, especially in the two recent
volumes, shows strongly the Italian influence, and the. same must
be acknowledged in the case of the present text-book. It is
natural that the Italian school, which has been responsible for
a great part of modern geometrical research, should have pro-
duced also some of the finest text-books, such as Bianchi's
Lezioni di geometria analitica (Pisa, 1920), Castelnuovo's book
with the same title (6th ed. Milan, 1924), Berzolari's two Hoepli
manuals entitled Geometria analitica (Milan: 1, 3rd ed. 1925;
11, 2nd ed. 1922), and Comessati's Lezioni di geometria analitica e
proiettiva (Milan, 1930). To these, as well as to Salmon, Baker,
the Collected Mathematical Papers of Cayley and of Klein,

• Vol. 1, 7th ed. revised by R. A. P. Rogers and edited by C. H. Rowe,
1928 Vol. a, 5th ed. revised by Rogers, 1915.

xvi PREFACE

Hudson's classic on Rummer's Quartic Surface, Pascal's Reper-
torium, the Enzyklopadie der mathematischen Wissenschaften, and
other sources difficult to particularise, I have to express my
indebtedness.

Being an elementary text-book it may be used by beginners.
For such it may be useful to indicate a first course of reading :
Chap, i (omitting i-8 # ), Chap, n (omitting 2-34, 2-35, 2-36, 2-41,
2-5, 2731, 2-8, 2-91), Chap, iv (omitting 4-2, 4-31, 4-51, 4-81),
Chap, v (omitting 5-122, 5-123, 5-23, 5-6), Chap, vi, Chap, vii
(omitting 7-38, 7-73), Chap, vni (omitting 8-11-8-13, 8-24,
8-41-8-432, 8-53-8-54, 8-64, 8-72, 8-74, 8-9), Chap, ix (omitting
9*3 > 9'4» 9' 6 > 97)» Cha P- x (omitting 10-71).

Except for a few insignificant references the subject-matter
of differential geometry has been excluded from this book. On
the other hand free use has been made of homogeneous co-
ordinates, tangential coordinates and line-coordinates. In the
case of metrical geometry the circle at infinity is used wherever
it is applicable; this is especially the case in the treatment of
foci, which follows somewhat closely on the lines of Berzolari.
There are several illustrative references to Non-Euclidean
Geometry, and much use has been made, as in Baker's volumes,
of geometry of higher dimensions, especially in the exposition of
line-geometry. In the enumeration of types of linear systems of
quadrics opportunity has been taken to explain the notation of
invariant-factors. No exhaustive treatment of the theory of
algebraic curves and surfaces has been attempted; the two
chapters which have been devoted to these are intended rather
to be suggestive, and are confined practically to curves of the
third and fourth orders, and to ruled and rational cubic and
quartic surfaces.

I have to express my grateful thanks to Mr F. P. White for
much encouragement in the preparation of the book ; to Professor
script, for many helpful and valuable suggestions ; and to Mr F. F.
Miles, M.A., Lecturer in Mathematics at Victoria University
College, for great assistance in reading the proof-sheets and in
checking the examples.

I have also to acknowledge with thanks the courtesy and close
attention of the Staff of the Cambridge University Press.

* This is to be understood as including all further subdivisions, as 1-81,
1-82, etc.

D. M. Y. SOMMERVILLE

VICTORIA UNIV. COLL.
WELLINGTON, N.Z.

October 1933

ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY
OF THREE DIMENSIONS

CHAPTER I
CARTESIAN COORDINATE-SYSTEM

1-1. Cartesian coordinates.

In a plane the position of a point P is determined by two co-
ordinates, x and y, referred to two straight lines OX, OY, the
coordinate-axes ; viz. if NP || OX and MP || O Y, so that we have
a parallelogram OMPN, then x = OM = NP, y = ON = MP.

To fix the position of a point in space we take three planes..
These have a point O in common and
intersect in pairs in three lines X'OX, < ■

Y'OY,Z'OZ. O is called the origin, J-

the three lines the coordinate-axes, ^i
and the three planes the coordinate-
planes. y_

/
&-

V s

r+Y

N

Let P be any point. Through P
draw PL parallel to XOX' cutting J
the plane YOZ in L, and similarly ■*
PM and PN parallel to the other axes. Fi s- x

Let the plane MPN cut OX in U, and similarly obtain AT
and N'. We obtain then a parallelepiped whose faces are parallel
to the coordinate-planes, and edges parallel to the coordinate-
axes, and OP is a diagonal. The figure is determined by the
lengths of OL', OM', ON'.

In the usual way we attach signs to lengths measured along
the axes, defining by a convention that distances measured in
one direction are positive, distances measured in the opposite
direction being negative. With these conventions we then define
the coordinates of the point P as the three lengths

OL' = x, OM' = y, ON' = z.
To every point P there corresponds uniquely a set of three num-
bers [x,y,z], and conversely to every set of three numbers,
positive or negative, there corresponds a unique point.

3 CARTESIAN COORDINATE-SYSTEM [chap.

I'll. Convention of signs.

Let the positive directions along the axes of x and y be defined
arbitrarily, say OX and OY; then in the plane XOY we may
pass from OX to OY by a rotation through an angle XOY less
than two right angles. Viewed from one side of the plane this
rotation is clockwise, and from the other side it appears counter-
clockwise. We define that side of the plane from which the
rotation appears to be counter-clockwise as the positive side of
the plane. Then the positive direction of the axis of z is defined
to be that which lies on the positive side of the plane XO Y. This
relation then holds for each of the axes, viz. the positive direction
of the axis of x is on the positive side of the plane YOZ, and the
positive direction of the axis of y is on the positive side of the
plane ZOX. This is called a right-handed system of cartesian
coordinates.

1-2. When the planes are mutually at right angles we call it
a rectangular system, otherwise it is oblique. We shall confine our
attention for the present to rectangular coordinates.

OP is called the radius-vector of P, denoted by r. Since PN
is perpendicular to the plane XOY, ON is the orthogonal pro-
jection, or simply the projection, of OP on the plane XOY.
Again, since the plane PML'N _L OX, PL' ± OX and OU is
the projection of OP on the line OX.

Let the angles which OP makes with the positive directions
of the axes be a, jS, y, then

ar = rcosa, y = rcosj3, z = rcosy.

The position of P is determined by the angles a, /?, y and the
radius-vector r, for these then determine x, y, z. The angles by
themselves determine only the direction of the line OP. We call
them the direction-angles of the line OP. As the cosines of these
angles occur repeatedly it is convenient to call them the direction-
cosines, and frequently we denote them by single letters /, m, n.
There is a redundance in fixing the position of a point by the
radius-vector and its direction-angles, for these are four num-
bers, and three, x, y, z, are sufficient to fix the position. We shall
find that the three direction-cosines are connected by an identical
relation.

i] CARTESIAN COORDINATE-SYSTEM 3

1-21. The direction-angles are not uniquely denned since
each is indeterminate to an added multiple of 277, but the direc-
tion-cosines are unique. In fact, r being always positive, the
direction-cosines /, m, n are uniquely defined as
l=x\r, m=yjr, n=zjr.

1-22. To determine the radius-vector in terms of the rectangular
coordinates.

By the theorem of Pythagoras

OP 2 = ON* + NP 2 = OL' 2 + L'N 2 + NP 3 .
Hence r 2 =x 2 +y 2 +z 2 .

1*23. Identity connecting the direction-cosines.

Putting x = rcosa, y = rcosfi, z = rcosy, we find, on dividing

by r *» cos 2 oc + cos 2 £ + cos 2 y = 1 .

It is often convenient to speak of a line whose direction-
cosines are proportional to three given numbers /, m, n. The
actual values of the direction-cosines are obtained by dividing
each by -\/(l 2 +m 2 +n 2 ). For suppose the actual values to be
kl, km, kn ; then ^2/2 + k * m 2 + k* n 2 =i,

hence k=(l 2 +m 2 +n 2 )~ i .

Ex. Find the direction-cosines of the line joining the origin to the
point (-1,2, 2).

Here r 2 = 1+4+4 = 9, hence r=3«

Then /= -J, m = §, « = f.

1-3. Change of origin.

Let a new coordinate-system be constructed with origin
0' = \X, Y, Z] and coordinate-
planes parallel to the old ones.
Let the coordinates of a point P
referred to the two systems be
[x, y, z] and [x', y', z']. Draw
through P a line parallel to the
axis of x cutting the planes yOz
and y'O'z' in L and L', and
let the plane y'O'z' cut Ox
in K. Then since the parallel
planes yOz, y'O'z' intercept Fig. 3

I

Ly

2

*

•f

^S

fS

z

—~5

— y

X*.

jE-- 5

4 CARTESIAN COORDINATE-SYSTEM [chap.

equal segments on parallel lines, LL' = OK. But LP- x, L'P=x',
OK=X, hence

x=x'+X

similarly y=y'+Y

z=z' + Z

x'=x-X
- and y'=y— Y
z'=z-Z

x', y', z' are the coordinates of P relative to 0' = [X, Y, Z].

This may be described in vector language thus. The step from
O to P can be broken up into the two steps O to O' and O' to P.
Further the step from O to O' can be broken up into three steps
of lengths X, Y, Z parallel to the axes, and similarly for the steps
from O to P and O' to P. Parallel steps are then simply added.

1-4. Distance between two points.

Let P x = [*!, y ly z x ], P 2 = [x 2 , y 2 , *J. Then the coordinates of
P 2 referred to parallel axes through P x are

x 2 -x ly y 2 -yi, Z2-Z1,
and P t P 2 is the relative radius-vector. Hence

{P x P 2 f = (x 2 - x t )* + (y 2 - ytf + (z 2 - z,y.

1-5. Angle between two lines.

Let the two lines pass through O and have direction-angles
K> ft, 7i] and [otj, ft, yj. Take two points PjS [x lt y x , *J and
P 2 = [x 2 , y 2 , z 2 ], one on each; let OP 1 =r 1 , OP 2 =r 2 and let the
angle P x OP 2 =9. Then

(P^) 2 = OPi* + OP 2 * - aOP x . OP 2 cos5,
therefore S (* 2 - arj* = r x a + r 2 2 - 2r x r 2 cos0,

hence 2# 2 2 + Stfj 2 - zLx^ = S^ 2 + E* 2 2 - zr x r 2 cosfl.

But 3^=^0080!, » 2 =r 2 cosa 2 , etc.

Therefore Sr^ coso^ cosa 2 = r x r 2 cos0,

i.e. cos0 = cosa 1 cosa 2 +cosft cos/3 2 + cosyjcosyg

= Scosa 1 cosa 2 = E/ 1 / 2 .

1-51. If the direction-cosines are only proportional to the
numbers [l lt n^, «J and [4, «h, «J> then

2^4

COS0 =

V^^SW

i] CARTESIAN COORDINATE-SYSTEM 5

1-52. A useful expression may be found also for sin 2 0.
We have sin 2 = 1 - (244) 2 = 24 2 24 2 - (544)1

= 2 (rn^n^ + m£nf) - TSmytn^n^r^
=2(m 1 « 2 — n^tij) 2 .
These results may be applied to any two lines. When two lines
do not intersect we define the angle determined by them as the
angle between two lines through O parallel to the given lines.
All parallel lines are then considered as having the same direc-
tion-angles.

1-61. Condition for perpendicularity.

If two lines [l lt nh, nj and [k, «h, « 2 ] are perpendicular or
orthogonal, their angle = far, and cos 8 = o, hence

l 1 l i + m 1 m i + n 1 n 2 = o)
or 2008% cosocu = o j

Conversely, if this condition is satisfied, cos 6 = o and Q = \rr.

The expression 244 is linear in each of the two sets of direc-
tion-cosines 4 1 »i, «i and 4. fh, fh, and also symmetrical as
regards these two sets. It is the bilinear symmetrical expression
associated with the quadratic expression 2/ 2 .

1-62. Conditions for parallelism.

By definition, two lines are parallel when they have the same
direction-angles. It follows then that sin = o and = o.

Conversely, if = o, sin0=o and Z,(m 1 n 2 -m 2 n 1 ) i = o. For
real values of the direction-cosines this can be true only if

m 1 n t —m 2 n 1 = o, « 1 4-«2^i = o, 4 w *2 _ 4»*i= : o,

hence £-5*=?J

4 nh «2

If 4, nh, ih an d 4» w*2» «a are the actual direction-cosines we

have also ,,

4 2 + m^ + n x * = 1 = 4 2 + m^ + n£.

Putting each of the equal ratios equal to t and substituting

4=*4> fth=tm2, » 1 =f« 2

we get * 2 (4 2 + m^ + rtf) = L*+m 2 2 + tuf.

Hence t= + 1.

6 CARTESIAN COORDINATE-SYSTEM [chap.

If t= + 1, the direction-cosines are identical; if t= — i, they
are equal but of opposite sign. The latter case is interpreted to
mean that the lines are in opposite senses. In both cases they
are parallel.

If /j , m 1 , «j and Z 2 , m 2 , Wa are only numbers proportional to the
direction-cosines, the necessary and sufficient conditions for
parallelism are l l :n h :n 1 = l t '.m t :n %t

equivalent to two conditions only.

1-7. Position-ratio of a point with regard to two base-
points.

The formulae for the coordinates (rectangular or oblique) of a
point P= [x, y, z] dividing the join of two points P x = [x t , y u z t ]
and P 2 = [# 2 , y 2 , #J in a given ratio / : m or k : i are exactly the
same as in plane geometry. For if the planes through P t , P 2 , P
parallel to the plane of yz cut Ox in L ly L it L, then L cuts L^L %
in this same ratio, and OL 1 =x 1 , OL i =x 2 , OL=x. Hence

_lx i +mx 1 _kx 2 +x 1
x l+^n k+T'

with similar formulae for_y and z. The ratio Ijm — k is called the
position-ratio of P with regard to Pj and P 2 . The formulae are
sometimes referred to as Joachimsthal's formulae.

1-71. Another set of section-formulae is useful. If
P 1 P=t.P 1 P 2 ,
we have »-* k +*(« i -« 1 )'

y=yi+t(yz-yi)

z=z 1 +t(z i -z 1 )

1-72. If two particles of masses m x , m 2 are placed at P 2 and P 2
their centre of mass divides P X P 2 in the ratio m^-.m^, hence the
coordinates of the centre of mass are

m 1 x 1 + m^Xi

x=-^-± — , etc.

m 1 + m 2

This point is also called the mean point for the multiples
tn\, ff?g.

I] CARTESIAN COORDINATE-SYSTEM 7

1-73. Similarly, if three masses m lt m 2 , n^ are placed at three
points P lt P 2 , P s the coordinates of the centre of mass are
M _ m 1 x 1 +7n 2 x 2 +m 3 x s

X ; - , etC.

OTi + TMjj + mg

By admitting negative masses any point in the plane can be
represented in this way.

1-8. General cartesian coordinates.

In the general cartesian system the planes are not neces-
sarily at right angles. The system will be determined by the
angles between the coordinate-axes, viz. L YOZ=X, AZOX=fi,
LXOY=v.

The direction-angles are then no longer convenient, but in
place of the direction-cosines we define the direction-ratios as
follows i =x j ry ms *ylr,- n =*lr.

1-81. To find the radius-vector r we have (Fig. 1)
r* = OP*= ON* + NP* + 2ON . NP cosNOZ.
Now the projection of ON on OZ is equal to the sum of the
projections of OM' and M'N, hence

ONcosNOZ= OM' cos YOZ+M'NcosZOX
=y cosA + x cosfi.
Also ON* = OL'* + L'N* + 2OL' . L'N cosXO Y

= x 2 +y 2 + zxy cos v.
Hence

r* = x 2 +y a + z 2 + 2yz cos A + 2zx cos /a + 2xy cos v.
1-82. Then substituting from (i-8) we have

P + m 2 + n 2 + 2tnn cosA + 2nl cos/u. + 2lm cos v = 1,
as the identity connecting the direction-ratios.

1-83. The square of the distance between two points (x t ,y x , z^
and (x 2 ,y 2 , z t ) is found by substituting in (i-8i) x x — x 2 for x, etc.

1-84. The angle between two straight lines (4> »%, w x ) and
(4, *«2, ^2) is found as in 1*5,

„_ Hl 1 l2+'Z(m 1 n 1i +m i n 1 ) cos A

V(%h 2 + 22«i«i cos A) (Z4 2 + 2T,m i n 2 cos A) '
The numerator is the bilinear symmetrical expression associated
with the quadratic expressions which occur in the denominator.

8 CARTESIAN COORDINATE-SYSTEM [chap.

1-9. EXAMPLES.

i. Find the direction-angles of the lines joining the origin to
the following points : (i) [s/2, i, i], (ii) [- i, a, 2], (iii) [2, - 3, 6].

Ans. (i) [45 , 6o°, 6o°], (ii) O-cos-4, cos" 1 !, cos- 1 !],
(iii) [cos -1 ^, 7T— cos _1 f, cos -1 f].

2. A line makes angles 6o° and 45 with the positive axes of x
and y respectively ; what angle does it make with the positive
axis of #?

Ans. 6o° or 120 .

3. Show that the point [3, — 1, 2] is the centre of the sphere
which passes through the four points [a, 1, 4], [5, 1, i], [4, — 3, o],
[*> ~ 3> 3]> an< i fi n d its radius.

Ans. r = 3.

4. Find the centre and the radius of the sphere which passes
through the four points [-a, -2, 3], [1, -5, 3], [1, -a, o],
[0, -6, -1].

Ans. [-1, -4, 1], r = 3 .

5. A regular tetrahedron is placed with a vertex at the origin
O, the altitude through O making equal angles with each of
the three rectangular axes, and each of the edges through O
lying in the same plane with the altitude and the corre-
sponding coordinate-axis. Find the direction-cosines of the edges
through O.

' Ans. [4, 1, 1], [1, 4, 1], [1, 1, 4] or [o, 1, 1], [1, o, 1], [1, 1, o].

6. Find the actual direction-cosines of the line joining the
origin to the point \zu, 2v, u* + v* — 1].

Ans. Each divided by u 2 + v 2 + 1.

7. Show that the four points [1, — 1, — 1], [ — 1, 1, — 1],
[—1, — 1, 1], [1, 1, 1] form the vertices of a regular tetrahedron
and find the length of the edge.

Ans. 2V2.

8. Show that [-3, -3, -3], [5, -1, -1], [-1, 5, -1],
[—1, —1, 5] are the vertices of a regular tetrahedron whose
centre is at the origin.

I] CARTESIAN COORDINATE-SYSTEM 9

9. Prove that [a, b, c], [c, a, b], [b, c, a], [d, d, d] are the vertices
of a regular tetrahedron with its centre at the origin when

a=t*+zt+-i, b = t i -t-i, c=-t*-t+i, d=-t*-t-i,

t being any parameter.

10. Show that the four points [2, 9, 12], [1, 8, 8], [—2, 11, 8],
[—1, 12, 12] are the vertices of a square.

11. Show that the six points [o, 1, — 1], [o, — 1, 1], [1, o, — 1],
[1, — 1, o], [— 1, o, 1], [—1, 1, o] form the vertices of a regular
hexagon ; and so also the points whose coordinates are [a, b, c]
and the permutations of these, where a, b, c are in arithmetical
progression.

12. Show that the six points [—1,2, 2], [2, — 1, 2], [2, 2, — 1],
[1, — 2, —2], [—2, 1, —2], [—2, —2, 1] form the vertices of a
regular octahedron.

13. Show that the six points [1, 5, 6], [4, 2, 6], [4, 5, 3],
[3, 1, 2], [o, 4, 2], [o, 1, 5] form the vertices of a regular octa-
hedron.

14. OP, OQ are lines in the planes of zx, xy, bisecting the
angles between the positive directions of the axes in these planes.
Prove that the angle POQ = 6o°. Hence show that six regular
octahedra and eight regular tetrahedra will exactly fill up the

15. Show that the 12 points [o, + 1, + 1], taking all permuta-
tions, form the vertices of a polyhedron bounded by 6 squares
and 8 equilateral triangles.

16. Show that the 24 points [o, ±a, ±b], taking all per-
mutations, form the vertices of a polyhedron bounded by
6 squares and 8 hexagons, and that the hexagons are regular
if a = 26.

17. Show that the 24 points [±a, ±b, ±b], taking all per-
mutations, form the vertices of a polyhedron bounded by 6
squares, 12 rectangles, and 8 equilateral triangles; and find the
relation between a and b if the rectangles are squares. (a>b.)

Ans. a 2 — zab — b 2 =o.

io CARTESIAN COORDINATE-SYSTEM [chap.i

18. Show that the 48 points [+ i, ±(i+\/2)» ±(i+2\/2)]>
where all permutations are taken, form the vertices of a poly-
hedron bounded by 6 regular octagons, 8 regular hexagons,
and 12 squares.

19. Show that if a 2 — ab — b*=o the 12 points [o, ±a, ±b],
[ ± b, 0, ± a], [ ± a, ± b, o] are vertices of a regular icosahedron,
and the 20 points [o, ±b, ±(a + b)], [±(a + b), o, ±b],
[±b, ±(a+b), o], [±a, ±a, ±a] are vertices of a regular
dodecahedron.

20. If the position of a point P is determined with reference
to a rectangular coordinate-system by its radius-vector p, the
angle ZOP=(f>, and the angle XOL, or 6, which the plane ZOP
makes with ZOX, show that

x=psin<j>cos9, y=psin(f>smO, z=pcos(f>,
and ds 2 = dp* +p 2 d<f>*+ P i sin? <[>d6\

21. HA,B,C are three consecutive vertices of a parallelogram
show that the coordinates of the fourth vertex are

x=x A + x c —x B , etc.

CHAPTER II

THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE

2-1. Since a point in space requires three coordinates to fix
its position we say that it has three degrees of freedom. Similarly
in a plane a point has two degrees of freedom. More generally,
if it is confined to any surface it has two degrees of freedom, and
if it moves only on a line or curve it has one degree of freedom.
A point is deprived of one degree of freedom when its coordinates
are connected by any relation. Hence an equation in x, y, z
represents a surface. Two such equations deprive the point of
two degrees of freedom and limit it to a curve. If three equations
are given no freedom is left ; the values of x, y, z can be found by
solving the equations and only a finite number of positions are
possible for the point.

2-11. The equations of a straight line.

Let the straight line pass through the point A = [x lt y lt #J and
have direction-cosines (or ratios) [/, tn, »]. Then if P= [x,y, z]
is any point on the line, and AP = r, we have
2-111. x=x 1 +lr

y=y 1 + mr -.
z = z 1 + nr
2-112. Eliminating r, we get the (two) equations
x-x 1 = y-y 1 = z-z 1
I m n

(2- 1 1 2) is adopted as the standard form for the equations of a
straight line. (2-111) are called freedom-equations of the line in
terms of the parameter r. [x lt y lt *J is an arbitrary point of
reference on the line.

2-113. The coordinates of any point on the join of [x lt y lt *J
and [X2,y lt #d can be written

x=x 1 +t(x i —x 1 )'
yyi+tfo-yj ■,
z=z x +t(z^z^)

12 THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE [chap.

(see 171). These are freedom-equations in terms of the para-
meter t.

2-12. Equation of a plane.

If P lt P 2 , P 3 are three points, the coordinates of any point on
the plane determined by them are (173)

x = -±-± — . . 2_s etc.

m 1 + tn i -\-m s

Put m z =tH,m and m z =uLm, so that

%=Sm- m^— m 3 =(i — t— u)"Lm.

We have then

2-121. x=x 1 +(x 2 —x 1 )t+(x s —x 1 )u

y=yi+(.y*-yi) t +(ys-yi)u ■•

z==z 1 +(z 2 -z i )t+(z i -z i )u

These are freedom-equations involving two parameters t and u,
corresponding to the two degrees of freedom in the plane.

2-122. Eliminating t and u we get an equation in x, y, z, which
is equivalent to

PC X]_ **2 ^3

y y\ y* ys

Z Z± Z2 z$I I I I The equation is thus of the first degree in x, y, z. (2-122) is also the condition that the four points [x, y, z], [x lf y lt Zj], [*a» Ja» z 2]> [*s. ya, z s ] should be coplanar. 2-123. An equation of the first degree always represents a plane. The general equation of the first degree is Ix + my + nz + p = o. (1) The characteristic property of a plane is that if it contains two points P lt P 2 °f a straight line it contains all points of the straight line. Let then P ± = [x t , y± , *J and P 2 = [x 2 , y 2 , sj be two points = 0. ii] THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE 13 on the plane. Then lx 1 +my 1 +nz 1 +p = o) r . (2) & 2 + my t + nz 2 +p= 0) Substituting in (1) the coordinates (1-71) of any point on the line P X P 2 , kc+my+nz+p=(lx 1 +my 1 +nz 1 +p)(i — t) + (lx 2 + my 2 + nz 2 +p) t, which vanishes by (2). The theorem is therefore proved. 2124. Orientation of a plane. The orientation or lie of a plane is determined by the direction of any straight line perpendicular or normal to the plane. A plane may be determined by the direction [a, /?, y] of its normal and its distance/) from a fixed point, say the origin. We shall call a, /J, y the direction-angles, and their cosines the direction-cosines, of the plane. Let N be the foot of the normal from O to the plane, and P s [x, y, z] any point on the plane. Then the projection of OP is equal to the sum of the projections of OL', L'N, NP, hence projecting on ON we have x cosx+y cosjS + sr cosy=p. This will be adopted as the normal or canonical form for the equa- tion of a plane. The special property of this equation is that the sum of the squares of the coefficients of x, y, z is equal to unity. 2-125. Equation of a plane in terms of intercepts on the axes. Let the plane cut the axes in A, B, C; let OA ■— a, OB = b, OC = c ; these are the intercepts. Let P = [x, y, z] be any point on the plane. Then the tetrahedron OABC is divided into three tetrahedra OABP, OBCP, OCAP. The volume of OABC = % abc, that of OBCP = ibex, etc. Hence \bcx+\cay + \abz = \abc, x,y z or -+^+- = 1. abc This equation has the same meaning when the axes are oblique. 14 THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE [chap. 2-13. Intersection of two planes. Two planes intersect in a straight line. Hence the equations of a straight line may be given in the form Ix + my + nz +p = o| . . l'x + m'y+n'z+p' = o)' If \x x , y lt #J is any point on the line, it lies on both planes, therefore hc 1 +my 1 +nz 1 +p=o) . . rx 1 +m'y 1 +n'z 1 +p'=oy hence, subtracting the corresponding equations of (i) and (2) l(x-x 1 )+m(y—yi) + n(z-z 1 ) = o, l'(x-x 1 ) + m'(y-yJ + n'(z-z 1 ) = o. Solving for the ratios of x—x 1} y—y lf z—z 1 vie have x—Xx _ y—yi _ z—z t mri —m'n~ nl' —n'l lm' — I'm' The denominators are therefore proportional to the direction- cosines (or ratios) of the line (1). 2-14. Note on vectors. A line of definite length and direction is a vector. Following the usual convention we represent vectors in Clarendon (heavy) type ; the same symbol in ordinary italic type is taken to represent die length of the vector. Thus v represents a vector whose length is v. All parallel vectors of the same length are equivalent. If P = [x, y, z] is any point, the vector OP has *, y, z for its rect- angular components. The direction-cosines [I, m, n] are rect- angular components of a unit-vector. The sum of two vectors is a vector determined by the "triangle of vectors ", viz. if the two vectors are placed consecutively as AB and BC their sum AB + BC = AC. Subtraction is the inverse of addition, and a negative vector is equivalent to a positive vector taken in the opposite sense. Addition and subtraction are associative and commutative. The multiplication of vectors may be defined in various ways, and two distinct kinds of products of vectors are found to be of n] THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE i S special importance. If [* lf y u sj and [x 2 , y 2 , z^\ are the rect- angular components of two vectors v^ v 2 , the sum XiXz+y^ + z^i is called their scalar product and is written »x . » 2 = x x x 2 +y^y 2 + z t z 2 . A common example of this is the work done by a force F. If X, Y, Z are the rectangular components of the force, and x, y, z those of the displacement * of its point of application, the work done by the force is represented by W=Xx+ Yy+Zz. If 8 is the angle between the line of action of the force and the direction of the displacement, W=FscosO=F.s. The scalar product of two unit vectors [/, m, »] and [/', m', »'] is U' + mm'+nn', and vanishes when the vectors are at right angles. The vector-product of two vectors v^D^, y lt z t ] and ▼2=0*2. y»y #2] is a vector whose components are ji« 2 — y 2 z t , z x x 2 —z 2 x u Xiy 2 — x^ , and which is therefore y x1t perpendicular to the two vectors. It is denoted by^xVjj. Evidently v x xv 2 = -VaXv^sothat vector multiplication is not commutative. The direction of the vector-product is defined as in the figure. For example, in a right- ^T "y" handed coordinate-system if X and Y are Fig. 3 vectors along the positive axes of x and y, Xx Y is along the positive axis of z. 2-2. Angles. The angle between two planes is equal to the angle between their normals. The angle between the two planes Ix + my + nz +p = o, I'x + m'y + n'z +p' = o, (the axes being rectangular) is therefore given by cos0=Z//7V(2/ 2 2/' 2 ). The two planes are orthogonal if S//' = o, and parallel if l\m:n=V :m' :»'. 16 THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE [chap. The angle between a straight line and a plane is equal to the complement of the angle between the straight line and the normal. Hence if 8 is the angle between the plane he + my + nz +p = o, and the straight line x — x' _ y — y ' _ z — z' ~V ~m' ¥~* sin0 = 2/Z7V(2/ 2 SH. The straight line is parallel to the plane if Till' = o and perpen- dicular i£ l:m:n=l' :m' :n'. 2-31. Intersection of a straight line and a plane. Let the equation of the plane be lx + my + nz+p = o, (i) and the freedom-equations of the line x = x' + l't * y=y' + m't\- (2) z = z' + n't Then substituting for x, y, z in the equation of the plane, we have t(W + mm' + nn') + lx' + my' + nz'+p = o (3) This gives in general one value for t, and this value substituted in (2) gives the coordinates of a single point. If, however, 1,11' = o, (3) cannot be satisfied unless lx' + my' + nz'+p = o. (4) In this case the line is parallel to the plane and has the point \x', y', z'] common with the plane, hence it lies entirely in the plane. If Til' = o, while (4) is not satisfied, the line is parallel to the plane and has no point in common with it. (This is true also if the axes are oblique.) 2-32. Points, lines, and plane at infinity. Two straight lines in the same plane either intersect or are parallel. When they intersect they have a common point, and , this point belongs to each of a single infinity of lines forming a II] THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE 17 pencil ; when they are parallel they have a common direction, and this direction belongs to a single infinity of lines all mutually parallel. Two distinct points determine a unique line, the line which possesses the two points. A point and a direction also de- termine a unique line, the line which possesses the given point and the given direction. In three dimensions a point is common to a doubly infinite system of lines forming a bundle ; a direction is common to a doubly infinite system of lines all mutually parallel. Two planes either intersect or are parallel. When they intersect they have a common line, their line of intersection, and this line belongs to each of a single infinity of planes forming a pencil ; when they are parallel they have a common orientation, and this orientation belongs to a single infinity of planes all mutually parallel. A straight line possesses a single infinity of points and one direc- tion ; a plane possesses a double infinity of points and a single infinity of directions, the directions of all the lines in the plane. If a line and a plane intersect they have a common point ; if they are parallel they have a common direction. Three distinct points determine a unique plane, the plane which possesses the three points. A plane is also uniquely de- termined by two given points and a given direction, or by a point and a straight line, or by a point and an orientation, or by a given point and two given directions. Two directions alone determine an orientation, since a system of parallel planes can be drawn all parallel to two given lines. Thus in determining lines and planes, we may in certain cases replace points and lines by directions and orientations re- spectively. This connection is emphasised by using the suggestive terms "point at infinity" for "direction" and "line at infinity" for "orientation". A line possesses one point at infinity ; a plane possesses one line at infinity but a single infinity of points at infinity. Two points at infinity determine uniquely a line at infinity, and we say that the points at infinity on a plane lie on the line at infinity of this plane. Two lines at infinity determine uniquely a point at infinity (the direction of the line of intersection of two planes with the given orientations). Since two lines which determine a sag 2 i8 THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLAJNE [chap. at infinity, at infinity c at infinity at infinity a. blage of all the point also determine a plane, we say that two lines a, b, determine a "plane at infinity" a. A third line determines a point at infinity with each of the lines a, b, and we conclude that c also belongs to the plan|e Hence there is just one plane at infinity, the points at infinity and all lines at infinity. 2-33. Homogeneous cartesian coordinates. finity, or direction, is represented by the ratios direction-cosines, but it is convenient to modify system to admit of the representation of ordinai)y points at infinity equally. This is done by the i homogeneous cartesian coordinates. If [X, Y, Z] are non-homogeneous coordinates (rectangular or X=x\w, Y=y/w, Z=zjw, then [x, y, z, w] are called the homogeneous ordinates. If w i= o every set of values of x, y, z, presents a point, and for every value of k, not kx, ky, kz, kw represent the same point. 2-34. The equations of the straight line through [*', y', z', w 1 ], with direction-ratios [/, m, «], become assemi . point at in- of the three coordinate- points and introduction of the ordinary ique), let obliq to zero w x— x w _ w y— y w _ w z— zw I m n and freedom-equations are obtained by equating ratios to t: w'x=x'w+lt, w'y=y'zv+mt, zv'z=z'w+nt, where w may have any value. Introducing another writing pw = w'u, and replacing t by w't/p, the equations px =x'u + lt, py =y'u + mt, pz =z'u+nt, pw=w'u, where p is a factor of proportionality. These are freedom-equations in terms of two homoge Any point on the line is determined by the ratio cartesian co- uniquely re- , the values each of these parameter «, become homogeneous neous parameters. t\u. n] THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE 19 When w — o the cartesian coordinates x/zu, etc., in general all become infinite, and we get the point at infinity on the line. The homogeneous coordinates are [/, m, n, o]. These are therefore the coordinates of the point at infinity in the direction [/, m, n]. The equations of the straight line through the points [«ii J'u #i> «>i] and |> 2 , y 2 , z 2 , wj are w-iX— wxx _ wrf—ioy^ _ to 1 z — toz 1 h^Xj — w 2 x 1 Wyy 2 — mj^ — zo 1 z 2 —zv 2 z 1 ' Equate each of these to u/p, and write pw=w 1 t+zc 2 u, and we get as the homogeneous freedom-equations px = x t t +x 2 u, py =yit +y a u t pz =z ± t +z 2 u, ptv=w 1 t+zo i u. Eliminating p, t, and u between these equations, taken three at a time, we obtain four equations, of which only two are in- dependent. These may be represented by the notation x #2 y yi y* w W 2 = 0, which means that each of the determinants of the third order formed from this matrix vanishes. Ex. Show that the ratio in which [x,y, z, w] divides the join of l x i>yi> *i» »J and [x 2 ,y 2 , z 2 , roj is Wiufat. 2-341. Matrices. We shall frequently have occasion to use the matrix notation. A matrix is a set of numbers arranged in m rows and n columns, and is denoted by a ln -| or [a mn ]. 'ml &m& •'• &mi Any determinant which is formed by striking out m—r rows and n—r columns is called a determinant of the matrix. If all 20 THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE [chap. the determinants of order r + i vanish, but at least one of the determinants of order r does not vanish, the matri^ is said to be of rank r. The condition that three points [x 1 ,y 1 ,z 1 , roj, [x 2 , y 2 , z%, o>J, [*3> Js> z 3 , w 3 ] should be collinear can be expressed by saying that the matrix *i yi #1 w i x z yz z 2 w% x 3 y 8 Z 3 ™3 is of rank 2. If this matrix is of rank 1 the three points all coincide. 2-35. The equation of a plane in homogeneous coordinates becomes Ix + my + nz +pw = o. The condition that four points [x lt y x , z lt h>J, [x 2 , y 2 , z it w>J, [*8» y»> #s> w i\> [x*i y*> *4» W4] should be coplanar is Xi yi #1 W! =0, Xz y 2 z 2 Ws x 3 y s %s % *4 y*. #4 W 4 or that this matrix is of rank 3. If the matrix is of rank a the four points are collinear; if of rank 1, the four points coincide. 2-351. The freedom-equations of the plane through three points [x lf ...], [x iy ...], [x 3 , ...] are pX = X x t +X 2 U +XiV, py =yit +yzu +y s v, pz = z x t + Z 2 U+Z 3 V, pw=zo 1 t+w i u + zo 3 v. 2»36. Consider the intersection of the line px =x'u+lt, py =y'u+mt, pz=z'u+nt, pw=zv'u, n] THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE 21 which passes through the point [x', y', z', a;'] and has direction- ratios [/, tn, »], with the plane I'x + m'y + n'z +p'zv = o. Substituting for x, y, z, w in terms of t , u we have (11' +mm' +nn')t+(l'x' +m'y' +n'z' +p'w')u=o. ...(1) When the line is parallel to the plane, 2//' = o. Then either l'x'+m'y' + n'z'+p'w' = o, which expresses that the point [x\ y', z', w'] lies in the plane and then the whole line lies in the plane, since (1) is then true for all values of t and u; or else m=o, and we get as the coordinates of the point of intersection x=lt, y = mt, z=nt, zo = o, or, since only the ratios are significant, [/, m, n, o]. These are thus the homogeneous coordinates of the point at infinity on the line whose direction-ratios are [/, m, «]. The coordinates of any point at infinity satisfy the equation V3 = o. Since this is an equation of the first degree we consider that it represents a plane which we call the plane at infinity. The equations of the parallel planes lx + my + nz +pzo = o, Ix + my + nz +p'w = o are satisfied simultaneously only if w = o, i.e. by the co- ordinates of points at infinity. They have then in common a straight line at infinity. On every plane (except the plane at in- finity) there is one straight line at infinity; the equations of the straight line at infinity on the plane Ix + my + nz +pw = o being lx+my+nz=o) w = o) 2-41. Intersection of three planes. Three planes l x x + m^y + n x z +p x w = o, l^x + m^y + n z z +p 2 w = o, l a x+m 3 y+n 3 z+p a w=o 22 THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE [chap. intersect in a point whose coordinates satisfy the three equations simultaneously. These coordinates are therefore given by X m-y «i Pi *w 2 «2 Pi m* «3 Pa -y k «i A h «2 Pi h «3 Pz k m x Pi k m^ P2 h m 3 Pz — w k /«! « x 4 trh n 2 h m 3 fig k m± «1 Pi h m 2 "2 P* h m* «8 Pz which may also be expressed as [x y z w] = i.e. x, y, z, w are proportional to the determinants of the matrix taken with the proper signs. If the matrix on the right is of rank 2 the three planes have a common line ; if of rank 1 they coincide. If the matrix k wi\ fix _h ffh Hz. is of rank 2 the point of intersection is at infinity, and the three planes are parallel to one line ; if of rank 1 they are mutually parallel. The condition that four planes should have a point in common is that the matrix k h h u m. «i Pi r>h «2 Pi »*s «s Pz ™i "i Pi. should be of rank 3, i.e. the determinant vanishes. If the matrix is of rank 2 the planes have a line in common ; if of rank 1 they all coincide. 2-42. Pencil of planes. If u 1 = l 1 x+m 1 y+n 1 z+p 1 = o, ti 2 =l i x + m i y + n 2 z+p 2 = o represent two planes, the equation u x + A«g = o ii] THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE 23 is of the first degree, therefore it represents a plane. Also it is satisfied if w x = o and m 2 = o, i.e. by the coordinates of any point on the line common to u t and u% . Hence it represents a plane through the line of intersection of Wj and u 2 . All the planes through a given line form a sheaf or axial pencil of planes ; the line is called the axis. Similarly, if w x , u 2 , M3 are three planes, ll t + Atta + /Xt/g = o represents a plane through their common point. By giving all values to A and /x. we obtain a doubly infinite system of planes through a point, forming a bundle. 2-43. Condition that three lines through the origin should lie in one plane. Let the direction-ratios of the three lines be [4, ot x , raj, etc., andlet lx + my + nz = o be the equation of the plane containing the lines. Then since the point at infinity on each line lies in this plane, Ik + mm 1 + nn^ = o, 7/ 2 + mm^ + nn^ = o, ll 3 + mm z + nn^ = o. Hence eliminating /, m, ra, = 0. k nt! «1 k nti «2 k nh «3 This is also the condition that three lines should be parallel to one plane, or that the three points at infinity [4, ra^, n lt o], etc., should be collinear. 2-44. Intersection of two straight lines. Since a straight line is the intersection of two planes, and four planes do not in general have a point in common, two straight lines do not in general intersect. In this general case they are said to be skew. Condition that two straight lines should intersect. Let [% , y 1 , z J and [x 2 , y z , #J be points of reference on the two 24 THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE [chap. lines, [/ 1( fBj, «J and [4, m^, «J their direction-ratios, then the freedom-equations are X = #i ■+" li 1 1 , # = X% "T ^2 ^2 > y=J 1 + JM 1 f 1 , J=J 2 + '«2<2 > 5r=5: 1 + « 1 f 1 , «=^ 2 + n 2 i 2 . If * x , * 2 are the respective parameters of the point of intersection, we have, equating the coordinates, %i "T" l\ t j = X% + 1% * 2 , #1 + W^ J^ = #2 "1" ^2 ^2 • Between these three equations we can eliminate t lf t % and we get X-^ ~~ " X% l-± *2 ~ = * ®* yi-y* «h m 2 #1 ~ *S «1 «2 This expresses that the two lines and a line which cuts both lines are all parallel to one plane. Writing the condition in the form = 0, X-i <%2 k 4 yx Ja m-L »z 2 *i #2 % «2 1 1 O it expresses that the two points [x 1 ,y 1 , z lt 1], [at 2) y 2 , z 2t 1] and the two points at infinity on the lines, [/j , jwj , n x , o] , [/ 2 , tm 2 > W 2 , o] , are coplanar. 2-5. Number of data which determine a point, a plane, and a straight line. A point is determined by three data, its three coordinates. A plane is determined by a single equation of the first degree, which contains four constants. Only the ratios of these constants, however, are significant, hence a plane is determined by three data. A straight line is determined by two points, and each point requires three data to fix it ; hence we have six data. But each point has one degree of freedom on the line ; hence the number of necessary data reduces to four. Otherwise, the line is de- ii] THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE 25 termined by the two points in which it cuts two of the co- ordinate-planes, and each of these points requires two data to fix it, hence again the line requires four data. The number of constants required to fix a figure is called its constant-number. Thus the constant-number of a point or a plane is 3, while the constant-number of a straight line is 4. In plane geometry the constant-number of a circle is 3, and of a conic 5. 2-51. Coordinates of a plane. The coordinates of a figure are any set of independent num- bers serving to fix the figure. In the simplest case the number of coordinates is equal to the constant-number of the figure, but sometimes it is convenient to employ a greater number of co- ordinates connected by certain relations. Such coordinates are said to be superabundant. In choosing coordinates for a figure two conditions are desirable : (1) to each figure there should correspond a unique set of values of the coordinates, and (2) to each set of values of the coordinates there should corre- spond a unique figure, i.e. between the figures and the sets of values of the coordinates there should exist a (1, 1) or biunivocal correspondence. In the case of the plane these conditions are satisfied if we take as coordinates the ratios of the coefficients in the equation of the plane. The four coefficients [/, m, n, p] may then be called the homogeneous coordinates of the plane. As a set of non-homogeneous coordinates we may take the three ratios l/p, m/p, njp, provided thztp i= o, i.e. provided that the plane does not pass through the origin. The geometrical meaning of these coordinates is readily obtained. They are in fact equal to the reciprocals of the intercepts which the plane makes on the coordinate-axes, each with reversed sign. An equation in point-coordinates represents a two-dimensional locus of points or a surface ; in particular an equation of the first degree represents a plane. An equation in plane-coordinates re- presents a two-dimensional assemblage of planes. (We shall see later that such an assemblage may envelop either a surface or a curve.) 26 THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE [chap. The equation Ix + my + nz +pw = o represents the condition that the point [x, y, z, w] lies on the plane [/, m, n, p]. If /, m, n, p are fixed, while x, y, z, w are variable, this equation represents a locus of points, in particular a plane. If x, y, z, w are fixed, while /, m, n, p vary, it represents the assemblage of planes which pass through the fixed point [x, y, z, to], i.e. it represents a bundle of planes. 2-511. We may here explain a notation which it will some- times be convenient to use. Instead of using the letters x, y, z, w for the coordinates of a point, and /, m, n, p for those of a plane, we may economise letters by representing a point by the co- ordinates * , x lt x 2 » x 3> and a plane by £ , | 1( | 2 > la- Here x replaces to, so that x = o represents the plane at infinity, and | = o represents the origin (bundle of planes through O). To distinguish two points we may use different letters, e.g. the point [y ,yi,y2> yal- The point whose coordinates are [x , x l7 x a , * 3 ] may be referred to simply as the point (x), and similarly the plane (f) for the plane whose coordinates are [£ ,$1, la, | 8 ] or
whose equation is

2-52. Coordinates of a line.

A set of four coordinates for a line may be found as follows.
Draw a plane through the line perpendicular to the plane of xz.
This cuts the plane of xz in a line

y=o, x=Xz+p,

and x=Xz+p is the equation of this plane. Similarly the plane
which passes through the line and is perpendicular to the plane
of yz is of the form

y = HZ+q.

"Hie straight line is then represented by the two equations

x=Xz +p~\
y = HZ+q}'

and the four numbers A, p, p, q may be taken as the coordinates
of the line. They satisfy the conditions of 2-51, but they are
lacking in symmetry.

n] THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE 37

A more symmetrical set of coordinates for a line can be ob-
tained as follows. Using the notation of 2-511 the line is de-
termined either by two points (*), (y), or by two planes (f), (rj).
In each case we have 8 constants which reduce to 6, since only
the ratios of each set of 4 are significant. The straight line may
be represented by either of the two matrices

SO 61 62 S3 I

,r

[X Xi
y yi

#2

x s

yz

or

\-Vo Vi V2 Va-

and is, as we shall prove, completely determined by the ratios of
the second-order determinants of either matrix.

Let Xiys-xtf^pu and ^-^i?*=ro«,

so that Pu~—p]i and w if = —m jt .

The straight line is completely determined by the two points
(x) and (y), and their coordinates then determine p it . The line
is also determined by any two points on the same range, say
(x+Xy) and (x+fiy). Now

(** + hi) 0*V + Wj) - (x, + \y,) (x t + ny f ) = (p - A) (x t y, - x^).
Hence the ratios of p ti are the same whatever pair of points are
chosen on the line. Similarly we may prove that the ratios of
m it are the same whatever pair of planes are chosen from the
pencil whose axis is the given line.

2-521. The sixp {i are connected by an identical homogeneous
relation. We have in fact

Poip2n+Po2p3i+PosPi2= 2 (x y f - x t y ) {Xj y k - x k y s )
1.2,3

= 0,

— #6

yi y* ys

-yo

Xi x% x$1 **9 "3 Xi X2 x$

yi J2 y 9

yx yi yz

and similarly

ro 01 ra 2S + ro O

12^31 + B

3 r 3 t«7 12 = O.

2-522. We can now prove that the ratios of any six numbers
pa which satisfy the identical relation uniquely determine a line,
such that if (x) and (y) are two points on the line

ppii = *iyi-x$yu where p is a factor of proportionality. Choose (x) as the point at 28 THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE [chap. infinity on the line, so that # = o, then the ratios of x u x iy x s are determined by the equations Pp i0 = x i y , i.e. the direction-cosines of the line are [p w , p x , p^]. Similarly the coordinates of the point of intersection with the plane x x = o &re[p 01 ,o,p n ,p ai \,etc. 2-523. The two sets of line-coordinates p it and m ti are con- nected by simple equations. Since {x) and (y) are two points on the line, and (|) and (17) are two planes through the line, each of these points lies on each of the planes. Hence Sf>c=o, Z£y=o, Sij*=o, 2i?3>=o. Eliminate | between the first two equations and we get tiPio + &P20 + isPao = o. Similarly, eliminating 17,, between the last two, we get ,ViPio + ViPio + VaPso - °- Hence p 10 : p 20 '• Pso - w ?& '• TO 3i : f la ; and in a similar way we prove the complete set of relations PlO '• PiO '• PaO '■ p2S '• Pil '• Pl2 ~ ID 23 : TO 31 '• ro 12 '• TO 10 '• ^a) : ^a,. These superabundant coordinates are called the Pliicker co- ordinates of a line. If [/, m, n] are the direction-cosines of the line, and [x', y', z'] any point on it, the matrix which defines dth^ coordinates of the line is p., y z . x - / m n o and p 01 = l, poz = m, p^ = n, p i3 = ny'-mz', etc. We shall some- times use the notation [/, m, n ; /', tri, «'] for the coordinates of a line whether /, m, n are simply the direction-cosines or the more general coordinates. The identical relation is then ll' + mm' + nti' = o. In representing a line by its coordinates we shall adhere to the conventional order [p 01 , /> M , pa,; p w , p ai , pj^. Thus [2, 3, 6; 3, -6, 2] II] THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE 29 represents a line with direction-cosines [2, 3, 6] and passing through the point [o, — i, — 3] ; while the line [3, — 6, 2 ; 2, 3, 6] has direction-cosines [3, — 6, 2] and passes through the point [o, -2, 1]. Ex. 1. Prove that the coordinates of the point of intersection of the line (p) with the plane (f ) are S1P10 + 62.P20 + isPso > ZoPoi +i2pai+ fa/to. SaPm+siPit +£3p32' S0P03 + siPia + S2P23 > and that if the line lies in the plane these four expressions all vanish. Ex. 2. Prove that the line-coordinates of the plane containing the line (w) and the point (x) are *o ro io +x 2 rn ia +x a w 13 , X W 2o + X 1 W n +*3TJ»2a» *0 ro 30 + ^Vm + X 2 W 32 > and that if these four expressions vanish the point (*) lies on the line (w). Ex. 3. Prove that the conditions that the line (p) should pass through the point (*) are any two of the equations XiPjk + XjpM + Xkpu^O, and that the line (p) should lie in the plane (f) are any two of the equations where i,j, k are given any three of the values o, 1, 2, 3. 2-524. Condition that two lines (/>), (q) should intersect. Let the lines be determined by the pairs of points (x), (x') and O0» (/). so that £«=*<*/-***/. qu=yiy/-yiyi- The con- dition required is that the four points should be coplanar, i.e. = 0. «b Xi #2 «8 *o' #1 &2 %3 y* yi y* y» y* y\ yt' y* 30 THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE [chap. Expanding this determinant we find the condition in the form />01?23 +/ , 2S?01 +/>02?31 +/>31?02 +/ , 03?12 +Pl2<IoS = °- The condition is linear and homogeneous in the coordinates of each of the lines. The left-hand side of the equation is the bi- linear symmetrical expression which reduces to the identity P01P23 +PozPai +/W12 = o when the two lines coincide. 2-6. Imaginary elements. In applying algebra to geometry we must frequently deal with equations having imaginary roots. The number-system in algebra having been extended to include complex numbers, an inter- pretation of the corresponding elements in geometry is required. A purely geometrical treatment of imaginary elements was given by von Staudt on the basis of elliptic involutions, but we shall simply define an imaginary point as the thing which corresponds to a set of values of the coordinates when some of them at least are complex numbers. The two sets of values [x+ix', y+iy', z+iz'] and . [x—ix\ y—iy', z—iz'] represent "conjugate imaginary points", and the two equations (l+il')x+ ... =0, (l-il')x+ ... =0 represent "conjugate imaginary planes". The line joining con- jugate imaginary points, and the line of intersection of con- jugate imaginary planes, are real. Through an imaginary point there is just one real line, the line joining the point to its conjugate ; and on an imaginary plane there is just one real line, the line of intersection with the conjugate plane. A line is determined either by two points or by two planes, and we obtain the corresponding Pliicker coordinates. In order that the line should be real the ratios of its Pliicker coordinates must be all real. In general the line (Z) determined by two imaginary points is imaginary, and then the line (/') determined by the two corresponding conjugate points is the conjugate imaginary. Two sorts of imaginary lines arise, according as the line does or does not meet its conjugate. h] THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE 31 If / is of ihe first species it meets its conjugate /'. Then we have one real point on / and one real plane through /. If / is of the second species it does not meet its conjugate. It contains no real points, and lies in no real plane. As an example let A, A' (Fig. 4) be two conjugate imaginary points, and 5, Ctwo real points, such that the real lines BC and AA' do not intersect. Then^C, A'C and AB, A'B are pairs of conjugate imaginary lines of the first species. The planes AA'B and AA'C are real, while ABC and A'BC are conjugate im- aginaries. A ^«~" If A, A' and B, B' (Fig. 5) are two pairs of conjugate imaginary points such that the real lines AA' and BB' do not intersect, then AB', A'B and AB, A'B' are pairs of conjugate imaginary lines of the' second species. The planes AA'B and AA'B', BB'A and BB'A' are pairs of conjugate imaginaries. 2-71. Distance from a point to a plane. Let P = [x', y', z'] be the given point and * cos a. +y cos /? + z cos y =p the given plane, so that the direction-angles of the normal are a, /3, y and p is its distance from the origin. Let d be the distance of P from the plane. The projection of OP upon the normal is p±d according as P is on the opposite side of the plane from O or on the same side. But this is equal to the sum of the projec- tions of the coordinates of P. Hence p± d= x' coscn+y' cos fi + z 1 cosy, i.e. ± d=x'co$a.+y' cos fi+z' cosy— p.

32 THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE [chap.

If the equation of the plane is

lx+my+nz+p = o,

, , lx' + my' + nz' +p

then a= ± — ,,,, , — $-, — ^r-. V(l + m +«) 2-72. Distance of a point from a straight line. Let the equations of the line be x-X^y-Y_z-Z I m n and the given point P= [x', y', z']. Let A = [X,Y, Z\. Then if p is the length of the perpendicular PN, and AP=r, and L PAN= 6, Atx,xz] ? PLx^ p = r sin#, and r 2 =2(*'-.£) 2 . Also, projecting AP on AN, we have rcos0=2/(*'-Z)(2/ 2 )-*. From these three equations, by eliminating r and 0, we can obtain p. Ex. Prove that p* =S {m (*' - Z) - n (/ - Y)} 2 /^/ 2 ). 2-73. Shortest distance between two straight lines. Let the freedom-equations of the two lines be x=X+lt, etc., and x=X' + l't', etc. Take a point P= [x, y, z] on the former, and .F = [#', y, #'] on the latter. We have then to find P and P 1 so that PP 1 may be a minimum. We have PP'*=Z{(X+lt)-(X'+rt')} i . The conditions for a minimum are found by differentiating separately with regard to t and t' and equating to zero. Hence Xl{(X+lt)-(X' + l't')}=o, Xr{(X+lt)-(X' + l't')}=o. •z.- H] THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE 33 But if A, fi, v are the direction-cosines of PF these equations are equivalent to Z/A=o, 2/'A=o. Hence PP' is perpendicular to both lines. A&xzl Let MM', = d, be the common perpendicular, and let be its in- clination to AA'. The direction- cosines [A, n, v] of MM' are found from the equations A KM w SA=o, 2Z'A=o, Fig. 7 hence A : /* : v = mri - m'n : nl' — n'l : lm' - I'm. Then, d being the projection of AA' on MM', rf=SA(X-X')/(SA 2 )i The equations of the common perpendicular MM' are most symmetrically expressed by forming the equations of the two planes AMM and A' MM'. The plane AMM' is expressed as the plane through A which is parallel to the two directions [/, m, n] and [A, p, v]. Its direction-cosines are therefore tnv - rip, etc. Similarly for the plane A' MM'. Lastly, the coordinates of M' and M are found by the intersection of the plane AMM' with the line A'M', and the plane A'MW with the line AM. 2-731. Let [/, m, n], [/', m', n'] be the actual values of the direction-cosines and i the angle between the two lines, then since sin a i = 2(/rara' -m'n) 2 , we have, denning the sign con- ventionally, - d sin i= 2 (X- X') (mn'- m'n) X-X' I r Y-Y' m Z-Z' n This can be expressed in terms of the coordinates of the two lines. We have - dsin 1= S/'(» Y- mZ) + 2/(«' Y' - m'Z') = Z(P'oip2s+P<nP'n)- The expression d sin i is called the moment of the two lines. Its sign depends on the directions of the two lines. To bring the one SAG m' 34 THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE [chap. line into coincidence with the other, with the proper sense, we may combine a translation through d with a rotation through *; if these displacements are effected simultaneously we have a screwing motion, and the moment is positive if, when * < 180 , the screw is right-handed. Thus if a is along the positive *-axis, a' parallel to the positive y-axis, and d — + i along the #-axis, the coordinates of the two lines are [i, o, o; o, o, o] and [o, i, o; - i, o, o] and their x Saqo) moment = +i. The vanishing of the moment is the condition that the two lines should intersect or be parallel. [04.0.01 Fig. 8 2-8. Volume of tetrahedron. Consider the tetrahedron with one vertex at the origin, and the other vertices numbered i, 2, 3, so that the coordinates of the vertices are [x u y lt z^\, etc. The volume = £ base x altitude. Take the base as the plane (123). Its equation is = 0. X y z I *1 yi *1 I x% yz *2 I x$

yz

*3

I

Now the coefficient of x is

y x z x 1

y% *2 1

y» *3 1

This is equal to twice the area of the triangle in the plane of yz
with coordinates in that plane (y lt Zj), (j a , z 2 ), (y 3 , z 3 ). But this
triangle is the projection of the triangle (123), = (123) cos a.
Similarly for the coefficients of y and z. Hence dividing the
equation by (123) it reduces to the normal form

* cos « +y cos /J + z cos y +p = o.

ii] THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE 35

Therefore p x (123) = 6V= x t y r %

x 2 yt z 2

x a yz z t

For a general tetrahedron with vertices 1, 2, 3, 4, if we take
new axes parallel to the old through the vertex 1, the relative
coordinates of the vertices are x 2 — x ly etc., and

6V =

x a ~ x i yz~ Vi z » ~ %i

x 3 ~ x i yz~ y\ z 3 ~ z i

x i yx zi 1

x 2 y% z 2 *

*3 y^ %a 1

x t y t z t 1

2-81. Corresponding to the expression

\r-ji sin (0 a - X ) = \r x r 2 sin <f>

for the area of a triangle we have an expression for the volume of
a tetrahedron in terms of the lengths of three coterminous edges
and the angles between them.

Thus 6 Vol. (0123) = r-jtfi

COS Oj cos /?! cos y 1
cos 02 cos /9 2 cos y 2
cos 03 cos j3 3 cos y 3

The square of this determinant is

1 cos (12) cos (13)

cos (21) 1 cos (23)

cos (31) cos (32) 1
= 1 — S cos 2 (23) + 2 cos (23) cos (31) cos (12).
The square root of this expression is sometimes called the sine
of the solid angle of the tetrahedron.

2-82. An expression for the volume of a tetrahedron can also
be obtained in terms of the edges r if . Multiply together the
two determinants

6V =

x iyi

%

I

x 2 y 2

z 2

I

x 3 yz %z

I

x *y4.

s t

I

I

-6V =

x l

yi

*i

O

I

%2

J2

*2

I

X$yz *Z I x t yi *4 I O I 3-3 36 THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE [chap. by rows. In the diagonal we get the terms r^, ..., r 4 2 , o, and in the place (i, j) we have HxiXj = %{r? + rf - Ti?) (i, j = i, 2, 3, 4). The last row and the last column are each 1, i, 1, 1, o. Now multiply the last row by \r? and subtract from the *th, and the last column by Jr,- 2 and subtract from the tth. Finally, taking out the factors — \ we get 8x 3 6F 2 = 2 _ a 12 '13 o r *2i 2 o r a -r 2 *• 2 r\ I I I X O This is the three-dimensional analogue of Heron's formula for the area of a triangle A 2 = j (s - a) (s - b) (s - c) = - T V c 2 b* 1 c 2 a* 1 6 2 a 2 1 Ex. 1. If the line-coordinates (p) are the actual values of the determinants of the matrix where- [*!,>»!,* J, [x i ,y % ,z^\ are the rectangular coordinates of two points on the line, and r is the distance between the two points, show that the expression (2*73 1) 2 (Poi Pvs +P01P22) = rr'd sin 1. jEx. 2. Show by expanding the determinant *1 yi *i I x% y2 *2 I x 3 y s *B I x t y* *4 I in terms of the minors formed from the first two and the last two rows that if r , r' are the lengths of two opposite edges of a tetrahedron, d the distance and * the angle between these edges, the volume V=\rr'd&mi. n] THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE 37 2-9. Transformation of coordinates. In 1 '3 we have already considered the effect of changing the origin alone. We shall now consider the transformation to new axes with the same origin. Let the direction- cosines of the new axes of x', y\ z' with respect to the old be respectively [4> »*i> »J, [4, «2» «2]» [4. ™a, «s], and assume that both sets of axes are orthogonal. Let P be any point whose old coordinates are [x, y, z] and new coordinates [*', y', z']. Then, pro- jecting OP on each of the original axes in succession, we have, since the projection of OP is equal to the sum of the projections of *', y' and z', x=l 1 x' + 4/ +l 3 z' 1 y = m 1 x' + rn^y' + m^z' \ . z=n 1 x' +n^y' +n s z l J Also, since [4,4, 4] are the direction-cosines of Ox with respect to the new axes, x' = l i x + m i y + n 1 z' y' = l 2 x+m 2 y+n 2 z z'=l a x+tn 3 y+n a z These two sets of equations, which represent inverse trans formations, can be represented by the scheme z' x y z 4 4 4 m 1 TBj TBj «i «a ih The nine coefficients are connected by a number of equations. Since 4» *»i> «i are a set of three direction-cosines, we have 4 2 +»t 1 2 +w 1 2 =i. Similarly tf + m£ + n^ = 1 , ] 4*+'«s a +«8 a =i- 38 THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE [chap. Further, since the new axes are mutually at right angles, / 2 / 3 + m 2 m 3 + n 2 n 3 = 6 l 1 l 2 +m 1 m 2 + 71^ = These six equations reduce the nine constants to three. Another set of six equations can be written down by con- sidering the old axes in terms of the new, and we have l\ +h* +h 2 =I > «i«l+ ff2 2 « 2 +OT 3 «3=0, m 1 a +JM 2 2 +/K 3 2 =i, nJx +nzl 2 +W3/3 =0, « 1 2 +« 2 2 +n 3 1! =1, l 1 m 1 -¥l i m i +l z m 3 =o. 2-91. This transformation is equivalent to a rotation through a definite angle about some definite line. The angle d and the ratios of the direction-cosines [A, p, v] of the axis of rotation form the three independent con- stants which are required, and the equations of transformation could be expressed in terms of these. Thus, let OC be the axis of rotation, and consider a vector OP=r=[x,y,z] which is transformed into OQ = r'=[x',y',z'] by a rotation through the angle — about OC. This is equivalent to a rotation of the coordinate- system through the angle + 0. In the plane POC take OA ± OC, andtakeOB±theplsuieAOC.Drav/QN±AOB.ThenAON=6. Let POC=x=QOC. Draw NL\\BO, LP'\\OC and FQ'\\LN. Then the vector Q q = Qp , +F q, + q,q Now OP' = OL coseca = ON cos cosec a = OQ cos = OP cos 0. Therefore OP' = rcos0. P'Q'=LN= ONsind=OQ sina sin0, therefore P'Q' = a x rsinfl, where a is the unit vector in the direction OC. Q' Q=NQ- LP' = (OQ- OP') cosa=OP(i-cos0)cosa, therefore Q'Q=a(a.r)(i-cos0). Fig. 10 Fig. 9 «] THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE 37 2-9. Transformation of coordinates. In 1-3 we have already considered the effect of changing the origin alone. We shall now consider the transformation to new axes with the same origin. Let the direction- cosines of the new axes of x', y', z' with respect to the old be respectively Kl. m\, «J, [4, r>h, «J, [/ S) nis, hJ, and assume that both sets of axes are orthogonal. Let P be any point whose old coordinates are [x, y, z] and new coordinates [*', /, z']. Then, pro- jecting OP on each of the original axes in succession, we have, since the projection of OP is equal to the sum of the projections of *', y' and z', x=l 1 x' +4/ +l 3 z' I y=m L x'+m 2 y'+m a z'[. z=n 1 x' +n?y' +n z z') Also, since [4,4, h] are the direction-cosines of Ox with respect to the new axes, x' = l 1 x + m 1 y + n 1 z' y'=l 2 x+m 2 y+n 2 z ^' = l s x+m a y + n z z These two sets of equations, which represent inverse trans formations, can be represented by the scheme * h 4 h y tn y ma mj 2 «! «2 W3 The nine coefficients are connected by a number of equations. Since 4> wij, n x are a set of three direction-cosines, we have 4 a +«i*+»i 2 =i." Similarly 42 + m£ + rtf = 1 , 38 THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE [chap. Further, since the new axes are mutually at right angles, l l l s +m 2 m 3 +n i ?i 3 =o igii + ffigfti! + W3M1 = o y , 44 + m^m^ + n^n^ = o These six equations reduce the nine constants to three. Another set of six equations can be written down by con- sidering the old axes in terms of the new, and we have 4 a + 4 2 + 4 2 =I > m 1 n 1 + m 2 n 2 + m 3 n 3 =o, m 1 2 +m i 2 +m 3 2 =i, nji + w 2 4 +K3J3 =0, Mi 2 +Mij 2 +7% Ijrii + litn,, + l 3 m 3 = o. Fig. 10 2-91. This transformation is equivalent to a rotation through a definite angle about some definite line. The angle 6 and the ratios of the direction-cosines [A, fi, v] of the axis of rotation form the three independent con- stants which are required, and the equations of transformation could be expressed in terms of these. Thus, let OC be the axis of rotation, and consider a vector OP= r =[x,y,z] which is transformed into OQ=r' = [x',y',z'] by a rotation through the angle — 6 about OC. This is equivalent to a rotation of the coordinate- system through the angle + 0. In the plane POC take OA ± OC, and take OB _L the plane AOC. Draw QN _L AOB. Then AON = 9. Let POC=x=QOC. Draw NL\\BO, LP'\\OC and P'Q'\\LN. Then the vector qq _ Qp, , p,Qi ,q'q Now OP' = OL cosecoc= OiVcosfl coseca.=OQ cos9=OPcos6. Therefore OP' = rcos6. P'Q/ = LN=ONsmO = OQsina.sm6, therefore P'Q' = axr sin d, where a is the unit vector in the direction OC. Q'Q=NQ-LP' = (OQ-OP')cos<x.=OP(i-cos6)cosa, therefore Q'Q=a(a.r)(i-cos9). ii] THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE 39 Hence we have the vector equation r' = rcosd+(axr)sm0+(a.r)a(i-cos9). Writing this in terms of the rectangular components referred to the original axes we have x' = x cos 6 + (vy — fiz) sin 6 + A ( 1 — cos 6) (Xx + ju/y + vz), y'=ycos6+(\z-vx)sm6+(i(i-cos6)(Xx+iJ,y+vz), z'=zcos6+(fj.x-Xy)smd+v(i-cosd)(Xx+fjLy+vz). These are known as Euler's equations of transformation. The inverse equations are obtained by interchanging accented and unaccented letters and changing the sign of 0. 2-92. In the general orthogonal transformation the de- terminant is called the modulus of the transformation. Squaring it and using the equations of 2-9 we find Z) 2 = 1, and therefore D= + 1. For the identical transformation l x = i=m l =n s and the other elements all vanish, so that D= + 1. The sign is negative when the two coordinate-systems are one right-handed and the other left-handed. 2 95. EXAMPLES. 1. Find the equation of the plane through the line x = zy = 3* perpendicular to the plane 5^+43; — 3sr= 8. Ans. iyx—28y—gz=o. 2. Reduce to the normal form the equations of the line of intersection of the planes 4*+ 4y-sz =12, 8x+ i2y-i2z= 32, and write down the equations of its projections on the three co- ordinate-planes. Ans. — — =•—- = -;4y-3*=8, 2*-*=2, 3*-2.y+i=o. * 3 4 40 THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE [chap. 3. Find the three plane angles at the vertex of the trihedral angle determined by the three planes x+z=$, y—z+s = o,
x=y+z, and find the coordinates of the vertex.

Ans. 9 o , 9 o , 6o°;[i, -2,3].

4. Find the equation of the plane (i) through the origin
parallel to each of the lines (x— y+ 421=1, 2x+y — 3z=2) and
(*+3 = 2y+i = 3#+2); (ii) through [1, 1, 1] parallel to each of
the lines (# _ 3 j, + 2 * = o, ax 2 + by 2 + cz* = 0).

Ans. (i) i2X+2oy—6gz=o; (ii) x— 3;y+2#=o.

5. Find the equations of the lines through [1, 2, 3] which cut
the axes of x and y respectively at right angles, and the equation
of the plane containing these lines.

Ans. (x=i, $y=2z), (y=2, 2x=z); 6x+$y— 2Z=6.

6. Find the equation of the plane through the line

(3x-4y+$z=io, 2x+2y-2z=4) and parallel to the line #= 2^=32. Ans. x—2oy J c2']z=i\. 7. Find the two points on the line a: = 2y = 32 + 6 at a distance 7 from the plane 2x+y — 2z=$.

Ans. [12, 6, 2], [-J£ft -f$, -ff]. 8. Prove that the lines 2x— y+$z+ 3 = 0= x+ioy— 21 and
2X—y= o = yx+z — 6 intersect. Find the coordinates of their
common point, and the equation of the plane containing them.

Ans. [1,2, — 1], x+3y+z=6.

9. Find the condition that the three planes x=cy+bz,
y = az+cx, z=bx+ay may pass through one line.

Ans. a? + b* + c 2 + 2abc=i.

10. Find the equations of the two planes through the points
[o, 4, —3], [6, —4, 3], other than the plane through the origin,
which cut off from the axes intercepts whose sum is zero.

Ans. 2x-2y—6z=6,6x+3y-2z=i8. (Math. Trip. 1, 1913.)

ii] THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE 41

11. The three lines

x=y = \z, x-2 = $$y+i)=z-i, 2(*+i) = 6(j-2) = 3(*-3) are three non-intersecting edges of a parallelepiped; find the equations of its six faces. Ans. x—5y+z=o and —8, yx — y— z=o and 16, 2x+y — 52=0 and —16. 12. The coordinates of four points are [a — b, a — c, a — d], [b — c, b — d, b — a], [c — d, c — a, c — b], [d—a, d—b, d—c]. Prove that the straight line joining the mid-points of any two opposite edges of the tetrahedron formed by them passes through the origin. 13. Find the equations of the projection of the line x—i _y+i _z~- 2 ~* — 1 — 4 on the plane x+2y+z=6. Ans . *Zl m ?+l m *=l, 4 -7 IO 14. Prove that the lines x—a y—b z—c . x—a! y — b' z—c' — T-^-rr-- — ~ and =<-=— = a b c a b c intersect, and find the coordinates of the point of intersection and the equation of the plane in which they lie. Ans. [a+a\ b+b', c+c'], Hx(bc'-b'c) = o. 15. Prove that the lines x— a+d_y— a_z— a— d x—b+c_y—b_z—b—c ~a^8 a a + S ' j8-y /T j8 + y are coplanar, and find the equation of the plane in which they lie. (Wolstenholme.) Ans. x—2y+z=o. 16. Find the equations of the line through [1, 2, — 1] per- pendicular to the plane 2 x ~Sy+4 z= 5> *h e length of the per- pendicular, and the coordinates of its foot. A „ t x-i_y-z_z_ + i 81/2 [49 2 7_1 Am - ~3~~ -5 ~ 4 ' 5 ' Us* 5' d' 42 THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE [chap. 17. Find the distance of the point from the straight line, and the coordinates of its foot : (1) [6,6, -1] and _=■*_=_ ~>. (n) [5,4,2] and — _=^ = — _. ,.... r " , , * — 3 V+I — 2 (ui) [-2,2, -3] and _^=->__ = _-. (i) V21, [4. 5» -5]. (") V24, [1, 6, o], (iii) V28, [4, 1, -2]. 18. Find the length and the equations of the common per- pendicular to the two lines : ... x— 3 _ j~4 _ 0+i x+6 _ y+ _z-i *' 1 1 — — 1 ' 2 ~~ 4 — -1 " .... x—  _ y+2 _ z-T, x+y _ y+2 _z-i ^ ' 2 ~ 1 ~ — 1 ' 3 — 2 ~ 1 ' ..... x—y v+7 0+1 #+7 v-8 z+i (111) — i-=^ — '- = , — '-=■<- — = . v ' -1 2 1-5 3 2 W j- _ 2 - , > ? - _ 6 ~I- . ... #-1 v-2 0-1 4mj. (1) V 1 ^ = - = • 3 — 1 2 .... . x+i y — 2 z — 2 a;— 4 _ j+i _g— 2 (iii)V59. z _ 3 ? (iv) 2V29, 19. Show that the straight line joining [a, b, c], [a', V, c'] passes through the origin if aa' + bb' + cc'=pp', p and p' being the distances of the points from the origin. ii] THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE 43 20. Prove that the equations a+mz— ny_b+nx— lz_c+ly — mx m—n n—l l—m represent the line at infinity on the plane (m-n)x+(n-l) y+(l—m)z=o; unless al+bm+cn=o, in which case the line is indeterminate and its locus is the plane (m-n)x+(n-l) y+(l-m)z=a+b + c. 21. Find the equations of the planes through the lines of intersection of two of three given planes perpendicular to the third, and show that the three planes pass through one line. 22. If the tetrahedron whose vertices are A { =[x if y„Zt] (1=1,2,3,4) is such that the perpendiculars from the vertices on the opposite faces are concurrent, prove that 2*g* 3 + 2*!* 4 = 2*3*! + 2* 2 * 4 = 2*1*2 + 2*3*4, and deduce that the three sums of the squares of opposite edges are equal. (Orthocentric tetrahedron.) 23. If two pairs of opposite edges of a tetrahedron are at right angles prove that the third pair are also at right angles. Hence prove that for such a tetrahedron the sums of squares of opposite edges are equal, and that the four altitudes are concurrent. 24. If ABCD is a tetrahedron whose altitudes are concurrent in a point E, show that each of the five points is the orthocentre of the tetrahedron formed by the other four. {Orthocentric pentad.) 25. Show that the equation of the plane through the line x=x 1 +l 1 t, etc., perpendicular to the plane !x+my+nz=o is = 0. * y z 1 *1 yi % 1 k "h "1 I m n 44 THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE [chap. 26. A, B, C, D are four points in space, and P, Q, R, S are points dividing the segments AB, BC, CD, DA in the ratios p:i, q:i, r:i, s:i; prove that if pqrs=i the four points P, Q, R, S are coplanar. 27. Four spheres touch in succession, each one touching two others (the number of external contacts being even) ; prove that the four points of contact lie on a circle. 28. P and Q are two variable points on fixed straight lines, each determined linearly by a parameter, t and u respectively. If the line PQ always cuts a fixed straight line show that t , u are connected by an equation of the form a.tu + fit + yu + 8 = o. 29. If (if) denotes the distance between the points P* and P t show that the six distances connecting four coplanar points are connected by the relation 2(y) 2 W+Z(y) 2 (jkf (ki)*-X(ij)* (ikf (;7) a =o. 30. Show that the six angles formed by four concurrent rays OP lt ..., OP t , taken in pairs, are connected by the relation I cos 0^1=0. 31. If (/>) and (q) are the line-coordinates of two intersecting lines, show that (p+M) are th e line-coordinates of a straight line belonging to the plane pencil determined by the two given lines. 32. From any point P are drawn PM and PN perpendicular to the planes zx and xy. O is the origin and a, jS, y, 6 are the angles which OP makes with the coordinate-planes and with the plane OMN. Prove that cosec 2 = cosec 2 a + cosec 2 /? + cosec 2 y. 33. Deduce from Ex. 32 that if PL is perpendicular to the plane yz, OP makes equal angles with the three planes OMN, ONL, OLM; and that the plane OPL is equally inclined to the planes OLM and OLN. ii] THE STRAIGHT LINE AND PLANE 45 34. Show that the result in Ex. 33 is equivalent to the fol- lowing theorem : ABC is a trirectangular spherical triangle and P any point on the sphere ; great circles through P perpendicular to the sides meet them in L, M, N; P is the spherical centre of the small circle inscribed in the triangle LMN. 35. If from the point P= [a, b, c] perpendiculars PM, PN are drawn to the planes of zx, xy, find the equation of the plane OMN and the angle which OP makes with it. Ans. —bcx+cay+abz=o, cos^abc (Sa 2 26 2 c 2 )~*. 36. Find the equation of the plane which bisects the join of [#i> yu #1] and [x 2 , y 2 , z 2 ] perpendicularly. Ans. S* (* x - *jj) = p fa* - x/). CHAPTER III ! GENERAL HOMOGENEOUS OR PROJECTIVE COORDINATES 3-1. A large section of geometry deals with relations, such as those of incidence, which involve no measurement. This is pro- jective geometry. It is more fundamental and primitive than metrical geometry, in the sense that it involves fewer funda- mental assumptions or axioms. It is possible to prove theorems of projective geometry by metrical methods, but, without the introduction of additional considerations which do not belong to projective geometry, it is not possible to prove theorems of metrical geometry by projective geometry. Thus we may prove the collinearity of three points by the Theorem of Menelaus, which is a metrical theorem, but if the theorem of collinearity is a purely projective one it should be capable of being proved without any metrical considerations. In order to deal with projective geometry analytically we have to devise a system of coordinates having no metrical basis. We must distinguish here between metrical and numerical. Naturally a system of coordinates must be numerical. 3-11. In geometry the primitive elements arepoints, lines, and planes; and the primitive forms or assemblages of elements, arranged according to their dimensions, are as follows : i a. Range of points (points on a line), a'. Axial pencil of planes (planes through a line), b. Plane pencil of lines (lines lying in a plane and passing through a point) ; 2a. Plane field of points (points in a plane), a'. Bundle of planes (planes through a point), b. Bundle of lines (lines through a point), b'. Plane field of lines (lines in a plane); 3 a. Space of points (all points in space), a'. Space of planes (all planes in space); 4. Space of lines (all lines in space). chap, m] PROJECTIVE COORDINATES 47 Point and plane are reciprocal elements, line is self-reciprocal. Forms whose reference-letters are distinguished by an accent are reciprocal; 16 and 4 are self-reciprocal. 3-2. One-to-one correspondence. We shall consider first the one-dimensional forms, and, as typical, the range of points. In determining the position of a point on a given line we as- sume a (1, 1) correspondence between the points and the real numbers, so that with each point is associated a certain number, its coordinate. If the points are renumbered, i.e. subjected to a transformation of coordinates, we assume that the old number x is definitely associated with the new number *' by a (1, 1) correspondence, and that this correspondence is represented by an algebraic relationship linear in both x and x', viz. yxx' — ax + 8x' — fi = o, yx+o Instead of x and x' we may write xjy and x'/y', thus introducing homogeneous coordinates, and then the equation of transforma- tion can be replaced by the two equations px' — ax+fiy, py'=yx+hy, where p is a factor of proportionality. It is essential that aS — jSy should not be zero, for then x'/y' would be a constant ratio. x and y must not be both zero. The parameter x/y has a definite numerical value except when y=o; in the latter case we denote the parameter by the symbol 00. 8»21. As the transformation is determined by the ratios of the four numbers a, jS, y, 8 we can make any three given points have specified numbers, but a fourth point will then have its co- ordinate determined. We have thus to consider the coordinate of a point determined with reference to three fixed points. A set of four points on a line is associated with a certain function, the cross-ratio of the set, which is defined (metrically) as the ratio of the position-ratios 48 GENERAL HOMOGENEOUS OR [chap. of one pair with regard to the other pair, all taken in an assigned order. We denote the cross-ratio of the two pairs P, Q and X, Y by p v p y py OX (PQ, XY)= Qx/ qy=py/ QY- This function, as is proved in text-books which treat projective geometry metrically, is unaltered by projection ; which suggests that we should define the projective coordinate of a point as the value of the cross-ratio of the set consisting of the given point and three fixed points taken in a certain order. But as cross- ratio is here denned metrically we must proceed somewhat differently. 3-22. Coordinate of a point on a line. Take three points on the line, A, B and E, and assign to these respectively the para- meters o, oo and i. Then if Pis any other point, the number or parameter * which corresponds to it is called the coordinate of P referred to the base-points A, B and unit-point E. If we are to avoid actual measurement it is not possible to determine the number corresponding to any point without using a construction which goes outside the line. We shall consider this construction in 3-63. For the present, however, we shall assume that the line has been graduated so that each point has a different number attached to it. If another pair of base-points A', B' and another unit-point E' are chosen, whose parameters are a, b and e, there is a definite linear transformation which changes o, oo, 1 into a, b, e respectively, viz. ,_ b(e—a)x+a(b—e) _e— b x'—a ~ {e — a)x + (b — eY ' ~e — a'x' — b' We can consider this either as a renumbering of the points, so that A, B, E, P take the numbers a, b, e, x' ; or as a geometrical transformation by which these points become A', B', E', P'. 1 co x a e b x' — Ao -E o B o— Po A« E 1 o—B'o F° a e i x.' Fig. 11 Then the point P' is related to A', B', E' in exactly the same way as P is to A, B, E, so that when A', B', E' are given the para- meters o, 00, 1 the coordinate of P' with regard to the system in] PROJECTIVE COORDINATES 49 A', B', E' is also x. The condition which the projective co- ordinate has to satisfy is that the geometrical cross-ratio (PE,AB) = (P'E',A'B'). 3-3. Cross-ratio. We now introduce the cross-ratio of two pairs of numbers as a function of the four numbers whose value is not altered by a linear transformation. Consider first the cross-ratio (x, 1 ; o, 00) which is a function of the single variable x, and denote it by f(x). Now subject the numbers to the linear transformation which changes, i, o, 00 respectively into V, m and m'. The transformation is _ (r-m')(x'-m) X (l'-m)(x' -m'Y Then since the value of the cross-ratio has not been altered, we or, writing / instead of x', The simplest form for/(#) which we can use is *. We therefore define the cross-ratio l—m/l—tn 3-31. We may study this function quite apart from geometry. Writing it in terms of four numbers a, b, c, d, we have (ab rJ) = ^/b- c -. ( ab + cd )-(i>c+ad) C-A a-dl b-d (ab+cd)-(ca+bd) C-B' where A = bc+ad, B=ca+bd, C=ab+cd. A, B, C are each unaltered if we interchange any two of the numbers and at the same time interchange the other two. Hence the cross-ratio is unaltered by the double interchange. Although there are 24 different orders of the four numbers there are only six different values of the cross-ratio, viz. A-B B-C C-A A-C B-A' C=B and the reciprocals of these. SO GENERAL HOMOGENEOUS OR [chap. The interchange of b and c, or of a and d, leaves A unaltered and interchanges B and C. f~l D j Hence (ab, dc) = (ba, «I) = c=A = (ab^J)> while (ac, bd) = ^—g= i--^—^ = i-(ab, cd). If (ab, cd) = k, the six values are k, k~\ i-k, i-k~\ (i-Jfe)" 1 , (I-*" 1 )" 1 . 3-311. In general the six values are all distinct, but there are certain cases in which two or more of them become equal. If k = k~\ k* = i and k= ± i. (i) If k= + 1, (ac, bd) = o and either a=b or c=d. In this case there are three values, o, i, oo. (2) If k = — 1, the set of numbers is said to be harmonic. The relation in this case can be written A + B = 2C, or (a + b) (c + d) ~ 2 (ab + cd), and is symmetrical in both a, b and c, d. In this case there are again three values, — 1, 2, \. The harmonic relation associates the four numbers in pairs ; a, b and c, d; and it is only when they are associated in this way that the cross-ratio has the value — 1. (3) If k = (1 — k)- 1 , k 2 —k+i=o. k is a complex number = — <o, where w 3 =i. The set of numbers is then said to be equian- harmonic. There are only two values, -co and — w 2 . It is easily verified that these are the only cases of equalities. 3-32. When numbers occur in pairs it is often convenient to represent them as the roots of a quadratic equation at 2 + 2ht+b = o. The discriminant of this quadratic C=ab-h* determines the nature of the roots, which are real, equal, or imaginary, according as C is negative, zero, or positive. 3-321. Consider two pairs of numbers A, A' and /*, yJ repre- sented by the quadratic equations a 1 * 2 +2A 1 *+£ 1 =o, OiP+zfht+b^o. in] PROJECTIVE COORDINATES 51 Then AA' = bj^, A + A' = - 2/^, W' = hl<h, ii + iJ.'=-2h 2 ja i . The condition that (AA', fifi') should be harmonic is X-fi j X'-fj, _ A-^VA'-m' --1 ' or 2 (AA' + M/i ') = (A+A')(M + M'). Substituting the values of the symmetric functions we obtain 2 (Vai + b 2 [a 2 ) = ^h 1 h 2 la 1 a 2 , This function is the bilinear symmetrical expression which is associated with the quadratic function ab-h 2 , the discriminant of the quadratic. The term apolar is also used to describe this relationship. 3-322. If we write a x b x - h* = C u and a 2 b 2 - hf = C 22 , then we may write a x b 2 + a^ - 2h t h 2 = zC M . If C u >o and C 22 >o, so that both pairs of elements are imaginary, we have (aA+«A) a -4W > (a±b 2 + a^i)* - ta^Ozbt, i- e - >(«i6«-a2*i) 2 - Hence C 12 cannot vanish in this case, i.e. in a harmonic set at least one of the pairs must be real. 3-323. To find the cross-ratio of the two pairs a 1 t i +2k 1 t+b 1 = o, a 2 t i + zh 2 t+b 2 = o. Since the roots of each equation can be taken in either order, there are two values for the cross-ratio, (AA' ( fifi') and (AA', /*»! These being reciprocals, their product =1. We proceed to find their sum. Let C=AA' + /x M ', isA/t+Ay, BsXp'+X'p. The two values of the cross-ratio are then (C-A)/(C-B) and (C-B)/(C-A), and their sum _ {C-Af + {C-BY 7 . (A + BF-4 AB (C-A)(C-B) ~ Z + C*-C(A+B)+AB' 4-a 5 2 GENERAL HOMOGENEOUS OR [chap. Now C= i x / a i + hjoi = (<z A + OibJIa^ , A + B = (A + /a) (A' + /*') = 4A 1 As/oifl 8 , ^5 = AA'( / * 2 +^' !! ) + W '(A 2 +A' i! )=AA'(/x+ / x') 2 + / * / *'(A+A') , -4^V/*' = 4( A2 2 «i*i+ V«2*2 - a 1 a i b 1 b i )la 1 *a i i . Hence we find (-4+ B) 2 -4^5 = i6C u C M /a l , fli« and C 2 - C(j4 + B) + ^S = 4 (C 12 2 - C^C^KW, whence the sum of the cross-ratios is 2(C 12 2 + CnC^/CQ/- C U C 22 ). The two values of the cross-ratio are therefore the roots of the quadratic equation *'-» r" re k+I= °- o 12 — '--ii^^ 3-324. Conditions that the cross-ratio of two pairs should be real, and positive. We assume that the coefficients of the two quadratics are all real. The condition that the cross-ratio should be real is \c 2 -r r ) * ' \*--12 »-'ll<-'M' which reduces to C M 2 C u C 22 > o, or simply C n C w > o, i.e. the two pairs are either both real or both imaginary. 3-325. The condition that the cross-ratio should be positive is C 12 +C u C i2 12 — ^11^22 l.C C*i2 > 1^11^22 I » or, since the cross-ratio must also be real, ^12 ^ ^11^22 -^ O. Ex. i. Show that if ^ M | + ^ u ^'=f either (A M) A>') or (V, A» C 12 — < -ll ( -22 4 is harmonic. C a +C C i £■*. 2. Show that if t^V - 7^r^ = ~» ^ two P 3 * 18 are e< l uian - harmonic. in] PROJECTIVE COORDINATES S3 3-41. We have now to define the geometrical cross-ratio of four points, and to do this we must consider the line as lying in a plane. We think of the cross-ratio in the first place as a property of the four points which is not altered by projection, but we shall have further to endowit with numerical value so that it can be treated as an algebraic quantity capable of addition and multiplica- tion. These operations will be introduced by suitable definitions. The fundamental property is that if ABCD and A'B'C'D' are two transversals of the same pencil, then the cross-ratio (AB, CD) - (A'B', CD'). We say that (ABCD) is in perspective with (A'B'C'D'), with centre of perspective O, and write this (ABCD) a o (A'B'C'D'). We assume that if (AB, CD) = (AB, CD') the points D and D' coincide, or shortly D=D'. The cross-ratio depends upon the order of the four points. There are 24 different orders, but we can prove that they fall into six sets of four, each set forming equivalent cross-ratios. In Fig. 12 we have (ABCD)a (PBRS) a d (PAQO)a b (BADC). Thus the cross-ratio is un- altered by the simultaneous in- terchange of A, B and C, D. Fig. 1* Thus ( AB> CD) = ( BA> DC) = (CZ)> AB) = (Z)Cj BA) 3-42. A special case of great im- portance occurs when (AB, CD) = (BA, CD). Let A, B, C be given. Take any two points O and Q collinear with C. Let OA cut QB in R, and QA cut OB in S. Let RS cut AB in D. Then (AB, CD) a (RS, LD) a q (BA, CD). By this construction D is uniquely £ determined when A, B, C are given 54 GENERAL HOMOGENEOUS OR [chap. in this order, and we assume that the same point will be determined if we take any other points O, Q collinear with C*. In this range the relation between A and B is symmetrical, and since also ( AB> CD) = ( BA> DC)y we have (BA, DC) = (BA, CD), so that C, D are also related symmetrically. (AB, CD) is said to be harmonic; A, Bare harmonic conjugates with regard to C, D, and C, D are harmonic conjugates with regard to A, B. 3-43. If (AB, CD) = (A'B', CD') the two ranges are not necessarily in perspective, but can be connected by a chain of perspectivities. In general we say that they are projectively re- lated or projective; A and A', B and B', etc., are corresponding points. They are in perspective if three of the four lines AA', BB', CC, DD' are concurrent; for if AA', BB', CC are con- current in O, and OD cuts A'B' in D u then (A'B', CDJ = (AB, CD) = (A'B', CD'), therefore D^=D' . In particular if (AB, CD) = (AB'C'D') then BB', CC, DD' are concurrent. If on each of two straight lines we take three points A, B, C and A', B', C then if P is any point on the first line there is a definite point P' on the second such that (ABCP) and (A'B'C'P 1 ) are projective. A (i, i) correspondence between the points of the two lines is determined when three pairs of corre- sponding points are given. 3-44. The last statement is so important that it has been called the fundamental theorem of projective geometry. Assuming the theorem, which implies that the correspondence is unique when three pairs are given, and which requires for its complete proof considerations of continuity, let us consider a construction by which the correspondent of any point P will be determined. • This can be proved with the help of Desargues' Theorem on perspective triangles. Thus if O', Q', R', S' are points determined in the same way as O, Q> R, S, the triangles OQR, O'Q'R' are in perspective since the inter- sections of QR and Q'R', RO and R'O', OQ and O'Q' are collinear, hence OO', QQ', RR' are concurrent. Similarly the triangles OQS and O'Q'S' are in perspective, hence OO', QQ', SS' are concurrent. Therefore QQ', RR', SS' are concurrent and the intersections of QR and Q'R', QS and Q'S', RS and R'S' are collinear, i.e. RS, R'S' and AB are concurrent. m] PROJECTIVE COORDINATES 55 We have A, B, C on /, and the corresponding points A', B', C on /'. On A A' take any two points O, Q. Let OB cut QB' in Fig. 14 Then B", and OC cut QC in C. Let B"C=r cut AA' in ^" (^5C) a {A"B"C) a q (^'iS'C'). If P is any point on / its correspondent on /' is found by the con- struction: let OP cut /" in P", then QP" cuts /' in P'. 3-45. As an example of two projective pencils of lines consider a conic, defined as a plane curve which is cut by an arbitrary line in two points. Let A and B be fixed points on the conic. Then a variable line I through A cuts the conic again in a point P and the line BP or V uniquely corresponds to I. If P, Q, R, S are four points on the conic we have then A(PQRS)=B(PQRS). 3-5. We may have two projective ranges ABCP... and A'B'C'P'... on the same straight line. This is called a homo- graphy. In this case any point of the line may be regarded as belonging to either of the two ranges, and there will be con- fusion if the ranges are not kept distinct. As an example of a homography let / be a fixed line, and C a conic, cutting / in Z) x and Z) 2 . Let O u 2 be fixed points on the conic. If P is any point on /, a corresponding Fig- is 56 GENERAL HOMOGENEOUS OR [chap. point P' is uniquely determined by the following construction. Join PO t cutting the conic again in L, join 2 L cutting I in P 1 . Then to P', as a point on the second range, corresponds the unique point P determined by the reverse construction, i.e. join P'0 2 cutting the conic in L, then O x L cuts / in P. But if P is considered as belonging to the second range its correspondent is a different point Q. Thus the homography is not in general symmetrical. The points D x and D 2 are self-corresponding points or double-points of the homography. They may be real, co- incident, or imaginary. 3-51. Involution. The case in which the two points corre- sponding to a point P coincide is important. In this case the relation between P and P' is symmetrical and the homography is said to be involutory, or an involution. There is no need then to distinguish the two ranges on the line. Points P and P 1 are connected definitely in pairs. We have then (PP', D X D 2 ) = (PT, D X D 2 ) and therefore P, P' are harmonic conjugates with regard to the double-points. In the above construction, when the two pairs O t P, O^ and 2 P, OiP' both intersect on the conic, we have ={PF, A A). The four points 1 2 , D X D 2 are said to form a harmonic group on the conic. Since P, P" are harmonic conju- Fi s- l6 gates with regard to D u D 2 , the polar of P with regard to the conic passes through P'. An involution is thus formed on any line by pairs of conjugate points with regard to a given conic. Similarly pairs of conjugate lines through a fixed point form an involution-penal. In an involution the double-points may be real or imaginary; but they cannot coincide unless the involution degenerates, for then either P or P' would coincide with them. When the double- points are real the involution is called hyperbolic, when im- aginary, elliptic. in] PROJECTIVE COORDINATES 57 3-52. An involution is completely determined by its double- points when these are real. More generally, an involution is de- termined by two pairs of corresponding points. For a projectivity is determined by three pairs of corresponding points. Thus taking A, A', X and the corresponding points A', A, X' a pro- jectivity is determined which is an involution since A' corre- sponds to A, and A to A'. c Fig. 17 Let A and A', and X (or Y') and X' (or Z), be two pairs of points on a line a. Through X and X' draw any lines b, c inter- secting in Y (or Z'). On c take any point C. Let CA and CA' cut b in P' and P, and let AB cut c in C". Then if P is any point on a the corresponding point P' is found by the construction: Let CP cut b in £)', .4£)' cut c in P, and PP cut a in P'. To P' should correspond P by a similar con- struction, i.e. if CP' cuts b in £), and AQ cuts c in P', then PP' should pass' through P. To prove this consider the six points AQQ'CRP' on the two lines AQ'R and CP'Q, 1&en by Pappus' Theorem (the particular case of Pascal's Theorernror six points on a conic when the conic degenerates to two straight lines) the three intersections (AQ\_ (QQ'\ = R (Q' C \ = P \cr)- k ' krp')- 1 *' \PA)- r are collinear. 58 GENERAL HOMOGENEOUS OR [chap. Then (PP'AA'XX') a b (R'R C'C Z'Z) a a (QQ'BB'YY') a (P'PA'AX'X), and thus we have involutions on the three lines a, b, c. 3-521. Consider the quadrangle BCQ'R. Its opposite sides CQ' and BR, Q'R and BC, BQ' and CR are cut by a in the involution (PP\ AA', XX'). This often affords a simple way of recognising that six points are in involution. 3-6. We now return to the definition of geometrical cross- ratio, which up to this point has only been considered as a magnitude in so far as we can recognise when two cross-ratios are equal. We have now to consider cross-ratios as capable of being added or multiplied. We define these operations in two special cases as follows : (i) (PQ, XY) x (QR, XY) = (PR, XY), and (ii) (PX, QY) + (PQ,XY) = i. In (i), putting Q = P we have (PP, XY) = i, and in (ii) (PX,PY) = o. Hence (PQ,XY)x(QP,XY) = i, or (Q^XY)^^^, and, putting Q=X, (PX,XY) = ±oo. 3-61. If now we take three points O, E, Z7and attach to them the numbers or parameters o, i, ± oo, we may define the para- meter of any point P as the value of the cross-ratio (PE, OCT) as this is consistent with the values just determined, for (EE,OU) = i, (OE,OU) = o, and (UE,OU) = (EU, UO) = ± oo. We can now identify the numerical value of the geometrical cross-ratio with that of the four parameters as previously defined (3-3)- m] PROJECTIVE COORDINATES 59 Let P, P', Q, Q' be four points with parameters A, A', /*, fi\ so that (PE,OU)=X, (FE,OU)=X, (QE,OU) = ih (Q'E,OU)=n'. Then - = (PE, OU) x (EQ, OU) = (PQ, OU), ** A whence i-- = (PO, QU); and similarly i - - = (P'O, Q U). /* Hence ^-(PO, QU) x (OF, QU)=(PP', QU)=(QU, ppy, and similarly 4^=(pp', fftn-iffu, ppy, whence finally ^J^=(.M,w')=(Qu,pnx(UQ\pn = (QQ',PP') = (PP',QQ'). 3-62. We have not yet, however, actually determined the parameter of any point except the arbitrarily assumed points O, E, U. The harmonic or quadrilateral construction enables us to deter- mine the point corresponding to the parameter — i. For if {PQ,XY)a {P'Q',X'Y) -Ro.(QP,XY) then since p (PQ,XY)x(QP,XY) = i, and since P and Q, and X and Y, are distinct, it follows that {PQ, XY)= - 1. Hence if (PE, OU) is harmonic, the parameter of Pis —i. 3-63. Now, for the moment altering the notation, if we start with the three points P , P lt P m to which we attach the para- meters o, i, oo we can construct points corresponding to any 60 GENERAL HOMOGENEOUS OR [chap. rational values of the parameter by a repetition of the quadri- lateral construction alone. Thus, if (P P, PiPco) is harmonic, by 3-6 (ii) (PP lt P P CO ) = 2, and therefore P corresponds to the parameter 2 ; if we denote this point by P 2 we have similarly if (Pi ,P,P 2 , Poo) is harmonic then (PP X , P P X ) = 3, and proceeding in this way we get the points P , P x , P 2 , . . ., P„ , . . . corresponding to all the positive integers, with the general relation \Pn-l "o+l 1 PnPco) = — 1 . Again, if (P P lt PP W ) = - 1, then (PP lt P P=o) = h and so P is Pj. Similarly if (P P if PP 1 )=-i, then P is Pj, and pro- ceeding in this way we obtain the points which correspond to the fractional values i/«, with the general iterative relation (-M)Pl/n> Plhn+l)Pllln-l))= — I. Further, (P ( „-i)/ m P ( „ + i,/ m , P„/ m Poo) = - 1, hence we obtain all the positive fractions n/m ; and lastly (■»0-» 00 > PfiP-n) = "~ Ii hence we obtain the corresponding negative numbers. From the three points P , P 1( Pa, we thus obtain points corre- sponding to any rational value of the parameter. This construc- tion is called the Mobius Net or net of rationality. We shall dismiss the case of irrational values by remarking that any irrational number can be expressed as the limit of a sequence of rational numbers. 3-64. Projective coordinates in a plane and in space. We have defined the projective coordinate of a point P on a line, with reference to the base-points A, B and unit-point E, as the cross-ratio (PE, AB), and as homogeneous coordinates we take two numbers *, y whose ratio x/y = (PE,AB). The extensions to two and three dimensions are precisely similar to one another. In a plane the position of a point is determined by the ratios of three numbers x, y, z (not all zero) ; any multiple of these numbers kx, ky, kz represent the same point, for all values of k (not zero). We refer to this shortly as the point (x). A straight m] PROJECTIVE COORDINATES 61 line is determined by two points fa), fa), and on it a point has one degree of freedom and can be determined by the ratio of two homogeneous parameters A, p.. We assume that the coordinates of any point on the line are represented by px^Xxi + px^,, py=Xy 1 + f iy 2 , pZ = )tiS 1 + pJS 2 , where p is a factor of proportionality. Eliminating p, A, p. be- tween these three equations we obtain an equation in x, y, z, homogeneous and of the first degree. Hence a straight line is represented by a linear homogeneous equation. The three equa- tions x=o,y = o, z=o represent three straight lines which form a triangle, the triangle of reference or fundamental triangle ABC. It is essential that these three lines should have no common point, for if they had then the equation lx + my + nz=o would represent a line passing through this point and could not re- present an arbitrary line. 3-65. To complete the determination of the coordinates we attach to one assigned point, the unit-point E, the coordinates We can show now that every point has a definite set of co- ordinates. Let P=[x', y', z'] be any point, and let the line PE cut the sides of the triangle of reference in L, M, N. PE is re- presented by the parametric equations px=x' + t, py=y' + t, pz=z' + t, and the parameters of P, E, L, M, N are o, oo, -*', -/, -z'. T^he cross-ratio (PE,MN) = (o, oo ; -/, -z')=y'/z', and (PE, LN)=x'jz'. Hence the ratios of the coordinates are determined in terms of certain cross-ratios. 62 GENERAL HOMOGENEOUS OR [chap. 3-66. Similarly in three dimensions a point is represented by the ratios of four homogeneous coordinates [x, y, z, to], A plane is determined by three points fa), fa), (x 3 ), and is represented by parametric equations px=Xx 1 +fix i +vx 3 , etc., or by a homogeneous linear equation in x, y, z, w. The four equations x=o, y=o, z=o, w = o determine the tetrahedron of reference. If E=[i, i, i, i] is the unit-point and EP cuts the fundamental planes in L, M, N, K the ratios of the coordinates are determined by cross-ratios, viz. x'lw' = (PE,LK), etc. 3-67. Analytically, there is no difficulty in extending this process to a system of five or more homogeneous coordinates. Generally, a point is represented by the ratios of n + 1 homo- geneous coordinates [x , x t , ..., x„]. A line is determined by two points (a), (b), and is represented by parametric equations px i =\a i + fibfi a plane is determined by three points (a), (b), (c), and is re- presented by parametric equations px t ='Xa i +iib i -\-vc i . Then a region of three dimensions, solid, or flat space, is de- termined by four points, and is represented by parametric equa- tions involving three parameters or the ratios of four homo- geneous parameters. Similarly in the »-dimensional region S„ there are flat regions of all dimensions up to n — i. The figure formed of the determining points, triangle, tetrahedron, etc., is called in general a simplex. A single linear homogeneous equa- tion in the n+i coordinates represents a flat space of n— i dimensions or (n — i)-flat. This, the space of highest dimensions in the containing space, is also called a prime. Two equations represent an (n — 2)-flat, which is therefore the intersection of two (»— i)-nats, and so on. We shall have occasion later to make use of relations in higher space in the representation of ordinary spatial relations. ni] PROJECTIVE COORDINATES 63 3-71. We have defined the cross-ratio of four collinear points, and shown that it is equal to the cross-ratio of the parameters of the four points. For the other one-dimensional forms we have similar relations. Thus for a plane pencil of lines we define the cross-ratio as equal to that of four collinear points one on each line. If we take the vertex of the pencil as A = [1, o, o] and the transversal as the line x=o, the lines are represented by equa- tions y= \z, y=X'z, y=y^, y=n'z, and the points by [o, A, 1], etc. The parameters of the points are A, A', fi, /*', and the cross- ratio of the four points, which is equal to that of the four lines, is equal to that of the four parameters (AA', /u/*') which are also the parameters of the four lines. Similarly for four planes through a line the cross-ratio is equal to that of the four lines of intersection with any plane, or of the four points of intersection with any line, and is equal to the cross- ratio of the parameters when the planes are represented by equa- tions of the form u — Xv = o. The fundamental principle at the basis of these determinations is that if two one-dimensional systems are in (1, 1) corre- spondence, the cross-ratio of four elements of the one system is equal to that of the corresponding four elements of the other system. 3-72. Polar plane of a point with regard to a tetrahedron. As an example of the use of the projective coordinates we shall prove the following projective theorem. ABCD is a tetrahedron, and P any point. Let AP cut BCD in P lt and similarly define the points P 2 , P 3 , P t . The plane P 2 P s P t cuts the plane BCD in a line l t ; and similarly we define the lines 4, l s , / 4 . These four lines lie in one plane which is called the polar plane of P with regard to the tetrahedron. Let P=[X, Y, Z, W], then P lS [o, Y, Z, W]. The plane P,P»P* is = 0, X y z to X Z W X Y W X Y z 64 GENERAL HOMOGENEOUS OR [chap. and this cuts x=o where ZWy+WYz+YZzo = o, i.e. where y/Y+z/Z+w/W=o, i.e. where x/X+y/Y+z/Z+wlW=o. The symmetry of this equation shows that the other three lines also lie in it. 3'81. Transition from projective to metrical geometry. The system of coordinates which has been established is a purely projective one and makes no use of measurement. Distances and angles are metrical functions and are foreign to projective geometry. When the processes of projection are applied in euclidean geometry we find that parallel lines are projected into concurrent lines, which intersect on the "vanishing line". Parallelism and concurrency become merged in the same idea, and this is facilitated by the use of the phrase ' ' point at infinity ' '. The line corresponding to the vanishing line is the "line at infinity". In euclidean geometry there is one point at infinity on each line, one line at infinity in each plane. Considering now lines through a point O, y=iix, there are two lines through O such that the " angle " which they determine with any line of the pencil is independent of fi. If one of these lines is y= he we have by the ordinary formula in rectangular cartesian coordinates tan0=^ = 'i-*, A,+ I > i+A/x, A ( i+Xfi\' and this is independent of /z. if A 2 = — i and therefore A= + i. These two lines are called the absolute lines through O. If (i = tan 6 and p' = tan 6' are the parameters of any two lines through O, the cross-ratio of this pair and the two absolute lines is , , . _ tan0-t. tan0' — i Now tanfl-i _ _ cos 9+i sin 9 = _ „ tan0 + j cos0 — isin0 Hence (fi, p! ; i, -i) = e ^^-^\ and therefore 6' - 9 = | log (/*,/*' ; i, - i). in] PROJECTIVE COORDINATES 65 This formula, due to Laguerre, expresses the angle between two lines in terms of a cross-ratio. We have therefore a means of re- ducing angular measurements to projective relations. There is a marked difference between the pencil of lines and the range of points, for in the latter there is only one special element, the point at infinity, while in the former there are two, the two absolute lines. We are led therefore to consider the metrical geometry on a line as specialised by the coalescing of two points. When we replace the single point at infinity by two, we obtain the more general non-euclidean geometry of which euclidean geometry is a limiting case. 3-82. Distance in metrical geometry of one dimension. In the general metrical geometry we begin by assuming that on any line there are two special points, X, Y, the points at in- finity. Distance must be defined so that the distance of any finite point from either X or Y is infinite, and, if P, Q, R are three points on a line, PQ + QR=PR. We have three cross- ratios (PQ, XY), (QR, XY) and {PR, XY); and (PQ, XY) . (QR, XY) = (PR, XY). Hence log(PQ, XY) + log(QR, XY)=log(PR, XY). The function c log(PQ, XY), where c is some constant, therefore satisfies the required con- ditions, since (PX, XY)=co, (XQ, XY)=o, and the logarithm of each of these is infinite*. • To show that this is the only expression which can represent the distance we observe first that the distance OP is some function of the cross-ratio (OP, XY)=x, say (OP)=f (x). Let Q be another point on the line OP, and let (OQ, XY)=y. Then since (OP, XY).(PQ, XY)=(OQ, XY), (PQ, XY)=y/x. Now (OP)+(PQ)=(OQ), therefore / (y/x)=J (y)—f (x). Differentiating partially with respect to * and y, we have ' ™-5rg) -d f<*=ir(*). hence */' (x) =yf (y)=c, say. Therefore / (je) = (t dx = c\ogx + C. But (00)=o and (OO, XY)= 1, therefore /(i)=o and C=o. 66 GENERAL HOMOGENEOUS OR [chap. In euclidean geometry the two points X, Y coincide ; (PQ, XY) becomes = i and its logarithm is zero. The expression for the distance can, however, be obtained as a finite limiting expression by supposing that, as Y-* X, c -*■ oo in some way. Let the parameters of P, Q, X and Y be p, q, oo and « _1 where e ->■ o. Then (PQ, ZF)=|^; = (I -qe)(l +/*)= I HP-!)*, neglecting e 2 . Then \og(PQ,XY) = {p-q)e. Let Lim ce= — i, then we obtain distance (PQ) = q —p, and, if O is the point corresponding to the parameter o, the distance (OP) =p. In euclidean geometry then the metrical expression for the cross-ratio of four points (PQ RS) = (pq rs)= P ^l^ -g®,m (*V>"*) U>Q>rs) p _ s / q _ s (PS)/(QS)' 3-83. Distance in two dimensions. In two dimensions the locus of points at infinity is a curve of the second order or conic, and is represented by an equation of the second degree in the coordinates. In euclidean geometry, since the two points at infinity on any line coincide, the conic degenerates to two coincident lines. Take this line as ar=o and Fig. 19 two conjugate lines through its pole O as the other sides of the triangle of reference, then, with proper choice of unit-point, the equation of the conic can be written -e*(x 2 +y 2 ) + z* = o, in] PROJECTIVE COORDINATES 67 where e -»■ o. Let P= [x' t y', z'] be any point and let OP cut the conic in U and V. Then dist. (OP) =clog(OP,UV). Parametric equations of OP are px=x', py=y', pz=z' + t. Substituting in the equation of the conic we have t a + 2z't - e 2 (*' a +/ a ) + 2f' a = o. The parameters of O, P, U, V are 00, o, t lt t 2 , where t lt t a are the roots of this quadratic equation. The cross-ratio (OP, UV)=(ao o, f 1 f 2 ) = f 2 /f 1 . Write 6 a (^' a +y 2 )=i? a , *u h z'+R then t^R' and log(OP, UV) = log(i+Rlz')-log(i-Rlz') = 2Rlz'. Choose c so that Lim 2ce = 1, then dist. (OP) = Lim 2ce(*' 2 +/ 2 )*/s' «-*o where x=x'jz', y=y'/z'. 3-84. The absolute. For angles, since there are two special or absolute lines through each point, the assemblage of absolute lines is a curve of the second class or conic-envelope. The angle between two lines is zero only in two cases : either the lines themselves coincide or the two absolute lines through their point of intersection coincide. Identifying the latter case with the case of parallelism, when the point of intersection is a point at infinity, we find that the conic- locus of points at infinity and the conic-envelope of absolute lines form one and the same figure. This is called the Absolute. In euclidean geometry when the conic-locus degenerates to two coincident straight lines (the line at infinity) the conic-envelope becomes a pair of imaginary points on this line (the circular S-a 68 GENERAL HOMOGENEOUS OR [chap. points at infinity). In euclidean geometry of three dimensions we shall find that the absolute figure is a pair of coincident planes (the plane at infinity) and a conic in this plane (the circle at infinity). 3-85. Metrical coordinates. For metrical geometry the most convenient coordinates are rectangular cartesians, but a system based, like projective coordinates, on a tetrahedron of reference, is sometimes useful. We may derive from the projective system the metrical meanings to be attached to the coordinates. Let P= [x, y, z, zv], E= [i, i, i, i], and let PE cut the funda- mental planes x=o, etc., in L lt L 2 , L 3 , L 4 . Then (3*66) using the metrical value of the cross-ratio. Draw PP t and EE± perpendicular to the plane x=o, and PP t and EE± perpendicular to the plane 10=0. Then PLi_PPi PL i _PP tt EL t EES ELi EE t ' „ * PPt/PP* Hence w = mjm; and therefore U PP X .PPi Fig. 20 z *EE 3 ' "EES """EE^ where k is some constant ; and similarly h PP* Hence the coordinates are certain multiples of the distances of P from the fundamental planes. 3-851. When the unit-point E is the centre of the inscribed sphere of the tetrahedron, so that EE 1 =EE 2 =EE s =EE l , the coordinates x, y, z, w are proportional to the distances of P from the fundamental planes. These are analogous to trilinear coordinates in a plane and may be called quadriplanar co- ordinates. m] PROJECTIVE COORDINATES 69 3-852. If E is the centroid of the tetrahedron, and A lt A it A 3 , A t denote the areas of the faces, A^EE^At.EE^Az.EE^Ai.EEi. Then x=k'.PP 1 .A 1 , etc., and the coordinates are proportional to the volumes of the tetra- hedra PDBC, PDCA, PDAB, PABC. These are analogous to areal coordinates, and may be called volume-coordinates. 3-853. If masses m 1 ,?ri i ,m 3 ,m 1 are placed at the vertices and if P is the centre of mass, then if d and p denote the distances of P and A from the plane BCD, we have . „ , vol. PDBC d nu ^dZm, and -^3^-^. Hence m u wig, m s , m t are proportional to the volume-coordinates. From this point of view they are called barycentric coordinates. 3-86. In the theorem of 3-72 if P is the centroid of the tetra- hedron, the planes P 2 P 3 P t , etc., are parallel to the corresponding faces of the tetrahedron, hence the polar plane of the centroid is the plane at infinity. Hence in barycentric coordinates, the centroid being [1, 1,1,1] the equation of the plane at infinity is x+y+z+zo=o. It is often most convenient to specify the particular system of metrical coordinates by the equation of the plane at infinity. Ex. Show that if /, m, n, p represent the volumes of the tetrahedra EDBC, EDCA, EDAB, EABC, E being the unit-point, the equation of the plane at infinity is Ix + my + nz +pw = o. 3-861. General homogeneous coordinates, referred to a fundamental tetrahedron, are not usually the most convenient for metrical geometry, but are used mostly in projective geo- metry. The simplest metrical system is obtained by taking the plane at infinity itself as one of the fundamental planes w=o, and this leads at once to cartesian coordinates, the opposite vertex of the tetrahedron being the origin, and the edges through that point the coordinate-axes. 70 GENERAL HOMOGENEOUS OR [chap. 3-91. Analytical representation of a homography. The general homography on a line is represented by a linear transformation. The parameters t, t' of corresponding points P, P' are connected by a bilinear equation att' + bt + ct' + d=o. The double-points of the homography are then represented by the roots of the quadratic at*+(b + c)t+d=o. The homography is an involution if the equation is symmetrical in t, t', i.e. if b=c. 3-92. An involution is determined by two pairs of points. Let the parameters of the two pairs be the roots of the quadratic equations a 1 t t +2h 1 t+b 1 = o, If the double-points are the roots of the quadratic At*+2Ht+B=o, then, since the double-points are harmonic conjugates with re- gard to each pair, we have (3-321) b 1 A-2h 1 H+a 1 B = o, and b !i A — 2h i H+a i B = o. These two equations determine uniquely the ratios A-.zH: B=(a 1 h 2 -a 2 h 1 ) : (a^-a^) : (^A-A&i)- The condition that the double-points should be real is (fl^ - Ojs^) 2 - 4(«i hi - a 2 h^j (hJz -h 2 b 1 )> o, which reduces to C 12 2 — C n C& > o. If the two pairs are both real this is the condition that their cross-ratio should be positive (3-325). If one or both of the pairs be imaginary the double-points must be real since in a harmonic range one pair at least must be real (3-322). Hence for an involution determined by two pairs 3-921. Ifbothpairs arereal, the involution is elliptic or hyperbolic according as the cross-ratio of the two pairs is negative or positive, in] PROJECTIVE COORDINATES 7r 3-922. If one pair at least is imaginary, the involution is hyperbolic. An elliptic involution contains no conjugate imaginary pairs. 3*93. Two involutions on the same line have a unique common pair of elements. This is proved in 3*92, considering the first two quadratics as determining the double-points of the two involutions, and the third the pair of common elements. Hence the common elements of two involutions are real if one at least of the involutions is elliptic; if both are hyperbolic, the common elements are real or imaginary according as the cross-ratio of the two pairs of double-points is positive or negative. 3 95. EXAMPLES. 1. P 1 P 2 P z P i is a skew quadrilateral, and a plane cuts the sides PtP 2 , etc., in the ratios k 12 : 1, etc. Prove that "12 "23 "34 ^41 = * • 2. A plane cuts the six edges of a tetrahedron A^A 2 A Z A^ in six points P^, etc., and Q 12 is the harmonic conjugate of P 12 with respect to A x and A 2 , etc. Show that the six planes Q X2 A 3 A^ etc., have a point in common. 3. A plane cuts the sides PiP 2 , etc., of a skew quadrilateral P 1 P 2 P 3 P l in points P 12 , etc., and Q 12 is the harmonic conjugate of P 12 with respect to P x and P 2 , etc. Show that Qi,Q 2 ,Q 3 , Q t are coplanar. 4. Show that the tetrahedron whose faces are y— z+zw=o, x—4%+w=o, —x+4.y+w=o, — zx +y+z=o is both circum- scribed and inscribed to the tetrahedron of reference. 5. Show that the tetrahedron whose vertices are [o, —b, c,p~\, [a, o, — c, q], [—a, b, o, r], [ap, bq, cr, o] is both inscribed and circumscribed to the tetrahedron of reference. 6. Show that the tetrahedron whose faces are — mry+nqz+w=o, lrx—npz+w=o, — lqx+mpy + a) = o, lx+my + nz = o is both inscribed and circumscribed to the tetrahedron of reference. 73 GENERAL HOMOGENEOUS OR [chap. 7. Show that the tetrahedron whose faces are —y + z +pzo= o, x— z+qw=o, —x+y+rw=o,px+qy+rz=o is both inscribed and circumscribed to the tetrahedron of reference. 8. Show that the product of the cross-ratios of the points in which four lines are cut by their two transversals is where the factors are the mutual moments of the lines taken in pairs. Consider the equation (m. i3 m u ) n + {m 31 m^ n + (m^m^Y = o, and show that it is true (i) for n=\ when the transversals coin- cide, (ii) for n = J when the four lines are tangents of a cubic curve. Give an interpretation for the case n = 1 . (Math. Trip. II, 1913.) 9. Examine the figure of two mutually inscribed tetrahedra ; and show that any one of the eight conditions (making a vertex of one lie on a face of the other) is a consequence of the rest. What plane theorem is obtained by taking an arbitrary plane section of the tetrahedra ? Show that a plane figure can be drawn in which AA', BB', CC are three lines, and the bisectors at A of the angles subtended by BB' and CC are the same; and similarly for all the other points. (Math. Trip. II, 1913.) 10. A set of collinear points P 1 ,P % ,P 3 ,...,P n are obtained by projecting from a point a set of collinear points which are spaced at equal intervals. Find the coordinates of P„ in terms of those of P x , Pi,P s , and find the limiting position of P„ when n is large. (Math. Trip. II, 1914.) . _ (n— 1) x 2 x 3 — 2W — z)x 3 x x + (n — 3) x 1 x i (n—i)x 1 — 2(n — 2)x 2 + (n — 2)X 3 1 1 . From a variable point P in one fixed plane a transversal is drawn to two fixed straight lines in space and produced to meet another fixed plane in P'. Find in the simplest form the relation connecting the positions of the points P, P' in their respective planes. If ABC, A'B'C be triangles in two different planes such that m] PROJECTIVE COORDINATES 73 BC passes through A', and B'C passes through A, and variable points P, P' in these planes be related by the fact that PP 1 intersects BB' and CC', find geometrically the locus of P 1 , (i) when P is on a straight line passing through A or B, (ii) when P is on BC or C.4, (iii) when P is on a conic circumscribed to ABC, (iv) when P is on any conic in the plane ABC. (Math. Trip. II, 1915.) Ans. Taking ABC and A'B'C as triangles of reference, P = [I, F.ZI.P'sfZ'.y'.Z'j.thenXX^yy'iZZ'^^rr. (i) A straight line through A' or B' respectively, (ii) The points A' and B' respectively, (iii) A straight line, (iv) A quartic curve with double-points at A', B\ C. 12. Show that it is possible to choose a tetrahedron of reference so that the vertices of a hexahedron, which is the projection of a parallelepiped, may have the coordinates (i) [+ 1, ± 1, ± 1, 1], (ii) [1, o, o, o], [o, 1, o, o], [o, o, 1, o], [0,0,0, 1], [-1,1,1, 1], [1, -1, 1,1], [1,1, -1,1], [1,1,1, -1]. CHAPTER IV THE SPHERE 4-1. A sphere is the locus of a point which is at a constant distance k from a fixed point, the centre. If the rectangular co- ordinates of the centre are [X, Y, Z] the equation of the sphere is (x-X) 2 +(y- Y) 2 +{z-Z) 2 = k 2 . This is an equation of the second degree and is characterised by two properties : (i) The coefficients of x 2 , y 2 , z 2 are all equal; (2) The coefficients of yz, zx, xy are all zero, i.e. there are no product terms. 4-11. The general equation of the second degree which satisfies these conditions may be written ax 2 + ay 2 + az 2 + zpx + zqy + zrz + d= o. If a^o we may write this in the form (* +p/a) 2 +(y+ qja) 2 +(z+ rja) 2 = (p 2 + q 2 + r 2 - ad)ja 2 , and comparing this with (4-1) we see that it represents a sphere with centre [-p/a, -qja, -r/a] and radius (p 2 +q 2 + r 2 -ad)i/a. The radius is real provided p 2 +q 2 +r 2 —ad>o. If p 2 +q 2 + r 2 -ad<o, the radius is imaginary, and we call it a virtual sphere. If p 2 +q 2 + r 2 = ad, the radius is zero, and we call it a point-sphere. 4-12. If a= o the equation reduces to zpx + zqy + zrz + d=o, which is no longer of the second degree and represents a plane. Now a locus whose equation is of the second degree has the geometrical property that it is cut by an arbitrary straight line in two points, while a plane is cut in only one point. The apparent discrepancy is explained when we use homogeneous coordinates. chap, iv] THE SPHERE 75 If we write x/w, yjw and z[zo for x, y and z, the equation of the sphere becomes ax 2 + ay 2 + a* 2 + zpxtv + zqyzo + zrzw + dw s = o, and when a—o we have a> (2p« + 2qy + zrz + dw) = o. The complete locus therefore consists of the plane 2px + 2qy + zrz +dw = o, together with the plane at infinity w=o. As a-+o the radius of the sphere ->-oo, and the centre tends to infinity. We may say roughly that the parts of the sphere in the neighbourhood of the plane flatten out on to this plane, While the farther parts of the sphere recede to infinity. 4-2. Power of a point with regard to a sphere. If P is a fixed point and PUV a variable line cutting a fixed sphere in U, V, it is easily seen by elementary geometry that the product PU.PV is constant; this constant is called the power of P with regard to the sphere. If k is the radius of the sphere, and d the distance of P from the centre, the power of P is d*-k*; or if P= [x, y, z] and the equation of the sphere is S=x 2 +y 2 +z a + 2px+zqy+2rz+c=o, ' then the power of P is equal to S. 4-21. S is positive or negative according as P is outside or inside the sphere, zero when P lies on the sphere. For a point- sphere with centre C it reduces to CP*. 4-22. As the sphere tends to a plane, the radius tending to infinity, the power of a point in general -*oo, but there is another quantity which remains finite in this case. Let PUV pass through the centre C, and let C tend to infinity while U remains fixed. Then 5= PU. PV= PU(PU+ 2k), and the ratio | = PU {^+ 2)+ 2PU. THE SPHERE [chap. as a-*-o 76 Analytically, if aS = a (x 2 +y 2 + z 2 ) + 2px + zqy + zrz + d, k=(p 2 +q i +r i -ad)l/a. T , S_ a(x 2 +y 2 +z 2 ) + 2px+2qy+2rz+d k~ (p2 +q 2 +r *-ad)i 2px + 2qy + 2rz + d "*" (pt + q 2 + r i)i = twice the distance of P from the plane. 4-3. A sphere is completely determined by four points. Let x 2 +y 2 + z 2 + 2px + 2qy+2rz + d=o be the equation of the sphere through the four points («j), (# 2 ), (*s)> (*«)• Then x 2 +yi + *i 2 + 2/>»i + 2qy t + 2rz t + d=o and three other similar equations. Eliminating p, q, r and d we have x 2 +y 2 +z 2 x 1 2 +y 1 2 +z 1 2 x y xi yi z *1 =0 x^+y^ + Zt 2 x t y x z t 1 as the equation of the sphere through the four points. 4-31. The condition that the sphere should pass through five given points is found by substituting in this equation the co- ordinates of the fifth point (x 8 ). This condition may be trans- formed as follows. We may write it in either of the forms: x^+y^+Zj 2 x r ji z x 1 =0, x & 2 +yi 2 +z s 2 x & y 6 z 6 1 1 — 2x t —2y t —2z t x^+y^+Zj 2 or =0. I -2X 6 -2% -2*5 x 5 2 +y 6 2 +z 5 2 Multiply together these two determinants by rows. Taking row i of the first determinant with row j of the second we get the element x i 2 +y i 2 +z t 2 — 2x i x i —2y i y i — 2z i z i +x i 2 +y i 2 +z i 2 = (*, - x,) 2 + (y t -y,)*+ (*, - z,) 2 - d ti 2 , iv] THE SPHERE 77 where d ti denotes the distance between the points (*<) and (x t ), d u being = o. Hence the condition that five points should lie on a sphere is represented by o _ 4i 2 o // 2 // 2 "31 "32 "41 *M2 // 2 // 2 rf, 2 <£.* d,. 2 d^ // 2 // 2 "<u "as 14 •*45 d*? =0. The corresponding relation in two dimensions, or the condition that four points should lie on a circle, viz. «v d,S dn 2 = 0, o d^ 2 o d^ 2 dy? d ai 2 d S2 2 o d M 2 d a 2 d^ d a 2 o is equivalent to d u d iA ±i a d u ±d a d t ^o t and represents the Theorem of Ptolemy. 4-41. A circle is the intersection of a sphere and a plane. The equations of a circle can therefore be given by the equations of a sphere and a plane together. Ex. 1. Find the equations of the circle through the points [a, o, o], [o, b, o], [o, o, c]. The equation of the plane through these points is x/a+ylb+z/c^i. Let the equation of a sphere through the three points be x 2 +y 2 +z 2 + 2px + 2qy + 2rz+d=o. Tnen a 2 + 2pa + d=o, b 2 + 2qb + d=o, c 2 + 2rc + d=o. We may give d any value, say o, and then determine 2p=—a, 2q=—b, 2r=—c. Hence the equations of the circle are xla+ylb+zjc=i, x 2 +y 2 +z 2 = ax + by+cz. 78 THE SPHERE [chap. Ex. 2. Find the equations of the circle with centre [X, Y, Z], radius k, and axis (the line through the centre perpendicular to its plane) in the direction [/, m, n] . Ans. {x-Xf + {y-Yf + {z-Zf = k\ Hx-X) + m(y- Y) + n (z-Z) = o. 4-42. Intersection of two or more spheres. 4-421. Consider the two spheres S =sx 2 +y 2 +z 2 +2px+2qy+2rz+d=o, S' = a 2 +y 2 + z 2 + 2p'x + 2q'y + 2r'z +d'=o. The coordinates of all the points of intersection satisfy both of these equations and therefore also satisfy the equation S-S' = 2{p-p')x+2(q-q')y+2(r-r')z+(d-d')=o. The curve of intersection is therefore a circle lying in this plane. This plane is called the radical plane of the two spheres, and is the locus of points which have the same power with respect to the two spheres ; it is perpendicular to the line joining the centres. 4-422. Three spheres S lt S 2 , S 3 have three radical planes when taken in pairs. Their equations may be written Since (5 2 -5 3 ) + (5 s -5 1 ) + (5 I -5 !! ) = o, the three planes have a line in common. This line is called the radical axis of the three spheres. 4-423. Similarly four spheres have six radical planes and four radical axes, and these planes and axes all pass through one point which is called the radical centre of the four spheres. 4-43. Angle of intersection of two spheres. The angle of intersection of two spheres at a common point is the angle between the tangent-planes to the spheres at that point, and, as the tangent-planes are perpendicular to the radii, it is equal to the angle between the radii. If C, C are the centres, and P, P' two common points, the triangles CC'P and CC'P' are congruent, hence at all common points the angle of intersection is the same. If this angle is a right angle the spheres are said to be orthogonal. iv] THE SPHERE 79 4-431. Condition that two spheres should be orthogonal. The geometrical condition is CP i +C'P a = CC'\ Hence (p-py+iq-q'y+ir-r'y-^+qt+rt-d) + (p' 2 + q'* + r'*-d'), i.e. 2pp' + 2qq' + 2rr'-(d+d') = o. The left-hand side of this equation is the bilinear symmetrical expression in p, q, r, d and p', q', r', d' which reduces to 2(p a +? a +r 2 -<*) when the spheres coincide. If is the angle of intersection in the general case CC'2 = CP* + C'P* - zCP . C'P cos e. Hence 2kk' cos 6 = 2pp' + 2qq' + 2rr' — (d+d'). Ex. A point-sphere is self-orthogonal. 4-432. Sphere orthogonal to four given spheres. Since the relation of orthogonality is linear in the coefficients of each sphere, four such relations connecting the coefficients of a sphere will uniquely determine it. Since the tangents from the centre of the orthogonal sphere to each of the four spheres are also its radii, the centre has the same power with respect to each of the four spheres and is therefore the radical centre. The orthogonal sphere will be real unless the radical centre lies within each of the given spheres. If S i =x*+y 2 +z i +2p i x+2q i y+2r i z+d i = o (i=i,z, 3, 4) represent the given spheres, and S= x 2 +y 2 + z* + 2px + zqy + zrz + d= o their orthogonal sphere, we have 2p i p + 2q i q+2r i r—d-d i = o (i=i, 2, 3, 4). The equation of the orthogonal sphere is obtained by eliminating p, q t r, d between these five equations. 4-5. Pole and polar with respect to a sphere. Let P= [x', y', z'~\ be a fixed point, and draw any line through P cutting the sphere in U, V. Then the locus of Q = [x, y, z], the harmonic conjugate of P with respect to U, V, is a plane, which is called the polar plane of P with respect to the sphere. Let the 80 THE SPHERE [chap. position-ratio of [/with respect toP, Q be A. Then the coordinates of E/are(Ax' + ;x;)/(A+i), etc. Substituting in the equation of the sphere, Ssx i +y z +z 2 + 2px+2qy + 2rz+d=o, we have (he' + *) a + (A/ +y)* + (As' + z)* + 2 {p (Xx' + x) + q(\y'+y) + r(\z'+z)}(\+i) + d(\+iy = o, or, rearranging, S'X i +2{xx'+yy'+zz'+p(x+x')+q(y+y') +r(z+z') + d}X+S=o. This is a quadratic in A, the roots of which, A x and Aj, are the position-ratios of U and V. If (UV, PQ) is harmonic, A x = — Aa, hence xx'+yy'+zz'+p(x+x')+q(y+y')+r(z+z') + d=o, or (x' +p)x+(y' +q)y+(z' +r)z+(px' +qy' +rz' +d)=o. This is the equation of the polar plane of [*', y', z'], which is therefore perpendicular to the line joining P= [x', y', z'] to the centre [— p, —q, —r\. When P lies on the surface the polar- plane passes through P and becomes the tangent-plane at P. With homogeneous coordinates the equation of the polar may be written in the form dS BS , 3S , BS x M + ydj' +2 d? +w M =0 - 4*51. If the spheres 5 X and 5 2 are orthogonal the polar plane of any point P on S t with respect to S 2 passes through the other end of the diameter of S x through P. Let S 1 = x 2 +y 2 +z*-k 2 =o, S 2 =x 2 +y 2 +z 2 +2px+2qy+2rz+k 2 =o. Let P= [x\ y, ar'] be any point on S x , so that x'*+y' 2 +z' 2 =k 2 . Its polar plane with respect to 5a is x'x +y'y+z'z+p(x+x')+q (y +y') + r(z+ 2') + k 2 = o, and this equation is satisfied by [x,y,z] = [-x', -y, -**]. iv] THE SPHERE 81 If Si, S 2 , S a , S t are four given spheres, their orthogonal sphere is therefore the locus of points P whose polar planes pass through a common point, the other end of the diameter of the orthogonal sphere through P. Hence the equation of the ortho- gonal sphere is dSj. dSj, 35i dS x dx dy 32 dw dS 2 &s 2 dS 2 dS_ z dx dy dz dw dSs dS, dS 3 d_S 3 dx dy dz dw as 4 85 4 dS t dSt dx dy dz dw This determinant is called the Jacobian of the four homogeneous functions S Xt S 2 , S 3 , S t , and the locus is called the Jacobian locus of the four spheres. It appears to be of the fourth degree, but a> 2 is a factor*, hence the complete Jacobian consists of the orthogonal sphere together with the plane at infinity taken twice. 4-6. Linear systems of spheres. 4-61. If Si, S z are two spheres, Si+XS^o represents, for all values of A, a sphere through their circle of intersection. For A = — i it reduces to the radical plane of the two spheres, and any two spheres of the system have the same radical plane. This system is called a pencil or linear one-parameter system of spheres ; it is called also a coaxial system. Writing the equation in full we have ( i+ A) (*« +y* + z*) + 2 (ft + Xp 2 ) x + 2 ( ft + Xq 2 )y + 2(r 1 +Xr 2 )z+(d 1 +Xd i )=o. Hence the homogeneous coordinates of the centre are |>i+Ap 2 , ft+Aft, ri+\r 2 , _(i+A)], • Putting ro= o the first three columns of the determinant become identical, except for a factor, hence io* is a factor. Geometrically, the polar of a point at infinity is the diametral plane perpendicular to the given direction. Hence the plane at infinity is part of the Jacobian locus since the polars of any given point at infinity are parallel and have a line at infinity in common. 8a THE SPHERE [chap. and the locus of the centre is a straight line perpendicular to the radical plane. Taking the radical plane as the plane of yz and the line of centres as axis of a: we have q 1 = o = q i , r 1 = o = r i , d 1 = d i = k, say. Then putting (ft + Aft)/( i + A) = - /x, the equation of the system becomes *»+y»+*»-a/x*+*=o, or (x-p) i +y*+z*=ii.*-k. If k>o the radius of the sphere becomes zero when fi— ±y/k. Hence in this case the system contains two point-spheres ; these are called the limiting-points of the system. In this case the radical plane cuts the spheres in a virtual circle. If k < o there are no real point-spheres, the minimum radius, for /i = o, being V^-k; and the common circle of the system is real. If S is a sphere cutting orthogonally two spheres of the system, so that 2ppi + 2?ft + 2rri =d+d u zppi + 2qq 2 + 2rr 2 = d+d. it then 2p(p 1 +Xp 2 ) + zq(q 1 +\q i ) + 2r(r 1 +h' a ) = (i +$$d+(d 1 +\d i ),
and therefore S cuts orthogonally every sphere of the system.

4-62. If S cuts orthogonally the sphere
x i +y* + z i -2Xx+k = o,
we have zXp + d+k = o,

which is satisfied identically if p=o and d= — k. Hence the
equation of a sphere cutting orthogonally every sphere of the
one-parameter system is

# a + j 2 + z 2 — 2fiy — zvz — k = o,
which represents a linear two-parameter system. The spheres of
this system have a common radical axis y = o, z = o, and pass
through two fixed points ( ±\/^» °» °) which are real when k > o,
i.e. when the common circle of the first system is virtual. If
k < o, the common points are imaginary, but there is a real locus
of point-spheres. Writing the equation in the form
x* + (y-n) 2 + {z-v)* = [ JL i + v i + k,

iv] THE SPHERE 83

the radius =0 when fi 2 +v 2 = -k. Hence the locus of point-
spheres is the common circle of the first system.
If S lt S 2 , S 3 are three spheres, the equation
S t + XS 2 + fiS 3 = o
represents a linear two-parameter system, which is thus de-
termined by three spheres. Any two spheres of the system
determine a pencil of spheres which is contained in the two-
parameter system and the limiting-points of the pencil are
point-spheres of both systems. Hence in order that the two-
parameter system should have imaginary point-spheres every
pair of spheres of the system must have real intersection ; all the
spheres then pass through two real common points. If any one
pair of spheres have imaginary intersection the one-parameter
system determined by these has real limiting-points and the
two-parameter system has a real circle of point-spheres.

4-63. Lastly, if S ly S 2 , S s , 5 4 are four spheres, the equation
S 1 +XS 2 + fiS a +vSi=o
represents a linear three-parameter system. There is one sphere
S which cuts the four spheres orthogonally, and then every
sphere of the system will cut S orthogonally. A linear three-
parameter system is thus a system cutting a fixed sphere ortho-
gonally. The system has a common radical centre, the centre of
the orthogonal sphere, and this sphere is the locus of point-
spheres of the system. If the equation of the orthogonal
sphere is x 2 +y 2 +z 2 = k

the equation of a sphere cutting this orthogonally is
x 2 + y 2 + z 2 + zXx + 2/j.y + zvz + k = o.

Ex. 1. Prove that the condition that the sphere 5 X should cut the
sphere S 2 in a great circle is

2 (PiPi + ?i? 2 + r^z) -di-di = zk£.

Ex. 2. If the sphere S cuts orthogonally the sphere x 2 +y 2 +z 2 = k,
show that it cuts the sphere x 2 + v 2 + z 2 + k = o in a great circle.

Ex. 3. If the common orthogonal sphere of a three-parameter
system is virtual, show that every sphere of the system cuts a certain
fixed sphere in great circles.

6-2

84 THE SPHERE [chap.

4-64. If the coefficients of the equation of a sphere satisfy an
equation of the first degree a linear system of spheres is deter-
mined. Let the coefficients/), q, r, d be connected by the equation

Ap + Bq + Cr + Dd+ E = o.
Then, comparing this with the equation

zp'p + zq'q + zr'r — d—d' = o,
we see that the general linear equation connecting the coefficients
expresses that the sphere cuts orthogonally the fixed sphere

D(x 2 +y 2 +z 2 )-Ax-By-Cz+E=o.
A single equation thus represents a three-parameter system. A
sphere in general has four degrees of freedom. Two equations de-
termine a two-parameter system, three equations a one-parameter
system, while four equations determine the sphere completely.

4-7. Inversion in a sphere.

Let S be a fixed sphere with centre O and radius k, and P any
point. Then if P' lies on OP and OP.OP' = k 2 , P' is called the
inverse of P with respect to the given sphere.

Let the equation of the fixed sphere be
x 2 +y 2 +z 2 =k 2 ,
and P= [x, y, z], P' = [x', y', z'], then

x y z
and (x*+y*+z 2 )(x' !i +y' !i +z'*)=k*:

x' y z' k 2 _ x' i +y' i + z' i

HenCe x~y~z~x 2 +y 2 + z 2 k 2

These are the equations of the transformation of inversion.
4-71. The inverse of a sphere is in general a sphere.
The equation

x 2 + v 2 + z 2 + 2px + zqy + zrz + d= o
becomes £4

k* px' + qy' + rz\ 2 , j_

T 2 !^ 2 * 2 x' 2 +y' 2 +z' 2,i +a ~°'

x'z+y'2+z' 2 x' 2 +y"'
i.e. d(x' 2 +y' 2 + z'*) + zk 2 (px' + qy' + rz') + k i =o,

which represents a sphere with centre

[-pk 2 /d, -qk 2 /d, -rk 2 /d]
and radius = k 2 (p 2 + q 2 + r 2 - d)ijd.

iv] THE SPHERE 85

If d=o, i.e. if the given sphere passes through the origin, the

inverse is a plane p x > +q y + rz ' + ^=o,

which is perpendicular to the line joining O to the centre

[~P> — 1> ~ r ] °f the sphere.
The inverse of a circle, which is the intersection of two spheres,

is again a circle.

4-72. Invariance of angles under inversion.

Let U t and Z7 2 denote two surfaces and P a point on their
curve of intersection, and let L x and L 2 denote the tangent-planes
at P. The angle between the surfaces is equal to the dihedral
angle between these planes. The inverses of the two planes are
spheres S^ and S 2 ' passing through O and having their tangent-
planes at O parallel respectively to L x and Z, 2 . Also the inverse
surfaces U t ' and E/ 2 ' into which t^ and U 2 are transformed
touch Si and S 2 ' respectively at the inverse point P'. Hence the
angle between U^ and U 2 at P' is equal to the angle between the
spheres Sj,' and S 2 at f or at O, and is therefore equal to the
angle between L x and L 2 .

4-73. Stereographic projection.

If S is a sphere through O its inverse is a plane parallel to the
tangent-plane at O. The inverse of a point P on the sphere is the
point P' on the plane such that O, P, P' are collinear. Thus P'
is the projection of P on this fixed plane. This transformation
between a sphere and a plane is called stereographic projection,
and, as it is a particular case of inversion, circles on the sphere
are transformed into circles on the plane, and angles are unaltered.

Ex. If P = [x, y , z , zo\ is any point on the sphere x i +y 2 + (si- r) a = r 2
and [*', y'] the coordinates of its projection on z = o from the centre
[0,0, ar], show that ^=4**,

Xy = 4 r i y',

Xz = 2r(x'*+y'Z),

Aa>=a:' 2 +/ 2 + 4r 2 .

(The stereographic projection can be regarded as a plane representa-
tion of the sphere, and these equations represent freedom-equations
of the sphere with the parameters *', y' .)

86 THE SPHERE [chap.

4-74. Inversion is a birational, quadratic, point-transforma-
tion, i.e. points are transformed into points, a plane is trans-
formed into a locus of the second order, and the equations of
transformation are rational in both sets of coordinates, both
when (x, y, z) are expressed in terms of (x', y', z') and vice versa.
It is also said to be conformal since angles are unaltered ; and
further it is called a spherical transformation, since spheres are
transformed into spheres.

There are two other ways in which the transformation may be
defined, which bring out more particularly the two distinct pro-
perties (i) that it is birational, (2) that it transforms spheres into
spheres.

(1) Let S be a fixed sphere, centre O, and let P be any point.
Then the inverse of P is the point of intersection of OP with the
polar of P with respect to the sphere.

(2) With the same data, the sphere S together with the point-
sphere at P determine a linear one-parameter system of spheres,
and in this system there is a second point-sphere P' ; P' is the
inverse of P.

4-8. The circle at infinity.

The points at infinity on a sphere are of fundamental im-
portance in metrical geometry. Writing the equation of a sphere
homogeneously

x 2 + y 2 + z 2 + 2pxw + zqyw + zrzvi + dzv 2 = o,
we see that it cuts the plane at infinity w = o where
x 2 +y 2 + z 2 =o.

Hence all spheres cut the plane at infinity in the same curve.
This curve, whose equations are

w=o, x 2 + y 2 + z 2 = o,

is called the circle at infinity, or absolute circle.

Every surface of the second order which contains the circle
at infinity is a sphere, for, the general equation of the second
degree being

ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 + zfyz + 2gzx + zhxy

+ zpxw + zqyw + zrzw + dw 2 — o,

iv] THE SPHERE 87

if this is satisfied identically by w = o and x*+y s +z 2 =o, we
must have a=b=c andf=o=g=h.

Any plane cuts the circle at infinity in two points, the circular
points in that plane ; and every conic, in this plane, which passes
through these two circular points is a circle.

Since every plane section of a sphere passes through the
circular points in its plane it is a circle.

Since the pole of the plane at infinity is the centre of the
sphere, the circle at infinity is the locus of points of contact of
tangents from the centre of the sphere. The assemblage of these
tangents is the asymptotic cone of the sphere.

If the points at infinity P= [I, m, n, o] and J" = [/', m', ri, o]
are conjugate with regard to the circle at infinity,

//' + mm' + nn' = o,

hence the lines OP, OP' are at right angles. If the line p is the
polar of P with regard to the circle at infinity its equations are

w=o, lx+my+nz=o.

Hence the plane Op is perpendicular to the line OP.

4-81. Isotropic lines and planes.

A line which cuts the circle at infinity, called an isotropic or
absolute line, has certain peculiar properties. If the line

xjl=yjm = zjn
cuts the circle at infinity we have

P+m 2 +n i =o.

Hence the distance from the origin to any point of the line, and
hence the distance between any two points of the line, is zero.
If d is the angle between the (real) line x/l=y/m = z/n and the
isotropic line xjl' =yjm'=zjn',

4 20 s/ 2 .s/' 2 -(s/n 2
^ e= — pny ~- u

The angle is of course unreal, but the fact that the square of its
tangent is a real number independent of /, m, n is held to justify
the term isotropic.
An absolute line is orthogonal to itself since

ll+mm+nn=o.

88 THE SPHERE [chap.

The assemblage of absolute lines through a point form a
virtual cone. If the point is [X, Y, Z] the equation of the cone is

{x-X?+{y- Y)*+{z-Zf = o.

This is called the isotropic or absolute cone at the given point;
it is also a point-sphere.

Through every point there is an assemblage of planes tangent
to the absolute cone at the point; these are tangent-planes to
the circle at infinity and are called absolute planes. The plane
lx+my+nz=o is an absolute plane if / a + w 2 + » 2 =o. The line
x\l=y\m = z\n is orthogonal to this plane, and also lies in the
plane.

Consider two lines [l lf %, n t ] and (7 2 , m z , wj both lying in the
absolute plane [I, m, n], so that 2/4=0, 2/4=° and 2/ 3 =o.
Then we have

/: m : n^^m-ji^,— m^ttj) : («i4 — ^4) : (4«*a— 4' w i)>

and therefore

S(m 1 M 2 -»2 2 « 1 ) 2 = o= sz i 2 - s 4 2 -(S/ 1 4) 1! .

Hence if 6 is the angle between the two lines

cos0=S/ 1 4/vW.2/ 2 a )= ± i.

The angle between any two lines on an absolute plane is there-
fore zero or a multiple of tt. If, however, one of the lines is
absolute, 2/ 1 2 =o and therefore 244=0 also, so that 6 is in-
determinate.

The equations of the circle at infinity are not altered by any
transformation of coordinates so long as they remain rectangular.
This is the fundamental reason why we are able to express
metrical relations in terms of this figure.

By Laguerre's theorem (3"8i): The angle between two inter-
secting straight lines is ijz times the logarithm of the cross-ratio of
the pencil formed by the two lines and the two absolute lines through
their intersection and lying in their plane.

With the same algebra, y=fix and y=n'x represent two
planes passing through the axis of z, while y = ±ix are the two
absolute planes through their line of intersection, and we obtain
the result that the angle between two planes is ijz times the logarithm

iv] THE SPHERE 89

of the cross-ratio of the sheaf of planes formed by the two planes
and the two absolute planes through their line of intersection.

If the pencil is harmonic, so that the two lines are conjugate
with regard to the absolute lines, the cross-ratio =— 1, the
logarithm has the value iir, and the angle = \n.

If the two lines coincide, the cross-ratio = 1, the logarithm
= o, and the angle is zero. The same is true if the two absolute
lines coincide, i.e. when the two lines lie in an absolute plane.

If one line coincides with an absolute line, the cross-ratio

becomes zero or infinite, and the angle becomes infinite (and

imaginary). We already saw in this case that tan 6 = i. 6 is unreal;

let0 = a + *'/?, then

,, , .~. tana+JtanhiS

i=tan0=tan(a+i8)= ——r- — r-g.

v r ' i + jtanatanhp

If a and /} are real we have then

tanoc= — tanatanh/3
and tanh£=i.

Hence a=o and f3 is infinite.

4 9. EXAMPLES.

1. Show that the equation of the sphere whose diameter is the
join of the two points [x lt y 1} 2J and [x 2 , y 2 , z 2 ] is

(x - x t ) (x - x 2 ) + (y -y t ) (y -y 2 ) + (* - *0 (z-z 2 ) = o.

2. Find the equation of the sphere through the points :
(i) [1, -1, -1], [3, 3, 1], [-2, o, 5], [-1, 4, 4].

(ii) [o, 5, -2], [4, 1, 8], [-2, -3, a], [-4, i, o].
Ans. (i) x 2 +(y-i) 2 + (sr-2) 2 =i4.

(ii) (*-i) a +(:V-2) 2 +(*-3) 2 = 35-

3. Show that the eight points whose coordinates are x=a or
a',y = b or b', z = c or c' lie on one sphere.

4. Find the equation of the sphere circumscribing the tetra-
hedron whose planes are * = 0, y = o, z=o, lx+my+ nz+k= o.

Ans. x i +y i +z 2 +k(xll+ylm+zln) = o.

5. Find the equation of the sphere inscribed in the tetra-
hedron whose faces are (i) #=0, y=o, z=o, x+y+z=i,
(ii) y+z=o, z+x=o, x+y=o, x+y+z=i.

Ans.

(i) x 2 +y 2 +z 2 -2a(x+y+z) + 2a 2 =o, where (3+V3)«=i.
(ii) x 2 +y 2 +z 2 -2a(x+y+z) + a 2 =o, where (3+V6)a=i.

6. C is a fixed point on OZ and U, V are variable points on
OX, OY respectively. Find the locus of a point P when the
lines PU, PV, PC are mutually at right angles.

Ans. A sphere with centre C and passing through O.

7. Find the equations of the two spheres which pass through
the circle x 2 + y 2 + z 2 - 4* - y + $x + 1 2 = o, 2x + 3 y - jz = 1 o and touch the plane x— 2y+2z= 1. Ans. (*-i) , +(y+i) , + (ar-2) , =4 and (*-3) , +Cy-a) , + (*+S)*=i6. 8. Show that the two circles * — 2y + qz — 1 3 = o, x 2 +y 2 + z 2 = 9 and x+y+z+2 = o, x 2 +y 2 +z 2 +6y-6z+2i=:o lie on the same sphere, and verify that the line of intersection of their planes cuts the two circles in the same two points. 9. Find the equation of the sphere for which the circle 2x+3y+4z=8, x 2 +y 2 +z 2 +7y-2z+2=o is a great circle. Ans. (x-i) 2 + (y+ 2 ) 2 + (z-2) 2 = 4. 10. If the sphere x 2 + y 2 + z 2 + 2ux+ 2vy + 2zvz+ d= o cuts the sphere x 2 +y 2 +z 2 + zu'x + zv'y + 210' z +d'=o in a great circle, 2 (uu' + w' + zotv') — (d+ d') = 2r' 2 . 1 1 . Find the locus of a point such that the ratio of its distances from two given points is constant. Ans. A sphere. iv] THE SPHERE 91 12. Find the locus of a point such that the ratio of its distances from three given points are constant. Ans. A circle. 13. If A lt A 2 , ... are fixed points find the locus of a point P such that T,k r PA r 2 is constant, k r being given constants. Ans. A sphere whose centre is the mean point of the given points. 14. Find the locus of a point such that the feet of the per- pendiculars drawn to the faces of a given tetrahedron lie in one plane. Ans. A cubic surface with conical points at the four vertices. 15. Find the locus of a point suoh that the feet of the per- pendiculars drawn to the faces of a given tetrahedron form a tetrahedron of constant volume. 16. Find by inversion the loci of the points of contact of a variable sphere with three fixed spheres which it touches. Ans. The three circles in which one of the spheres is cut orthogonally by a sphere through the intersection of the other two. 17. Find the locus of the centre of a variable sphere which cuts each of (i) two, (ii) three given spheres in great circles. Ans. (i) A plane perpendicular to the line of centres, (ii) a line perpendicular to the plane of centres. 18. Show that the following five spheres are mutually ortho- gonal: x 2 +y 2 +z 2 =a 2 , x 2 + y 2 + z 2 — 2ay — zaz + a 2 = o, x 2 +y 2 + z 2 — zax — 2az + a 2 = o, x 2 + y 2 + z 2 — zax — zay + a 2 = o, x 2 +y 2 + z 2 — ax — ay — az + a 2 = o. 19. Write down the equation of a system of spheres passing through the circle (z = o, x 2 +y 2 + zpx + 2qy + d=o), and prove that the spheres of the system cut the plane y=o in a system of coaxal circles. Ans. x 2 +y 2 +z 2 +2px + 2qy + 2?te+d=o. 92 THE SPHERE [chap. 20. Show that every sphere through the circle (z=o, x 2 +y 2 — 2ax + r 2 = o) cuts orthogonally every sphere through the circle (y=o, x 2 +z 2 = r 2 ). 21. Show that every sphere through the circle (z = o, x 2 +y 2 = a 2 ) cuts orthogonally every sphere through the circle {y=o, {x-\) 2 + z 2 =\ 2 -a 2 }. 22. Find the limiting-points of the coaxal system of spheres determined by the two spheres (x-a) 2 +y 2 + z 2 =c 2 and (x-a') 2 +y 2 + z 2 = c' 2 . Am. [(a+Xa')l(i + A), o, o], where A is a root of the equation c' 2 \ 2 +{c 2 + c' 2 -(a-a') 2 }\+c 2 =o. 23. Show that all the spheres, that can be drawn through the origin and each set of points where planes parallel to the plane x/a+ylb+z/c=o cut the coordinate-axes, form a system of spheres which are cut orthogonally by the sphere x 2 + y 2 + z 2 + zfx + 2gy + zhz = o if af+bg+ch=o. (Math. Trip. I, 1914.) 24. If a tetrahedron is self-polar with respect to a sphere show that it has an orthocentre which is the centre of the sphere. 25. Find the equation of the sphere through the origin O and three points A, B, C whose coordinates are [a, o, o], [o, b, o], [o, o, c\. Show that, if O' is the centre of this sphere,, the sphere on OO' as diameter passes through the mid-points of the six edges of the tetrahedron OABC, and through the feet of the per- pendiculars from O on the sides of the triangle ABC. (Math. Trip. I, 1915.) Am. x 2 +y 2 + z 2 —ax—by — cz=o. 26. If ABCDE is an orthocentric pentad show that the five spheres for which the tetrahedra BCDE, etc., are self-polar are mutually orthogonal. iv] THE SPHERE 93 27. If a tetrahedron has an orthocentre show that this divides the line joining the circumcentre and the centroid externally in the ratio 2 to 1. 28. If the mid-points of the six edges of a tetrahedron lie on a sphere show that the centre of this sphere is the centroid of the tetrahedron. Show also that the tetrahedron has in this case an orthocentre and that the sphere through the mid-points of the edges passes also through the feet of the altitudes. CHAPTER V THE CONE AND CYLINDER 5*1. A cone is a surface generated by a line which passes through a fixed point, the vertex, and through the points of a fixed curve. There is no loss of generality in taking the guiding curve as a plane curve since any arbitrary plane section of the surface can be taken as guiding curve. Take the vertex as origin, and as guiding curve a curve in the plane z = c, with equations z = c, f(x, y) = o. Let P=[x', y', z'\ be any point on the surface. OP cuts the plane z=c where /(x, y) = o, hence, t being the parameter of this point on the line OP, tz'—c and/(ta', ty')=o. Eliminating t we have f(cx'/z', cy'/z') = o, or, dropping the accents > f(cxjz,cy/z) = o. This equation is homogeneous in x, y, z. Conversely a homogeneous equation in x, y, z represents a cone whose vertex is at the origin, for if it is satisfied by [x, y, z] = [I, m, n], it is satisfied by the coordinates of all points on the line xjl=y/m = zjn. If the guiding curve is a plane curve of degree n, the equation of the cone is also of degree n, and we call it a cone of order n. A cone of order n is cut by an arbitrary plane through its vertex in n generating lines. If the guiding curve is determined by two equations A(*> y, *) = o, /*(*, y, z)=o the equation of the cone with vertex at the origin is found by making these equations homogeneous by writing x/w, y/w, zjw instead of x, y, z, and then eliminating w; for the resulting equation is homogeneous in x, y, z and is satisfied by the co- ordinates of any point on the guiding curve. If the vertex is at the point [X, Y, Z] we may transform first to this point as origin and proceed as before. chap.v] THE CONE AND CYLINDER 95 We may also determine the equation by the following method. Ex. To find the equation of the cone with vertex [X, Y, Z] and guiding curve the conic z = o, f(x,y) = ax 2 + by 2 + 2hxy + 2gx+2fy+c = o. Using homogeneous coordinates, the coordinates of any point on the cone are given by px =x+hc', P y=Y+Xy', pz = Z+Xz', pw=W+\w', where z' = 0, and x',y', w' satisfy the equation F (x',y',w')=ax' 2 + by' 2 + 2hx'y' + 2gx'w' + 2fy'w' + cw' 2 =o. Now Z=pz, Xx'=px—X, therefore, eliminating p, Xzx'=Zx-Xz. Similarly Azy' = Zy— Yz, and AW = Zzo — Wz. Hence the required equation is F {Zx - Xz, Zy-Yz,Zw-Wz)=o, i.e. by Taylor's theorem z»J(*,y,«)-z*(2rg+yg+jpg)+^(jr,y,no=o, or in non-homogeneous coordinates Z 2 f(x,y)-Zz (x l?+y f£+f^) +*f{X, Y) = o. 5-li. The general equation of a cone of the second order with vertex at the origin is f(x, y, z) = ax* + by 2 + cz 2 + zfyz + zgzx + zhxy = o. 5'12. Cone of revolution or circular cone. Let [/, m, n] be the direction-cosines of the axis, za. the vertical angle. Then if Ps [x, y, z] is any point on the cone we have Ix+mv+nz cos oc ^ — — (x 2 +y 2 + z 2 )i (I 2 +m 2 + n 2 )* ' Hence the equation of the cone is (x 2 +y 2 + z 2 ) (P + m 2 + n 2 ) cos 2 a - (he + my + nz) 2 = o. 96 THE CONE AND CYLINDER [chap. 5-121. Conversely the equation x 2 +y 2 + z 2 — (lx+my + nz) 2 = o represents a cone of revolution or circular cone whose axis is [/, m, n] and vertical semi-angle a given by cos 2 <x. = (l 2 + m 2 + n 2 )- 1 . 5-122. Condition that the general homogeneous equation of the second degree in x, y, z should represent a circular cone. Comparing with 5-121 we have Aa=i — / 2 , A/= — mn, Xb=i —m 2 , Xg= —nl, Ac = i— w 2 , Xh=—lm. Therefore P= —Xghjf, etc. Eliminating/, A (a/— £/;)=/, Equating this value of A to two other values obtained similarly by eliminating m and n we have, provided none of the coefficients /, g, h vanishes, af-gh jg-hf _ch-fg f g h ' or F/f=Glg=H/h, where Fsgh-af, G=hf-bg, H=fg-ch. Conversely, if/, g and h are all finite, these conditions secure that the cone is circular. If/=o, then either « or »=o, and hence either h or g=o. If £=0 and h=o, then /=o, and we find the condition f* = (a-b)(a-c). If/, g and h all vanish, then two of a, b, c must be equal. 5-123. From an examination of the equation of a circular cone it is seen that it cuts the plane at infinity in a conic which has double contact with the absolute circle x 2 +y 2 + z 2 = o, the points of contact being on the line lx+my + nz=o, w = o. The con- ditions for a circular cone can therefore be obtained from those for double contact of two conies. Let < S 1 =o and 5 2 =o denote two conies, and consider the equation S x + XS 2 = o, which represents a pencil of conies through v] THE CONE AND CYLINDER 97 their common points. A conic of the pencil will degenerate to two straight lines if A has a value which makes the matrix "ai+Aog h^+Xh^ gx+Xgi f^+Xh^ ii+A&a / x +A/g .^1 + ^2 /1+V2 ^ + Ac 2 of rank 2, i.e. for which the determinant vanishes. This gives a cubic equation in A and the three roots correspond to the three pairs of common chords. If the conies have double contact two pairs of common chords coincide with the chord of contact while the other pair are the tangents at the points of contact. The cubic has then two equal roots, and the matrix is of rank 1 . Or thus : (a 1 +Xa 2 )x + (h 1 + Xh 2 )y + (g 1 +Xg i )z = o represents the polar of the point [1,0,0] with respect to the conic of the system with the parameter A. When this conic breaks up into two straight lines the polars of all points are concurrent at their point of intersection, and in particular the polars of [1, o, o], [o, 1, o], and [o, o, 1] are concurrent. The condition for this is that the matrix should be of rank 2. When the conic de- generates to two coincident lines, the polars of all points coincide, and the condition for this is that the matrix should be of rank 1. Hence the conditions that the equation ax* + by 2 + cz 2 + zfyz + zgzx + zhxy = o should represent a circular cone are that for some value of A the matrix rQ+x h g - h b+X f g f c+X should be of rank 1. Ex. If the general homogeneous equation in *, y, z represents a circular cone, prove that the direction of the axis is [/ -1 , g- 1 , A -1 ]. 5-2. Intersection of the cone f(x, y, z) = ax 2 + by* + cz 2 + zfyz + zgzx + zhxy = with the plane he + my + nz = o which passes through the vertex. 98 THE CONE AND CYLINDER [chap. I, m, n are not all zero. If n is not zero, eliminate z, and we obtain the quadratic equation n 2 (ax 2 + by 2 + zhxy) — zn (gx +fy) (Ix + my) + c (he + my) 2 = o, i.e. x 2 (cl 2 — 2gnl + an 2 ) + zxy (hn 2 —gmn —fnl+ elm) +y 2 (bn 2 — zfmn + cm 2 ) = o. This equation determines two values for the ratio yjx, say y-ijxx andy 2 lx 2 , and the equation of the plane then gives corresponding values for z/x. We thus get two sets of values of the ratios x : y : z. The plane thus cuts the cone in two generating lines, with direction-cosines proportional to \x^,y\, 2J and \xi,y if #J. There are two particular cases of importance. 5-21. If the two generating lines coincide, the plane is a tangent-plane to the cone, touching at all points of this gener- ating line. The condition for this is that the equation in yjx should have equal roots, hence (hn 2 —gmn —fnl+ elm) 2 — (bn 2 — zjmn + cm 2 ) (cl 2 — zgnl+ an 2 ) = o. We find that n 2 is a factor of the left-hand side. Rejecting this factor, which is not zero, we obtain the equation (be -J 2 ) I 2 + (ca -g 2 ) m 2 + (ab - h 2 ) n 2 + z (gh - af) mn + z(hf—bg)nl+z(fg—ch)lm = o. If capital letters denote the cofactors of the corresponding small letters in the determinant a h g h b f 8 f c the equation can be written <f> (I, m, n) = Al 2 + Bm 2 + Cn 2 + zFmn + zGnl+ zHlm = o. More generally the conditions that the plane Ix+my + nz+p — o should be a tangent-plane to the cone are p = o together with the equation <f> (I, m, n) = o. These two equations taken together are called the tangential equations of the cone. v] THE CONE AND CYLINDER 99 5-22. If the two generating lines are at right angles, x 1 x 2 +y 1 y i +z 1 z 2 =o. Now from the equation in yjx x 1 x 2 _ bn 2 — zfmn + cm 2 Viy* cl 2 —2gnl+an 2 Hence if we put Xx 1 x 2 = bn 2 — zfmn + cm 2 , then Xy 1 y 2 =cP—2gnl+an 2 , and from symmetry X^! z 2 =am 2 — Mm + bP. Hence the condition that the two generating lines should be at right angles is (b+c)l 2 +(c+a)m 2 +(a+b)n 2 —2fmn—2gnl—2hlm=o or (a+b+c) (P + m 2 + n 2 ) -/(/, m, n) = o, 5-23. Angle between two generating lines. If 8 is the angle between the two lines, then cos 6=(x 1 x 2 +yiy 2 + #1 z 2 ) (2#i a . E# 2 2 )~*. Now Ea^ 2 . Zx 2 2 = S (xjji — x 2 y^f + (Ex^) 2 . Also the sum of the roots of the equation in yjx is x i,x 2 _ hn 2 —gmn—fnl+clm y t y 2 an 2 —2gnl+cl 2 ' therefore h(Xiy 2 + x^i) = — 2 (hn 2 —gmn —fnl+ elm) and A 2 {x^y 2 - x^) 2 = A 2 {(x t y 2 + x^) 2 - 4^ x^ y 2 } = 4 (hn 2 —gmn —fnl+ elm) 2 —^(bn 2 — 2Jmn + cm 2 ) (el 2 — 2gnl+ an 2 ) = — 4« 2 <£(/, m, n). Hence A 2 Sx 1 2 .Sx 2 2 == -4s/ 2 . <f>(l, m, n) + &(b+c)P-2Zfmn} 2 . Therefore finally cos = (a + b + c) (I 2 + m 2 + n 2 ) -/(/, m, n) [{(a + b + c)(l 2 + m 2 + n 2 )-f(l, m, n)} 2 -42P.<f>(l, m, »)]*' tme _ 2{-W.<Kh™,n)}^ Sc.2/ 2 — /(/, m, n) 7-2 ioo THE CONE AND CYLINDER [chap. 5-231. 6 is real or imaginary, and therefore the lines of inter- section are real or imaginary, according as <f> (I, m, n) < or > o. 5-3. Polar of a point with regard to a cone. The polar of a point P=[x', y', z'] is defined as the locus of harmonic conjugates of P with respect to the pairs of points in which a variable line through P cuts the surface. Let U, V be the points of intersection of any line through P, and Q = [x, y, z] any point on this line. If X divides PQ in the ratio k : i the coordinates of U are kOC "T" X —i , etc. k+i ' Substituting in the equation of the cone we have a(kx + x') 2 + ... + 2f(ky+'y')(kz + z') + ... =o. Hence k s f(x, y, z) + zk {axx' + byy' + czz' +f(yz' +y'z) +g(zx' + z'x) + h (xy' + x'y)} +f(x', y', z') = o. The roots of this equation correspond to the two points U, V. If (PQ, UV) is harmonic, the two values of k are equal and of opposite sign, therefore axx'+ ... +f(yz'+y'z)+ ... =o. Hence the equation of the polar, the locus of Q, is x (ax' + hy' +gz') +y(hx' + by' +fz') + z(gx' +fy' + cz') = o, which may also be written Hence the polar of any point is a plane passing through the vertex, and the polar-planes of all points on a given line through the vertex coincide. If the point P lies on the cone, the polar- plane becomes the tangent-plane at that point. 5-4. Reciprocal cones. The condition that the plane lx + my + nz = o should be a tangent-plane to the cone f(x, y , z) = o is cj)(l, m, k) = o. v] THE CONE AND CYLINDER 101 The line x/l=y/m=z/n is normal to this plane. Hence the normals at O to the tangent-planes are generators of a cone whose equation is <f> (x, y, z) s Ax 2 + By 2 + Cz 2 + zFyz + zGzx + zHxy = o. This cone is called the reciprocal cone. The relation between the two cones is a mutual one, for BC—F 2 =aD, GH-AF=fD, etc., where D stands for the determinant a h g h b f g f c The intersection of the cone/(», y, z) = o with the plane at in- finity w = o is a conic, the conic at infinity on the cone. The two conies / and <f> are reciprocals with respect to the virtual conic Q. = x 2 +y 2 + z 2 = o, the circle at infinity, in the usual sense, viz. that the polar with respect to Q of any point on / is a tangent to <f>, and vice versa. 5-41. The reciprocal of a surface F in the corresponding sense is defined as that surface F' which is such that the polar of any point on F with respect to the virtual sphere x 2 +y 2 + z 2 + w 2 = o is a tangent-plane to F', and vice versa. In this sense we find that the reciprocal of the cone/(#, y, z) = o is the assemblage of planes [/, m, n, p] such that/(^, m, n)=o, for the polar-plane of [*', /, «\ »'] is x'x +y'y+ z'z + w'w = o, i.e. the plane [l,m,n,p] = [x',y',z',w'], and since f(x', y', z') = o we have the equation /(/, m, n) = o. But this is the condition that the plane [/, m, n, o] should be a tangent-plane to the cone tf>(x, y, z) = o; hence the assemblage of planes [/, m, n, p] which satisfy this condition are these tangent-planes and all planes parallel to them. These planes do not envelop a surface but are tangents to the conic in which <f>(x, y, z) = o cuts the plane at infinity. Thus the reciprocal of a cone is not a surface but a plane curve. ioz THE CONE AND CYLINDER [chap. 5-5. Rectangular generators. The plane lx+my+nz=o cuts the cone f(x,y,z) = o (i) in rectangular generators if 2a.Z/ 2 -/(/,JW, ») = o. The normal to the plane at O is therefore a generator of the cone Y>a.Y>x 2 -f{x,y, z) = o. (2) Hence all the planes through O which cut the given cone in rectangular generators touch the cone which is the reciprocal of (2). To find the reciprocal of (2) we have (c+a)(a + b)-f*=A + aZa, gh + (b + c)f=F+fXa. Hence the reciprocal of (2) is T,a.f(x, y, z) + <f>(x,y, z)-=o. (3) A tangent-plane to (3) thus cuts (1) in two rectangular gener- ators. 5-51. If we attempt to get a set of three mutually rectangular generators we must choose the tangent-plane to (3) so that its normal is a generator of the given cone (1). But this normal is a generator of (2), and the generators which are common to (1) and (2) also belong to the absolute cone Ea; 2 = o. Every generator of the absolute cone is orthogonal to itself and lies in its own normal plane (just as a point on a conic lies on its own polar). Hence we fail in general to obtain a set of three distinct mutually rectangular generators. Not only are they imaginary, but in any such set two coincide. 5-52. If, however, a+b + c=o, the two cones (1) and (2) coincide, and the normal is always a third generator, i.e. if we take any generator, the plane perpendicular to it through the vertex cuts the cone in rectangular generators. The cone is then said to be a rectangular cone. We have thus the poristic theorem : a cone possesses either no set of three mutually rectangular gener- ators, or an unlimited number. v] THE CONE AND CYLINDER 103 5*53. If the reciprocal cone is rectangular, the given cone has the property of possessing an unlimited number of sets of three mutually orthogonal tangent-planes. The condition for this is A + B+C=o, and we shall say that in this case the cone is an orthogonal cone. The equation of a rectangular cone referred to a set of three mutually rectangular generators is fyz +gzx + hxy = o ; and the equation of an orthogonal cone referred to a set of three mutually orthogonal tangent-planes is p 2 x 2 + q 2 y 2 + r 2 z 2 — zqryz — zrpzx — 2pqxy = o. Ex. 1. If OX, OY, OZ and OP, OQ, OR are two sets of three mutually perpendicular lines, prove that they are all generators of the same rectangular cone. Take OX, OY, OZ as coordinate-axes, and let the direction- cosines of OP, etc., be [l t , m 1 ,n^\, etc. Then the direction-cosines of OX, OY, OZ referred to OP, OQ, OR are [l lt l 2 , l 3 ], etc. Hence m 1 n 1 + m i n 2 + tn 3 n s =o Vi +V2 + Vs =0 ■• (1) ^i OT i +h v h +h m 3 =0 The equation of a rectangular cone containing OX, OY, OZ is fyz +gzx + hxy = o, and if it contains OP, OQ, OR, we have /tKjMj +gn 1 l 1 + hl^rtiy = o, fm 2 n 2 +gn !i l 2 +hl 2 m a =o, fm a n 3 +gn a l a +hl a m a = o. But these equations can be simultaneously satisfied since when we add the left-hand sides together the result vanishes in virtue of (1); hence the ratios/:^ : h are uniquely determined. The reciprocal theorem is that two sets of three mutually ortho- gonal planes through the same point are tangent-planes to one cone. Ex. 2. If a circular cone is rectangular prove that its vertical semi-angle = cos -1 — r , and if it is orthogonal that the vertical semi- V3 angle = sin -1 —y- . 8 A/3 io4 THE CONE AND CYLINDER [chap. 5-6. The geometry of cones with a common vertex is pro- jectively equivalent to the geometry of conies in a plane. To every cone corresponds its conic at infinity C. To reciprocal cones correspond two conies at infinity which are reciprocal with regard to the circle at infinity O. A triangle which is self-con- jugate with respect to D. corresponds to a set of three mutually rectangular lines through O. Two conies have in general a unique common self-conjugate triangle. If C and O are referred to their common self-conjugate triangle their equations are of the form a'x 2 + b'y 2 + c'z 2 = o, x 2 +y 2 + z 2 = o. The equation of a cone can therefore always be reduced to the form ax 2 + by 2 +cz 2 =o. The envelope of lines which cut two conies f(x,y, z) = ax 2 + ... + 2fyz + ... =o, f'(x,y, z) = a'x 2 + ... +2f'yz+ ... =o, in a harmonic range has for its tangential equation (bc' + b'c-2ff')P+ ... +2(gh'+g'h-af'-a'f)mn+ ... =o. This is a conic called the harmonic conic-envelope of the given conies*. When the conic /' is the circle at infinity Q. = x 2 +y 2 + z 2 = o, the equation of the harmonic conic- envelope becomes (b + c)l 2 + ... -2jmn- ... =o, the equation found above, as the condition for rectangular generators. To a rectangular cone corresponds a conic C which has an infinity of inscribed triangles each self-conjugate with respect to the circle at infinity Q. The conic-locus C and the conic-envelope O are then said to be apolar ; C is also said to be outpolar to D, and Q. inpolar to C. The condition that the conic-locus /and the conic-envelope <f>' should be apolar is aA'+...+2fF'+...=o. • See Sommerville's Analytical Conies, chap, xx, § 18. v] THE CONE AND CYLINDER 105 For A' = B' = C" and F' = G' = H' = o, this reduces to a + b + c = o, the condition for a rectangular cone. Similarly to an orthogonal cone corresponds a conic which has an infinity of circumscribed triangles each self -conjugate with respect to the circle at infinity. 5-7. Cylinders. A cylinder is a surface generated by a line which passes through points of a fixed curve and is parallel to a fixed direction, the axis. It can therefore be regarded as a cone whose vertex is a point at infinity. Let the given axis be taken as the axis of z, and the guiding curve the plane curve f(x, y) = o in the plane of xy. Let P= [x\ y', z'] be any point on the surface, then the line x=x', y=y' through P parallel to the axis cuts #=0 where f(x, y) = o. Hence f(x', y') = o, or, dropping the accents, f(x,y) = o. Hence the equation of a cylinder whose axis is the axis of z does not contain z. If we express the equation in homogeneous co- ordinates it will therefore be homogeneous in x, y, to. We may say that a homogeneous equation in three variables x , x lf x 2 represents a cone with vertex x —o, x 1 =o, x 2 =o; if this is a point at infinity the surface is a cylinder. 5*71. As a quadric cone is cut in two straight lines by any plane through its vertex, so a quadric cylinder is cut in two straight lines by any plane which contains the point at infinity on its axis. One such plane is the plane at infinity. Thus a quadric cylinder cuts the plane at infinity in two straight lines, and the nature of the cylinder will depend upon whether these two lines are real, coincident, or imaginary. Thus, while there is only one type of real cone of the second order, there are three types of cylinders. When the two lines at infinity are real and distinct, every plane (not parallel to the axis) cuts the surface in a conic which has two real and distinct points at infinity and is therefore a hyperbola. The cylinder in this case is a hyperbolic cylinder. The tangent- planes along the lines at infinity are asymptotic planes. When the two lines at infinity are imaginary, the sections are ellipses, and the cylinder is an elliptic cylinder. In this case the io6 THE CONE AND CYLINDER [chap. cylinder has only one real point at infinity, the point at infinity on its axis. When the two lines at infinity coincide, every section is a conic which meets the line at infinity in its plane in two coin- cident points, and is therefore a parabola; the cylinder is a parabolic cylinder. In this case as the plane at infinity meets the surface in two coincident generating lines it is a tangent-plane, i.e. a parabolic cylinder touches the plane at infinity along a line at infinity. If the two lines at infinity (necessarily real in this case) are conjugate with respect to the circle at infinity, the asymptotic planes are at right angles, and we have a rectangular hyperbolic cylinder. If the two lines at infinity (necessarily imaginary in this case) are tangents to the circle at infinity — for a real cylinder, if one is a tangent, both must be tangents — we have a circular cylinder. In this case a plane through the chord of contact (the polar of the point at infinity on the axis) is perpendicular to the axis and cuts the cylinder in a conic whose points at infinity are the circular points, i.e. a circle. 5-72. The general equation of a quadric cylinder with the axis of z for axis is f(x, y) = ax* + zhxy + by 2 + zgx + zfy + c = o. The polar-plane of [x' t y', z'] (or the tangent-plane at this point if it is a point of the surface) is * (ax' + hy' +g) +y (hx' + by' +f) + (gx' +fy' + c) = o. The conditions that the general plane Ix + my + nz +p = o should be a tangent-plane are n = o and Al 2 + zHlm + Bm 2 + zGlp + zFmp + Cp 2 = o, where A = bc—f 2 , etc., and F=gh — af, etc. Thus, like the cone, the cylinder requires two equations to express the tangential condition. The equation n = o expresses that the plane is parallel to the axis. The other equation is the condition that the line of intersection lx+my+p=o with the plane z—o should touch the conic/(#, y) = o, z = o. This equation by itself then is the tangential equation of this conic. v] THE CONE AND CYLINDER 107 5-73. The reciprocal of the cylinder with respect to the virtual sphere x 2 +y 2 + z 2 + w 2 = o is the assemblage of planes [/, m, n, p] such that a p + Mm + bn2 + 2g i p + 2 f m p + c p 2 = o. But this is the condition that the plane should envelop the conic Ax 2 + zHxy + By 2 + zGx + zFy + C = o since Da^BC-F 2 , etc. Hence, as in the case of a cone, the reciprocal of a cylinder is a conic. 5-74. Both the cone and the cylinder, while they are two- dimensional assemblages of points, or loci, are only one- dimensional assemblages of tangent-planes. The reciprocals are two-dimensional envelopes but only one-dimensional loci, i.e. they are curves. They are, as we shall see later, particular cases of developables, or surfaces which can be developed or laid flat on a plane without stretching or tearing. 5-9. EXAMPLES. 1. Find the equation of the cone with vertex [yf, y', z'] and base z=o, x 2 ja 2 +y 2 jb 2 =i. Ans. (z - z') 2 = (xz' - x'zfla 2 + (yz' -y'z) 2 jb 2 . 2. Find the equation of the circular cone with vertex [x' t y', z'], vertical semi-angle a, and direction-cosines of axis [/, m, n\. Ans. {Xl(x- x')} 2 = SZ a . S (* - x') 2 cos 2 a. 3. Find the equation of the cone which contains the three coordinate-axes and the lines through the origin having direction- ratios [l ly m u nj and [l 2 , n^, n^\. Ans. 'Zl 1 l 2 (m 1 nz—m i n 1 )yz=o. 4. Find the equations of the lines of intersection of the plane x+y — z = o with the cone yz + 6zx— \zxy = o. Ans. x=yJ2= zl\, x=y/z= zfo . 5. Find the direction-ratios of the lines of intersection of the plane (i) * -5^ + 3^=0 with the cone jx 2 +$y 2 - 3* 2 = o,
(ii) 5*:— ny — yz = o and 25yz~28zx+66xy = o.

Ans. (i) [1, 2, 3], [-1, i, 2], (ii) [5, 1, 2], [77, 266, -363].

108 THE CONE AND CYLINDER [chap.

6. Find the angle between the lines of intersection of

(i) x— iy+z=o and x 2 -sy 2 +z 2 =o,

(ii) x~(a+i)y + z = o and x 2 — (a 2 +i)y 2 + z 2 = o,
(iii) 6x + 2y — 2z = o and yz + zx + xy = o,

(iv) x+y + z=o and 2>yz— 2zx—xy=o,

(v) x+y+z=o and 6yz + 2zx— zxy = o,

(vi) hc + my + nz=o and j2 + 2a: + ;ry = o,

(vii) *+j); + ^ = o and (\+i)(\x+y)z=)ucy.

Ans. (i) cos- 1 !, (n)cos- 1 (2a+ 1)1(^+2), (iii) 90 , (iv) 90 ,
(v) 6o°, (vi) cos~ 1 'Lmnl(LP-'Lmn), (vii) 60°.

7. Show that the cone x 2 — z 2 + 2xy — o cuts the sphere
x 2 +y 2 + z 2 — 2x— 4 = in two circles.

8. Show that the cone yz+zx+xy—o cuts the sphere
x 2 +y 2 +z 2 =r 2 in two equal circles, and find their radius.

Ans. %\/6r.

9. Show that

x 2 + 2y 2 + z 2 —^yz—6zx — 2x + 8y — 2z + g = o
represents a cone and find its vertex.
Am. [1, —2, o].

10. Show that any plane through the vertex perpendicular to
a generating line of the cone 6yz— 2zx+$xy = o cuts it in two lines which are at right angles. 11. Find the equation of a cone with vertex at the origin and base a circle in the plane z = 12, with centre [13, o, 12] and radius = 5 ; and show that the section by any plane parallel to x = o is a circle. Prove that a sphere can be drawn through the sections of the cone made by the two planes #=12 and x = 6, and find its equation. Ans. Cone 6(^ 2 +y+^ 2 ) = i3^, sphere x 2 +y 2 + z 2 — 2dx— 13*+ 156 = 0. v] THE CONE AND CYLINDER 109 12. Prove that the straight lines which cut two given non- intersecting straight lines, such that the length intercepted is constant, are parallel to the generators of a circular cone. (Math. Trip. I, 1914.) 13. Prove that the locus of a point whose distance from a fixed line is in a fixed ratio to its distance from a fixed plane is a cone. Examine the cases when the line (i) is parallel to the plane, (ii) lies in the plane. Arts, (i) A cylinder, (ii) two planes. 14. Show that the locus of vertices of circular cones which contain the ellipse z=o, x 2 /a 2 +y 2 lb*=i(a>b) consists of the virtual conic x =0, y 2 /(a z — b 2 )+z 2 /a*+i=o and the hyperbola y = o, ^/(a 2 - b 2 ) - z 2 jb 2 = 1 . 15. Find the locus of the vertex of a rectangular cone which passes through a given conic and through a given point. Ans. A conic. 16. Find the locus of the vertex of an orthogonal cone which passes through a given conic. Ans. A sphere. CHAPTER VI TYPES OF SURFACES OF THE SECOND ORDER 6-1. Surfaces of revolution. A surface of revolution is generated by a plane curve rotating about a straight line in its plane. The curve is called the gener- ating curve or meridian curve. We shall assume that it is sym- metrical about the axis of rotation. Take the axis of z as axis of rotation, and the generating curve originally in the plane of yz. Let its equation in y, z be y*=f{z). Let P= [x, y, z] be any point on the surface, and let Q be the corresponding point on the generating curve; draw QN±Oz. The points generated by Q all lie on a circle with centre N, and the plane of this circle is perpendicular to Oz. Hence P and Q have the same z, and the coordinates of Q are [o, y', z] where NQ=y'=NP. But ATP 2 = x* +y 2 and y' 2 =/(#). Hence x *+y*=f(z). We are particularly interested in the surfaces of revolution generated by conies. 6*11. Surf aces of revolution of an ellipse about an axis. The ellipse y 2 /6 8 + z^c* = i , by revolution about the axis of z, generates the surface Fig. 21 X? y» + 3 = i» which is called an ellipsoid of revolution or a spheroid: an oblate spheroid if b < c, a pro- late spheroid if b > c. Oblate spheroid Prolate spheroid Fig. 22 chap, vi] SURFACES OF THE SECOND ORDER in 6-12. Surfaces of revolution of a hyperbola about an axis. 6-121. Axis of revolution the transverse axis. The generating hyperbola is —y 2 lb 2 +z 2 jc i =i, and it gener- ates the surface ^2 -,2 ^2 'b 2 ~T 2 + c 2 The surface consists of two distinct parts and is called a hyperboloid of revolution of two sheets. Fig. 23. Hyperboloid Fig. 24. Hyperboloid Fig. 25. Paraboloid of two sheets. of one sheet. of revolution 6-122. Axis of revolution the conjugate axis. The generating hyperbola is y 2 jb 2 —z 2 jc i = 1, and it generates the surface xi „» ^ 2 The two branches of the hyperbola generate the same surface, which consists of one continuous sheet, and is called a hyper- boloid of revolution of one sheet. 6-13. Surface of revolution of a parabola about its axis. The equation of the parabola is y L =$pz, and it generates the
surface x 2 +y 2 =^pz, which consists of one infinite sheet, and is
called a paraboloid of revolution.

6-14. The equations of these surfaces are all of the second
degree. Any meridian plane cuts the surface in a conic congruent
to the generating conic, and any plane perpendicular to the axis
of revolution cuts it in a circle. If a conic is rotated about an axis

ii2 TYPES OF SURFACES [chap.

which is not an axis of symmetry the generating conic will not
come to coincide with itself again after a rotation through two
right angles, and the meridian plane will cut
the surface in two conies. These together
form a curve of the fourth order, and the
surface will be of the fourth order, i.e. its
equation will be of the fourth degree.

Suppose, for example, that a parabola is
rotated about the tangent at the vertex. Its
equation is # 2 = \py. The equation of the surface
of revolution is formed by replacing y* by
x i +y i , hence it is

z*= i6p 2 (x 2 +;y 2 ), Fig . 26 . Surfaceof

an equation of the fourth degree. bou'about^rticd

As another example let the circle tangent

(y-b) i +z i =a?

be rotated about the axis of z. The equation of the surface of
revolution is

W^+y^-bY+z^a 3 ,

Fig. 27. Anchor-ring

which, on rationalising, becomes

(x* +y % + z* + b* - a 2 ) 2 = 4ft 2 (x 2 +^ 2 ),

again an equation of the fourth degree. This surface is called
an anchor-ring or tore.

vi] OF THE SECOND ORDER 113

6-15. A straight line rotated about an axis in the same plane

will generate a surface of the second order.

If the equation of the line is y = fxz, the equation of the surface

of revolution is x i +y 2 = p 2 z i . This is a circular cone.

Fig. a8. Circular cone Fig. 29. Circular cylinder

If the line is parallel to the axis, y = b, the equation of the sur-
face of revolution is x i +y 2 = b 2 , a circular cylinder.

6-2. These surfaces can now be generalised.

6-21. The equation

* 2 V 8 **

i" 1 " Z.1 T -2 — x *

a' o- c"

which represents a spheroid when two of the quantities a, b, c
are equal, and a sphere when all three are equal, represents the
general ellipsoid. Sections by planes parallel to any of the co-
ordinate-planes are ellipses which are real only within distances
a, b, c respectively from the origin. The surface is closed and
finite.

6-22. The equation --

y %

+ T2=I

represents a hyperboloid of two sheets. Sections parallel to the
yz or xz plane are hyperbolas, sections parallel to the xy plane
are ellipses, which are real only at distances greater than c.

X Z yi Z *

6-23. The equation -^ +^ — ? = J

represents a hyperboloid of one sheet. Sections parallel to the xy
plane are always real ellipses.

TYPES OF SURFACES

[chap.

114

6-24. The equation of the paraboloid may be generalised to
ax i +by 2 =4pz. When a, b are of the same sign the surface re-
sembles the paraboloid of revolution, but sections perpendicular
to the ar-axis are now ellipses when a=£ b. It is called an elliptic
paraboloid.

6-25. If a, b are of opposite sign we have a new type of surface,
called the hyperbolic paraboloid. Let us write the equation

x 2 y 2 _ z

a~ 2 ~F i ~ 2 c'
and suppose c to be positive. Sections parallel to the yz or zx
plane are parabolas, as before, but turned in opposite directions.
Sections parallel to the xy plane are hyperbolas; those on the
positive side of the origin have their transverse axes parallel to
.the axis of x, while those on the negative side have their trans-
verse axes parallel to the axis of y.

Fig. 30. Hyperbolic paraboloid

6-251. By a change of axes the equation of the hyperbolic
paraboloid may be further simplified. Taking the planes

x/a—y/b = o and x/a+yjb = o
as coordinate-planes x' = o and v'=o (in general oblique), the
equation assumes the form

x'y' = kz'.

6-3. Ruled surfaces. A surface may be generated also by the
motion of a line or a plane. In the former case we have a ruled
surface, in the latter an envelope. We shall consider at present
certain simple cases of ruled surfaces of the second order.

fcwJ

Fig. 31

vi] OF THE SECOND ORDER 115

6*31. The surface generated by a straight line which rotates

about an axis which it does not cut.

Take the axis of rotation as axis of z, and let ON be the com-
mon perpendicular of the two lines in

any position. Then O is a fixed point

and OiVis of constant length =p. Take

O as origin and the plane through O

perpendicular to Oz as plane of xy.

In this plane take two fixed rectangular ^

lines as axes of x and y. The angle

between the revolving line and the axis

of rotation is also a constant =cc.
The position of the line is determined by the variable angle

xON = 6. Let P= [x, y, z] be any point on the revolving line and

let NP=r. Then

x=pcosd— rsinasinfl,

y=psvnd +rsinacosfl,
z= rcosa.

These are freedom-equations of the locus of P, in terms of the
two parameters r, d. Eliminating r and 0, we have

«* +y =p* + r * sin 2 a =/>» + z* tan*a,
i.e. x i +y 2 -z 2 tza?ai=p i .

The surface is therefore a hyperboloid of revolution of one sheet.

6-32. The general hyperboloid of one
sheet may be generated by a moving line in
the following way, as

The surface generated by a line which
joins pairs of points with constant difference
of eccentric angle on two equal and similarly
placed ellipses in parallel planes.

Let the line joining the centres of the
ellipses be perpendicular to their planes,
and take this line as axis of z, the mid-
point of the join of the centres as origin,
and axes of x and y parallel to the principal
axes.

8-a

Fig. 3a

n6 TYPES OF SURFACES [chap.

The coordinates of the corresponding points Q, Q' are

Q : [acos(<£ — a), 6sin(0 — a), c],

Q' : [acos(^ + a), 5sin(<£ + a), — c].

The direction-cosines of <3)2' are proportional to

asinocsin<£, — 6sinacos<£, c.

If P= [x, y, z] is any point on QQ',

x/a=cos(<j) — 0L) + 1 sinasin^ = costxcos<f> + (i + /)sinasin<£,

j/fi = sin(<£ — a) — /sinacos0 = cosasin^ — (i + £)sinacos<£,

z/c = i + 1.

These are freedom-equations of the locus in terms of the two
parameters <f>, t. Eliminating <f> and t , we have

* 2 /« 2 +>' 2 /* 2 = cos 2 a + (H-f) 2 sin 2 a = cos 2 a + ^ 2 /c 2 .sin 2 a,

x 2 v 2 z 2 „

i.e, -5+I2--2 5- = cos z a.

a 2 o 2 c 2 cosec 2 a

If the sign of a is changed evidently the equation is unaltered,
hence the surface can be generated in two different ways ; or,
from another point of view, the surface is covered by two sets of
straight lines, or systems of generating lines. Each system is
called a regulus.

An effective model of this surface can be made by fixing two
elliptie disks together rigidly in parallel planes and passing a
continuous thread alternately through holes pierced on the two
ellipses at equal intervals of eccentric angle.

6-33. The hyperbolic paraboloid also can be generated by a
moving line.

ABA'B' is a regular tetrahedron ; Q and Q' are variable points
on AB and A'B' such that AQ=A'Q'. QQ' generates a hyper-
bolic paraboloid.

The lines joining the mid-points x, x' ; y, y' ; z, z' of opposite
edges intersect at right angles. Take these lines as coordinate-
axes. Let Ox=Ox'=Oy = Oy' = Oz=Oz' = c, Az= etc. =a-\/2,
AQ=A'Q'=r^z. Then the coordinates of Q and Q' are

Q:\a-r, a-r, c],

Q' : [a-r, -a+r, -c].

vi] OF THE SECOND ORDER 117

The direction-cosines of QQ' are proportional to [o, a— r, c].
Hence the coordinates of any point on QQ' are

■* x=a—r,

y = (a-r)(x + t),
z = c(i+t).
Eliminating r and t, we obtain

y _ a ~ r _*
z~ c ~c*

i.e. zx=cy,

which is the equation of a hyperbolic paraboloid in the second
form.

This may be generated also in a second way. If Q and Q' are
variable points on AA' and BB' such that AQ = BQ', the equa-
tion of the surface generated by QQ' can be written down from
the last result by interchanging x arid z, but this does not alter
the equation.

6-4. It remains now to examine whether the other surfaces
can be generated by a moving line, or if straight lines exist upon
them.

Consider first the equation

ax 2 +by 2 +cz 2 =k, (1)

n8 TYPES OF SURFACES [chap.

which can represent, for suitable values of the coefficients, an
ellipsoid, one of the two hyperboloids, a cone, or a cylinder.

Let *_=X = yzX = ^ ( 2 )

I m n

be any straight line. Equating each of these ratios to t and sub-
stituting for x, y, z in equation (i), we obtain the quadratic
in t:

a(lt+X)* + b(mt+ Yf + c{nt+Zf=k.

The line in general cuts the surface in two points. But if it lies
entirely in the surface this equation must be true for all values
of t and becomes an identity. Equating to zero the coefficients
of the different powers of t, we obtain the three equations :

al 2 + bm 2 + cn 2 = o, (3)

alX+bmY+cnZ=o, (4)

aX 2 +bY*+cZ* = k. (5)

Equation (5) expresses that the point [X, Y, Z] lies on the surface.
If we choose any set of values of X, Y, Z satisfying this equation,
the other two equations, being homogeneous in I, m, n, determine
two sets of values for the ratios / : m : n, i.e. two directions through
the point. Hence through every point on the surface there pass two
generating lines. These may not, however, be real. Eliminating
« between (3) and (4),

cZ* (al* + bm*) + (alX+ bm Yf = o,

i.e. a (aX*+cZ*)P+2abXYlm+b(bY* + cZ*)m*=o.

The roots of this equation will be real if

aWX* Y 2 - ab (aX 2 + cZ*) (bY*+ cZ*) > o,

i.e. -Z*abc(aX*+bY*+cZ*)>o,

i.e. (by (5)) abck < o.

Taking k positive the generators will be real only if a, b, c are
all negative, or one negative and two positive. The latter gives a
hyperboloid of one sheet, the former a virtual quadric which has
no real points. The other surfaces, ellipsoid and hyperboloid of
two sheets, have imaginary generators. The generating lines
through a real point of the ellipsoid and the hyperboloid of two

vi] OF THE SECOND ORDER 119

sheets are imaginary lines of the first species since each has one
real point upon it ; those of the virtual quadric are imaginary
lines of the second species.

If a, b, cor k is zero, the generators coincide. In the last case
the surface is a cone, in the other cases a cylinder.

6-41. The paraboloids are represented by the equation

ax 2 + by 2 = 2cz,

and a similar investigation shows that the elliptic paraboloid, for
which ab > o, has imaginary generators.

Thus all the quadric surfaces are ruled surfaces, but the
generating lines are real only in the cases of the hyperboloid
of one sheet; the hyperbolic paraboloid, the cone, and the
cylinder.

6-5. EXAMPLES.

1. The sum of the squares of the perpendiculars from a point
to the lines y—xXzn6, z=c and y— — xtan0, z=—c is 2k 2 .
Prove that the locus of the point is an ellipsoid, and state the
lengths of its principal axes. (Math. Trip. I, 1915.)

Ans. acosecfl, asec9, a, where a 2 = k 2 — c 2 . A circular cylinder
if the two lines are parallel.

2. Find the locus of the position of the eye at which two given
non-intersecting lines will appear to cut at right angles.

Ans. A hyperboloid of one sheet with the given lines as
generators and its centre at the midpoint of their common per-
pendicular. Reduces to two planes, one through each line per-
pendicular to the other, when the lines are at right angles.

3. Find the locus of a luminous point such that the shadows
cast on the plane of xy by the lines *=o, z=ny+b and y=o,
z=mx + a should be at right angles. Examine the case when
a = b.

Ans. mnx 2 + mny 2 — myz — nzx + anx + bmy = o, a hyperboloid
having the axis of z and the two given lines as generators. A cone
when a=b, i.e. when the two lines intersect.

120 SURFACES OF THE SECOND ORDER [chap, vi

4. Find the locus of a luminous point if the ellipsoid

x 2 /a 2 +y 2 lb 2 +z 2 jc 2 =i
casts a circular shadow on the plane of xy.

Ans. An ellipse y = o, z 2 jc 2 + x 2 f{a 2 -b 2 ) = i, and a hyperbola
* = o, z 2 /c 2 -y 2 ](a 2 -b 2 ) = i.

5. If y 2 = ax is the equation of a parabola in the plane of xy,
and y+z=o that of a straight line in the plane of yz, find the
locus of the perpendicular drawn from any point of the parabola
to the straight line. (St Andrews, 1906.)

Ans. y 2 —z 2 —ax=o, hyperbolic paraboloid.

6. Show that the locus of a line which moves parallel to
the plane y=z, and intersects the two conies y=o, z 2 =cx and
z=o,y 2 =bx is x={y—z){yjb—zjc).

7. Find the equation of the surface generated by a line which
cuts the three lines

x=a\ x=—a) x—2a _ y+a _z+2a
y=z)' y=-z)' "^l 4 5~ *

Ans. x 2 +y 2 -z 2 = a\

8. Find the equation of the surface generated by a line which
meets the three lines x=2, 4^=3^; x+z=o, ^y-\-2z=o;
y = 2, zx+z=o.

Ans. x 2 j^+y 2 /g-z 2 /i6=i.

g. A line of constant length moves with its extremities on two
fixed skew lines ; find the locus of its mid-point.
Ans. An ellipse.

10. A circle of constant radius cuts an equal fixed circle in
two points and has its plane always parallel to a fixed plane which
is perpendicular to that of the fixed circle. Show that the moving
circle generates two cylinders.

CHAPTER VII

SURFACES DERIVED FROM THEIR

SIMPLEST EQUATIONS

7-1. The surfaces of the second order, or quadric surfaces,
which we have recognised can be grouped as follows :

±j£±jj±£-i Ellipsoid (+ + +).

Hyperboloid of one sheet (one minus).
Hyperboloid of two sheets (two minuses).

ax* + by* + zcz = o Elliptic paraboloid (a and b of same sign).
Hyperbolic paraboloid (a and b of opposite
sign).

7-11. Symmetry.

We shall consider these first from the point of view of geo-
metrical symmetry.

A centre of symmetry or centre of a figure is a point C such that
every line through C cuts the figure in pairs of points which are
equidistant from C.

An axis of symmetry is a line such that every line which cuts
this axis at right angles cuts the figure in pairs of points equi-
distant from the axis.

A plane of symmetry is a plane such that every line perpen-
dicular to this plane cuts the figure in pairs of points equidistant
from the plane.

If the plane of xy is a plane of symmetry, any line x=a, y=b
cuts the figure in points for which z has values equal and
opposite in sign. Hence the equation of the surface must contain
only even powers of z. If the equation is f(x, y, z) = o we have
f(x,y,z)=f(x,y, -z).

If the axis of z is an axis of symmetry, to any point [*, y, z]
on the surface corresponds the point [ — x, —y, z], i.e.

f(x,y,z)=f(-x, -y,z).

122 PROPERTIES OF QUADRIC SURFACES [chap.

If the origin is a centre of symmetry, to any point [x, y, z]
corresponds the point [— x, —y, —z], i.e.

f{x,y,z)=f(-x, -y, -z).

If the two planes x = o and y = o are both planes of symmetry,

f(x,y, z)=f(-x,y, z)=f(-x, -y, z),

hence the intersection of these planes is an axis of symmetry.
If the axes of x and y are both axes of symmetry,

f(x,y,z)=f(x, -y, -z)=f(-x, -y, z),

hence the axis of z is also an axis of symmetry. In this case there
may be no plane of symmetry. For example, the locus xyz +c=o
has the coordinate-axes as axes of symmetry, but it has no planes
of symmetry.

Lastly, if the three planes x=o, y=o, z=o are all planes of
symmetry,

f(x,y,z)=f(-x,y,z)=f(-x, -y,z)=f(-x, -y, -z), etc.,
hence the coordinate-axes are all axes of symmetry and the
origin is a centre of symmetry.

Applying these results, we see that the surfaces of the first
group, ellipsoid and hyperboloids, have the coordinate-planes as
planes of symmetry, the coordinate-axes as axes of symmetry,
and the origin as centre of symmetry. On the other hand, the
paraboloids have only the planes x=o and y = o as planes of
symmetry and the axis of z as axis of symmetry.

7-2. We shall investigate first the elementary tangential pro-

ax 2 + by 2 + cz % = i

as the typical surface, noting the modifications which are re-
quired in the case of the paraboloids.

7-21. Intersection of a straight line with a quadric.

Let the equations of the straight line be

y=y'+mt,
z=z'+nt.

vii] FROM THEIR SIMPLEST EQUATIONS 123

Substituting for x, y, z in the equation of the surface, we obtain
the equation

(a/ 2 + bm 2 + en 2 ) t 2 + 2 (alx' + bmy' +cnz')t

+ {ax' 2 +by' 2 +cz' 2 -i)=o,

a quadratic in t . Hence the surface is cut by an arbitrary straight
line in two points, real, coincident, or imaginary.
If the point [x' t y', z'] lies on the surface,

ax' 2 +by' 2 +cz' 2 =i,

and one root of the quadratic is t=o.

7-22. Tangent at a point.

If also alx' + bmy' + cnz' = o, (1)

the other root of the quadratic in t also vanishes, and the line
therefore meets the surface in two coincident points. It is said
to be a tangent at [x\ y', z'].

If the direction-cosines of the line are allowed to vary, con-
sistent with equation (1), the line is always perpendicular to the
direction [ax', by', cz 1 ]. Hence all the tangents at a given point
lie in one plane. This plane is called the tangent-plane at the
point, and the line through the point of contact perpendicular
to the tangent-plane is called the normal.

7-221. The direction-cosines of the normal at [x', y', z'] are
therefore proportional to

[ax', by', cz'],
and the equation of the tangent-plane at [x\ y', z'] is

ax' (x - x') + by' (y —y') + cz' (z — #') = o.
Since also ax' 2 + by' 2 +cz' 2 =i,

the equation of the tangent-plane can be written
7-222. ax'x + by'y + cz'z = 1 .

7-223. Exactly the same method applied to the equation of
the paraboloid

ax 2 +by 2 +2cz=o

124 PROPERTIES OF QUADRIC SURFACES [chap.

gives for the equation in t to determine the points of intersection
with a line

(aP + bm 2 + 2cn) t 2 +z (ax'l+ by'm + cz') t

+ (ax' 2 + by' 2 + zcz') = o.

The direction-cosines of the normal are [ax', by', c], and the
equation of the tangent-plane at [x', y', z'] is

ax'x + by 'y + c (z + z') = o.

7-23. Tangential equation.

The equation connecting the point-coordinates [x, y, z] re-
presents the surface as a locus of points. Reciprocally we may
consider the surface as an envelope of planes and investigate the
equation connecting the coordinates [/, m, n, p] of a variable
plane lx+my+nz+p = o which touches the surface.

Let the point of contact of the plane be [x r , y', z']. The
equation of the tangent-plane at this point is

ax'x + by'y + cz'z = i .

Identifying this with the equation of the given plane we have

aw' _ by' _ C2? _ i
I ~ m~ n ~ p'

But ax' 2 +by' 2 +cz' 2 = i,

hence l 2 ja + m 2 jb + n 2 jc —p 2 .

This is called the tangential equation of the quadric.

7-231. In a similar way it may be shown that the tangential
equation of the paraboloid

ax 2 + by 2 + 2cz=o

is P/a + m 2 jb + znp\c = o.

7-3. Pole and polar.

The equation ax'x + by'y + cz'z = i always represents a plane
whether the point [x', y', z'] lies on the surface or not. When
it lies on the surface it is the tangent-plane. In general it is
called the polar-plane of \x', y', z'] with regard to the given
surface.

vm] FROM THEIR SIMPLEST EQUATIONS 125

7-31. The polar-plane of a point P= \x', y', z'] is the locus of
harmonic conjugates of P with regard to the surface.

Take any line through P and on it take a point Qs [x, y, z].
The line cuts the surface in two points X, Y. Let one of these
X divide PQ in the ratio k:i. The coordinates of X are then,
by Joachimsthal's formulae,

kx+x' ky+y' kz+z'
~k+T' T+T' ~~k+I'

But X lies on the surface, therefore

a(kx+x') 2 +b(ky+y') 2 +c(kz+z') 2 =(k + i) 2 ,
i.e. k 2 (ax 2 +by 2 +cz 2 —i) + 2k(ax'x+by'y+cz'z—i)

+ (ax'* + by' 2 +cz' 2 -i) = o.
This quadratic, which we call Joachimsthal's ratio-equation, has
two roots ki, k% which correspond to the two points X, Y.

If (PQ, X Y) is a harmonic range, X and Y divide PQ internally
and externally in equal ratios, hence ^+^=0, and therefore

ax'x + by'y + cz'z = 1 .
This is the equation of the locus of harmonic conjugates Q, and
represents the polar of P.

7-32. If the join of two points [x t , y x , srj and [x 2 , y 2 , z 2 ] is cut
harmonically by the surface, each point lies on the polar of the
other, and ax^+by^+cz^z^i.

Two such points are called conjugate points.

7-33. Pole of a plane. Conjugate planes.

The polar of the point \x', y', z'] with respect to the quadric

ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 = 1

is ax'x +by'y+ cz'z = 1 .

Identifying this equation with the equation of the general plane

Ix + my + nz +p = o,

ax' by' cz' 1
we have — r = = — = — x-

I m n p

Hence the pole of the plane lx+my + nz+p = o is

/ m n '

'ap* ~bp' ~cp\'

h

126 PROPERTIES OF QUADRIC SURFACES [chap.

7-34. Two planes which have the property that one passes

through the pole of the other are said to be conjugate. If

the plane l'x+m'y+n'z+p' = o passes through the pole of the

plane

lx + my + nz+p = o

we have IT /a + mm'jb +nn'jc =pp'.

As this equation is symmetrical in the two sets of coefficients
it follows that each plane contains the pole of the other. This
equation bears the same relation to the tangential equation that
the equation connecting the coordinates of the conjugate points
bears to the point-equation, the left-hand side being in each
case the bilinear symmetrical expression corresponding to the

The planes through the line of intersection of the two planes
[Z ls m lt n lf p t ] and [4, m g , Mjj, />J form a pencil of planes whose
equation is

(l 1 x+m 1 y+n 1 z+p 1 )+X(l 2 x+m 2 y+n i z+p 2 )=o.

Its coordinates may be represented by

pi =/ x +A4,

pm=w 1 +Am 2 ,

pn =«! +Aw 2 ,

pp =/>i +Xp 2 .
If this variable plane is tangent to the quadric,

(h + A4) 2 A* + («i + M)7* + K + *ii»)V« = (Pi + W,
i.e.

(l^fa + m^/b + n^jc -p^) + zX (k l 2 /a + rn^n^b + Mj n^c -p t p 2 )

+ A 2 {l*ja + «■"/& + nfjc -p 2 2 ) = o.
This quadratic equation determines two values of A, A x and Aa,
which correspond to the two tangent-planes passing through the
given line. The condition

l 1 l 2 ja + m 1 m i /b + n 1 ti 2 lc=p 1 p 2

is that the two planes should be harmonic conjugates with regard
to the two tangent-planes through their line of intersection.

vii] FROM THEIR SIMPLEST EQUATIONS 127
7-35. Tangent-cone.

If a plane be drawn through P touching the surface in T, the
polar of T, which is the tangent-plane at T, passes through P,
and therefore the polar-plane of P passes through T. Hence the
points of contact of all tangent-planes through P lie in the polar
of P. These are also the points of contact of tangent-lines from
P to the surface.

The assemblage of all the tangent-lines through a point
P[x', y', z'] is a cone with vertex P, called the tangent-cone. If
Q [*> y> #] is any point on the tangent-cone, PQ is a tangent
and the two points X, Y in which PQ meets the surface
coincide. Hence Joachimsthal's equation has equal roots, and
therefore

(ax'x + by'y + cz'z — 1 ) 2

= (ax' 2 + by' 2 + cz' 2 - 1) (ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 - 1).

This is the equation of the tangent-cone with vertex [x' t y', z'].

7-351. Rectangular hyperboloid.

Ex. 1. Show that the locus of points from which three mutually
rectangular tangent-lines can be drawn to the surface ax 2 + by 2 +cz 2 =i

a(b + c)x 2 + b(c + a)y 2 + c(a + b)z 2 =a+b+c.

The locus in question is the locus of vertices of rectangular
tangent-cones. The tangent-cone with vertex [*', v', #'] is

(ax'x + by'y + cz'z- i) 2 = (ax' 2 + by' 2 +cz' 2 - 1) (ax 2 +by 2 +cz 2 - 1),

or, say,

a 1 x 2 + b^y 2 + c t z 2 + 2,j x yz + 2g t zx + 2h x xy + etc. = o.

The condition that it should be rectangular is a 1 +6 1 + c 1 =o, and
this gives the required equation in x', y', z'.
]£a + b + c=o the equation reduces to

a 2 x 2 + b 2 y 2 + c 2 z 2 = o,

which represents a virtual cone. The only real point on the locus
is the centre. In this case the asymptotic cone is rectangular, and is
the only real rectangular tangent-cone. The surface in this case is
called a rectangular hyperboloid.

Ex. 2. Discuss the nature of the locus in Ex. 1 according to the
values of a, b, c.

iz8 PROPERTIES OF QUADRIC SURFACES [chap.
7*352. Locus of points through which three mutually orthogonal
tangent-planes can be drawn to the quadric

ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 =i.

The locus in question is the locus of vertices of orthogonal
tangent-cones. Denoting for shortness

ax' 2 +by' 2 +cz' 2 -i
by F, we have

a 1 =a i x' 2 —aF, etc., f\=bcy'z', etc.

The condition that the tangent-cone should be orthogonal is

S(*iC 1 -/ 1 2 ) = o.

Now ij c x -f 2 =:(b 2 y' 2 -bF)(c 2 z' 2 -cF)-b 2 c 2 y' 2 z' 2
= -Fbc(by' 2 + cz' 2 -F)=Fbc(ax' 2 - 1).

Hence the required condition is

abc(x' 2 +y' 2 +z' 2 )='Lbc.

The locus is therefore a sphere, concentric with the quadric.
This is called the orthoptic sphere*. In the case of the ellipsoid
the orthoptic sphere is always real and encloses the ellipsoid, but
in the case of the hyperboloids it may be virtual or a point-
sphere. In the last case ~Lbc=o and the quadric is an orthogonal
hyperboloid, its asymptotic cone being an orthogonal cone.

For the paraboloid ax* + by 2 + 2cz = o the equation of the locus
is found to be 2abz = c(a + b), which represents a plane.

7-353. The enveloping cylinder. If the vertex of the cone
\x', y ', z'] becomes a point at infinity the cone becomes a cylinder.
Let the direction of the axis of the cylinder be [/, m, »]. Then
P= [I, m, n, o]. Using homogeneous coordinates x, y, z, w, the
equation of the cone becomes

(ax'x + by 'y + cz'z — w'w) 2

= (ax' 2 + by' 2 + cz' 2 - w' 2 ) (ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 - w 2 ).

Substituting [x', y', z', zo'] = [/, m, n, o] this reduces to

(alx + bmy + cnz) 2 = (al 2 + bm 2 + en 2 ) (ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 —i).

* It is also called the director sphere on the analogy of the director circle
of a conic, which reduces to the directrix in the case of the parabola.

vii] FROM THEIR SIMPLEST EQUATIONS 129

7-36. Polar of a line. If A and B are two points on a line /,
the polar-planes a, j8 of A, B intersect in a line /'. Let C, D be
any two points on /'. Since the polars of A and B both pass
through C and D, the polars of C and D both pass through A
and B. Let P be any other point on /. Then the polars of C and
D both pass through P, hence the polar of P passes through C
and D. Hence the polars of all points on I pass through /', and,
reciprocally, the polars of all points on /' pass through /. / and V
are called mutual polars.

The polar of the line joining the points [x 1} y u srj and
[*2> J2> #2] * s th e li ne °f intersection of the two planes
ax 1 x + by 1 y + cz 1 z= 1,
ax 2 x+by i y+cz i z=i.

The line / cuts the quadric hrtwo points P, Q. The tangent-
planes at P and Q are the polars of P and Q. Hence the polar of
/ is the line of intersection of the tangent-planes at P and Q.

If a line intersects its polar the point of intersection, being on
its polar, lies on the surface ; the polar-plane of this point thus
contains both the lines, which are therefore tangents to the sur-
face. If a line coincides with its polar it lies entirely on the
surface.

Ex. 1. Showthatthepolaroftheline[/,w,n;/',OT',n']withrespect
to ax 2 + by 2 +cz 2 =i is [-bcl', -cam', -abn';al, bm, en].

Ex. 2. Show that the condition that the line [/, m, n; /', m', «']
should be a tangent to the quadric ax 2 + by 2 + cz % = 1 (the "line-
equation " of the quadric) is

aP + bm 2 + en 2 - bcl' 2 - cam' 2 - abn' 2 =0.

Ex. 3. Show that the lines through [*', /, z'] which are perpendi-
cular to their polars form a cone Sa (b— c) x' {y—y') (z—z') = o.

7-37. Polar tetrahedra.

If ABCD is any tetrahedron the polar-planes of the vertices
form another tetrahedron A'B'C'D', and the polar-planes of
A', B', C", D' are the faces of the former tetrahedron. Each
tetrahedron is the polar of the other. If a tetrahedron coincides
with its polar it is said to be self-polar. A self-polar tetrahedron
may be chosen in an infinite variety of ways. The first vertex A
sao 9

130 PROPERTIES OF QDADRIC SURFACES [chap.
has three degrees of freedom ; the second vertex B may be any
point on the polar-plane of A and has therefore two degrees of
freedom ; the third vertex C lies on the polar-line of AB and has
one degree of freedom ; and then the fourth vertex is determined.
We may say therefore that there are oo 6 self-polar tetrahedra.

7-38. Conjugate lines.

If I and m are two lines such that the polar of I cuts m then the
polar ofm cuts I. Let /', the polar of /, cut m in P. Then since P
lies on the polar of /, the polar-plane of P contains /. But since
P lies on m, the polar of m also lies in this plane and therefore
cuts /. The two lines /, m are said to be conjugate with respect to

Ex. If the quadric is x 2 +y 2 +z i +w 2 =o, show that the condition
that the two lines (p), (q) should be conjugate is

Poi%i +Poz4m +/"03?08 +P&q& +^si?3i +P13Q12 = °-

7-381. If A, B, C, D are four points such that AB is conjugate
to CD and AC is conjugate to BD, then BC is conjugate to AD.

Let the four points be [x it y u z it eoj (i= 1, 2, 3, 4), and the
quadric Ssx i +y i +z 2 +to*=o. The polar of AB is the inter-
section of the planes JLx 1 x= o and 'Zx i x=o; these planes both
contain a point of CD, say x=x 3 +?oe i , etc. Hence A satisfies the
two equations

S* 1 (a; 3 + Aa: 4 ) = o, S* 2 (« 3 + Aa; 4 ) = o.
Eliminating A we have

2jX\ Xq • ZlX<y Xa ^ &X-± X^ • ZuX^ Xq •

Similarly the condition that AC should be conjugate to BD is

ZuX\ X% • 2UXq X^ === 2lX\ Xa\ ■ 4-jA>2 Xq •

Therefore Sxj^. 1iX 3 x l ='Zx 1 * 8 .2* 2 * 4 ,

which is the condition that BC should be conjugate to AD.

The tetrahedron ABCD is said to be self-conjugate with respect
to the given quadric. Since the twelve coordinates of the four
vertices are connected by only two relations there are oo 10 self-
conjugate tetrahedra. Every self-polar tetrahedron is self-
conjugate, but not vice versa.

vii] FROM THEIR SIMPLEST EQUATIONS 131
7-382. If A'B'C'D' is the polar tetrahedron corresponding to
a self-conjugate tetrahedron ABCD each edge of the one tetra-
hedron intersects the similarly named edge of the other.
Consider any two tetrahedra, without reference to any quadric,
having these relationships of incidence. Denote the point of
intersection of BC and B'C by (23), that of AD and A'D' by
(14), and so on. Then the three points (23), (31) and (12) all lie
in both of the planes ABC and A' B'C, and are therefore col-
linear. Hence the triangles ABC and A' B'C, in different planes,
are in perspective, and AA' , BB' , CC are concurrent in a point
O. Similarly AA', BB', DD' are concurrent in O. Hence the
two tetrahedra are in perspective, i.e. if two tetrahedra are such
that each edge of one cuts the corresponding edge of the other, they
are in perspective.

One condition is required in order that two given lines should
intersect, and two conditions in order that a given line should
pass through a given point, hence in order that two tetrahedra
should be in perspective five conditions are required. It follows
that if two tetrahedra have five pairs of corresponding edges incident
the sixth pair also are incident.

Ex. If two tetrahedra are mutually polar with respect to a given
quadric and are also in perspective, show that each is self-conjugate

7-4. Diametral planes.

A line through the centre is a diameter, and is bisected at the
centre. A plane through the centre is a diametral plane.

Since the harmonic conjugate of the mid-point of a segment,
with respect to the ends of the segment, is a point at infinity, the
polar of the centre is the plane at infinity ; and reciprocally the
polar of a point at infinity passes through the centre and is a
diametral plane.

Hence the locus of the mid-points of a system of chords
parallel to [/, m, n] is a diametral plane, the polar-plane of the
point at infinity [I, m, n, o].

Since a diameter passes through the centre its polar is a line
at infinity. Hence the polar-planes of all points on a diameter
have a common line at infinity and are therefore parallel.

9-2

i3a PROPERTIES OF QDADRIC SURFACES [chap.

Let A be any point, and a the polar-plane of A, and let the
diameter OA cut a in C. The polar of C is parallel to a, i.e. it
meets a in a line at infinity. Hence C is the centre of the conic
in which a cuts the quadric. In particular if OA cuts the quadric
in X, the tangent-plane at X is parallel to a. Hence the diameter
OX cuts all planes, which are parallel to the tangent-plane at X,
in the centres of the sections.

The diameter OX is said to be conjugate to the diametral plane
which is parallel to the sections through whose centres OXpasses.

Taking the equation of the surface

ax 2 A-by 2 + cz 2 =i,
consider a diameter

x = lt, y = mt, z — nt.
The polar-plane of the point t on this diameter is
alx + bmy + cnz = t~\

For all values of t these planes are parallel, and as t^-ao we get
the diametral plane

alx + bmy + cnz = o
conjugate to [/, m, n].
7-41. To find the centre of the section by the plane
lx+my+nz+p~o

we may find the pole P of this plane, then OP cuts the plane in
the centre C. The coordinates of P are found by identifying the
equation of the plane with the equation of the polar of [x r , y', z']

ax'x + by'y + cz'z — i = o,
hence x'= — Ijap, y' — — m/bp, z'= — n/cp.

The freedom-equations of OP are

ax = lt, by = mt, cz=nt.
This line cuts the given plane where

t (I 2 / a + m 2 /b + n 2 jc) +p = o;
whence the coordinates of the centre are given by

ax _by _cz _ p

T~m~n l 2 /a+m 2 /b + n 2 /c'

vii] FROM THEIR SIMPLEST EQUATIONS 133
7-411. The following alternative method is also useful.
Take any point P= [x', y', z']. The freedom-equations of a

line through P are

x=x' + lr, y=y'+mr, z=z' + nr.
This line cuts the surface where

(al 2 + bm 2 + en 2 ) r 2 + 2 (alx' + bmy' + enz') r

+ (ax' 2 + by' 2 + cz' 2 -i)= o.
If P is the mid-point of the chord through P we have
alx' + bmy' + enz' = o.

7-412. If P is a fixed point this equation determines the direc-
tions of the chords which are bisected at P, and we find that all
these lines lie in the plane

ax' (x - x') + by ' (y -y') + cz' (z - z') = o.

This represents the section which has its centre at P.

7-413. If Pis a variable point and [/, m, n] a fixed direction the
equation

alx + bmy + enz =0

represents the locus of mid-points of the system of chords
parallel to [I, m, «], i.e. the diametral plane conjugate to this
direction.

7-414. The equation

ax x (x 2 - x x ) + by x (y 2 -yj + cz t (z 2 -z 1 ) = o

connects the two points (x ± ) and (x 2 ) which have the unsym-
metrical property that the chord joining them is bisected at
(xj). If fa) is fixed and (xj) variable the locus of fa) is that of
the mid-point of chords through the fixed point (x 2 ). The equa-
tion of this locus is therefore

ax(x 2 -x) + by{y % —y) + cz(z 2 —z) = o,

i.e. a (x - £* 2 ) a + b (y - %y 2 ) 2 +c(z- £* 2 ) 2

^liaxf + byf + cz 2 ),

which represents a similar quadric with centre at the mid-point
of the radius-vector to (* 2 ).

134 PROPERTIES OF QUADRIC SURFACES [chap.
7-42. Conjugate diameters.

The diametral plane aIx+bmy+cnz=o is conjugate to the
direction [/, m, n] and we say in particular that it is conjugate to
the diameter in that direction. Denote the point at infinity in
the direction [I, m, n] by P, and let P' = [/', m', ri, o] be any point
at infinity in the conjugate diametral plane. Then the polar of
P' passes through P. Hence the diametral plane conjugate to
[/', m', ri] contains P and therefore contains the diameter OP.
Let these two diametral planes intersect in OP", where

P" = [l",tn",ri,o]
is the point at infinity in both planes. Then the diametral plane
conjugate to OP" contains both OP and OP". We have then a
set of three diametral planes, each conjugate to the line of inter-
section of the other two.

£,2 yi %i

Take the ellipsoid — 2 +p + -j = i ,

and let P x = [x x , y lt «J be any point on the surface, so that

x 1 2 la 2 +y 1 i /b 2 +z 1 i lc 2 =x.
The diametral plane conjugate to OP t is

xxja 2 +yy 1 /b i + zzjc 2 = o.
Choose P 2 = [x 2 , y 2 , sj any point on the section by this plane, so
that * 2 2 /a 2 +y 2 2 lb* + z*jc* = i

and x 1 x 2 la 2 +y 1 y 2 jb 2 +z 1 z 2 /c 2 =o.

The diametral plane conjugate to OP 2 is

xx 2 ja? +yy 2 lb* + zz 2 /c 2 = o,

which passes through P x .

These two diametral planes cut in a diameter which cuts the
surface in a point P 3 = [x 3 , y 3 , z 3 ]. We have then the two sets of
equations

x 2 x 3 y 2 y 3 z 2 z 3 _ ^_,V,?l_ t

~ti* + ~b* + ~? r ~ ' a 2+ 6 a c 2 '

x s xi , y 3 yi , *3*i__ ^,k 2 i.^-,

~d*~ + ~W + c 2 ' a i + b* + c 2 '

«ix 2 y x y 2 z x z 2 _ * 3 a yf z^ _

~^~ + ~P~ c 2 ' a a + 6 2 c 2 ~ '

vii] FROM THEIR SIMPLEST EQUATIONS 135

If we put xja = A]l , y x \b = ^ , zjc = v 1 , etc., these equations show
that Aj, /*!, v lt etc., are the direction-cosines of three mutually
perpendicular lines, and we have the derived relations (see 2-9)

hence x 1 2 +x 2 2 +x 3 2 =a 2 ,

yi 2 +y2 2 +y s 2 =b i ,

z 1 2 +z 2 2 +z 3 2 =c 2 ,

fHVi + IH V 2 + f l a v s = o> etc ->
yiZ 1 +y 2 z 2 +y 3 z 3 =o,
Zi x x + z 2 x 2 + z 3 x s = o,

x iyi + x zyz + %ya = °-

7-421. Lengths of conjugate diameters of an ellipsoid.

OP x 2 = xf + y? + zf, etc.,
hence OP 1 2 +OP i 2 +OP 3 2 =o 2 +b 2 +c 2 .

7-422. Volume of the parallelepiped whose edges are three
conjugate semi-diameters.

The volume of the parallelepiped whose corners are [o, o, o],

[»i»yi»*J>etc.,

V= xi y x »!

x 2 y% z 2

#3 y% z z

Squaring this determinant we have

1 *^fc 3

a_

T,x 2 lixy T,xz

=

a 2

y-i. ya y*

Ytyx Ey 2 Syar

b 2

»1 «2 2s

lence

ILzx TiZy S2 2

00 c 2

7-43. If the diametral plane alx + bmy + cnz = o of the surface
ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 =i is perpendicular to the conjugate direction

[I, m, n] we have

al_ btn _cn

1

m

If l^o, either m=o or a=&, and either n= o or a=c. Hence
i£a,b,c are all unequal, two of the quantities /, m, n must vanish,
and the only diametral planes which are perpendicular to their
conjugate directions are the coordinate-planes. These are called

136 PROPERTIES OF QUADRIC SURFACES [chap.

the principal diametral planes and the principal axes. They are the
only planes and axes of symmetry.

If a = b # c, then n = o. The surface is a surface of revolution,
the axis of revolution being the axis of z, a principal axis. Any
diameter perpendicular to this is also a principal axis.

If a=b=c, the surface is a sphere, and any diameter is a
principal axis.

7-5. In the case of the hyperboloids the metrical relations re-
quire modification, and it is convenient to take together the two
associated hyperboloids

a^b 2 c 2 -

These are separated from one another by the asymptotic cone

x 2 , v 2 z 2

— (- = o

a 2 ^b 2 c 2

Diameters which lie within this cone cut the hyperboloid of two
sheets in real points, but cut the hyperboloid of one sheet in
imaginary points. Diameters lying outside this cone are inter-
sectors of the hyperboloid of one sheet, and non-intersectors of
the hyperboloid of two sheets.

Let [/, m, n] be the direction-cosines of a diameter within the
asymptotic cone. Then

l 2 \a 2 +m 2 \b 2 -n 2 \c 2 <o, =-k~\ say.
The conjugate diametral plane for either of the hyperboloids is
Ix my nz _
a* + ~W~~c*~ -

This cuts the hyperboloid of one sheet in a real ellipse. The
diameter [/, m, n] cuts the hyperboloid of two sheets where

x/l=y/m = */» = ± (- l 2 /a 2 - m 2 /b 2 + n 2 /c 2 )~i =±k,

and the equation of the tangent-plane at one of these points is

lx/a 2 + myjb 2 — nzjc 2 = k _1 .

The enveloping cylinder with axis [/, m, n] of the hyperboloid
of one sheet is

(- x 2 ja 2 -y*jb 2 + z 2 Jc 2 + 1) = (lx/a 2 + my\b 2 - nz\c 2 ) 2 k\

vn] FROM THEIR SIMPLEST EQUATIONS 137

and this is cut by the tangent-plane in the same section as the
asymptotic cone (Fig. 34).

7-6. When a central quadric is re-
ferred to a set of conjugate diameters
as coordinate-axes (oblique) its equa-
tion is of the same form as when
referred to its principal axes. This
follows because each diametral plane
bisects all chords in the conjugate
direction.

The centre and the points at in-
finity on the three conjugate diameters
form a self-polar tetrahedron. p ig

Ex. The ellipsoid with conjugate diameters the lines which bisect
pairs of opposite edges of a tetrahedron touches the edges at their
mid -points.

Let A, A'; B, B'; C, C" be the mid-points of the edges. Then
BCB'C is a parallelogram, and therefore BB' and CC intersect at
their mid-points. Hence AA', BB', CC are all concurrent at their
mid-points. Let the coordinates of A, A' be [±a, o, o], B, B'
[o, ± b, o], and C, C [o, o, ±c]. Then, referred to axes OA, OB, OC,
the equation of the ellipsoid is

x i la 2 +y i lb 2 +z 2 /c 2 = i.

The edge through A is parallel to BC whose direction-ratios are
[o, b, —c\. Hence the equations of this edge are x=a, y/b+z/c=o.
But x = a is the tangent-plane to the ellipsoid at A, hence the edge
is a tangent to the surface.

7-7. Normals.

The tangent-plane at [x', y', z'] is

ax'x + by 'y + cz'z = 1 .

Hence the normal at this point is

x — x'_y—y'_z—z'
ax' by' cz'

7-71. Every normal is perpendicular to its polar, for the polar
of the normal at P lies in the tangent-plane at P. Hence all the
normals which can be drawn from a given point P[X, Y, Z\, not

138 PROPERTIES OF QUADRIC SURFACES [chap.

in general on the surface, are generators of the cone which con-
sists of the lines through P which are perpendicular to their
polars, i.e. the cone (7-36, Ex. 3)

^ X

H) =<

x-X\b

1-12. Number of normals which can be drawn from a given
point.

If the normal at [x\ y', z'] passes through [X, Y, Z],

X-x' Y-y' Z-z' t

- — — = 1 ; ■ = = t, say,

ax by cz' J

therefore x' = — ■ — ., y' — — —r., %' = —. — ;•
l+at J i+bt i+ct

But ax' 2 + by' 2 +cz' 2 =i,

aX 2 b Y 2 cZ 2

therefore (l+^+tT+S^+tT^ 1 - 1 '

i.e. (at+ i) 2 (bt+ i) 2 (ct+ i) 2 -l,aX 2 (bt+ i) 2 (ct+ i) 2 =o.

This is an equation of the sixth degree in t . Hence six normals
may be drawn through a given point.

7-73. The normals at two points P, Q do not in general inter-
sect. Suppose they intersect in R. Let a, j3 be the tangent-
planes at P, Q, and y the polar of R. The polar of P is a, and the
polar of Q is /?, hence the polar of PQ is the line (a/?). Now the
plane PQR is perpendicular to both a and jS and therefore per-
pendicular to (a/?). This is therefore a condition that the normals
should intersect. All the lines through P which are perpendicular
to their polars form a cone, and this cone cuts the surface in a
curve (of the fourth order).

The tangent-plane at P cuts the cone in two generating lines
which are such that each is perpendicular to its polar, but their
polars are also in the tangent-plane and have this same property.
Hence each is the polar of the other, and the two generators are
perpendicular. Hence at any point P on the surface there are
two directions in the surface (principal directions) such that the
normals at points near P cut the normal at P, and these two

vii] FROM THEIR SIMPLEST EQUATIONS 139
directions are at right angles. The curves on the surface which
have the property that normals to the surface at neighbouring
points on the curve intersect are called lines of curvature. Through
every point on the surface there pass two lines of curvature, and
these are at right angles.

7-8. The paraboloids.

7-81. The diametral properties of the paraboloids are some-
what different from those of the central quadrics.
Let the equation of the surface be

ax 2 + by 2 + zcz = o.
The line x=x' + lr, y=y'+mr, z=z' + nr

cuts the surface where

a(lr+x') 2 +b(mr+y') 2 +2c(nr+z') = o,
i.e. (al 2 +bm 2 )r 2 + 2(ax'l+by'm + cn)r

+ (ax' 2 + by ' 2 + 2cz') - o.
If /=o and m = o, one root of this quadratic is infinite, hence
all lines parallel to the axis of z meet the surface in a point at
infinity.

The point [x\ y', z'] will be the mid-point of the chord if
alx' + bmy' + cn = o.
Hence if/, m, n are given, i.e. for a system of parallel chords, the
locus of the mid-points is the plane

alx + bmy + cn = o,

and this plane is parallel to the #-axis. We have therefore to con-
sider all planes parallel to the #-axis as diametral planes, and all
lines parallel to the sr-axis as diameters, and hence the centre
must be regarded as a point at infinity.

If the diametral plane alx + bmy + cn = o is perpendicular to
the conjugate direction [/, m, n], we have

al_bm_o
I m n

Hence, provided that a i=b, w=o, and either /=o or m=o.
Hence the two planes x = o, j = o are principal planes. If a=b
we have a paraboloid of revolution and all planes through the
axis of z are principal planes.

There is no diametral plane conjugate to the direction of the
ar-axis [o, o, i] except the plane at infinity, but all sections
parallel to the plane of xy have their centres on the #-axis ; in
particular the plane of xy is the tangent-plane at O. O is called
the vertex.

7-82. Normals to the paraboloids.

The tangent-plane at [x\ y', z'] is

ax'x + by'y + c (z + z') = o,
and freedom-equations of the normal are

x=x'(i + af),
y=y'(i + bt),
z=z' + ct.
If the normal passes through the fixed point [X, Y, Z],
X=x'(i + at),
Y=y'(i + bt),
Z=z' + ct.
But ax'^ + by'i+zcz'^o,

, aX* , bY* tFT x

hence (T^r + ir+w +2c(z - ct)=0 -

This equation is of the fifth degree in t, hence five normals pass
through a given point. The sixth normal must be the diameter
through the given point. This counts as a normal since the plane
at infinity is a tangent-plane, [o, o, i, o] is the point at infinity,
and the tangent there is zv=o.

7-9. EXAMPLES.

i. Find the equations of the tangent-planes to
2x*-6y i +2z 2 = $which pass through the line x+9y-3z=o = 3X-3y+6z-5. Ans. 4^+6j+3^=5, 2x— izy+<)z=s. 2. Show that 2x-2y-2Z + % = o is a tangent-plane to 4x 2 +y 2 -gz 2 = 16, and find the point of contact. Ans. [-1,4, _§]. vn] FROM THEIR SIMPLEST EQUATIONS 141 3. If Z and /' are polar-lines with respect to a quadric and the common transversal through the centre meets them in P and P', prove that the polar-planes of P and P' are parallel to both / and /'. 4. Prove that the product of the lengths of a pair of opposite edges of a tetrahedron, self-polar with respect to a sphere, is in- versely proportional to the shortest distance between that pair. (Math. Trip. I, 1914.) 5. Prove that, if the chord which joins two points of the ellipsoid x 2 la 2 +y 2 lb 2 + z 2 /c 2 =i touches the ellipsoid x 2 /a 2 +y 2 lb 2 + z 2 /c 2 = %, the two points must lie at the extremities of conjugate diameters of the former, and the point of contact must bisect the chord. (Math. Trip. I, 1915.) 6. Show that any set of three equal conjugate diameters of the ellipsoid whose equation is x 2 Ja 2 + (y 2 + z 2 )/b 2 = 1 lie on a circular cone and that the cosine of the angle between any two is (a 2 -b 2 )l(a 2 + 2 b 2 ). (Math. Trip. I, 1913.) 7. Show that the plane through the extremities P, Q, R of three conjugate diameters of the ellipsoid x 2 /a 2 +y 2 /b 2 +z 2 /c 2 =i touches the ellipsoid x 2 /a 2 +y*/b 2 +z 2 /c 2 = % at the centroid of the triangle PQR. 8. If a point P be chosen on a line / such that the polar-plane of P with respect to the quadric ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 = 1 is parallel to /, and /' is the polar-line of /, prove that the plane through V and the origin O cuts Z in P. If the coordinates of P are [X, Y, Z], show that the plane through Z and O cuts V in the point X/2,aX 2 , YfLaX 2 , ZfZaX 2 , and that the polar of this point is parallel to /'. 142 PROPERTIES OF QUADRIC SURFACES [chap. 9. Show that the locus of points on the quadric ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 =i the normals at which all intersect the straight line (x-X)/l=(y- Y)/m=(z-Z)ln is the curve of intersection with the quadric 2/(6 — c)yz + S (mZ — n Y) ax = o. 10. Prove that the condition that all the normals to the ellipsoid x 2 /a 2 +y 2 /b 2 + z 2 /c 2 = 1 at the points of intersection with the plane lx/a + my/b + nz/c= 1 should intersect one straight line is 2(m 2 w 2 — P)(b 2 -c 2 ) 2 = o, and that if this condition is satisfied all the normals at the points of intersection with the plane x/al+y/bm + z/cn+ 1=0 will intersect the same straight line. Prove also that when l=m = n—\ the normals all intersect the straight line a(b 2 -c 2 )x=b{c 2 -a 2 )y=c(a 2 -b 2 )z. 11. Prove that the six normals to the quadric ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 =i which pass through the point P= [X, Y, Z] are generators of the cone XaX(b-c)(y- Y)(z-Z) = o. 12. Show that the cone in Ex. 11 contains also as generators the line OP and the lines through P parallel to the axes ; also the normal through P to its polar-plane. 13. Show that the feet of the six normals from [X, Y, Z] to the quadric ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 = 1 are the intersections of the surface with the cubic curve whose parametric equations are px = X(i+bt)(i+ct), ...,pw = (i+at)(i+bf)(i+ci). 14. Show that the cubic curve in Ex. 13 lies on the cone 15. If the quadric is a surface of revolution, show that there are just four normals through a point and that they lie in a meridian plane. The other two normals have become isotropic lines through the point in a plane perpendicular to the axis. vh] FROM THEIR SIMPLEST EQUATIONS 143 16. If the feet of three of the six normals drawn from a given point to the quadric ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 = 1 lie on the plane Ix + my + nz +p = o, show that the feet of the other three will lie on the plane ax 1 1 + by/m + czjn — 1 /p = o. 17. Find the radius of a sphere concentric with an ellipsoid of semi-axes a, b, c, such that an octahedron can be inscribed in the ellipsoid and circumscribed about the sphere, and show that if one such octahedron exists, an infinite number exist, all with their diagonals intersecting at right angles at the centre. Arts. r = abc/^/Eb 2 c 2 . 18. Show that, for the same radius as in Ex. 17, an infinity of parallelepipeds can be inscribed in the ellipsoid and circum- scribed about the sphere. 19. Show that the condition that the plane lx + my + nz=o should cut the cone ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 + zfyz + zgzx + zhxy = in two conjugate diameters of the quadric Ax i + By i + Cz i = i is (Bc+Cb)P+ ...-zAfmn- ...=o. 20. Prove that the condition that the cone ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 + zfyz + zgzx + zhxy = o should have three generating lines coinciding with three con- jugate diameters of the quadric Ax 2 + By 2 + Cz 2 =i is a/A + b/B+c/C^o, and that if this condition is satisfied there are an infinite number of such triads of generating lines. 21. If [/, m, n; I', tri, n'] are line-coordinates of a normal to the quadric ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 = 1 show that W mm' nri {La(b-cfm ,2 n' 2 }i a(b-c)~b{c-a) c{a-b) (b-c){c-a){a-b)' CHAPTER VIII THE REDUCTION OF THE GENERAL EQUATION OF THE SECOND DEGREE 8-1. We consider now the general equation of the second degree in x, y, z, or the homogeneous equation in x, y, z, zv. The surfaces represented must include the ellipsoid, hyperboloids, and paraboloids, since their equations are of the second degree. The geometrical property which they have in common is that an arbitrary straight line cuts the surface in two points, real, coin- cident, or imaginary. We call the general surface a quadric surface or quadric. The general equation of the second degree in x, y, z is F(x, y , z) = ax % + by 2 + cz* + zfyz + zgzx + zhxy + 2px + zqy + zrz + d=o. The homogeneous equation is written more symmetrically, using x , x t , x 2 , x s for the coordinates, or shortly '£Z,a rt x r x,=o (r, s=o, i, 2, 3), where* a rs =a sr . 8-11. The equation contains ten terms; the ratios of these give nine independent constants whose values determine the equation. We say that the constant-number of a quadric is 9. The condition that the surface should pass through a given point gives an equation which is linear and homogeneous in the ten constants ; this is therefore called a linear condition. Nine such equations in general determine the ratios of the constants uniquely. Hence in general one quadric can be drawn to pass through nine given points. If three of the points lie on a straight line all points of this straight line must lie on the surface (otherwise the line would cut the surface in three points), and the line is a generating line of the surface. If a second set of three points lie on another line * There is no loss of generality in this assumption, for the sum of the two terms a n x r x s + a„x a x r can always be replaced by 2a„' *,»:,. chap, viii] EQUATION OF SECOND DEGREE i 4S which does not cut the first one, we have a second generating line. Three mutually skew lines therefore uniquely determine a quadric. If two sets of three points lie on two intersecting lines the six points may, so far as they serve to determine the quadric, be replaced by five: the point of intersection, and any other points, two on each line. We would then have an insufficient number of points to determine the quadric. 8-12. Any plane section of a quadric is a conic, for any line in the plane of section cuts the surface, and therefore the curve of section, in two points. Five coplanar points determine a conic. Any quadric which passes through five given points in a plane a will contain the conic C which is determined by the five points; for the plane a cuts the quadric in a conic, and since this conic contains the five given points it must be the conic C. Hence if a quadric has to pass through a given conic it has still 4 degrees of freedom. This may be shown also as follows. Let the conic be determined by the two equations F 2 = o and F t = o, the latter an equation of the first degree representing the plane of the conic, the former an equation of the second degree representing any quadric which contains the conic. Then the equation F 2 +F 1 L = o, whereiisan expression of the first degree, represents anyquadric which contains the conic, and L contains four disposable constants. If six of the points which determine a quadric lie in one plane, either they all lie on one conic, in which case the quadric is not fully determined; or the plane itself must form part of the quadric; the other three points then determine a second plane, and the quadric consists of these two planes. In order that the quadric may be determinate no four of the nine points may be collinear, not more than six may lie in one plane, and not more than five on one conic. 8-13. A proper quadric cannot in general be made to pass through two conies, for each conic requires five data and there- fore ten are given. But the planes of the two conies together form a degenerate quadric which contains the two conies, and this is in general the only quadric containing the two conies. 146 REDUCTION OF THE GENERAL [chap. But if we cut a quadric by two planes we get two conies through which a proper quadric passes. These two planes inter- sect in a straight line, and this cuts the quadric in two points which are common to the two conies. Hence the condition that two conies should be capable of having a proper quadric surface passed through them is that they should have two points (real, coincident, or imaginary) in common. Each of these requires three other conditions to determine it, hence we have only 3 + 3 + 3 = 8 conditions. Hence if one quadric, other than two planes, can be drawn to pass through two conies, an infinite number can be drawn. All these quadrics touch one another in the two common points, for the tangents to the two conies are tangents to each quadric, and the plane determined by them is a tangent- plane to each quadric. Ex. i. Prove that any two spheres have double contact with one another. The two spheres intersect in a circle. They have also in common the circle at infinity. Therefore they touch in two points, viz. the points J, J in which the circle cuts the plane at infinity. Ex. 2. Show that an infinity of quadrics can be drawn to pass through two circles in parallel planes. Ex. 3. Given a conic S in a plane a, and three points A, B, C in another plane /}, to construct the conic which passes through A, B, C and the two points H, K (real or imaginary) in which S cuts the plane jS. When two conies have two common points the two involutions, determined on their common chord by pairs of conjugate points with respect to the two conies, coincide, for they each have the two common points as double-points. Thus, even when the conies inter- sect in imaginary points, the polars of any point on their common chord intersect on that line. Hence a solution of the problem is afforded as follows. Let / be the line of intersection of a and /S. Projecting / to infinity and at the same time S into a circle, the required conic becomes a circle also, and its centre may be constructed in the usual way by bisecting the joins of A, B, C perpendicularly. Hence we can construct the pole of / with regard to the required conic in the following way. Let BC cut I in. P and determine D the harmonic conjugate of P with respect to B, C. Let the polar of P with respect to S cut / in P'. Similarly determine E, F and Q',R'. Then DP', EQ', FR' are concurrent in a point O, the pole of / with respect to the i.e. vih] EQUATION OF THE SECOND DEGREE 147 required conic. Let AO cut / in L and determine A', the harmonic conjugate of A with respect to O, L. Then A' is also a point on the required conic. Similarly we find B' on OB and C" on OC, and thus six real points have been determined on the conic, and any number of other points can be found by Pascal's theorem. 8-2. Conjugate points. Let F(x, y, z,w) = o be the equation of the quadric in homo- geneous coordinates, and let P= [x, y, z, zv] and P' = [x',y',z', w'] be any two points. The coordinates of any point Q on the line PP' are [x'+Xx, y'+Xy, z' + Xz, w'+Xw]. If this point lies on the quadric we have F(x' +Xx,y'+ Xy, z' +Xz,w' + Xw) = o, +F(x',y',z',w') = o (1) a quadratic giving the two points of intersection Q t and Q 2 of the line PP' with the quadric, corresponding to the roots A 2 and V If (PP', QxQ^ is harmonic, A 1 +A 2 =o, hence the condition that P, F be conjugate points with respect to the quadric is dF- dF , dF dF ; M + yty +sl dz-' + w W This relation is bilinear and symmetrical in x, y, z, w and x', y', z', w'. 8-21. If P' is fixed equation (2) represents the polar-plane oiP'. If P, P' are conjugate points, and P' lies on the surface, equation (1) becomes X 2 F(x, y, z, w) = o. Hence either F(x, y,z,w) = oorX= o. 8-22. In the first case equation (1) is identically satisfied. Hence ifPandP' are conjugate points and both lie on the surface, the line PP' lies entirely in the surface and is therefore a generating line. 8-23. In the second case, when the equation reduces to A 2 = o, PP 1 meets the surface in two coincident points at P' and is there- fore a tangent. The locus of points P such that PP' is a tangent is represented by equation (2), which is therefore the equa- tion of the tangent-plane at P'. x ^ + y^ +z ^ +a; ^?= o ( 2 ) 148 REDUCTION OF THE GENERAL [chap. 8-231. The tangent-plane at P 1 , like any plane, cuts the quadric in a conic. Let P be any point on this conic. Then since P, P' are conjugate points, both lying on the conic, every point of the line PP' also lies on the surface. The conic therefore breaks up into the line PP' and another line through P'. Hence the tangent-plane at any point cuts the surface in two generating lines. 8*24. The two lines l lf 4 through P' may be real and distinct, coincident, or imaginary, and the point P' is called accordingly a hyperbolic, parabolic, or elliptic point of the surface. If 4 coincides with 4 every line in the tangent-plane it at P' meets the surface in two coincident points, and is therefore a tangent, wis then tangent' at all points of 4- Let Q be any other point on the surface, not on l x . The tangent-plane at Q cannot contain 4 but meets it in a point C, and CQ is a generating line. There can be no other generating line through Q, for this would meet n in a point lying on the surface and therefore on 4 . Hence Q is also a parabolic point. For any other point the tangent- plane must meet CQ and CP' in the same point, i.e. C. Hence all the generating lines pass through one point C, and the surface is a cone with vertex C If 4 and 4 are real and distinct the tangent-plane at any other point Q meets them in real and distinct points R lt P 2 , both con- jugate to Q and lying in the surface. Hence gP x and QR 2 are real and distinct generating lines. If 4 and 4 are imaginary, the generating lines through any other point are also imaginary. Hence if one point on the surface is a hyperbolic (elliptic) point, every point on the surface is hyperbolic (elliptic). 8-25. Since the relation between conjugate points P and P' is symmetrical it follows that each point lies on the polar-plane of the other. If it is a given plane and P its pole, the polar-planes of all points on it pass through P. If / is a given line and P, Q two points on it, the polar-planes a and j3 of P and Q determine a line /'. If P' is any point on V the polar-planes of P and Q both pass through P and therefore the polar-plane of P' passes through P and Q and therefore con- tains /. The two lines / and /' are therefore such that the polar- vin] EQUATION OF THE SECOND DEGREE 149 plane of any point on one of them contains the other. These are called polar-lines. If a line / cuts its polar /' in P, P is conjugate to itself and therefore lies on the surface. P is conjugate to every point in / and in /', hence I and /' are tangents to the surface. If t and t' are the generating lines through P, («', //') is harmonic. If / cuts the surface in P and Q the polar of / is the intersection of the tangent-planes at P and Q since these are the polar-planes of these points. Let /, /' be the generating lines through P, and m, m' those through Q. Then /, m' meet in a point P', and /', m in a point Q'. P'Q' is the polar of PQ and cuts the surface in F and Q'. Hence when the generating lines are real two polar-lines either both cut the surface in real points or both in imaginary points. If the surface has imaginary generators, and one line cuts the surface in real points P, Q, the polar-line, being the inter- section of the tangent-planes at P and Q, cannot meet the surface in real points. Hence, in this case, of two polar-lines one cuts the surface in real points and the other in imaginary points. 8-31. The equations ^ = 0, ^ = 0, ^ = 0, g = o represent the polar-planes of the vertices of the tetrahedron of reference. In general these form a tetrahedron. In a special case they may pass through one point. Eliminating x, y, z, w between these equations we obtain the condition As a h g P h b f Q g f c r P <L r d =0. This determinant is called the discriminant of the quadric. If C= [x', y', z', w'] is the point through which the polar-planes all pass, we have j p therefore C lies on the surface. If P= [x, y, z, w ] i s any other point on the surface the equation (1) of 8-2 is identically satisfied, and hence the line CPlies entirely in the surface. The surface there- fore consists of lines passing through C, and is a cone with vertex C. ISO REDUCTION OF THE GENERAL [chap. 8-311. The quadric may be further specialised. If the polar- planes all have a line in common the quadric degenerates to two planes passing through this line. The condition for this is that the matrix [A] should be of rank 2. If the matrix [A] is of rank i , all polar-planes coincide, and the quadric degenerates to two coincident planes. 8-32. Invariants. An invariant property of a geometrical figure is a property of the figure which remains true when the figure is subjected to some geometrical transformation. Analytically, the figure is de- termined by certain equations in the coordinates, and a geo- metrical transformation consists of a set of equations by which the coordinates are changed into a new system. An invariant is then a function of the coefficients of the equations of the figure which is unaltered by the transformation, or alternatively the invariant property is represented by an equation in the co- efficients of the figure which is unaltered by the transformation. These are not quite the same thing. In the first case the functions in question are absolute invariants ; in the second we have to deal with functions of the coefficients whose ratios only remain un- altered ; these are relative invariants. Thus when a pair of points P 1 s [x x , jj, P 2 = [x 2 , y J in a plane is subjected to a linear transformation x=l 1 x' + m 1 y', y = l i x' + m 2 y', the function x x y 2 — x 2 y x becomes {l x x x + m^) (W + m^yf) - (W'+ m^') (W + m^') = (l x m 2 - kmi) (xi'yz - * 2 >i')- If x 1 y i —x 9 y 1 =o, the 11 x x 'y 2 -x 2 y x =o ^ so > i- e - th e property that the line joining the two points passes through the origin is an invariant property for this transformation. If the trans- formation is orthogonal, so that / 1 =cosa, m 1 =sina, l t = — sina, m 2 = cosa, then l 1 m 2 — l 2 m 1 =i and x 1 y 2 -x 2 y 1 is invariant; it represents in fact double the area of the triangle OP x P 2 . *ij2 _ «yi is a 11 absolute invariant for the orthogonal trans- /l»Z 2 - / 2 Wi = viii] EQUATION OF THE SECOND DEGREE 151 formation, but only a relative invariant, or simply an invariant, for the general linear transformation. The factor k n h I h m 2 I is called the modulus of the transformation. Similarly in three dimensions if the coordinates are subjected to a linear transformation x=l 1 x' + m 1 y' + n 1 z', y = l 2 x' + m 2 y' + n 2 z', z = kx' + m 3 y' + n 3 z', the function As x 1 ^ z t *z y>i * 2 *3 y$ %s

of the coordinates of three points becomes

k
k
h

m 1
trio

ma

"i

«3

=LA'.

< y 2
* 8 ' y%

A is then an invariant and L is the modulus of the transfor-
mation.

Ex. Interpret the equation A = o, and the value of the invariant
when the transformation is an orthogonal one.

8-33. We now define more precisely an invariant as a function
1(d) of the coefficients, represented collectively by a, in the
equations which determine a figure, such that if a' represent the
new coefficients after a linear transformation x r =I,l ra x,'

I{a')^(l rs )I{a),
the factor <j> (l„) being a function of the constants /„ belonging to
the equations of transformation. We shall prove that if Lis the
determinant \ l„ \ and 1(a) is a polynomial function of a, then
(f>(l rs ) is a power of L. To prove this we shall require the
following :

8-331. Lemma. A determinant cannot be expressed as a product
of factors rational and integral as regards the elements l rt . For
suppose A = (fitft. Since A is linear in the elements of any row or
column, no element can be contained in both factors. Suppose

153 REDUCTION OF THE GENERAL [chap.

that <J> contains / M and that ifi contains /„. Then <f> cannot contain
any of the elements l vv or l m except l M , and ifi cannot contain any
of the elements l rv or l ua except /„ . Hence neither <f> nor t/i can
contain the elements l va and / ro , which are both involved in A.
The factorisation is therefore impossible.

8-332. Now the inverse transformation, which expresses x'

in terms of x, is

Lx a =2jLi ra x r ,

where L Ta is the cof actor of /„ in the determinant ; hence

I(a)^(L r JL)I(a').
We have therefore

<f>(l ra ).<j>(L r JL) = i.

Now <£(/„) is rational and integral in /„, and <f>(L r „IL) is rational
and integral in L r ,jL. The latter can be made integral in L ra by
multiplying by a power of L, say L k , and then, L T3 being ex-
pressed in terms of /„, we have

<f,(l„)4(lr.)=L\
But by the lemma the determinant L has no rational factors in
/„, hence both <£(/„) and t(t(l ra ) must be powers of L.
If (j>(l ra )=L w , w is called the weight of the invariant /.

8-34. Projective invariant of the general quadric.

The general quadratic expression 22a„ x r x a is transformed by
the general linear equations

*,=2/ rt */ (r=o, 1,2,3)
into a similar expression

2i2j<z rs x r x a .

The condition that the quadric should be specialised as a cone
is that the discriminant A= | a T , | should vanish. This is clearly
an invariant property.

Now 22a„ x T x „ = 22 (a rs 2/ ri */ I>l 3} x/)

r s i i

= 22 (a ti Zl ir x T ' Zl ja x s ')

ii r «

= 2222 a (j l ir l u x r ' x a .

i i r s

Hence «„' = 22 a tj l ir l ia = 2 (l ir 2 l ia a (i ).

a % i

vin] EQUATION OF THE SECOND DEGREE 153

Write S/ /S a„=c i(l ,

i

then a„' = S/ ir c fs .

i

Hence the determinant

A's I «,/ H c „ I I /„ |.

B"t \c„\ = \a„\\l rt \.

Therefore | a r ,' | = \ a„ | | /„ | 2 ,

i.e. A'=L 2 A,

where Z,= | /„ |.

Hence the discriminant As | a„ | is an invariant, and the
modulus of the transformation is L=\l rs \. As the general
linear equations represent the general projective transformation,
A is called a projective invariant.

8-341. A quadric cannot have an absolute projective invariant
for the equations of the transformation contain sixteen constants
l tj while the equation of the quadric contains only ten. It is
therefore possible in an infinite variety of ways to transform the
given quadratic expression (not necessarily by a real transforma-
tion) into any other quadratic expression, provided only it is not
specialised; projectively, any unspecialised quadric is equivalent

8-342. From this it can be deduced that a quadric cannot have
more than one projective invariant. For if I t and I 2 were two in-
variants, so that

Ii-L'Ij, and I 2 '=I/I 2 ,

then £*.£,

T'a T a »
1 2 ±2

and I^/I 2 a would be an absolute invariant.

8-35. Condition for real generating lines.

Since A is of the fourth degree in the coefficients, its sign will
remain always the same for any real transformation. The sign of
A is therefore an invariant for real projective transformations.

Let P be any point on the quadric. Take a tetrahedron of
reference with one vertex P= [1,0, 0,0], and one plane the

154 REDUCTION OF THE GENERAL [chap.

tangent-plane at P(a) = o). Then the equation of the quadric
becomes

by 2 + cz 2 + dw 2 + zfyz + zpxw + zqyw + zrzw = o.
w=o cuts the surface where

by 2 + cz 2 + zfyz = o.
This gives real lines if f 2 — ho o. Now the discriminant of the

A= o o o p =p 2 (f 2 -bc).

o b f q
o f c r
p q r d

Hence the condition for real generating lines is that the dis-
criminant should be positive. Conversely, if the discriminant is
positive, and the quadric has real points, it has also real lines.

8-4. Polarity.

The relation of pole and polar with regard to a quadric
establishes a (i, i) correspondence or correlation of a dualistic
kind between points and planes, lines and lines. To every point
corresponds a plane, to every plane a point, and to every line
another line.

If the equation of the quadric is written

SSa„* r *, = o (r, s = o, i, 2, 3),
where a„ = a sr , the equation of the polar of the point

{Xq , Xi , X% , X$j, or simply (#'), is SS a rs x r 'x t = o. We may represent a plane by its own coordinates, which are proportional to the coefficients of x , x x , x 2 , x a in its equation. Denoting the coordinates of the polar-plane of (x) by we have then &0 =<3 W-*'o"i" a 01''' ; l."'"'2oi!*2"'"'' : 03'*'S> CtC, or f r '=Sfl„x s (r = o, 1, 2, 3). If a point lies on its own polar it lies on the quadric, and if a plane passes through its own polar it is a tangent-plane to the quadric. vm] EQUATION OF THE SECOND DEGREE 155 8-41. Correlations. We shall consider now the general dual correlation between points and planes determined by the equations l/ = Sa„*, (r=o,i,2, 3), (1) s without making the assumption a rs = a„, that is we do not as- sume any quadric to begin with. To bring out the correlation more clearly we consider all the points and planes twice over; we have a space *S consisting of points (x) and planes (£); to the points (x) correspond planes (£') and to the planes ($) correspond points (#')> and these form
a space iS".

To determine the point (x) in S which corresponds to the
plane (£') in S' we have to solve the equations (1) for x in terms
of £'. Let D represent the determinant

D= Ooo ... Oq

«80 ••• fl 3i

and let A rs denote the cofactor of a rs , so that

2a T$A ra =D, and ~La rs A ts =o if r#<. Multiplying the equations (1) by A 0s , A u , A 2S , A 3s respectively and adding, we get Dx,=i:A r .£ r ' (5=0,1,2,3). (2) Now if the point (x) lies on the corresponding plane (£'), Eg r 'x r =o, hence by (1) ISa„x a x r =o, (3) and therefore (x) lies on a certain quadric F. If the plane (£') passes through the corresponding point (*), 2*,£,' = o, hence by (2) IXA„£ r '€.' = o, and therefore (£') is tangent to a certain quadric-envelope 4> ss I£A„te t = o. (4) These two quadrics F and <S> are not in general the same. If (x) lies on F then (£') is tangent to O but not in general to F. 156 REDUCTION OF THE GENERAL [chap. To the point (x) in S corresponds the plane (£') in S' where f r '=Sfl„Xj. If x' are the current coordinates of a point on this plane we have then HH,a rs x s x r ' = o. This equation connects the coordinates of a point (x) in S and a point (x') which lies in the plane corresponding to (x). If now (x') is fixed and (x) variable this equation represents the locus of (»), a plane in S which corresponds to the point (#') in S'. If | s are the coordinates of this plane (coefficients of *„) we have g s = ZjO rs X r , r or, interchanging r and s, i r ='Ea ar x s '. s Hence if the point (x) is considered as belonging to the space S the corresponding plane is £,' = 2 a ra x, , but if (x) is considered as belonging to the space S' the corresponding plane is |/ = Sa sr * 8 . 8-42. In order that the correlation may be a polarity the two planes which correspond to any point must coincide. Hence the expressions S«„«, and 2 a sr x, must be proportional and therefore a r »=P a sr> where p is a constant factor. Interchanging r and s, a ar -pa ri . Hence p s =i and />= ±i. If p= + 1, a„=a ST and we have & polarity. 8-43. If p= — i, a„= —a tr , a„=o. In this case F and <I> do not exist since their coefficients all vanish. Every point lies on its corresponding plane and vice versa. The correlation in this case is called a null-system. 8-431. The term "null-system" is derived from statics. Any system of forces in three dimensions can be reduced to three forces -3T,' Y, Z, acting along three arbitrarily chosen rectangular axes, together with three couples L, M, N in the three coordinate-planes. If P = [x', y', z'1 is any point the moments about axes through P parallel to the coordinate-axes are L-Zy'+Yz', M-Xz'+Zx', vm] EQUATION OF THE SECOND DEGREE 157 N— Yx' + Xy', and the plane through P whose direction-cosines are proportional to these three moments has the property that the sum of the moments about any line through P in this plane is zero ; it is a null plane. Using homogeneous coordinates, if P = [x, y, z, w] and the plane is g'x+rfy + l'z + co'w^o we have pf= -Zy+Yz + Lw, pr)'= Zx -Xz + Mw, pt,'--Yx+Xy +Nw, pca'= —Lx-My—Nz. These equations determine a null-system. 8-432. In a null-system, if (x) and (y) are any two points on a line /, the plane corresponding to a variable point on /, say (x+ty), is £/ = S a„ (x, + ty 8 ) = S a T3 x s + iZ a„y, = g r +tr) r , and this passes through the fixed line /' in which the planes (£) and (ij) intersect. Thus to a line / corresponds a unique line /', as in a polarity. If the coordinates of / are (/>) and those of V are (/>') we have Pta'—ioVi-iiVo — («oi*i + 002*2+003*3) («io Jo + 012J2 + «13j3) - (flio^o + 012*2 + 013*3) («oiJi + (kaji + tfosjs) = ^01 ( Woi + <*VZpO* + dW>03 + a 3SpiS + «3li>31 + a Upli) — («01 <h& + 002 «31 + fl 03 a 12)^23 . etC - The lines / and V will coincide if This linear equation determines a linear complex of the most general form. Hence a linear complex consists of the self- corresponding lines of a null-system. If the polar-plane of P contains Q it contains the line PQ ; then reciprocally the polar- plane of Q contains P and therefore also contains the line PQ. The self-corresponding lines are thus the lines through any point and lying in the polar-plane of the point. We have assumed that 001 ^23 + 002 031 + 003 012 is not zero. If this vanishes, p^' is proportional to a m . Thus 158 REDUCTION OF THE GENERAL [chap. there is a line whose coordinates are (a), and this line corre- sponds to every line of the null-system except such as make T,a ii p ii =o; but these are the lines which intersect (a), and the lines which correspond to these are indeterminate. In this case Zaijpi^o represents a special linear complex consisting of all the lines which cut a fixed line (the directrix). 8-51. Canonical equation of a quadric. If we choose as the fundamental tetrahedron A^A X A^A 3 one which is self-polar with respect to the quadric, i.e. so that the polar of the point [i, o, o, o] is the plane [i, o, o, o], and so on, we have a rs = o where r^s, and the equation reduces to the form a x 2 + axXj 2 + Ojs^ 2 + a 3 x 3 2 = o. If the coefficients are all of the same sign, the quadric can have no real points, and is therefore virtual. There are two other cases according to the number of negative signs. Changing the notation, suppose the equation to be a 3 x 2 +b 2 y 2 — c 2 z 2 — d 2 w 2 =o. This may be written (ax — cz) (ax + cz) = (dw — by) (dw + by) and is satisfied by either (ax— cz)-*$$dw — by)} (ax—cz)=n(dw + by)\ X(ax+cz)= (dw + by)) /j.(ax+cz) = (dw — by))' where A and fi are any parameters. Hence the systems of lines represented by these pairs of equations lie entirely in the sur- face. The surface in this case has real generating lines. If the equation is a 2 x 2 + b*y* + c*z 2 -d 2 w 2 =o the plane a;=o meets the surface in no real points and hence there can be no real lines on the surface. 8-52. Specialised and degenerate quadrics. If one of the coefficients of the canonical equation, say a , is zero, the polar-plane of any point x' is ^1 ^1 *^1 ' ^2 ^2 *^2 "• ^3 ^3 ^Z == ^ and passes through the fixed point A = (i, o, o, o), which lies on the quadric. If P is any point on the quadric, A and P are vm] EQUATION OF THE SECOND DEGREE 159 conjugate and therefore the line A P lies entirely in the quadric. The quadric therefore consists of a cone with vertex A . If two of the coefficients vanish, say a and a 1} the equation which represents two planes. If three of the coefficients vanish it reduces to two coincident planes. 8-53. Projective classification of conies. Before completing the projective classification of quadrics it will be useful to do the same for conies. We consider the general conic S = ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 + zfyz + 2gzx + zhxy = o. The conic has one projective invariant, viz. the discriminant a h g h b f g f c That this is an invariant is proved in the same way as for the quadric (see 8-34), and its vanishing is the condition that the conic should degenerate to two straight lines. We denote as usual the cofactors of each element of this determinant by the corre- sponding capital letter. We have identically aS = (ax + hy +gz) 2 + (Cy 2 - 2Fyz + Bz 2 ). The discriminant of Cy 2 -2Fyz + Bz 2 is BC-F 2 =aD, and if D = o, S is the sum or difference of two squares. If also B = o, then F and H vanish since F 2 = BC and H 2 = AB. If D = o and A and B both vanish, then all the minors of the determinant vanish. Since also G 2 =AB, it follows that A, B, C are all of the same sign (or zero). Hence we deduce the results : 8-531. When the matrix [D] is of rank 2, S=o represents two distinct straight lines, which are real if no one of A, B, C is positive, imaginary if no one of A, B, C is negative (one may be zero). 8-532. When the matrix [D] is of rank 1, S=o represents two coincident lines. We shall assume now that D # o. Consider the pencil of lines z= Ay. The intersections with the conic are given by the equation ax 2 + 2(Xg + h)xy + (c\ 2 + 2fX+b)y 2 = o (1) 160 REDUCTION OF THE GENERAL [chap. The discriminant of this quadratic in x/y is (\g+hy-a(c\ 2 + 2f\+b)= -B\*+ 2 FX-C (2) The roots of equation (1) are real or imaginary according as (2) is positive or negative. If the quadratic (2) has real roots there are two critical values of A which separate the lines of the pencil into those which cut the conic and those which do not. The con- dition for this is BC—F* < o, i.e. aD < o. In this case the conic is real and the vertex [1, o, o] of the pencil is outside. If aD > o the roots of (2) are imaginary, and this quadratic is of fixed sign, + or — according as B and C are both - or both + . In the former case the lines of the pencil all cut the conic in real points; the conic is real, and the point [1, o, o] is inside. In the other case the lines of the pencil all cut the conic in imaginary points, and the conic is virtual. If a=o the point [r, o, o] lies on the conic, and the conic is real. Hence we deduce the result 8-533. When the matrix [D] is of rank 3, S=o represents a proper conic, which is virtual if aD, bD, cD, A, B, C are all positive; otherwise it is real. Ex. When the conic /(*, y, z)=o is real, prove that the point [*> y, *] is inside or outside according as D.f(x, y, z) is positive or negative. 8-54. Projective classification of quadrics. The general quadric HiZa„x r x,=o has one projective invariant, viz. the discriminant A=K, |> and its vanishing is the condition that the quadric should be a cone. The cone may be real or virtual, and in either case there is one real point, viz. the vertex, whose coordinates are \A«>i <A {1 , A iz , A i3 ], where i may be o, 1, 2 or 3 (provided these four minors are not all zero). If A 0f = o it follows (when A = o) that A v , A 2j and A& also vanish; the vertex of the cone then lies on * 3 = o. The condition for a virtual cone is that any plane, vin] EQUATION OF THE SECOND DEGREE 161 not through the vertex, should cut the cone in a virtual conic. Hence by 8-533 ^ none of the minors vanish all the quantities auAjj and a«a w — a {j 2 (*V/=o, 1, 2, 3) must be positive. If all the minors vanish the quadric degenerates to two planes, their intersection being a real line ; and if all the minors of the second order vanish, the quadric degenerates to two coincident planes. Hence we deduce the results : 8-541. When the matrix [A] is of rank 3, the quadric is a cone, which is virtual if no one of the quantities a ti A j} , ««%— a« 2 is negative, otherwise it is real. 8-542. When the matrix [A] is of rank 2, the quadric degenerates to two distinct planes, which are imaginary if no one of the quan- tities a«a w — a w 2 is negative, otherwise they are real. 8-543. When the matrix [A] is of rank 1, the quadric degenerates to two coincident planes. We shall now suppose that A#o. The discriminant of the canonical equation is a a 1 a 2 a s , and the sign of the discriminant is an invariant for real transformations. If A > o, the signs of the coefficients a , a lt a^, a t are either (1) all the same, in which case the quadric is virtual, or (2) two positive and two negative, in which case the quadric has real generating lines. If A < o, the signs are either one negative and three positive, or one positive and three negative ; in either case the quadric has real points but imaginary lines. Suppose first that A > o. The quadric is then either virtual or with real generating lines according as any one plane section is virtual or real. Taking the sections x =o, ..., x a =o, and applying 8-533, we obtain the results: 8-544. When A > o, the quadric is virtual if all the quantities a u Ajj , a u a it — a w 2 are positive, otherwise it has real generating lines. 8-545. When A < o, the quadric has real points but imaginary lines. Ex. 1 . If a quadric has real generating lines prove that the tangent- planes through a given line are real or imaginary according as the line cuts the quadric in real or imaginary points, and vice versa for a real quadric with imaginary generating lines. SAG 11 162 REDUCTION OF THE GENERAL [chap. Ex. 2. For a quadric with real generating lines prove that of two non-intersecting polar-lines either both cut the surface in real points or neither does. Ex. 3. A real quadric S=x 2 +y 2 +z 2 — zo 2 =o whose generating lines are imaginary divides space into two regions, the interior for S<o and the exterior for S > o. Every line through an interior point cuts the quadric in real points, and through a line which lies entirely in the exterior region pass two real tangent-planes. Ex. 4. A quadric whose generating lines are real does not divide space projectively into two regions. By the real collineationp«' = z, py' = zv, pz' = x, pw' =y the expression S=x 2 +y 2 — z 2 — zo 2 is transformed into —S. This transformation is not a perspective transformation or homology in which there is a fixed centre and a plane of fixed points ; in this transformation, which is sometimes called a skew involution, there are two lines of fixed points x=z,y=w and x= —z,y= —w. There is no actual homology which will change S into — S. Ex. 5. Verify that F (x, y, z, zv) = - (ax + hy +gz +pw) 2 + -~ {Cy -Fz + {aq — hp) to} 2 where C=ab—h 2 , F=gh — af, andDj^,^ are the cofactors of d, rin the determinant A. 8-6. We have now to consider the quadric in its metrical aspect, that is in relation to the plane at infinity. If C is the pole of the plane at infinity, the polar-planes of all points at infinity pass through C. And since the harmonic con- jugate of the point at infinity on the join of two points P, Q is the mid-point of PQ, all chords through C are bisected at C. C is therefore the centre of symmetry, or centre, of the quadric, planes through C are diametral planes, chords through C are diameters. 8-61. Diametral planes. Since the equation of the polar-plane of [x', y', z', zv'] is symmetrical in the two sets of coordinates, it can be written also in the form dF dF dF dF ox J oy oz 010 vm] EQUATION OF THE SECOND DEGREE 163 Let a;=o represent the plane at infinity, then the polar-plane of the point at infinity [x\ y', z', o] is ,dF , ,dF ,dF * di+y Ty +Z Tz = °- This is the diametral plane conjugate to the direction [x\ y', z']. 8-62. For all values of *', y', z' this represents a plane through the common point of the three planes dF_ dF__ dF_ dx~°' dy~°' dz~°' or shortly F x , F v , F z . This point is the centre C. The three planes F x =o, F v =o, F z =o are the diametral planes conjugate to the directions of the coordinate-axes. 8-63. The conic at infinity on a quadric. The plane at infinity zo=o cuts the quadric in a conic whose equations are f(x, y,z) = ax i + by 2 + cz 2 + zfyz + 2gzx + zhxy = o) j»=oj ' The discriminant of the first equation is a h g h b f g f c If D = o, the conic breaks up into two straight lines. The plane at infinity is then a tangent-plane. No significance is attachable to the sign of D when it is not zero, since its sign would be changed by changing the signs of all the coefficients. If D=£o the conic is either a real proper conic or virtual. For a conic at infinity there is no distinction corresponding to ellipse, parabola or hyperbola, for this refers to the nature of its intersections with the line at infinity in its plane. As the equation by itself represents a cone we see also that cones are distinguished only as real or virtual. The section of a real cone may be any type of conic. By 8-53 we obtain the following criteria for the nature of the conic at infinity : If the matrix [D] is of rank 3, the conic at infinity is virtual if aD, bD, cD, A, B, C are all positive, otherwise it is real ; if the 164 REDUCTION OF THE GENERAL [chap. matrix [D] is of rank 2, the conic becomes two straight lines which are real if no one of A, B, C is positive, imaginary if no one of A, B, C is negative ; and if the matrix [D] is of rank i, the conic reduces to two coincident lines. 8-64. Metrical classification of quadrics. (A) If the three planes F X ,F V , F z have in common a unique finite point C, the surface is called a central quadric. This is the general case, no special condition being assigned except that ZMo. If A=o the quadric is specialised as a cone. If A < o the quadric has real points and imaginary lines, and is either an ellipsoid or a hyperboloid of two sheets. If A > o the quadric is either virtual, or a hyperboloid of one sheet. To distinguish these further we consider whether the section by the plane at infinity is real or virtual. Hence by the last paragraph we obtain the results : A>o, aD, bD, cD, A, B, C all positive. Virtual quadric. „ „ not all positive. Hyperboloid of one sheet. A<o, „ „ all positive. Ellipsoid. „ „ not all positive. Hyperboloid of two sheets. A=o, „ „ all positive. Virtual cone. „ „ not all positive. Real cone. (B) If the three planes F x , F v , F z have in common a unique point at infinity, all diameters pass through this point at infinity and are therefore parallel. Further, since the polar-plane of C passes through C, C is a point on the surface, and the plane at infinity is the tangent-plane at C. The surface is a paraboloid. The analytical condition that C should be a point at infinity is D = o. The conic at infinity then becomes a pair of straight lines, real or imaginary according as A, B, C are negative or positive. D=o, A, B, C all positive. Elliptic paraboloid. „ all negative. Hyperbolic paraboloid. vin] EQUATION OF THE SECOND DEGREE 165 (C) If the planes F x , F v , F z have in common a unique finite line, there is no unique centre, but a line of centres or axis. The surface is a cylinder, elliptic or hyperbolic. The condition is that the matrix - a h g p' h b f q g f c r_ should be of rank 2. It is equivalent to the two conditions A = o, D = o. As in the case of the paraboloid, the conic at infinity again breaks up into two straight lines, real in the case of the hyper- bolic cylinder, imaginary in the case of the elliptic cylinder. A=o, Z)=o, A, B, C all positive. Elliptic cylinder. „ all negative. Hyperbolic cylinder. If the matrix [A] is of rank 2, the quadric degenerates to two planes, real or imaginary according as A, B, C are all negative or all positive (three conditions). (D) If the planes F X ,F V , F t have in common a unique line at infinity the surface is a parabolic cylinder. The condition is that the matrix h b f o P q r should be of rank 2, and this is equivalent to the condition that the matrix [D] should be of rank 1. The conic at infinity then reduces to two coincident straight lines. This is equivalent to the three conditions Z)=o, A = o, B=o. A = o, Z> = o, A = o, B=o, C=o. Parabolic cylinder. (E) If the planes F x , F v , F, coincide, forming a finite plane, we have a plane of centres. The surface degenerates to two parallel planes. The condition is that the matrix Y a h g p' h b f q .g f c r. should be of rank 1. This is equivalent to the conditions that the matrix [A] should be of rank 2 and A, B, C be all zero. 166 REDUCTION OF THE GENERAL [chap. (F) If the planes F x , F v , F g all coincide with the plane at infinity, the surface degenerates to the plane at infinity and another plane. The condition is that the matrix [D] should be of rank o, i.e. that all the coefficients a, b, c, /, g, h should vanish. (G) If the matrix [a h g p h b f q ~g f c r is of rank o the quadric reduces to the plane at infinity twice. 8-65. Principal diametral planes. A diametral plane is said to be a principal plane when it is perpendicular to its conjugate direction, and this direction is called a principal direction. The direction-cosines of the diametral plane conjugate to the direction [/, m, n\ are proportional to d f V d l dV dm' dn' i.e. al+hm+gn, hl+bm+fn, gl+fm+cn. Hence if [/, m, n] is a principal direction al+hm+gn _ hl+bm+fn _gl+fm + cn, i ~ — A, say. m n J These give two homogeneous equations in /, m, n, and therefore there are a finite number of principal directions. We have (a— X)l+hm +gn =o, hi +(b—$$m+fn =o, gl +fm +(c~X)n=o. Eliminating I, m, n a— A h g h b- f g f c- l.e. where A 3 -(a+i+c)A 2 + (^+5 + C)A-Z)=o, D= A = bc-P, B = ca-g 2 , C=ab-h\ This equation, which is called the Discriminating cubic, gives three values for A, and hence we get three sets of values of /, m, n. a h g h b f g f c vni] EQUATION OF THE SECOND DEGREE 167 8-71. The roots of the discriminating cubic are all real. Assume a>b>c, and let <f>(X) = \ 3 -(a+b + c)\* + (A+B+C)\-D = (A - a) {(A - b) (A - c) -/*} - {(A - b)g* + (\-c)h* + zfgh). Consider also the function 0(A)s(A-6)(A-c)-/». When A = — 00, c, b, + 00, 0(A)- +00, -/», -/», +00. Hence ^(A) = o has real roots a, j3 such that — oo</?<c<5<a<+oo. Then «£(«)= _{(a-%- 2 + ( a - c )A 2 +2 /^}, and since (a — £)(a — c)=/ 2 , <£(a) is a perfect square, viz. (a-AW(«) S -{(a-&)*+/A}»; and similarly for <f> (/?). Hence c£ (a) < o and <f> (£) > o. Hence substituting in <£(A), when A= —00, j8, a, +oo, 0(A) is - + - +. Hence the equation <£(A) = o has three real roots, separated by a and /J. We have supposed that a ^ /?. When a=/5, we must have (&-c) 2 +4/ 2 =o, hence b = c and/=o. Then *(A)-(A-«)(A-ft)»-(g«+A«)(A-&) = (A-&){(A-a)(A-i)-(^+^)} = (A-6){A«-(a+6)A+o4-£«-A«} = (A-J)[{A-i(a+i)} 2 -J(a-6) 2 - i? 2 -A 2 ]. Hence the roots of <f>(\) = o are all real. One root is b{ = a), one is < b and the remaining one is > b. 8-72. Multiple roots of the discriminating cubic. The occurrence of repeated roots of the equation is connected with the rank of the matrix [D]. The result is stated most con- veniently for the general equation of this form, viz. D(\) S a n +A a n ... a ln a J3 «22 + A ... #2n "2n ... a«„+A = 0, 168 REDUCTION OF THE GENERAL [chap. which is called the characteristic equation of the square matrix [a nn ] ; it is sometimes called the secular equation as it arises in astronomy in connection with the secular perturbations of planets. The general theorem, which is due to Weierstrass, is as follows : IfX is a p-repeated root of the characteristic equation, when this value is substituted the matrix [D (A)] is of rank n —p; and conversely and the proof depends upon the lemma : 8-721. If mis the rank of a symmetrical matrix, the product of two principal determinants of order m is equal to the square of another determinant of order m of the matrix ; and further the sum of all the principal determinants of order m cannot vanish. We shall consider only the determinant of the third order a h g h b f g f c If the matrix [D] is of rank 3, D ^ o. If it is of rank 2, D = o, but the minors of the second order do not all vanish. In this case we have BC-F i =aD, etc., i.e. BC=F i , CA = G\ AB=H\ as stated in the lemma. Further, A+B+C cannot vanish, for on squaring we obtain A 2 +B i +C i +2(F 2 +G 2 +IP), which can only vanish if all the second-order minors vanish. If [D] is of rank 1, all the second-order minors vanish, so that be =f 2 , ca =g 2 , ab=h 2 . But a+b+c cannot vanish, for on squar- ing this we obtain Za 8 +2E/ 2 , which can only vanish if all the elements vanish. Now consider the equation Z)(A) = a+X h g h b+X f g f e+\ For the values X lt A^, A 3 the determinant vanishes and [£)(A)] is of rank 2 at most. The condition for equal roots is that both D(A) = o and D' (A) = o. But, differentiating with regard to A, we have Z)'(A) = a + 0+ y , vm] EQUATION OF THE SECOND DEGREE 169 where a, jS, y are the principal minors, i.e. oi=(b+X)(c+X)-f 2 , etc. Now by the above results if [D(X)] is of rank 2, a+P+y cannot vanish, and hence the roots are all unequal. If [D(X)] is of rank 1, a, /? and y all vanish and D'(A) = o. Hence there are equal roots. The condition for three equal roots is further o=Zr(A) = 2{(a+A) + (&+A) + (c+A)}, but this, being the sum of the principal minors of first order, cannot vanish unless the determinant is of rank o. 8-722. Hence (1) if [Z>(A)] is of rank 3, A is not a root, (2) if [Z)(A)] is of rank 2, A is a simple root, (3) if [D(X)] is of rank 1, A is a double root, and (4) if [D(X)] is of rank o, A is a triple root. 8-73. The three principal directions are in general mutually at right angles. We have d l M. V dl _dm _dn _ ,. 1 m n ~ ' where A is a root of the discriminating cubic. Since /is a homogeneous quadratic in /, m, n jdf 9f df df 3/ df Hence 2A 2 (/ 1 / 2 4-»w 1 /M 2 +w 1 M 2 ) = 2A 1 (/ 2 / 1 +m 2 w 1 +» 2 » 1 ). Therefore, provided Aj^Aj, In the alternative case A^Aj we shall see (8-9) that the surface, if real, is a surface of revolution, and any diameter perpendicular to the axis of rotation is a principal axis. 8-74. The discriminating cubic is the discriminant of the quadratic equation (ax 2 +by 2 + cz 2 + zfyz + 2gzx + zhxy) - A (x 2 +y 2 + z 2 ) = o. This equation represents a system of conies at infinity passing through the points of intersection H, H', K, K' of the conic at infinity and the circle at infinity. The discriminant expresses that the conic breaks up into two straight lines. Corresponding to the three roots of the discriminating cubic we have the three 170 REDUCTION OF THE GENERAL [chap. pairs of lines HH', KK' ; HK, H'K' ; HK', H'K. If these pairs of lines intersect in A, B, C, ABC is a self-polar triangle ^ B with regard to both conies ; and if O is the centre of the quadric (the pole of the plane at infinity), O ABC is a self-polar tetrahedron with regard to the quadric. Also the lines OA, OB, OC are mutually orthogonal and are therefore the principal axes. Referred to this tetrahedron the equation of the quadric will be of the form Fi *-35 ax 2 +by 2 + cz 2 + dw 2 = o. 8-8. Transformation of rectangular coordinates. The equation of a quadric is simplified when the axes are suitably chosen. The transformation to new axes can best be made in two stages, first keeping the directions of the axes fixed and changing the origin, and then keeping the origin fixed and rotating the axes. 8-81. Reduction of the general equation to axes through the centre. Let the coordinates of the centre be [X, Y, Z]. The equations of transformation are then x=x'+X' y=y'+Y -. z=z' + Z Then F(x, y, z)=F(x'+X, y'+ Y, z'+Z) „> dF , .W =/(,',y,,0 + (,'g + y|J + ,'|) +F(X, Y, Z). By this transformation the coefficients of the terms of the second degree are unaltered, i.e. a, b, c, f, g, h are invariants. vm] EQUATION OF THE SECOND DEGREE 171 dF dx dF The coordinates of the centre satisfy the equations =- = o, dF dF 5- =0, 5- = 0, hence the coefficients of x', y', z' all vanish. The remaining term can be simplified. Using homogeneous coordinates [x, y, z, w], we have *3r + Y \% +z % + w m =2F ^ x > Y > z > ™)- Hence F(X, Y, Z)=F 1 (X, Y, Z, W) = \ ^±, where W is put = 1 after differentiating. The last equation is the best form for calculating, but a concise expression for the new constant d' can be obtained as follows. We have l d ^=pX+qY+rZ + d=d', l^ = aX+hY+gZ+p = o, l d ^ = hX+bY+fZ + q=o, 1%-gX+fY+cZ+r-o. Eliminating X, Y, Z between these four equations we obtain a h g p =o=A-Dd', h b f q g f c r p q r d—d' hence </'=A/Z>. The reduced equation is therefore f(x',y',z')+AJD=o, provided D^o. If D = o the centre is at infinity and this trans- formation cannot be applied. 8-82. Rotation of axes. Invariants. Omitting the dashes we shall now write x, y, z for coordinates referred to the centre, and x', y', z' for coordinates referred to new rectangular axes whose direction-cosines referred to the old 173 REDUCTION OF THE GENERAL [chap. are [l ly m ly «J, [l 2 , m 2 , mJ, [l 3 , m 3 , tig]. The scheme of trans- formation is *' / z' X k h Is y m^ m 2 m 3 z »i «2 «3 The equations of transformation being homogeneous, the constant term is unaltered, and f(x, y, z) is transformed into a homogeneous quadratic expression in x', y', z'. We have then ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 + 2jyz + zgzx + zhxy s a'x' % + b'y' 2 + c'z' 2 + 2f'y'z' + 2g'z'x' + 2h'x'y'. In the orthogonal transformation with origin fixed the expression x 2 +y 2 +z 2 , which represents OP 2 , is transformed into x' 2 +y' 2 +z' 2 , i.e. x 2 +y 2 +z 2 =x' 2 +y' 2 +z' 2 . Hence (a — A) x 2 + (b — A) y 2 + (c — A) z 2 + 2fyz + 2gzx + ihxy = (a'-\)x' 2 +(b'-\)y' 2 +(c'-\)z' 2 + 2f'y'z' + 2g'z'x' + 2h'x'y' for any value of A. If the left-hand side of this identity breaks up into factors, so also will the right-hand side for the same value of A. Hence the two equations a — X h g = o and a'-X h' g' =o h b-X f h' b'-X f g f c-X g' f c'-X must be identical, i.e. X 3 -(a+b + c)X 2 +(A+B+C)X-D =X 3 -(a' + b' + c')X 2 +(A'+B' + C')X-D'. In the orthogonal transformation we have therefore the three absolute invariants a +b +c =1, A+B+Cs=J, an d D. viii] EQUATION OF THE SECOND DEGREE 173 Also since the orthogonal transformation is a particular case of the general projective transformation, A is at least a relative invariant. The modulus of the transformation is l^ m 1 Hi = 1, since 2/ x 2 =24 2 =2/ 3 2 =i, while 2/ 1 4 = etc. =0. The square of this is 2/ x 2 Z/^ S^Zs 244 24* 24/3 24/3 244 2/ 3 * Hence A is an absolute invariant for the orthogonal trans- formation. The equation A 8 - /A 2 +/A - D = o is the discriminating cubic ; since its coefficients are all invariants the three roots A^ A^ A s are all invariants. 8-83. Reduction of the equation to the principal axes. Let the canonical equation of the quadric be a'x' a + b'y'* + c'z'* + A/2? = 0. We have the three invariants a' + b' + c'=I, b'c' + c'a' + a'b'=J, a'b'c'=D. Hence a', V, c' are the roots of the discriminating cubic, and the reduced equation is A^' 2 + A,/ 2 + A 3 .s' 2 + A/Z) = o. 8-84. Reduction of the paraboloid. In the case of the paraboloid the centre is a point at infinity. Z) = o, and one root of the discriminating cubic is zero. The direction [/, m, n] of the corresponding axis, the axis of the paraboloid, is determined by any two of the equations al+hm+gn = o, hl+bm+fn =0, gl+frn +cn = o. 174 REDUCTION OF THE GENERAL [chap. The axis itself cuts the surface in one finite point, the vertex A, such that the tangent-plane at A is perpendicular to the axis. Its coordinates [X, Y, Z] may be found from the equations dF /. dF I dF I dX/ l== dY/ m= dz/ n > F(X,Y,Z) = o. Let the reduced equation be «V 2 +&y 2 +27V=o. Then a'+b' = I, a'b'=J, -a'b'r' i =A. Hence a', V are the two finite roots of the discriminating cubic, and the reduced equation is A 1 *' 2 +A 2 j' 2 ±2V'(-A/A 1 A 2 )^ = o. 8-85. Elliptic and hyperbolic cylinders. In the case of an elliptic or hyperbolic cylinder, A = o and Z>=o. The three planes F x =o, F v =o, F l = o have a line in common, the axis or line of centres. Transformed to any point [X, Y, Z] on this line as origin, the equation reduces, as in 8-8i, to the form f(x,y,z) + d' = o, where d' = F(X, Y, Z) =pX+ q Y+ rZ+ d. Then using along with this any two of the equations aX+hY+gZ+p=o, hX+bY+fZ+q=o, gX+fY +cZ+r = o and eliminating X, Y, Z (as is possible since D = o), we find d'=A 1 /A=...=F 1 /F=..., where A lt ... and A, ... are the cofactors of a, ... in the de- terminants A and D respectively. The discriminating cubic has one root zero, and if A 1; \ are the two finite roots the equation reduces finally to the form A x a; 2 +A 2 j 2 +d'=o. If d' — o the surface degenerates to two intersecting planes, and F(x, y, z) can be resolved into factors. viii] EQUATION OF THE SECOND DEGREE 175 8-86. Parabolic cylinder. In the case of a parabolic cylinder the three planes F x =o, F v =o,F z =o have a line at infinity in common. The matrix [D] is of rank 1, and f(x,y, z) is a perfect square = (xy/a +yy/b + z\Zc)\ The equation is then of the form Y 2 =$kX, where X =0 and
Y=o represent planes, but these two planes are probably not
at right angles. Introducing an unknown coefficient A we may
write the equation

(Sx y/a + A) a +zZ(p- Xy/a) x + (d- A 2 ) = o,
and then determine A by the condition for orthogonality

2 (p — A y/a) y/a = o,
so that X=Hpy/a/I,a.

Then if we write Ex y/a + A —y' */Za
and 2(p-A-v/fl)*+iO*-A 2 )= -x'V^(qVc-Wb) 2 JI,a}
the equation reduces to the form

/ 2 =4&c',

where &==lH2(?\/c-»V&)7(2a) 3 }*.

If the value of A makes the coefficients of x, y, z in the ex-
pression for x' all vanish, the surface reduces to two parallel
planes; and if k=o it reduces to two coincident planes.

In a surface of revolution every plane perpendicular to the
axis cuts the surface in a circle whose centre is on the axis. Let A
(Fig. 36) representee point atinfinity on the axis OA, and UVthe
polar of A with respect to the circle at infinity. Then every plane
section through Wis a circle, and its centre, which lies on OA,
is the pole of UV with respect to the curve of section. Hence the
planes OAU and OAV are tangent-planes to the quadric at U
and V. The condition for a quadric of revolution is therefore that its
conic at infinity should have double contact with the circle at
infinity.

176 REDUCTION OF THE GENERAL [chap.

The conic at infinity is

f(x, y, z) = ax z + by* + cz z + zfyz + zgzx + zhxy = o,
and the circle at infinity is

x 2 +y 2 +z i =o.
If these have double contact, then, for some value of A,

f(x, y,z)+X (a 2 +y*+z*) = o
represents two coincident lines. The conditions for this are that
the matrix ^ a +X h g

h b+X f
.g f '+AJ

Fig. 36

should, for some value of A, be of rank 1. This gives the following

equations in A : .

X*+(b+c)X+(bc-f*)=o, fX-(gh-af)=o,

A 2 + (c + a) X + (ca -g 2 ) = 0, gX- (hf - bg) = o,

X 2 +(a+b)X+(ab-h*)=o, hX-(fg -ch) = o.

The case where A=o should be rejected for this makes

f(x,y,z) = o

represent two coincident straight lines and the quadric is a
parabolic cylinder. If/, g, h do not vanish we get the conditions

i-l-k
F G H'

vm] EQUATION OF THE SECOND DEGREE 177
If /= o then either g=oorh=o. If /= o =£ while h ^ o we find
A= -c, and then A 2 = (a-c)(i-c). Iif=g=h=o, then two of
a, b, c must be equal.

The condition for a sphere is that /(*, y, z) should coincide
with the circle at infinity, and this is expressed analytically by
the condition that the matrix should, for some value of A, be of
rank o, which leads at once x.of—g=h = o, a = b=c.

In the case of a surface of revolution two roots of the dis-
criminating cubic are equal. The converse, however, is not true
unless it is understood that the quadric is real, for two conditions
are required in order that a quadric should be a surface of
revolution, viz. that the conic at infinity should have double
contact with the circle at infinity. The condition for equal
roots merely requires single contact; single contact with the
virtual circle is, however, impossible in the case of a real
conic.

Similarly, in the case of a sphere the roots of the cubic are all
equal. But this implies only two conditions, whereas five are
required for a sphere. The equality of the three roots merely
implies three-point contact, but for a sphere the conic at infinity
must coincide with the circle at infinity.

The condition for equal roots, or the discriminant, of the

cubic A3-/A^ +/ A- J D=o

is 7V 2 -4^ s ^-4/ 3 -27Z> 2 +i8//Z)=o,

and the conditions for three equal roots are

Now P - 3 J = (Sa) 2 ~ 3 (Sic - S/ 2 ) = (Sa 2 - Sic) + 3S/ 2 .
But Sa 2 — Sic is a positive definite form. Hence if P— 3/=o,
and the coefficients are real, we must have f=o, g=o, h = o
and o=Sa 2 -Sic={a-£(6+c)} i! +f (i-c) 2 , therefore a=b=c.

8-95. EXAMPLES.

1. Find the pole of the plane 2X — 8y — 32 = 2 with regard to
the surface x i —2y z +z 2 —2yz+6x—^z+^ = o.
Ans. [-1, 3, 2].

SAG I3

178 REDUCTION OF THE GENERAL [chap.

2. Reduce to their principal axes:

(i) x 2 +y 2 +z 2 — \yz— i t zx—qKy='$. (ii) y 2 +z 2 +yz+zx—xy—2x+2y — 2z+i = o. (iii) 4x 2 +y 2 +z*+2yz+4zx+4xy — 24x4-32=0. (iv) x 2 +2y 2 +2z 2 —2yz—2x—2y+6z+3=o. (v) 2y 2 —2yz+2zx—2xy—x—2y+ 32—2 = 0. (vi) 2x 2 —yy 2 +2z 2 — 10^2— 82X— ioxy+ 6x+ i2y — 6z+ 5 =0. (vii) 2y 2 +/[zx+2x—^y+6z+$=o.

(viii) 9x 2 +4y 2 +4z 2 +8yz + i2zx+ i2xy+$x+y + ioz+ 1 = 0. (ix) x 2 +2y 2 +z 2 —4.yz—6zx—2x+8y—2z+9=o. (x) x 2 +3j 2 +2 2 +42X+2x+i2v— 22+9 = 0. (xi) x 2 +4y 2 +92 2 -i2j2 + 62x-4xy+4x:-8y+ 122+4=0. (xii) 2x 2 +5j 2 +22 2 -2y2+42x-2xy+i4x-i6y+ 142+26 = 0. (xiii) i6x 2 + 9y 2 +42 2 +7x+2y-i22— I2J2— i62*+24ry=o. (xiv) x 2 + 4^ 2 + 92 2 — 12J2 + 62X— +ry + 6x+4y+ 102 — 23 = 0. (xv) 2x 2 +2y 2 — 42 2 — zyz — 2zx — sxy — 2X — 2y+z=o. (xvi) i6x 2 +4j 2 +42 2 +4 i y2-82x+8xy+4a:+4 i >'- 162— 24=0. Ans. (i) X 2 +Y 2 -Z 2 = i. (ii) -Z a +2l 72 + 3Z 2 =4, centre [i, -1, 1]. (iii) Parabolic cylinder. V3Y 2 =4Xor (2x+y+z— 4) 2 =8(x— y—z— 2). (iv) Z 2 +2Y a +4Z 2 =i, centre [1, o, -1]. (v) Hyperbolic cylinder. 3X 2 -Y 2 =£. (vi) Cone. X 2 + 2 Y 2 - 4^=0, vertex [£, -£,£]. (vii) Cone. JT»+ Y 2 -Z 2 =o, vertex [-|, 1, -£]. (viii) Parabolic cylinder. 1 7 Y 2 = 7X or (3X + 2_y + 22+l) 2 = 2X + 3^ — 62. (ix) Cone. 4-8oZ 2 +i-68I 72 -2-48Z a =o, vertex [1, -2,0]. (x) iX 2 +3Y 2 -Z 2 = 1, centre [i, -2, -1]. (xi) Two coincident planes, (x— 2^+32 +2) 2 =o. (xii) Elliptic cylinder. X*+2 Y»=i. vin] EQUATION OF THE SECOND DEGREE 179 (xiii) Parabolic cylinder. zgY 2 = gX or (4* + 33/ - zz + 1) 2 = * + \y + 8z + 1 . (xiv) Parabolic cylinder. 7Y 2 =2\ / 6Xor (x-2y+2z+i) 2 +4(x+2y+z-6)=o. (xv) Hyperbolic paraboloid. ^(X 2 - Y 2 ) = zZ, vertex [o, o, o]. (xvi) Ellipticparaboloid. 3Z a +y 2 =2Z,vertex[-i,2,-i]. 3. Show that the equation 2X 2 —y 2 — 22Z 2 + zoyz + 1 ozx — qxy + 2x — zoy + 14* + 14 = o represents a cone of revolution; find the coordinates of the vertex, the vertical semi-angle, and the direction of the axis. Ans. [-1, 2, 1], tan-^, [1:2: -5]. 4. Prove that the equation ^/x +Vy +V Z = ° represents a cir- cular cone whose axis is x = y = z and vertical semi-angle cot _1 -v/2. 5. Find the conditions that F(x, y, z) = o should represent a paraboloid of revolution. Ans. agh+f(g 2 +h 2 )=o, bhf+g(h 2 +f 2 ) =0, cfg+Kf 2 +g 2 )=o. 6. Find the conditions that F(x, y,z)=o should represent a .circular cylinder. Ans. agh+f{g 2 +h 2 ) = o, etc., and p/f+q/g+rjh=o. 7. Show that the equation fyz+gzx + hxy +pxw + qyw + rzw = o represents a quadric passing through the vertices of the tetra- hedron of reference and find the conditions that the lines of intersection of the tangent-planes at the vertices with the op- posite faces should lie in one plane. Ans. fp=gq=hr. 8. Show that x 2 +y 2 +z 2 + w 2 —yz—zx—xy—xw—yw-zw=o represents a quadric inscribed in the tetrahedron of reference, and that the lines joining each vertex to the point of contact with the opposite face are concurrent. 12-2 180 EQUATION OF SECOND DEGREE [chap, vm 9. Show that by suitable choice of unit-point the equation of a quadric which touches the six edges of the tetrahedron of re- ference can be written x 2 +y 2 + z 2 + a; 2 + 2yz ± zzx ± zxy ± zxzv ± zyw ± zzw = o. If the signs are all + , the quadric degenerates to two coincident planes ; if the signs are all — , it is a proper quadric (not a cone) ; and these cases each give rise to seven others by changing the sign of one or more of the coordinates ; in the remaining forty- eight cases the quadric is a cone. 10. If a quadric which is not a cone touches the edges of a skew quadrilateral show that the four points of contact are coplanar. 11. If a quadric which is not a cone touches the six edges of a tetrahedron show that the lines joining the pairs of points of contact of opposite edges are concurrent. 12. Three mutually perpendicular lines through a point O of a given quadric cut the surface in P, Q, R. Show that the plane PQR cuts the normal at O in a fixed point (Fregier point). 13. Three lines through a fixed point O of a given quadric, parallel to three conjugate diameters of another quadric, cut the first quadric in P, Q, R. Show that the plane PQR passes through a fixed point. 14. Find the locus of the Fregier points when O is varied. Ans. A concentric quadric. If the given quadric is ax i + by i +cz t =i the equation of the locus is (a+b+c) i 'L{ax i j(-a+b+cy}'=i. 15. If the quadrics U and V both have ring-contact with the quadric S, show that U and V intersect one another in two conies. 16. Show that any two tangent-cones of the same quadric intersect in two conies. 17. Show that two quadrics which have the same tangent- cone intersect in two conies. CHAPTER IX GENERATING LINES AND PARAMETRIC REPRESENTATION 9-1. We have seen that in determining the intersection of a line with a quadric we obtain an equation of the second degree. This equation either has two definite roots or becomes an identity. Hence if three points of the line lie on the quadric, all its points must lie on the quadric. This implies three conditions. But a line in space has four degrees of freedom, hence there is still one degree of freedom, and thus an infinity of lines lie on the quadric. If we apply the same reasoning to the case of a cubic surface we see that a line either cuts the surface in three points or lies entirely on the surface. If, then, four points of the line lie on the surface it lies entirely on the surface. But this implies four con- ditions, and hence a finite number of lines are determined as lying on a cubic surface. It will be proved in Chap, xvn that this number is 27, though they are not necessarily all real. Similarly, in general, no lines at all lie on a surface of the fourth or higher order. Of course there may be cubic surfaces which contain an infinity of lines (ruled cubics), and quartic surfaces which contain a finite number, or even an infinity of lines, etc., but these are special cases. 9-11. We have seen also that through any point on a quadric there pass two generating lines, real, coincident, or imaginary. Let A be any point on the surface, a and a' the two generating lines through A. These form the intersection of the quadric with the tangent-plane at A. If B is another point on the surface it does not lie in this plane. Let b and V be the two generators through B. b meets the plane (aa') in a point lying on the surface and therefore lying on either a or a', say a', i.e. b cuts a' and cannot cut a. Similarly V cuts a, but not a'. If C is a third point on the surface, and c, c' the generators through C, one of them, c' say, cuts a in a point P. The generators through P are a and c', of which a cuts b' and therefore c' cuts b. Hence all the i8z GENERATING LINES AND [chap. generators a, a' ; b, V ; c, c' form two distinct systems. Every generator of the one system, e.g. a, cuts all the generators b', c', ... of the other system, but no two generators of the same system intersect. 9-2. The equation of a hyperbolic paraboloid was obtained in the form yz=cx, or homogeneously yz=cxw. The equation of a hyperboloid of one sheet can be written in the form x*/a*-z*lc*=i-y 2 /b\ i.e. (x/a - zfc) (x/a + zjc) = (i —y/b)(i +y/b). Both of these equations are of the form oc0 = y8, where a, j3, y, 8 represent planes. This is the form of the equation of a quadric when two pairs of generators are taken as four of the edges of the tetrahedron of reference. Take A = [i, o, o, o] and B=[o, i, o, o] two points of the surface, and let a, a' be the generators through A, and b, b' those through B. Let a cut V in C= [o, o, i, o] and a' cut b in D= [o, o, o, i]. Then x=o cuts the surface in a and a' where also zw = o. Hence the equation of the surface is of the form xy = kzw. 9-21. Equations of the generating lines of the quadric xy—zw. Let P= [x' f y', z', w'] be any point on the surface, so that x'y'=z'w', and let / and V be the two generators through P. Then since / cuts a' and b' it is the intersection of the planes (Pa') and (Pi')> i- e - y%'=y'z and xw'=x'w. Write y' = Xz', then w' = Xx'. The equations of / are then 3>=A#, Xx=w. Similarly the equations of /' are y=X'w, X'x=z, where y' = \'zv'. Conversely, these two pairs of equations represent, for varying values of the parameters A and A', two systems of straight lines lying on the surface. From this we can deduce independently that every generator K] PARAMETRIC REPRESENTATION 183 of the one system meets every generator of the other system, but no generator of the same system. For the equation (y-Xz)+k(Xx— w) = o represents a plane containing the generator A of the first system ; and the equation (y-\'zo)+k'(\'x-z)=o represents a plane containing the generator A' of the second system. But if k=X' and k'=X these two planes coincide, i.e. the plane Mx+ y -\z-\'z»=o contains the generators A and A'. But taking two generators of the same system we have four " y=Xz, Xx=w; y = fiz, jxx=w which have no solution in common. 9-22. The hyperbolic paraboloid. Taking the equation of the hyperbolic paraboloid in the form yz=cxw, where to = o is the plane at infinity, the two systems of generators are -v . j=Ax;| Z=IJLX) Xz=cwy fiy = cwj But for all values of A the equation Xz = cw represents parallel planes, hence all the generators of the one system are parallel to the plane z=o. Similarly all the generators of the other system are parallel to the plane y=o. This is clear also from the figure in 6-33. The surface, in fact, cuts the plane at infinity in the two lines y==o, w=o and z=o, w=o, and all the generators cut one or other of these two lines at infinity. 9-3. The two equations y=Xz, A* =«> represent two pro- jectively related sheafs of planes. Thus a regulus is generated by the intersection of two projective pencils of planes. Denote the two lines x = o = w and y = o = z by a' and b' respectively, the planes Xx=zv, y=Xz by <x and /?, and let / be the line of inter- section of a and /?. Then there is a (1, 1) correspondence between 184 GENERATING LINES AND [chap. the planes a and j3. Now a.=(a'T) and /3= (b'l). a' and V there- fore cut /, say in P and Q. We have then on a' and V the points P and <5 in (i, i) correspondence, and (PQ) = l. The regulus is therefore generated also by the lines joining points on two pro- jective ranges. It follows that if a' and V are cut by four gene- rators in P ly P 2 ,P s , P 4 and Q x , Q z , Q 3 , Q^ these two ranges have equal cross-ratios. Also since (la') is the tangent-plane at P, the tangent-planes at the four points P form a pencil of planes with the same cross-ratio as that of the tangent-planes at the four points Q. 9-31. A quadric surface is generated by a straight line which meets three given skew lines. Let a, b, c be three given lines, all mutually skew. Take any plane a through a and let it cut c in R, then a plane B=(Rb) is determined which cuts a in a line /. As / lies in a it cuts a, and as it lies also in j8 it cuts b, also it cuts c in R. Hence I cuts a, b and c. But / is the intersection of the planes a and /? which are in (i, i) correspondence, hence by 9-3 / generates a regulus. Without assuming this, we may show that the surface generated by I is of the second order. Letp be any line. R being a variable point on c, the planes (Ra) and (Rb) cut p in points P and Q which are in (1, 1) correspondence. If U and V are the self-corresponding points in this homography, the planes (Ud) and (Ub) cut c in the same point, therefore the line of intersection of (Ud) and (Ub) cuts a, b and c and is therefore a generator of the surface. U therefore lies on the surface, and similarly also V. Hence U and V are the two points in which/) cuts the surface. 9*311. Equation of the surface generated by the transversals of three given lines. Let /, m, n be the three given lines. Take any two points A, B on /. The planes (An) and (Bn) cut the line m in points C and D. AC and BD then cut n in points E and F. Take ABCD as tetra- hedron of reference. Let E=[i, a,p, o] and F=[o, q, o, 1]. Let L = [1, A, o, o] be any point on /. The planes (Lm) and (Ln) inter- sect in a line which cuts m in M=[o, o, 1,/*], say, and » in N=[i, qv,p, v] = [i, A, u, pu]. Then qv = X,p = u, v=fj.u, therefore v=np,\=pqii. ix] PARAMETRIC REPRESENTATION 185 Let P= [*, y, z, to] be any point on LM. Then P= [1, A, t, p.t]. Hence „ „ px=\, py = \=pqp., pz = t, pW = [lt. Eliminating p, p. and t we have p a yz =pqpt =pqpw .px, therefore yz=pqxw. 9-32. Quadric surface with two given generators of different systems. A surface passing through the line u = o = v is represented by <x.u+fiv = o, where a, /} are expressions of the first degree. But this passes also through a=o = /?. If this second generator is given, the surface is still not determined and its equation may be more generally (Aa+/?)tt+(ju.a+/3)© = o. Hence the general equation of a quadric with generators u=o = v and u' = o=v' is auu' + bvv' + cuv' + du'v = o. The quadric has been made to satisfy six conditions and there are still three disposable constants, the ratios of a, b, c, d. Ex. Show that the equation of a hyperboloid of one sheet referred to a set of axes through the centre parallel to three generating lines is fyz +gzx + hxy = 1 . 9-4. The condition that a variable line should cut a given line imposes one degree of restraint. The assemblage of all lines which cut one fixed line is, as we have seen (8-432), a special linear complex. The assemblage of all lines which cut two fixed lines is a linear congruence. That of all lines which cut three fixed lines is a regulus. If a line is to cut four given lines a, b, c, d it is deprived of all freedom, and only a finite number of lines exist satisfying these conditions. The number of lines can be determined by taking the special case in which the given lines intersect in pairs. Suppose a, b intersect in A and determine a plane a, while c, d intersect in B and determine a plane p. Then if the line / meets both a and b, either it passes through A or lies in the plane a; similarly if it meets both c and d, either it passes 186 GENERATING LINES AND [chap. through B or lies in the plane /?. If A lies in the plane /J, or B in the plane a, there is an infinity of lines cutting the four. Excluding this case, if the line / meets all four lines it either passes through A and B or lies in the two planes a and /?. Hence there are in general two lines which meet four given lines in space. We may determine these lines in the general case as follows. The three lines a, b, c determine a quadric, which is cut by d in two points P and Q. Through each of these there passes a generator of the other system, which therefore cuts a, b, c and also d. The two common transversals may be real, coincident, or imaginary. This may be shown also by using Plucker coordinates. Let (j>), (q), (r), (s) be four straight lines, and (Z) a line meeting them. We have then four equations of the form Pol »23 +^23^)1+ ••• =0 > linear and homogeneous in (/), and also the equation *oi '23 ~^~ nB^si "t" n» '12 = 0« These five equations determine two sets of values of the ratios of the six I's. 9-41. A problem which is important in non-euclidean geometry is to determine the common transversals of two pairs of lines which are polars with regard to a given quadric. When this quadric is the "absolute" the common transversals are the common perpendiculars of the lines. Let the equation of the given quadric be ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 + dw 2 = o, and let one pair of lines be x = o = w and y = o = z. Let the other pair be given by their Plucker coordinates p, p' ; let the first be the join of the points [x lt y ly z x , eoj and [x 2 ,y 2 , z 2 , roj. Then the second is the intersection of the lines ax ± x + by-yy + cz t z+ dw-,10 = o, ax 2 x + by^y + cz z z + dw 2 zv = o. Hence Poi' = ?>cp23, p w ' = adp 01 , Pw=cap sl , p 3 i=bdpw, Poa'=abpi2> Pvi= c dp<a. ix] PARAMETRIC REPRESENTATION 187 If (q) is the common transversal we have ?01 = °» ?23 = °> PsiQoi + PnQoa +PoaQsi +PtaQn = °> (1) and b dp w q 0i + cdp g3 q 0S + Cap 31 q 31 + abp 12 q 12 = O (2) A 1 * 50 «oa?3i+?o3?i2 = o. (3) Express q 12 and q a from (1) and (2) in terms of q w and q m and sub- stitute in (3) and we obtain ("PsiPu ~ dpmPm) ( 6 W - <%a 2 ) + {« (bpi* ~ <$n) + d (bpq? - cpot*)} ? 2?08 - o»
a quadratic in q^q^. The condition for real roots is

{a (bpn* - cp^) + d (bfa* - tf os 2 )} 2 + 4^ («PsxPi2 - <#W>os) 2 > o.
This is equivalent also to

{b (ap lt * - dp,,?) + c {apt* - #os 2 )} 2 + ^ad (% 2 /> 12 - cp^f > o,
and to

{a(bp^+cp^)+d(bp 0i ' i +cp 03 i )^-4abcdp 01 z p^>o.

The roots are real if abcd<o or if boo or ad>o. Hence the two
common transversals are always real if the quadric has imaginary
generators. If the quadric has real generators and the signs of

a, b, c, d are + + the transversals are again real; in this case the

two lines * = o = w and y = o = z cut the quadric in imaginary points.

If, however, the signs are either + H or H 1 — ,so that these

two lines cut the quadric in real points, a further condition is required.
The condition that the line joining (atj) and (* g ) should cut the
quadric in real points is that the roots of

(ax 1 s + ...) + 2 (ax 1 x 2 + ...) A + (fl* 2 2 + ...) A 2 =o

should be real. This gives

(ax^ + . . .) 8 - (a*^ 2 + . . .) (a« 2 2 + . . .) > o,
i.e.

P = abpjf + acp n * + adp 10 * + bcp^ + bdp^ + cdp„* < o .

Now the condition for real transversals is

i.e. P 2 - 2 (a^oi 2 + bc Pn) p + i^Pai - hcp^f > o.
Hence if ad and be are both negative the roots are real if P>o.

•(3)

188 GENERATING LINES AND [chap.

9-51. Freedom-equations of the hyperboloid of one sheet.

Writing the canonical equation in the form

x i la i -y i lb 2 =w 2 -z 2 jc 2 , (i)

each side factorises.

Write

xja +y/b = X (to — zjc) and xja +y/b = p,(w + zjc) ■»
then [••••(2)

x/a—y/b=X~ 1 (w+z/c) and x/a—y/b=p,- 1 (zo—z/c))

These four equations are equivalent to three, and we may solve
any three of them for the ratios of x, y, z, w. We obtain then

px/a=Xp,+ i'
P y/b=X l i-i
pz/c= X—[i
pw = X+p.,

These are freedom-equations in terms of the two parameters
A and p., and the two systems of generators of the surface are
represented by A = const, and p. = const.

9-52. Similarly the paraboloid

x z /a i -y 2 /b i =2zwlc
is represented by the freedom-equations
pa:/tf=A+/i ,
py/b=X-p.
pz/c = I
pw =zXp, .

9-6. Parametric equations of a curve.

If the homogeneous coordinates x, y, z, w are expressed as
functions of a single parameter A they have just one degree of
freedom and represent points on a curve. If the equations are
algebraic the curve is called an algebraic curve, and if, further,
they are rational we have a rational algebraic curve. To every
value of A there corresponds then one set of values of the co-
ordinates and therefore one point. We shall assume for the

ix] PARAMETRIC REPRESENTATION 189

present (see I4 - I3) that, conversely, to every point, with certain
possible exceptions, corresponds one value of the parameter, so
that between the points of the curve and the values of the
parameter there is an algebraic (1,1) correspondence. The
exceptional points are double-points on the curve.

The intersections of the curve with an arbitrary plane are
found by substituting the coordinates in terms of A. If r is the
highest degree in A of the four parametric equations, this will
lead to an equation of degree r in A. Hence the curve is cut by
an arbitrary plane in r points, and is said to be of order r.

9-61. Thus for example the general freedom-equations of the
second degree

px=a \ i +2a 1 \+a i , etc.,

represent a conic. Eliminating p, A 2 , A linearly between the four
equations we obtain

X «j % fl| =0,
y h b t b 2

SI Cq C-y C%

w dfj d 1 d%

which represents the plane of the conic. Again, eliminating p
and A between the first three equations we get a homogeneous
equation of the second degree in x, y, z which represents a cone
with vertex [o, o, o, 1]. If tv=o is the plane at infinity the conic
will be a hyperbola, parabola, or ellipse according as d^—d^d^ > ,
= , or < o.

9-62. Again, freedom-equations of the third degree represent
a cubic curve, which, however, does not in general lie in one
plane :

px=a X 3 +a 1 X 2 +a i X+a 3 , etc.

Eliminating A 3 between the first equation and each of the others
in turn we get three equations

p(6 *-a j) = (5 a 1 -a J 1 )A 2 +(i a 2 -a J 2 )A

+ (6 a 3 -a & s ), etc.,

and eliminating/) and A between these three equations we obtain
a homogeneous equation of the second degree in (b x— a^y),

190 GENERATING LINES AND [chap.

etc., which represents a quadric cone with vertex [a,,, b , c , d^\.
Similarly eliminating the constant term we get three equations
p(b 3 x-a 3 y) = (b 3 a -a 3 b )X s +(b 3 a 1 -a 3 b 1 )X a

+ (b 3 a2—a 3 b 2 )X, etc.
Eliminating p/X and A we obtain a homogeneous equation of the
second degree in (b 3 x— a 3 y), etc., which represents a quadric
cone with vertex [ag, b a , c 3 , d 3 ]. Each of these cones passes
through the vertex of the other as we see by putting A=o in the
freedom-equations of the former and letting A -> oo in those of
the latter. Hence these two cones have a common generating
line and their remaining intersection is a cubic curve.

9-63. Conversely any conic can be represented by rational
freedom-equations ; for let I be any line not in the plane of the
conic and meeting it in a point O. Then any plane a through I
cuts the conic in one other point P, hence there is a (i, i) corre-
spondence between the points P and the planes of the pencil with
axis /, and these can be uniquely related to a parameter A.

Ex. Find freedom-equations for the conic in which the plane
x/a - zyjb + w=o cuts the ellipsoid x 2 ja 2 +y i /b 2 + z 2 /c 2 = w a .

By inspection one point on the conic is [3a, 4b, o, 5]. Take the line
\bx = 2,ay, z = o as axis of a pencil of planes ^x/a — Sy/b— Xz/c=o.
We find that this plane cuts the conic besides in the point whose
coordinates are given by

*/a=3-A 2 ,

z/c=^X,
ro=5+A 2 .

9-64. Further, any non-plane cubic is rational, for if we take
two fixed points on the curve a plane through these will cut the
curve in one other point. Hence there is a (1, 1) correspondence
between the points of the curve and the planes of the pencil.
A plane cubic curve, however, is not in general rational, but it is
rational if it possesses a double-point, for any line through the
double-point and lying in the plane of the cubic will cut the
curve in just one other point.

We shall reserve the further discussion of cubic curves in
space till a later chapter.

ix] PARAMETRIC REPRESENTATION 191

9-7. Parametric equations of a surface.

If the coordinates of a point are functions of two parameters,
the point has two degrees of freedom and its locus is a surface.
If the functions are algebraic and rational the surface is called a
rational algebraic surface. The order of a surface is equal to the
number of points in which it is met by an arbitrary line. Hence
if the parametric equations are of degree r the order of the sur-
face appears to be in general equal to r\ It may, however, be
less than this (see 9*73).

9-71. It is convenient to consider the parametric equations
from another standpoint. If we consider the parameters A, /* as
cartesian coordinates in a plane we have a representation of the
surface on the plane of A, //.. To every pair of values of A, /* corre-
sponds a unique set of values of the ratios x:y:z:w, hence
to every point in the (A, /x)-plane corresponds uniquely a point
on the surface. The converse, however, is not so obvious, and
to fix the ideas more clearly we shall confine our attention again
to the hyperboloid (see 9-51). The equations (3) express
(x, y, z, w) rationally in terms of (A, ti), and two of the equations
(2) conversely express (A, /a) rationally in terms of (*, y, z, w)
when these coordinates satisfy the equation of the surface (1).
Thus in this case there is a birational relation between (A, tt) and
the ratios of (x, y, z, to), and therefore a (1, 1) correspondence
between the points of the quadric and the points of the plane.

To a plane section lx+my+nz+pzo=o of the quadric corre-
sponds a conic

la (A/* + 1 ) + mb (Aii - 1 ) + nc (A - ti) +p (A + ti) = o.

Writing X/v instead of A, and /a/v instead of tt, i.e. replacing
A, n by homogeneous coordinates A, /u., v, all the conies which
correspond to plane sections of the quadric pass through the
points common to the four conies

A/x+v 2 =o, A/a-i/ 2 =o, v(A-/a)=o, v(A+ti) = o.

More than two conies do not in general have any point in
common, but these four conies have in common the two points
L = [i, o, o], and M=. [o, 1, o]. These two points are exceptional
points in the representation, since the corresponding values of

192 GENERATING LINES AND [chap.

x, y, z, w are all zero and therefore there is no unique point on
the quadric which corresponds to either of them. Since the
generators of the quadric are represented by equations of the
form X=hv and /j,=kv, the two points L and M are in fact the
points through which pass the lines in the (A/x)-plane which
represent generators of the quadric. The line LM or v = o is also
exceptional, for to this corresponds the single point x/a=Xfi,
y/b=X[j,, z=o,w = o, i.e. the point = [a, b, o, o]. The tangent-
plane at this point is x/a—y/b = o. The generators through this
point are the lines of intersection of this plane with the two
planes z= +cw; to these planes correspond A=o and fj, = o, and
to the two generators correspond the points [o, i, o] and
[i, o, o]. Thus the exceptional points L and M represent the two
generating lines through a particular point O of the quadric.

9-72. Stereographic projection.

This representation can be viewed as an actual projection of
the quadric upon a plane, the centre of projection being a point
O on the surface. Let the generators through O cut the plane of
projection in L and M, then every plane section of the quadric
which does not pass through O is a conic which is projected into
a conic passing through L and M. The generating lines which
meet OL are projected into straight lines passing through L,
and those which meet OM into straight lines passing through M.
The generators OL and OM are represented only by the points
L and M, to the point O corresponds the whole line LM, and a
plane section through O is represented by a straight line to-
gether with the line LM.

Such a projection is called stereographic. The term is often
restricted to the projection of a sphere in which the centre of
projection is a point O on the sphere and the plane of projection
a is parallel to the tangent-plane at O. In this special case, since
the section by the tangent-plane at O is a point-circle, the
generating lines through O are two imaginary lines passing
through the circular points 2, J in this plane. These are also the
circular points in the parallel plane a. Hence every plane section
of the sphere (not through O) is represented by a conic passing
through I and /, i.e. a circle.

ix] PARAMETRIC REPRESENTATION i 93

This representation of a quadric surface on a plane is not
confined to the case in which the generating lines are real.
By stereographic projection any quadric can be represented
rationally on a plane, all plane sections being represented by
conies passing through two fixed points which are real or
imaginary according as the quadric has or has not real generating
lines. Thus if the ellipsoid x 2 /a 2 +y 2 /b 2 +z 2 /c 2 =zo 2 is projected
from the point [o, o, c] on to the plane z = o the point
P= [x, y, z, zv] on the ellipsoid is represented by the point
F — l x 'y y'] on the plane z=o, and we have

x _y _ ciq—z _ z

x' y'~ c ~ ~c'

SM?-0-(S+S+')?-

Writing pa ,=_+Z_ + I)

we have pz/c=x' 2 Ja 2 +y' 2 Jb 2 - 1,

and p{w- zjc) = 2, therefore

px=zx\ py=zy';
or putting *' = \ a , y' = yj,,

we have px/a=z\,

py/b=2fi,

pz/c=X 2 +p, 2 -i,

degree r, and consider the points in which the surface is cut by
an arbitrary line. If « = o = © are the equations of the line,
u+kv=o represents any plane through the line. When the
values of the coordinates are substituted in terms of A, p., the
equation u + kv — o represents a pencil of curves of order r in the
(Aju)-plane, and this pencil has r 2 base-points, the points of inter-
section of the curves which correspond to the plane sections

sag 13

194 GENERATING LINES AND [chap.

m=o and v = o. Thus to the points of intersection of the line
u=o = v with the surface correspond in general r 2 points in the
(Aju)-plane, hence in general the surface is of order r 2 . If, how-
ever, all the curves corresponding tox=*o,y=o, z=o,w=o pass
through s fixed points, these points do not correspond to any
definite points on the surface, and the order of the surface is
then r 2 — s.

9-731. Thus the general parametric equations of the second
degree in three homogeneous parameters represent a quartic
surface*. This is not the most general quartic surface, for a
quartic surface is not in general rational. If we take a linear
-homogeneous equation in the parameters, aX+bfi+ cv=o and
express v in terms of A and p, we obtain parametric equations
of the second degree in two homogeneous parameters, and these
represent a conic. Hence this quartic surface contains a double
infinity of conies.

If the four conies in the (A/ir)-plane which correspond to
x=o, y = o, z=o, iv=o have one point in common, the para-
metric equations represent a cubic surface, also possessing an
infinity of conies, and therefore also an infinity of straight lines,
since a plane which cuts the surface in a conic will have a straight
line for the remainder of its intersection. The surface is therefore
a ruled cubic.

Ex. i. px=X,

par=A 2 +A/x,
pw=\ 2 + fi 2 + p.
The equation of the surface is found, by eliminating p, X, p, to be

yz(x—y)=x{x+y)(y + z—w).
If p=kX, we get px= i,

P y = k,

pz = (k + i)\,
pw = (k 2 + i)X+i,
• This is Steiner's Surface. See 17*93.

K] PARAMETRIC REPRESENTATION 195

parametric equations of the first degree in A, and therefore repre-
senting a straight line. This line is the intersection of the two planes

y=kx I

(#>+ 1) z = (k + 1) («>-*)}•

In fact x = o=y is a double-line on the surface, since x=o cuts the
surface where y*z=o, and therefore every plane through this line
cuts the surface in this double line and one other line.

Ex. 2. Show that the tangential equation of the cubic surface in
Ex. 1 is

*>P - £0? + <») + (£ + <o) (1? + w) 2 = o.

If the four conies have two points in common the parametric

If they have three points in common, say [1, o, o], [o, 1, o] and
[o, o, 1], the parametric equations will all be of the type
px = a/w + b vX + cXfi,

and writing A', fj.', v' for fiv, vX, X/jl, they become linear and there-
fore represent a plane.

The general cubic is a rational surface and can be represented
by parametric equations of the third degree, such that the four
cubic curves in the (A/^-plane which correspond to x=o,
y=o, z=o, w=o all pass through six fixed points.

To prove this and at the same time explain a method by which
the parametric equations can be found, let two lines a and b be
chosen on the surface, mutually skew, and take any plane it, not
containing either of the lines. Let P' be any point in ir. Then
through P' there passes one line which cuts both a and b, and
this line cuts the surface in one other point P. Hence there is a
(1, 1) correspondence between the points P of the surface and
the points P' of the plane.

9-9. EXAMPLES.

1. Show that the generators of the surface x z +y 2 -z i =i
which intersect on the plane of xy are at right angles.

2. Prove that the hyperboloid x a /a a +y i /b*-z*/c !i =i has
generators which intersect at right angles unless c is greater
than both a and b.

X3-2

i 9 6 GENERATING LINES AND [chap.

3. Show that the coordinates of any point on the surface
x 2 + y 2 = z 2 + w 2 can be expressed as

* = sin(a-jS), j = cos(a-j8), sr=cos(a + j8), w = sin(a + 0).

4. Show that the angle between the generating lines of the
quadric x 2 /a+y 2 jb + z 2 lc=i through the point [*', y', z'] is
cos- 1 (A 1 +A 2 )/(A 1 -A 2 ), where A^ ^ are the roots of the quadratic

~'2 v '

a(a + X) + b(b + X) + c(c + X)''

5. If AA', BB\ CC axe three concurrent lines, not coplanar,
prove that there is a quadric for which BC, CA', AB' are
generators of the one system and B'C, CA, A'B are generators
of the other system.

6. Prove that the normals to a quadric at all points of a gene-
rating line generate a hyperbolic paraboloid.

7. Show that the four quadrics, each of which contains three
of four given skew lines, have two common generating lines.

8. If a parallelepiped has three edges coinciding with
generating lines of the same system of the hyperboloid

x 2 la 2 +y 2 lb 2 -z 2 jc 2 =i,

show that the two remaining vertices lie on the hyperboloid

x 2 /a 2 +y i /b 2 - z 2 \c 2 + 3 = 0.

9. If a parallelepiped has three edges coinciding with
generating lines of the same system of the hyperboloid

X */a 2 +y 2 /b 2 -z 2 /c 2 =i,
show that it has three other edges coinciding with generators of
the other system.

10. Show that all parallelepipeds which have six of their edges
coinciding with generators of the same hyperboloid have the
same volume.

11. A straight line moves so that four points marked upon it
move in four fixed planes ; show that the straight line has one
degree of freedom and that every point on it describes a conic.

ix] PARAMETRIC REPRESENTATION i 97

12. Show that the lines joining the vertices of a tetrahedron
to the corresponding vertices of the polar tetrahedron with
respect to a given quadric all belong to the same regulus.

13 . Show that the lines of intersection of corresponding planes
of a tetrahedron and its polar with respect to a given quadric all
belong to the same regulus.

14. Show that the four altitudes of a tetrahedron belong to
the same regulus of a hyperboloid of one sheet ; and that the four
perpendiculars to the faces at their orthocentres are generators
of the other system.

15. Show that the centroid of a tetrahedron is at the mid-
point of the join of the circumcentre and the centre of the
hyperboloid on the altitudes. What does this theorem become
when the tetrahedron is orthocentric ?

that the four lines of intersection of the tangent-planes at a vertex
with the opposite face belong to the same regulus.

17. If a quadric is inscribed in a tetrahedron show that the
four lines joining a vertex to the point of contact of the opposite
face belong to the same regulus.

18. Two generators of the same system of a quadric being
given it is required to find a generator meeting them in points
at which the tangent-planes are perpendicular. Show that the
problem admits of two solutions or of an infinite number, but
that in the latter case the quadric is not of general type.

(Math. Trip. II, 1914.)

19. If the generators of the same system of a hyperboloid at
four points A, B, C, D meet the opposite faces of the tetra-
hedron respectively in A', B', C, D', prove that a quadric exists
touching these faces at these points. (Math. Trip. II, 1915.)

20. With the notation of 2-511, if (a), (b), (c) are given points
and (x) a variable point on the plane, (abcx) = o, where (abcx)
denotes the determinant whose rows are a,,, c^, a^, <%; b , ...;

tQ, ...J XQy •••*

I9 8 GENERATING LINES [chap, ix

21. If (a), (a'), (b), (b') are given points and (x) a variable
point, show that the coordinates of the point of intersection of
the plane aa'x with the line bb' are

b t {aa'xb') - b { ' (aa'xb) (i = o, i , 2, 3).

22. Prove that the equation of the quadric which has as three
generators the lines joining the pairs of points (a), (a') ; (b), (b');

(aa'bx) (b'cc'x) = (aa'b'x) (b cc'x).

23. Given six points (a), (b'), (c), (a'), (b), (c'), forming a skew
hexagon, show that the three quadrics U, V, Wwith generators
(i) aa', bb', cc', (ii) ab', be', ca', (iii) ac', ba', cV are connected by
a linear relation \U+\i.V- i rvW=o.

CHAPTER X

10-1. A quadric has the property that it is cut by any straight
line in two points, real, coincident, or imaginary. The surface
is therefore said to be of the second order, the order being equal
to the degree of the equation.

Consider the section by any plane a. Every line in a cuts the
surface, and therefore the section, in two points. Hence the
section is a curve of the second order, i.e. a conic.

The plane at infinity cuts the surface in a conic at infinity C.
Let the section a cut this conic in H, K. Then the section is
an ellipse, a parabola, or a hyperbola, according as H, K are
imaginary, coincident, or real and distinct.

If the conic C is virtual, HandK are always imaginary. Every
section is therefore either an ellipse or virtual. The surface is
either a real ellipsoid, or a virtual surface.

If C is real, the surface is a hyperboloid. If O is its centre, the
cone with vertex O and base C is the asymptotic cone. Sections
by planes which touch this cone are parabolas, sections by planes
through O cutting the cone in real lines are hyperbolas, and
sections by planes through O cutting the cone in imaginary
lines are real ellipses in the case of the hyperboloid of one
sheet, and virtual ellipses in the case of the hyperboloid of two
sheets.

If C breaks up into two straight lines, their point of inter-
section is a double-point on the curve of intersection, i.e. every
line lying in the plane at infinity and passing through this point
meets the surface in two coincident points and is therefore a
tangent. The plane at infinity is therefore a tangent-plane. The
surface is a paraboloid (hyperbolic or elliptic according as the
two lines at infinity are real or imaginary).

All parallel sections cut the plane at infinity in the same two
points, and have therefore their corresponding asymptotes
parallel. They are therefore similar conies, similarly placed, or
homothetic.

200 PLANE SECTIONS OF A QUADRIC [chap.

10-2. The centre of a plane section.

The centre C of any section is the pole, with regard to the curve
of intersection, of the line at infinity in the plane. This line at
infinity is therefore part of the polar of C with regard to the sur-
face ; hence the given plane and the polar of C both intersect the
plane at infinity in the same line, i.e. the polar-plane of C is
parallel to the given plane.

If the surface is a central one, let its equation be
ax 2 + by i + cz*=i,
and let the plane of section be

lx+my + nz=p.
If [X, Y, Z] is the centre of the section, its polar is

aXx+bYy + cZz=i.
These two planes cut the plane at infinity in the lines

lx+my + nz=o, w = o,
and aXx+bYy+cZz=o, w=o.

In order that these may coincide

aXJbY _cZ , p

T ~ m" ~ "n * C ~ P/a + »•/* + »V«*

These equations determine X, Y, Z.
10-21. If the surface is a paraboloid
ax i +by 2 =zcz,
the polar of [X, Y, Z] is

aXx+bYy = c(z+Z),
and we have to identify the equations

lx+my + nz=o,
and aXx+bYy — cz=o.

aX bY c_ p-nZ

Hence

I m n Pja+m 2 lb'

10-31. Axes of a central plane section.

Let C be the centre of the section. Equal diameters of the section
are equally inclined to either of its axes. The magnitudes and
positions of the axes can be investigated by considering the limit-
ing case of a pair of equal diameters when they come to coincide.

x] PLANE SECTIONS OF A QDADRIC 201

Consider first for simplicity a central section. The centre of
the section then coincides with the centre of the surface. The
extremities of all semi-diameters of length r lie on a sphere with
centre C. The lines joining C to the points in which this sphere
cuts the surface form a cone. The generators of the cone are the
common diameters of the sphere and the surface. Since every
section through C has C for centre and cuts the sphere in a con-
centric circle, and since a conic and a concentric circle have just
two common diameters, every plane through C cuts the cone in
two generators and the cone is of the second order.
Let the equation of the surface be

ax 2 +by 2 +cz 2 =i,
and the plane lx+my+nz=o.

Take the concentric sphere

x 2 +y 2 +z 2 =r 2 .
The cone formed by the common diameters is then
(ar 2 - i)x 2 + (br 2 - i)y 2 + (cr 2 - i)* 2 = o.
Now if the given plane touches the cone the two equal diameters
coincide with one of the axes of the section. The condition for
a tangent-plane is

P/(ar 2 - 1) + m 2 l(br 2 - 1) + n 2 /(cr 2 - 1) = o,
i.e. £/ 2 (ir 2 -i)(cr 2 -i)=o,

which is a quadratic in r 2 .

The two roots r ± 2 and r 2 2 are the squares of the semi-axes of
the section.

To find their direction-cosines A, //., v, find the equation of the
tangent-plane at [A, /j,, v\ to the cone, viz.

(ar 2 -i)\x + (br 2 -i)ny + (cr 2 -i)vz = o,
and identify with the equation of the given plane. Then
X-.fi: v=l\{ar 2 - 1) : mj(br a - 1) : n\{cr 2 - 1).

10-32. Axes of non-central section.

In the general case when C is not the centre of the surface, an
arbitrary plane through C cuts the sphere in a circle with centre
C and the surface in a conic not having C for centre. These two
curves cut in four points, and their joins with C form four distinct

2oa PLANE SECTIONS OF A QUADRIC [chap.

generators of the cone. The cone is therefore of the fourth
order. The section which has C for centre, however, cuts the
cone in two pairs of coincident generators, and we obtain the
axes of the section by choosing r so that these two lines coincide.
Let the equation of the surface be

ax*+by* + cz i =i,

and that of the plane

lx + my + nz=p.

If [X, Y, Z] is the centre of the section,

aX_bY _cZ_ p aX*+bY*+cZ*

I m n l*/a + m*/b + n*/c p

Now transform to [X, Y, Z] as origin. The equation of the

ax'* + by'* + cz'* + 2 {aXx' +bYy'+ cZz')

+ (aX*+bY*+cZ*-i)=o,
i.e.

ax'* + by'*+cz'* + 2 (lx' + my' + nz') pfcP/ a +m*/b+ n*/c) -K=o,

where K = i -p'KP/a + m*\b + rfjc),

and the equation of the plane becomes

lx' + my' + nz' = o.

Hence the axes of the section are the same as those of the conic

ax z +by 2 +cz 2 =K)
Ix+my+nz =o J *

Hence the quadratic equation for the squares of the semi-
axes is 2l*(br*-K)(cr*-K)=o,
and the direction-cosines of the axes are

A : n : v=l/(ar a -K) : m/(br*-K) : n/(cr*-K).

10-33. The directions of the axes of a plane section may also
be investigated as follows. Let the equations of the surface and
the plane in homogeneous coordinates be

ax* + by* + cz* = w* t

Ix+my + nz =pw.

x] PLANE SECTIONS OF A QUADRIC 203

The points at infinity on the section are determined by the
equations

ax*+by 2 +cz 2 =o

he + my+nz =0

The second equation represents the cone joining the origin to
the conic at infinity on the surface, and the plane, which passes
through its vertex, cuts it in two straight lines, which are the
lines joining the origin to the points at infinity on the section.
Hence the asymptotes of the section are parallel to the two lines

ax*+by z +cz* = o
Ix+my+nz =0} °

Eliminating z and expressing the condition for real roots, we
find that the section is

an ellipse 1 >

a hyperbola - according as bcP + cam? + abn? < o.

a parabola

The axes are harmonic conjugates with regard to the asymptotes,
and are also at right angles, i.e. harmonic conjugates with regard to
the absolute lines in their plane, viz. the two lines

x 2 +y i +sP=d
Ix+my + nz=o) '

If therefore the axes are the two lines

lx+my + nz=zO) '
we have the two conditions (cf. 5*6)

Z(bc' + b'c)P=o,
X(b' + c')P=o,
hence a': b': c' = P{-(b-c)P + (c-a)m* + {a-b)n*}
:m*{(b-c)P-(c-a)m> + (a-b)n i }
: » a {(b - c) P + (c - a) m* - {a - b) n 2 }.
Ex. Show that the section will be a rectangular hyperbola if
S(6 + c)/ 2 =o.

204 PLANE SECTIONS OF A QUADRIC [chap.

10-4. Circular sections.

The most interesting of the plane sections of a quadric are the
circular sections. To show that circular sections actually exist
consider the conic at infinity C on the ,

quadric, and the circle at infinity Q. \ \f

These two conies, in the plane at ^- ^pc~\ /

infinity, intersect in four points, which / // '■ t/v'

are conjugate imaginary in pairs, H, I // ^ '' A\

H' and K, K', and they determine \ // S\ I X

three pairs of common chords, HH' \. //.'" > If J
and KK', HK and H'K', HK' and ----^^^^- —
H'K, of which the first pair are real .--'/ V c s' \
and the others conjugate imaginaries. ' ' \

Any plane through one of these lg " 37

chords, say HH', has the two points H and H' as the circular
points, and as the section of the surface passes through these
points it is a circle. There are therefore three pairs of sets of
parallel circular sections, one pair real, the others imaginary.

ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 = i.
The conic at infinity is

w = o, ax 2 +by 2 +cz 2 =o,
and the equations

ax 2 +by 2 + cz 2 -X(x 2 +y 2 +z 2 ) = o, to=o

represent a conic through the four points H, H', K, K'. Choosing
A so that these equations may represent two straight lines we have

(\-a)(\-b)(\-c)=o.
Hence X=a, b, or c. For each of these values the quadratic
breaks up into factors and represents two planes through the
centre, the central planes of circular section. Thus for

A = a, (b-a)y 2 + (c-a)z 2 = o, (i)

X = b, (a-b)x 2 + (c-b)z 2 = o, (ii)

A=c, (a-c)x 2 + (b~c)y 2 = o. (iii)

Hence the central planes of circular section all pass through one
of the principal axes, and in pairs are equally inclined to a

x] PLANE SECTIONS OF A QDADRIC 205

principal plane. If a<b<c the planes corresponding to X=b
are the real planes, whether a, b, c are positive or negative.

For the ellipsoid the real central planes of circular section are
those which contain the mean axis.

For the hyperboloid of one sheet, say a<o<b<c, the real
central planes are those which contain the major axis of the
principal elliptic section.

For the hyperboloid of two sheets, say a<b<o<c, the real
central planes do not cut the surface in real sections, but parallel
sections sufficiently remote from the centre will cut the surface
in real circles. A plane parallel to the plane of xy cuts the surface
in an ellipse ax 2 + by 2 = k and a real plane of circular section then
contains the minor axis of this ellipse.

10-42. Circular sections of the paraboloids.

The case of the paraboloids requires some modification.
A paraboloid ax 2 +by 2 =2cz cuts the plane at infinity in two
straight lines w=o, ax 2 +by 2 =o. These are real, say HH' and
KK', in the case of the hyperbolic paraboloid, imaginary, say
HK and H'K', for the elliptic paraboloid. The planes of circular
section are found by choosing A so that

ax 2 + by 2 -X(x 2 +y 2 + z 2 )
factorises. The values of A are o, a, b.

In the case of the hyperbolic paraboloid the real planes
correspond to A=o, but this gives planes which cut the surface
in a line at infinity and another line. We have seen that this pair
forms a degenerate case of a circle with centre at infinity. The
hyperbolic paraboloid possesses no proper circular sections
other than its rectilinear generators. The rectilinear generators
of a hyperboloid do not of course correspond to circular sec-
tions, since they consist of pairs of finite lines, not a finite line
and a line at infinity as in the case of the paraboloid.

In the case of the elliptic paraboloid there are real proper circular
sections corresponding to A= b if a is numerically greater than b.

10-5. Models of these surfaces can be constructed of card-
board by fixing together two series of circular sections. If the
planes are hinged at their lines of intersection, these models are
deformable, being capable of being squeezed or expanded into

206 PLANE SECTIONS OF A QUADRIC [chap.

different shapes. As an example take the sphere x 2 +y t +z t =b 2 ,

and form two series of parallel sections

perpendicular to the plane of xz and

inclined to the plane of xy at angles ± a.

Then if P is any point on the surface,

and PL and PM are the traces on the

plane of zx of the two planes through

P, and if OL=p, OM=q, we have

*=(— p + q) cosa,

z=(p + q) sina, Fig. 38

while y 2 = b* - (q -pf cos 2 a - (q +p) 2 sin 2 a.

Now change the inclination of the planes to 8. For the same
material point P, y is unchanged, but

x=(q— p)cos8, z=<(q+p)sm.8.
Then eliminating p and q we get

y 2 — b 2 — # a cos 2 a sec 2 8 — z % sin 2 a cosec 2 9,
which represents an ellipsoid with semi-axes b sec a cos 6, b,
b cosec a sin0. In the extreme cases when 6=0 or 90 the planes

Fig. 39. Hyperbolic paraboloid

flatten out and we obtain two ellipses, one in the «y-plane with
semi-axes b sec a and b, the other in the yz-pl&ne with semi-
axes b and b cosec a.

x] PLANE SECTIONS OF A QUADRIC 207

10-6. Any two circles which belong one each to the two sets of
real circular sections lie on a sphere.
Taking the two sections

m=V(£— a).x+-\/(c—b).s— p = o

and v=y/{b—a).x—^/{c—b).z—q=o,

the equation k (ax a + by 2 +cz 2 — i) + uv=o

represents a quadric containing both circles. The equation con-
tains no terms in yz, zx or xy, and the coefficients of x 2 , y 2 and z 2
will all be equal if k= 1.

Otherwise, let a, j3 be two circular sections. Their planes
intersect in a line which cuts the quadric in two points U, V.
a passes through H, H', and jS through K, K'. Since a conic is
. determined by five points the two sections can be determined,
apart from the surface, by taking a fifth point, A and B re-
spectively, on each. Thus a is determined by the five points U,
V, H, H', A, and by the five points U, V, K, K', B. Any
quadric through the eight points U, V, H, H', K, K', A, B will
then contain the two sections, since it contains five points of
each, and it can be made to pass through a ninth point L which
we may choose on the circle at infinity. It then contains five
points H, H', K, K', L on the circle at infinity and therefore
contains it and is a sphere.

The condition that two circles should lie on the same sphere
is simply that they should have two common points, and this
condition is evidently satisfied by two circles of different systems

10-7. Umbilics. A circle which lies on a quadric, in the
limiting case when its radius becomes zero, is a point-circle.
These point-circles are called umbilics. There are four real um-
bilics, lying in pairs at the ends of two diameters. In addition
there are four pairs of imaginary umbilics, i.e. twelve in all.

If [X, Y, Z] are the coordinates of an umbilic of the quadric
ax i +by 2 +cz a =i the conjugate diametral plane is a circular
section. Hence identifying

aXx + b Yy + cZz = o

with V(°~ a).x±^/{c— b).z=o,

208 PLANE SECTIONS OF A QUADRIC [chap.

we have

Y=o and aX=X x /(b-a), cZ=±X^(c-b).

But «X» + 6Y»+eZ»=i,

hence {c{b — a) + a(c—b)}\*=ac,

and therefore A= ±-\/{ac/b(c— a)}.

We have therefore

X= ±V{c(b-a)/ab(c-a)}, Y=o, Z= ±V{a{c-b)jbc{c-a)}.

10-71. The twelve umbilics, together with the four absolute
points or points of intersection of the conic at infinity on the
quadric with the circle at infinity, form a remarkable con-
figuration of sixteen points on the quadric. Denote the absolute
points by P lt P 2 , P 8 , P 4 ; these lie in the plane w=o. Four
umbilics U x , U if U s , C/ 4 lie in the plane x=o; four, V x , etc., in
the plane v=o; and four, W lt etc., in the plane z=o. The
tangent-plane at an umbilic U 1 cuts the surface in two gene-
rating lines which together form also a point-circle and therefore
pass through two of the points P. Also through each of the points
P there pass two generating lines, i.e. eight lines in all, and all
the umbilics lie on these eight lines. On each line there is an
absolute point P lt say, and three umbilics, viz. the points in
which one generator through P x cuts the generators of the
opposite system through the other absolute points P 2 , P s and
P 4 . Thus the sixteen points lie in sets of four on eight lines.

Again, the tangent-plane at Ux contains the two generators
through C/j and therefore contains seven of the sixteen points,
viz. five umbilics and two absolute points. Similarly the tangent-
plane at Pt contains the two generators through P x and therefore
also contains seven points, viz. six umbilics and one absolute point.

A configuration is a figure consisting of points, lines, and
planes, such that on every line there are the same number of
points, on every plane the same number of points and the same
number of lines, through every point the same number of lines
and the same number of planes, and so on. If N , JV^, N 2 de-
note the total numbers of points, lines and planes; N 01 , N w the
numbers of points in a line and in a plane ; N 10 , N w the numbers
of lines and planes through a point ; N 12 the number of lines in

x] PLANE SECTIONS OF A QUADRIC 209

a plane, and N 21 the number of planes through a line, the con-
figuration may be denoted by

A'o

N a

^02

N 10

Ai

N*

Nv,

N a

N 2

This configuration is therefore represented by

16 4

7

2 8

2

7 4

16

10 9. EXAMPLES.

1. Find the coordinates of the centre of the section of the
surface 3x 2 -2y 2 + sr 2 = 6 by the plane 6*-8y + 3«+u=o.

Arts. [2, 4, 3].

2. Find the coordinates of the centre of the section of the
surface 3x*+2y*+4z 2 =24 made by the plane 2^-y + 2Z=g.
From the coordinates thus obtained show that the plane cuts the
surface in a real curve.

Arts. [2, —1, 1].

3. Find the equations of the real circular sections of the

(i) 4x 2 +2y 2 + z* + 2yz+zx-i=o.
(ii) 2x 2 +$y 2 -3z i +4xy-i=o. (iii) 2x 2 + ^y 2 + zz i -yz-/[zx — xy + 4=o. Ans. (i) x+y — z = o, x— y + 2z=o. (ii) x + 2y + 2z = o, x + 2y — 2z = o. (iii) x+y+z=o, 2x—y+2z=o. 4. Find the real circular sections of the paraboloids: (i) iox 2 +2y 2 =z. (ii) 2x 2 +7y 2 +8z 2 +i2yz+4zx+8xy=2x-2y+z. Ans. (i) 2x±z=X. (ii) 4x+2y+5z=X, 2y+z=(i. SAG 14 210 PLANE SECTIONS OF A QUADRIC [chap. 5. Find the real central circular sections of the ellipsoid i3* 8 +3y+5* 2 =4. Prove that the sphere$(x i +y*+x s )+4x—6y=o cuts this
ellipsoid in a pair of circles, and find the equations of their planes.
Ans. y— ±2x; 2x— y+i=o, zx+y— 2«=o.

6. Find the directions and lengths of the axes of the section of
the ellipsoid 14a; 2 +6y 2 + 9^=3 by the plane x+y+z=o.

Ans. r=\, [-3, 1, 2]; r 2 =9/22, [1, -5, 4].

7. Show that the plane x+ 2y+^z=i cuts the hyperboloid
2a: 2 +^ 2 — 2sr 2 =i in a parabola, and find the direction-ratios of
its axis.

Ans. [1,4,-3].

8. Show that the plane #+ 2^+32=0 cuts the hyperboloid
— 6# 2 +7y 2 — 14s 2 =7 in a hyperbola, and find the direction-
ratios of the axes.

Ans. [7, 1, -3], [9, -24, 13].

9. Find the equation of the cone with vertex at the origin and
passing through the curve of intersection of the quadric

ax i +by 2 +cz i =i
with the concentric sphere of radius r. Prove that every tangent-
plane of this cone cuts the quadric in a conic having one axis = r.

10. If the plane Ix+tny+nz—o cuts the surface F(x,y, z) = o
in a rectangular hyperbola show that

a(m 2 +n i ) + b(n !i +P) + c(l i +m 2 )-2fmn-2gnl-2hlm=o.

11. Find the area of a given central section of an ellipsoid.
Ans. w a6c(S/ 2 /Sa 2 / 2 )*.

12. Show that the envelope of plane central sections of con-
stant area of an ellipsoid is a quadric cone.

13. A sphere of constant radius cuts an ellipsoid in plane
sections ; find the surface generated by the line of intersection
of the planes.

Ans. Three cylinders.

x] PLANE SECTIONS OF A QUADRIC 211

14. Show that the planes, whose sections with a given quadric
have their centres on a given straight line, are parallel to another
fixed line and envelop a parabolic cylinder.

15. Show that there is a doubly infinite system of spheres
which cut a given central quadric in pairs of circles, and that the
locus of point-spheres of the system consists of three conies (the
focal conies).

16. Prove that the plane section of the ellipsoid

x i ja i +y i jb i +z i jc i =i
whose centre is at the point [\a, \b, §c] passes through three of
the extremities of the principal axes of the ellipsoid.

(Math. Trip. I, 1914.)

14-2

CHAPTER XI

TANGENTIAL EQUATIONS

11-1. A set of four numbers [* , x^, x 2 , aj, homogeneous
point-coordinates, represents a point ; and a set of four numbers
[£o» £i> &> is]> homogeneous plane-coordinates, represents a
plane. The point and the plane are incident when

£0^0 + bl#l+ 62^2 "t" 63 x 3 = o.

If (£) is fixed and (x) variable this is the equation of the plane
(£) ; if (x) is fixed and (£) variable, it is the equation of the
point (x).

11-21. Tangent-plane of a surface.

A single homogeneous equation in x , ..., x s represents a two-
dimensional assemblage of points, two-way locus, or (in general)
a surface,

Jf {Xq , Xi , X 2 , X 3 ) = o.

If (x') is any point on the surface and (*' + Sx') is a neighbouring
point on the surface, so that

F(x ', ...)=o and F(x '+8x Q ', x^+Sx^, x 2 ' + 8x 2 , x 3 ' + Sx 3 ')=o,

expanding by Taylor's theorem, we have

F(x ' + Sx ', ...)=F(x ', ...)+S |p8*«' + ••••

Hence, neglecting squares of the increments,

The matrix

**0 ™1 *2 **3 I

@Xq QrX-x QXt£ ClXa I

represents a line-element of the surface through (x') when

dF
F(x ', ...) = o and 2 ~— , dxi' = o, and determines the direction

of a tangent-line at (»'). If (») is any point on this tangent, this

chap, xi] TANGENTIAL EQUATIONS 313

line will be that determined by the points (*') and (x) provided
(x) satisfies the same equation as (dx'). Hence the coordinates
of any point on any tangent-line at (x') satisfy the equation

This is the equation of the tangent-plane at (x').
11-22. Point of an envelope.

Similarly a single homogeneous equation in (£) represents a
two-dimensional assemblage of planes, two-way envelope, or
(in general) a surface

*(&, €1, &. £,) = o.

The matrix

£0' £1' £ 2 ' £3'
Mo <&' <&' <fc

i-]

where ©(&', ...)=oandSgp <#/ = o, represents a line-element

in the plane (£'), and the coordinates of any plane which passes
through any line-element in this plane satisfy the equation

This is the equation of the point of contact of the tangent-
plane (£').

11-3. Tangential equation derived from point-equation,
and vice-versa.

A surface, which can be considered either as a two-way locus
or as a two-way envelope, has a point-equation and a plane or
tangential equation; and if the one is given the other can be
deduced.

Let F(xg, x^, x^, Xg) = o be the point-equation of the surface.
The condition that (£) should be a tangent-plane is found by
identifying this plane with the tangent-plane at (*'). Hence

and further E£ 4 »:/=o.

ai4 TANGENTIAL EQUATIONS [chap.

Between these five equations we can eliminate */ and A, and thus
obtain the tangential equation in (£).

By an exactly similar process the point-equation can be ob-
tained from the tangential equation.

11-31. Tangential equation of the quadric

YLa ra x r x,=o.
The equation of the tangent-plane at (*') is

Hence A£ r = S a„x,' (r= 0,1,2,3),

a

and since (x') lies on the tangent-plane

E| r a; r ' = o.
Eliminating x r ' and A we obtain the equation

=0,

%>

«01

«02

«03

6,

«10

a n

«12

«13

&

<ho

(hi

a 2 2

#23

&

«30

<hi

a Si

«33

&

£0 £1 & £3
which is homogeneous and of the second degree in £ r . If capital
letters denote the cofactors of the corresponding small letters
in the determinant Asia I

the equation can be written

22M„£ r f,=o.

As the point-equation is obtained from the tangential equation
by exactly the same process we verify a known theorem in de-
terminants, that the cofactors of the capital letters in the de-
terminant A'=|^„| are proportional to the corresponding
small letters in the determinant A = | a rs |. It can be proved in
fact that A'=A 3 , and if a rs ' denotes the cofactor of A tl , then
a rs '=A*a r$, or a rs '/A' = a re /A. 11-4. The general equation of the second degree in plane- coordinates thus represents a quadric-envelope. Some special forms of the equation may be noted. xi] TANGENTIAL EQUATIONS 215 If = o and T=o represent two quadric-envelopes, the equation <D+AY=o represents a quadric-envelope which touches all the planes common to the two given quadric-envelopes. In particular, if <& breaks up into linear factors oc/J, <D = o represents two bundles of planes with vertices oc=o and jS=o, and the equation «j8+AT=o represents a quadric-envelope inscribed in each of the tangent- cones to Y with vertices a and /?. Further, the equation £/=a 2 +AY=o represents a quadric-envelope inscribed in the tangent-cone to *F with vertex a, and having ring-contact with it and with T around the conic of contact of the tangent-cone with T. For the point of contact of a tangent-plane (£') of T is E£ ^> =0, and 3T its point of contact with U is 2aa' + AS £ ^p = o. But if (£') passes through a, then a' = o, and (£') touches Y and J7 at the same point. 11-5. Order and class of a surface. In the dual correlation, to a point corresponds a plane, and vice versa, and to a line corresponds a line. To a surface con- sidered as a two-way locus corresponds in general a surface considered as a two-way envelope. An arbitrary line cuts a sur- face in a finite number of points equal to the degree of the equation in point-coordinates, the order of the surface. Dually, through an arbitrary line there are a finite number of tangent- planes to the surface equal to the degree of the equation in plane-coordinates, the class of the surface. The points which a plane has in common with the surface form a plane curve whose order is equal to that of the surface. Dually, the planes which a bundle (planes through a point) has in common with a surface (two-way envelope) form a cone. Thus cone is dual to plane curve. A plane curve is a one-way locus of 216 TANGENTIAL EQUATIONS [chap. points, and a cone is a one-way envelope of planes. At any point on a curve there is just one tangent-line, and every plane through this line is a tangent-plane. In any tangent-plane to a cone there is just one proper tangent-line (the generating line), and every point on this line is a point of the cone. Thus as a cone is a two- way locus of points, a plane curve is a two-way envelope of planes. 11 '51. In plane geometry the order of a plane curve is denned as the number of points in which it is cut by an arbitrary line in its plane. In space a line does not in general cut a given curve, and the order is denned more generally as the number of points in which it is cut by an arbitrary plane. Dually, for a cone there are in general through an arbitrary line no tangent-planes, but through a line which contains the vertex there are a finite num- ber of tangent-planes ; this is equal also to the number of tangent- planes through an arbitrary point, and is called the class of the cone. The order of the cone is of course equal to the number of points in which it is cut by an arbitrary line, and the class of a plane curve is equal to the number of tangent-planes through an arbitrary line, which is the same as the number of tangent-lines through an arbitrary point in its plane ; dually, for the cone the order is equal to the number of generating lines in an arbitrary plane through its vertex. Thus to plane curve corresponds cone, and to tangent corresponds generating line. A plane curve requires two equations in point-coordinates, one of which, linear, will represent its plane. Dually, a cone requires two equations in plane-coordinates, one of which, linear, will represent its vertex. A cone is represented by a single equation in point-coordinates, and a plane curve by a single equation in plane-coordinates. A single tangential equation therefore may represent either a surface or a plane curve. We shall see afterwards that it may re- present any curve, not necessarily plane. 11-52. Tangential equation of a plane curve. A plane curve, as we have seen, is dual to a cone, its plane corresponding to the vertex of the cone. The algebraic method of finding the tangential equation of a plane curve is therefore the same as that of finding the point-equation of a cone. xi] TANGENTIAL EQUATIONS 317 If t=o is the point-equation of the plane of the curve, and «=o represents any tangent-plane, the two equations together represent a tangent-line to the curve in its plane, and any plane through this line, say u + \t = o, is also a tangent-plane. The point-coordinates being [x, y, z, w] and the plane-coordinates [£, rj, £, co], if the plane of the curve is a»=o or, in plane- coordinates, [o, o, o, 1], then if [£, rj, £, w] or gx+rjy + £z+cozv=o is a tangent-plane so also is tjx + riy + £z + co'zo = o or [£, 1?, £, <»'] for all values of a>'. The tangential equation there- fore does not contain to, but is homogeneous in £, rj, £. And con- versely a homogeneous equation in £, 17, £ represents a curve in the plane w=o. As an example let us find the tangential equation of the circle at infinity whose point-equations are x 2 +y 2 + z 2 = o, 10 = 0. The plane fx+rjy + £z + a>u) = o cuts the plane at infinity in the line £x+i)y + £z = o, io = o, and the condition that this should be a tangent to the conic x i +y 2 +z 2 = o, w = o is P+r,* + !? = o. Similarly, more generally, the tangential equation of the conic at infinity on the quadric ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 + zfyz + zgzx + zhxy + zpx + zq y + zrz + d = o is AP+B^ + C^ + zFtf + zGtf + zHfr^, where capital letters denote the cofactors of the corresponding small letters in the determinant D = a h g h b f g f c 11-6. Tangential equations of a cone. When A=o, which is the condition for a cone, the tangential equation, derived from the point-equation as in 11-31, de- generates. If ^#0 it can be written 2S^4oo ■"« fc> s« = o. ai8 TANGENTIAL EQUATIONS But by a theorem in determinants [chap. 2 00 -"01 A l0 A hence when A = o etc., #32 ^33 AooA rB = A 0r A 0t , and the equation becomes 'SSjA 0r A ,^ r ^,=o, i-e. (S4> r £ r )*=o. This equation thus represents the vertex of the cone, taken twice ; and it may similarly be represented by any one of the four equations S^ = o (z = o, i, 2 , 3 ) (i) r While a plane through the vertex has the property of a tangent- plane in cutting the quadric in a pair of lines, the actual tangent- planes of the cone are further specified as cutting the cone in coincident lines. Another equation in | r is therefore required along with the former one to represent this one-dimensional system of tangent-planes. For this we may take the tangential equation of any plane section of the cone not passing through the vertex, or of any quadric which is inscribed in the cone. For example, the section by the plane x = o is 3 3 SSa rs x r x s =o, i i and its tangential equation is S {(a^a 3S -a 23 2 )i 1 2 + 2(a sl a 12 -a n a 2S )i 2 ^ s }=D (2) This equation, together with any one of the equations (1), then form tangential equations of the cone. 11-7. Equations in line-coordinates. A line in space has four degrees of freedom, and a single equation connecting the coordinates of a line represents a three- dimensional assemblage of lines. This is in general a complex. Two equations represent a two-dimensional assemblage, in general a congruence; and three equations represent a one- dimensional assemblage or line-series, such as the lines on a quadric surface. h] TANGENTIAL EQUATIONS 219 A single equation may also, however, represent a surface or a curve, for there are 00 3 lines tangent to a given surface, or cutting a given curve. Such an equation will be called the line- equation of the surface or curve. 11-71. Line-equation of a conic. As an example of the line-equation of a conic let us take the conic at infinity on the general quadric 4 i SSfl„x r x,=o, 1 1 #0=0 being the plane at infinity. Let pijSdibj — ajbi be the line-coordinates of any line. The point-coordinates of any point on the line are a t — Xb { . Hence the line cuts the plane x = o where A = a^jb , and the coordinates of the point of intersection are x i = (a i b -a b t )lb =p iO lb . As this point lies also on the quadric we have 3 3 2Sa„/) r0 /) 80 =o. 1 1 In particular the line-equation of the circle at infinity is Ex. Prove that the line-equation of any curve in the plane *r =o is homogeneous in/> 01 ,/> 02 ,/>03; and conversely that any homogeneous equation in />oi» A>2>A>s represents a curve in the plane x =o. 11-72. Line-equation of a quadric. This is the condition that the line (p) should touch the quadric. Let the line be the intersection of the two planes cc= ££<#< = o, Then for some value of the ratio Xffx, the equation Aa+^j8=o represents a tangent-plane to the quadric. If (v) is the point of contact we have a m y +a a y 1 +a i2 y 2 +a ia y a =>4 i + firji (1 = 0, i, 2, 3), also 'L$ i y i =o and l,r) ( y i =o.

220 TANGENTIAL EQUATIONS [chap.

Eliminating^, y x , y 2 , y s , A and /* between these six equations

we get

% Sffl ^ «03 4 1o

a 1Q a n 0x2

^20 ^21 G 22

^30 ^31 ^32

60 SI S2

V0 Vl V't

=o.

«13 Si %

fl 23 S2 1 ?2

^33 S3 %

£3 O O

% O O

When this determinant is expanded it can be written as a
homogeneous equation of the second degree in the line-coordinates

11-73. Polar of a line (p) with respect to a given quadric.

The polar plane of (x') with respect to the quadric

HHa rs x r x, =o

is 2,T,a rs x r x s ' = o.

Hence the polar line of the line joining (*') and (x") is

~L1>a rB x r x s ' =o\
YLa TS x T x" = o) '

Now pi^x/x'-x/xf,

and if m { / are the line-coordinates of the polar line

w it ' = 2 a is x 8 ' . S a u x" - 2 a 3S » s ' . 2 a,,*/
= SS (a <r a„ - a ir a { ,)p„ .

r s

11-74. From this we can deduce in another way the line-
equation of the quadric. The line (p) is a tangent to the quadric
when it meets its polar. The condition for this is

TSp ii ra i / = o.

Hence substituting the values of w ti ' we obtain the line-equation
of the quadric in the form

2222 (a ir a js - a^a^piip^ = o,

i i r s

where i, j and r, s take the successive pairs of values o, i ; o, a ;
o. 3 ; 2» 3 ; 3» J ; r » 2 independently.

xi] TANGENTIAL EQUATIONS 321

In terms of the coefficients of the tangential equation the line-
equation is similarly

ESSE (A iT A it - A Jr A is ) ot«ot„ = o.

i j r s

If the quadric is a cone with vertex [o, o, o, i] so that 0^ =
(i=o, 1, 2, 3), the line-equation contains only p a , p n , p u , or, if
it is expressed in terms oivj iit it is homogeneous in tjt 01 , m^, vj m .

Ex. 1. Show that the line-equation of any cone with vertex £,=0
is homogeneous in t<j 01 , to 02 , td m ; and conversely.

Ex. 2. If the point-equation of the quadric is

Ea r * r 2 = °>
show that its line-equation is

11-8. We can now amplify the classification of quadrics in the
cases of degeneracy.

When [A] is of rank 3, the quadric as a locus is a cone. If the
point-equation is

a \ x \ + <h. x % + a % x s 2 — °
the plane-equation degenerates to £ 2 =o, which represents just
the vertex of the cone twice. The determinant [V] is of rank 1.
The cone, however, is represented completely in plane-co-
ordinates by the two equations

&=o and fi7ai+& 2 M!+&7«s=°.

The line-equation is

a 2 Ozpv? + a s a^fta 2 + a t a^p^ = o.

When [A] is of rank 2, the quadric as a locus degenerates to
two planes. If the point-equation is

a x i +a t x 1 2 =o,

the plane-equation completely degenerates, [V] being of rank o.

a x 2 + a 1 x 1 i + eHLa r ,x r x s = o.

Forming the tangential equation and arranging in powers of e
we find

JZZA r ,£ r £, + e*K- ea a 1 (a S!i & + a^ 3 2 - 2<h 3 & 3 ) = o.

222 TANGENTIAL EQUATIONS [chap.

Divide by e and let e ->o and we get

which represents two points on the line joining £ 2 =o and £ s =o,
i.e. on the line x = o = x 1 .

In this case the point-equation and the plane-equation must
be separately given, and the matrices of the coefficients are in
general each of rank 2. We have the following cases :

[A] of rank 2, [V] of rank 2. The quadric consists as a locus
of two distinct planes through a line /, and as an envelope of two
distinct points on the line /.

[A] of rank 2, [V] of rank 1. Two distinct planes through a
line /, and two coincident points on /.

[A] of rank 1, [V] of rank 2. Two coincident planes; two dis-
tinct points in this plane.

[A] of rank 1, [V] of rank 1. Two coincident planes ; two coin-
cident points on this plane.

11-9. EXAMPLES.

1 . Show that the envelope of planes which cut a given quadric
in sections whose centres lie on a given plane is a paraboloid.

2. Pairs of orthogonal tangent-planes to a given quadric pass
through a fixed point; show that their lines of intersection

3. Show that

fqrx 2 +grpy 2 + hpqz 2 +fgkw 2 + (fp -gq - hr) (pyz +fxzo)

+ iSi ~ hr ~fP) (Q zx +gyw) + (Jw -fp ~gq) (rxy + hzzv) = o
represents a quadric which touches the four faces of the tetra-
hedron of reference.

Show also that the conditions that the lines joining each point
of contact to the opposite vertex should be concurrent are

fp= g q=hr.

Show that by suitable choice of unit-point the equation can
be written

x 2 +y 2 + z* + to 2 + zl(yz + xw) + zm {zx +yzv) + zn (xy + zw) = o,

where zlmn— I 2 — m 2 — n 2 +i=o.

xi] TANGENTIAL EQUATIONS 223

4. If F(x, y, z, w) = o represents a cone with vertex
[A, B, C, D] show that its tangential equations are

A£+Bri + C£+Da> = o
and

(bc-p)p+{ca-g*W+{ab-h*)t?+2{gh-af)r,t >

+ 2 (hf- bg) tf+2 (fg - ch) $7) = o. 5. A quadric cone has vertex A and a circular base of which P is any point. Show that the envelope of the plane through P perpendicular to AP is another quadric cone, and that it cuts the plane of the circle in a conic the foci of which are the orthogonal projections of the vertices of the two cones. (Math. Trip. II, 1913.) CHAPTER XII FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES 12>1. A focus of a conic is a point such that every pair of lines through it which are conjugate with regard to the conic are also at right angles. In general through any point there is just one pair of conjugate lines which are at right angles. Pairs of con- jugate lines through a point P form an involution whose double- lines are the tangents from P to the conic ; pairs of orthogonal lines through P also form an involution and its double-lines are the lines joining P to the circular points J, /. For an ordinary point P these two involutions are distinct, and since one of them at least, the involution of orthogonal lines, is elliptic, they have always a real pair of lines in common (3-93). If, however, P is a focus F, the two involutions coincide ; the lines FI and FJ are tangents to the conic. As these two lines also form a point-circle, we may say also that the foci of a conic are point-circles having double contact with the conic ; the chord of contact is the corre- sponding directrix. 12-11. Focal axes. For a quadric surface these ideas may be extended in two different ways. First, we may consider pairs of planes through a line, orthogonal and conjugate with regard to the quadric. Pairs of conjugate planes form an involution whose double- planes are the tangent-planes to the quadric, and pairs of orthogonal planes form an elliptic involution whose double- planes are tangents to the circle at infinity (i.e. cut the plane at infinity in lines tangent to the circle at infinity). In general these two involutions have one pair of common planes, which are always real. But for certain lines the two involutions coincide, and every pair of orthogonal planes are also conjugate. Such lines are called focal axes. The pair of tangent-planes through a focal axis cut the plane at infinity in two lines which touch the circle at infinity, hence they form a circular cylinder whose radius is zero. A focal axis is therefore the axis of a circular cylinder of zero radius which has double contact with the quadric. chap, xii] FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES 225 1212. Foci. Second, we may consider triads of planes through a point, mutually orthogonal and conjugate with regard to the quadric. If the point P does not lie on the quadric any triad of mutually conjugate planes through P are also mutually conjugate with regard to the tangent-cone from P. But of these sets there is just one which is orthogonal, viz. the three principal planes of the cone. If the point P lies on the quadric the tangent-cone de- generates to a plane ; the three planes then consist of the tangent- plane and the two planes which contain the normal and one of the bisectors of the angles between the two generators through P. Thus in general there is just one such triad of planes through a given point. But for certain points the triad becomes in- determinate, i.e. an infinity of triads are possible. Lying on the quadric the only such points are the umbilics ; and for a point not on the quadric the triad becomes indeterminate only when the tangent-cone is circular. Such points, through which there is an infinity of mutually orthogonal and conjugate planes, are called foci. A focus has thus the property that the tangent-cone from a focus to the quadric is circular. The tangent-cone cuts the plane at infinity in a conic C which has double contact with the circle at infinity O, hence it follows that the cone with vertex F and containing O touches the tangent- cone along two generators and has therefore double contact with the quadric. But this cone is a point-sphere. Hence a focus is the centre of a sphere of zero radius having double contact zvitk the quadric. The chord of contact is called the corresponding directrix. Let U, V be the points of contact of C" and CI, and let the tangents at U and V intersect in T. Then FT is the axis of rotation of the tangent-cone. FU and FV touch the quadric in P and Q, say. Then PQ is the directrix for the focus F. Also the two planes FTU and FTV form a circular cylinder of zero radius having double contact with the quadric at P and Q, and there- fore FT is a focal axis. Hence through any focus there is one focal axis, which is the axis of rotation of the tangent-cone from F. Since the planes FTU and FTV are tangent-planes to the quadric at P and Q, the focal axis FT is the polar of the directrix PQ. sag 15 az6 FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES [chap. Again, since the tangent-cone has ring-contact with the quadric on the conic S, their sections C" and C by the plane at infinity have double contact on the line of intersection / of the plane at infinity with the plane of S. Let L be the common pole of / with respect to C and C" ; and let O be the pole of the plane Fig. 40 at infinity with respect to the quadric, i.e. the centre. Then OF is the polar of / and therefore passes through L, The point at infinity R on the directrix PQ is the intersection of PQ with UV and lies on /. The polar-plane of R with respect to the quadric is TFO, hence its polar with respect to the conic C is LT. But since it lies on / its polar with respect to C" is also LT, and, since it lies on UV, LT is also its polar with respect to Cl. Hence since R has the same polar with respect to both C and O, it is the point at infinity on one of the principal axes of the quadric; its polar-plane OFT is then the corresponding principal plane. xii] FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES 227 Hence a focus F and its focal axis FT lie in a principal plane of the quadric, while the corresponding directrix is parallel to the corre- sponding principal axis. Since T is the pole of UV with respect to Q, the line FT is perpendicular to the plane FUV, i.e. the plane through a focus F and the corresponding directrix is per- pendicular to the focal axis through F. A focal axis which does not lie in a principal plane does not pass through any focus. A focal axis may be obtained from any chord UV of Q. Through each of the tangents UT and VT can be drawn two tangent-planes to the quadric, and the four lines of intersection of these form four focal axes through T, i.e. four parallel focal axes, two real and two imaginary. The corre- sponding chords of contact PQ with the quadric are not in general coplanar with UV. 12-21. Focal axes. We shall treat the problem now analytically, confining our attention for the present to central quadrics. Let the equation of the quadric be t +£+*!_ T A + B + C~ ' and suppose a focal axis to be determined as the intersection of the two planes u = Ix + my + nz +p = o, u' = I'x + m'y + n'z +p' = o. A plane through the intersection of these is represented by (l+\l')x+(m+Xm')y+(n+Xn')z+(p+Xp') = o. Consider this plane and a similar plane with parameter fi instead of A. The condition that these two planes should be orthogonal is A/x (Z' a + m' 2 + »' 2 ) + (A + /*) (//' + mm' + nn') + (Z 2 + m 2 + « 2 ) = o, and the condition that they should be conjugate with regard to the quadric is Xfi (An +Bm'*+ Cn'* -/>' 2 ) + (A + /*) (AW + Bmm' + Cnn' -pp') + (AP + Bm* + Cn* -p 2 ) = o. 15-3 228 FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES [chap. If their line of intersection is a focal axis these two conditions must be identical for all values of A and ju.. Hence Al' 2 + Bm' 2 + Cn' 2 -p' 2 _ AW + Bmm' + Cnn' -pp' I'z + m'z + ri 2 _ H' + mm' + nn' Al 2 +Bm 2 + Cn 2 -p 2 . , l 2 + m 2 + n 2 ' " A ' If one plane is kept fixed, say /', m', n', p' are given, we have two equations, one linear and one quadratic, to determine the ratios of /, m, n, p. If (I) is any one plane satisfying these equations, then (l+M') will also satisfy them. Thus these equations determine two pencils of planes having their axes on the plane (/'). Hence in general there are two focal axes in any plane. Equating each of the ratios (i) to t, we get the three equations (A-t)P+(B-t)m 2 + (C-t)n 2 -p 2 =o, (A - 1) I' 2 + (B - 1) m' 2 + (C - 1) n' 2 -p' 2 = o, (A - 1) IV + (B-t)mm' + (C-t) nn' -pp' = o. Solving for A-t, B-t, C-t, and writing mn'-m'n^p^, pl'-p'l=p^, etc. (the line-coordinates of the focal axis), we have (A — <)/>02^08 =PmPi2 » (B-t)p 03 p 01 =pi2pi3, (C — t)p 01 p02 -pWpSL • Then eliminating t we obtain the two equations P«l (4/W>03 -pSlPli) =P02 ( B P<)3p01 -Pl2p23) =Po3 (CpOlPw -PzSpSl)> which represent the whole two-dimensional assemblage of focal axes, or the focal congruence. Ex. Show that the equations of the focal congruence can also be written (j>aiPi2+PosPi3)Pw (PmPzs +Poip2i)Pai _ (PoiPsi +P02P&) Pn _ ft „ ^ B^C C^A A-B -PoiPutPut- xii] FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES 229 12-22. Focal conies. The principal planes of the quadric are exceptional. Taking (/') as the plane x=o, so that l'=i, m' = o=n'=p', then the equations (1) of 12*21 reduce to A _ /l _ AP + Bm i + Cn i -p i which give only the one equation (A - B) m 2 + (A - C) n* +/> 2 = o. The plane x= o therefore contains an infinity of focal axes, whose envelope is the conic „2 Z * + 7, = !, X = 0. B-A ' C-A Similarly we have conies in the planes y = o and z=o. These three conies are called the focal conies of the quadric. If A>B>C the conic in the plane of yz is virtual, that in the plane of zx is a hyperbola, and that in the plane of xy is an ellipse. This holds whether A, B, C are positive or negative. 12-23. Foci. Consider now any point P= [X, Y, Z], and a plane through P, l{x-X)+tn{y- Y) + n(z-Z) = o. Let the pole of this plane with regard to the quadric x*IA+y 2 /B+z*IC=i be Q=[X', Y', Z']. Then, identifying the equation xX'IA+yY'/B + zZ'IC^i with that of the given plane, we have X' Y' Z' _ 1 Al~Bm Cn IX+mY+nZ' Also if PQ is perpendicular to the plane, X'-X _ Y'-Y _ Z'-Z _ A I m ~ n ~lX+mY+nZ' say - 230 FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES [chap. Hence Al-X(lX+mY+nZ)=M, etc., i.e. (X*-A+X)l+ XYm + XZn=o, XYl+(Y i -B+X)m + YZn=o, XZI+ YZm + (Z*-C+\)n=o. Eliminating /, m, n, X*-A+ A YX ZX =o. XY Y*-B+\ ZY XZ YZ Z*-C+\ In general this gives three real values for A, and these de- termine one set of three planes through P, mutually orthogonal and conjugate with regard to the quadric. If, however, every element of the determinant vanishes, i.e. if the determinant is of rank o, the three roots will be equal, and every set of three mutually orthogonal planes through P are also mutually conjugate. Such a point is called aprincipalfocus. The conditions for this are YZ=o, ZX=o, XY=o, A-X*=B-Y* = C-Z*=X. Hence two of X, Y, Z must vanish, say Y=o = Z, and then B=C=\ and X 2 = A — B. The quadric is then a quadric of revolution, and there are two principal foci (real or imaginary), which are the foci of the meridian sections which lie on the axis of rotation. If the determinant is of rank i, two roots of the equation in A will be equal. P is then an ordinary focus. The conditions for this are (\-B)(\-C)+Y*(\-C)+Z*(\-B) = o, (\-C)(\-A)+Z*(\-A)+X*(\-C)=o, (\-A)(\-B)+X 2 (A-B)+ Y*(\-A) = o, and YZ(A-^) = o, ZX(X-B) = o, XY(\-C) = o. If A = B = C these equations are all satisfied when A =A, i.e. for a sphere every point is a focus, the centre being the only principal focus. xii] FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES 231 Excluding this case, one at least of X, Y, Z must vanish, say X= o. The equations then become (X-B)(X-q+ Y*(\-C)+Z*(\-B) = o, (X-A)(X-C+Z*) = o, (\-A)(\-B+Y*) = o, (X-A)YZ=o, which are satisfied when X=A and Y*(A-C)+Z*(A-B) + (A-B)(A~C)=o. Hence we obtain a locus of foci on the plane *=o forming the focal conic B-A^C-A ' The foci of a quadric are thus the points of the three focal conies. For a quadric of revolution with the axis of x as axis of re- volution, B = C, and we find either Y= o and Z= o or X= o and Y*+Z 2 =B-A. In this case therefore the focal conic in the plane x = o becomes a circle, while the other two degenerate to the axis of rotation which contains also the two principal foci. 12-24. We may investigate the foci also as the centres of spheres of zero radius having double contact with the quadric. Let S=(x-X)*+(y-Y)* + (z-Z)*=o represent a point-sphere at [X, Y, Z], and denote the quadric by F=o. Then the equation S-XF=o represents a quadric passing through the curve of intersection of S and F. Now if S touches F at two points the curve of intersection has a double-point at each of these points. Draw a plane through these two points and any other point on the curve of intersection. This plane has then five points in common with the curve ; but the curve is only of the fourth order, hence it has an infinity of points in common with the curve. The curve of intersection therefore breaks up into two plane curves, each a conic. We can therefore choose A so that the equation S—XF=o represents 232 FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES [chap. these two planes, say S—XF=<xfi. Hence the quadric will have a focus Fs= [X, Y, Z] if its equation can be written in the form {x-X?+(y- y) 2 +(«-Z) 2 =aj3, where a and fi are expressions of the first degree in x, y, z. a and /? represent the two planes, real or imaginary, which contain the curve of intersection of the quadric with the point- sphere. They are therefore planes of circular section. Their line of intersection d is the line joining the two points of contact P and Q, and is the directrix corresponding to the focus F; being the intersection of two circular planes it is parallel to one of the principal axes, viz. that one which is perpendicular to the prin- cipal plane in which F lies. The tangent-planes at P and Q intersect in a line/ which is the polar of the directrix. Any pair of planes through / which are harmonic conjugates with regard to the two tangent-planes are conjugate with regard to both the quadric and the point-sphere, and are therefore orthogonal, /is therefore a focal axis and by 12-22 is a tangent to the focal conic. As the tangent-planes pass through F, f also passes through F, which is therefore the point of contact of/ with the focal conic. If the directrix cuts the principal plane, which contains the focal conic, in D, f is the polar of D with regard to the principal section. One set of three mutually orthogonal and conjugate planes through F consists of the plane of the focal conic, the plane through / perpendicular to the principal plane, and the plane through F perpendicular to /. But the last plane contains d, since it is the polar of/. Hence DFis perpendicular to / and therefore normal to the focal conic. The principal section being y/B+*"/c=i, and the focal conic Fi s- 4* ?I(B-A)+#I(C-A)=i, these are confocal ; they cut orthogonally at the umbilics. These relations are shown in Fig. 41. xii] FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES 233 12-25. As already remarked, the only foci which lie on the quadric itself are the umbilics. These are therefore the points of intersection of the focal conies with the quadric, or with its principal sections. The circular planes through a directrix d are parallel to the tangent-planes at the umbilics which lie in the principal plane perpendicular to d. The foci of the focal conic z=o y 2 l(B-A) + z i /(C-A) = i y=±V(B-C)\ and y z=±V(C-B)\' The former are vertices of the focal conic *l(A-C)+fHB-C) = i t and the latter are vertices of the remaining focal conic z*l{C-B) + x i l{A-B) = i. Thus each of the three focal conies passes through one pair of foci of each of the other two. Even the virtual focal conic thus possesses a pair of real foci (the ends of the minor axis of the focal ellipse), though the corresponding eccentricity is of course imaginary ; the eccentricity corresponding to its imaginary foci is real. Ex. Show that for points on the focal ellipse the circular planes are imaginary in the case of the ellipsoid and real in the case of the hyperboloid of two sheets, and vice versa for the focal hyperbola. 12-31. The equation (* - X) 2 + (y - Y) 2 + (* - Zf = aj 8 expresses a metrical property of the foci, viz. the ratio of the square of the distance of any point on the quadric from a focus to the product of its distances from the two circular planes is constant. Ex. Show that A (* 2 /.4 + v 2 /£ + s 2 /C-i) = {* 2 + (y- Yf + {z-Zf) B-Af BY y» C-A ( CZ \* B~V~B-AJ C~\* C-A) ' y 2 z z where B=A + C=A = S ' 234 FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES [chap. 12-32. Taking a focus as origin, the equation of the quadric can be written ^ +y 2 +z z = aj8) «j8 = o being the equation of the two circular planes whose inter- section is the corresponding directrix. If we choose further the plane z = o as the plane containing the focus and its directrix, this plane cuts a and /? in the same line, say z=o and u = lx+my+n=o. Hence the section of the quadric by this plane is z=o, x z +y 2 = u 2 . But this represents a conic with focus at the origin and directrix u. Hence the plane containing a focus and the corresponding directrix cuts the quadric in a conic having these as focus and directrix. Also since this plane is normal to the focal conic on which the given focus lies, every plane normal to a focal conic has for a focus the point where it meets the focal conic normally. 12-33. We may prove these results also as follows. The focal axis /through the focus F is the axis of rotation of the tangent- cone from F. This cone has ring-contact with the quadric. Two quadrics have ring-contact when their curve of intersection reduces to two coincident conies; in this case any plane cuts them in two conies which have double contact at the points where the plane cuts the double conic. Let a be the plane through F perpendicular to/. Then a cuts the tangent-cone from Fin a point-circle, i.e. in two straight lines passing through the circular points 2, / in a. It cuts the quadric in a conic having double contact with this line-pair, i.e- FI and FJ are tangents to the conic, and therefore F is a focus of the conic. The plane a also contains the corresponding directrix d of the quadric, and this is the polar of F with respect to the curve of intersection, and is therefore the directrix also for this conic. 12-34. Dandelin's Theorem. The well-known construction for the foci of a plane section of a circular cone follows from the property of quadrics having ring-contact. The cone being circular, there are two spheres inscribed in the cone and touching the plane. Each sphere has xii] FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES 235 ring-contact with the cone, and therefore the curves of inter- section of the plane with the cone and one of the spheres have double contact. But the intersection of the plane with the sphere is a point-circle, hence this point is a focus of the conic section. Ex. Prove that the tangent-plane at an umbilic of a quadric cuts any tangent-cone in a conic having a focus at the umbilic. 12-4. Confocal quadrics. Two quadrics are said to be confocal when they have the same focal conies. Confocal quadrics have therefore the same prin- cipal planes. Confining our attention for the present to central quadrics, if x*IA+y*IB+z*/C=i and x*/A'+y*IB'+z*IC' = i are confocal, B-C=B'-C, C-A = C'-A', A-B=A'~B' (the third equation following from the first two). Hence if A'=A-X, thenB' = B-X and C' = C-A. The equation .*! a V a a -2 A-X^B-X' C-X therefore represents all the quadrics which are confocal with x i /A+y 2 /B+z 2 /C= 1. These form a system of confocal quadrics. If A, B, C are all unequal we may assume that A>B>C. Then if A < o the quadric is an ellipsoid, for B > X > C a hyper- boloid of one sheet, for A > X > B a hyperboloid of two sheets, and for A > A it is virtual. The critical values, X=A,B, C, make the quadric degenerate, e.g. A =A requires x=o and y 2 /(B— A) + z 2 /(C— A) = i, which is one of the focal conies. The focal conies are therefore de- generate quadrics of the confocal system. If two of the quantities A, B, C are equal, say B=C, all the quadrics of the systems are of revolution. The focal conic in the plane of yz, which is perpendicular to the axis of rotation, is a circle of radius \/(B—A), real or virtual according as A< or >B. The principal planes perpendicular to this are inde- terminate, but in each of them the focal conic degenerates to the same pair of points [±\ / (A— B), o, o]; these are the real foci of the meridian section if A > B, and are principal foci ; the virtual 236 FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES [chap. focal circle then passes through the two imaginary foci of the meridian section. When A<B, the focal circle, which is real, passes through the real foci of the meridian section. If A = B=C, the quadric is a sphere and all the principal foci are collected at the centre. 12-41. Confocals through a given point. Through a given point [X, Y, Z] there pass in general three quadrics of a given confocal system. The equation of the system bein S *• + ^-t=i, A-\^B-X n C-X if this equation is satisfied by [X, Y, Z] we obtain a cubic equa- tion in A : <f>(X) = (\-A)(\-B)(\-C) + X(\-B)(\-C)X*=o. Assuming that no one of X, Y, Z is zero, and that A > B > C, if " we substitute A=-oo, C, B, A, +00, the signs of j> (A) are — + — + +. Hence the roots are all real : the first root, < C, gives an ellipsoid ; the second, between C and B, gives a hyperboloid of one sheet; and the third, between B and A, gives a hyperboloid of two sheets. Exceptional cases occur when the point [X, Y, Z] lies (i) in one of the principal planes, then one of the three quadrics reduces to that plane ; (2) in one of the principal axes, then two of the quadrics reduce to the principal planes through this axis ; (3) on one of the focal conies, then two of the quadrics reduce to the plane of this conic; (4) at the centre, then the three quadrics reduce to the three principal planes; (5) at a vertex of one of the focal conies, then two of the quadrics reduce to the plane of this conic while the third reduces to the other principal plane through the point. As regards the nature of the surviving confocals through a point, the reader may verify the results indicated in Fig. 42, where E, H lt and H % stand for ellipsoid, hyperboloid of one sheet, and hyperboloid of two sheets respectively. 12-42. The three confocals through a point are mutually orthogonal. Let the roots of the cubic equation in A, X 2 Y * Z* + D 1 + /"! \ — l t A-\ B-X^C-X Hi] FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES 237 be denoted by A x , Aj, A 3 . The tangent-planes at [X, Y, Z] are Now Xx -+■ ■&- + : Zz X* = 1 (1=1,2,3). X s X* X" 1 / X" Xr \ The confocals therefore form a triple orthogonal system. Fig. 43 12-43. Confocal quadrics in tangential coordinates. The tangential equation of the confocal system is (A-\)P+(B-\)m i +(C-\)n*=p\ or X(l i +m i +n*)-(Al i +Bm*+Cn i ~p i ) = o (1) This equation is linear in A, and if /, m, n, p are given, a unique value of A is in general determined. Hence one and only one quadric of a confocal system touches an arbitrary plane. The equation is satisfied by any set of values of /, m, n, p which satisfy the two equations Al i +Bm 2 +Cn*-p*=o and Z 2 + m a + n 2 = o. These equations represent two quadrics of the system. The latter, however, is a special quadric whose only real tangent- plane is [o, o, o, 1], i.e. the plane at infinity. The equation ex- 238 FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES [chap. presses the condition that the line of intersection of the plane lx+my + nz+pw = o with the plane at infinity w = o should touch the conic x 2 +y 2 +z i = o, w = o, i.e. the circle at infinity. The equation P+m 2 +n 2 =ois therefore the tangential equation of the circle at infinity. Thus in addition to the three focal conies, which are degenerate quadrics of the system lying in the prin- cipal planes *=o, y=o, z=o, there is a fourth degenerate quadric of the system, the circle at infinity, in the plane w=o. The equation (i) represents a linear tangential system of quadrics determined by a given quadric Al 2 +Bm 2 +Cn 2 —p 2 =o and the circle at infinity. Any plane which touches these two quadrics, or indeed any two quadrics of the system, will touch them all. Such planes are in general only imaginary. The tangential equation of the point of contact of the plane [/', m', n', p'] is (A - A) l'l+ (B - A) m'm + (C - A) n'n -p'p = o, i.e. the coordinates of the point of contact are [(A-X)l\ {B-X)m', (C-A)»\ -/>'], and by giving all values to A we get a straight line joining the point \AV, Bm', Cn', —p'] to the point at infinity [/', m', »', o]. Hence when a plane touches two quadrics of the system, and there- fore all of them, the points of contact lie on a line. 12-431. The planes which touch all the quadrics of the system, i.e. the assemblage of common tangent-planes to two quadrics of the system, form a one-dimensional assemblage and generate a developable. This is called the focal developable and is represented by the two simultaneous equations l 2 +m 2 +n 2 =o, AP+Bm 2 +Cn 2 -p 2 =o. We shall return to this in another chapter. 12-44. Confocals touching a given line. Let / be a given line. The pairs of tangent-planes through / to quadrics of the system form an involution, for if a is any plane through / there is one quadric which touches a, hence a second tangent-plane a! to this quadric is uniquely determined; and conversely to a' corresponds a. The two tangent-planes coincide when the line is a tangent to the quadric, and form the double- xii] FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES *39 elements of the involution. Hence there are two quadrics of the system which touch a given line. As the involution contains as one pair the planes through / which touch the circle at infinity, and as the double-elements are harmonic conjugates with regard to them, it follows that the tangent-planes to the two quadrics at their points of contact with I are at right angles. 12-5. The paraboloids. As a conf ocal system of quadrics is the linear tangential system determined by one quadric and the circle at infinity, and since the plane at infinity touches the absolute circle, it follows that if one quadric of the system is a paraboloid, the plane at infinity, which then touches two quadrics of the system, will touch them all, and therefore all the quadrics will be paraboloids. As the focal conies are degenerate quadrics of the system they must be parabolas. Let the equation of the paraboloid be x*/A+y*/B=2z. Let F= [X, Y, Z] be a focus, and consider a plane through F l(x-X)+m(y- Y)+n(z-Z) = o. The pole Q= [X', Y', Z] of this plane is given by X' Y' _ i Z' Al Bm n IX+mY+nZ' and, if FQ is perpendicular to the plane, X'-X Y'-Y Z'^Z A — = — = = =-, say; / m n n J then —Al —nX=Xl, -Bm-nY=Xm, -(lX+mY+nZ)-nZ=Xn. Eliminating /, m, n, \+A o X =o. o X+B Y X Y X+2Z This gives as before a cubic equation in A, having in general 240 FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES [chap. three different roots. If all the elements of the determinant vanish the roots are all equal and we have \=-A=-B=-2Z, X=o=Y. The paraboloid is then a paraboloid of rotation and we have a single principal focus at [o, o, \A\ ; this is the focus of the meridian section. If the minors of the determinant all vanish two roots are equal and the tangent-cone with vertex F is circular, its principal axis corresponding to the double-root. The conditions for this are (X+A)(X+2Z)=X 2 , (\+B)(\+ 2 Z)=Y*, (X+A)(X+B) = o, Y(X+A) = o, X(X+B) = o, XY=o. These are satisfied by (i) X=o, X=-A, Y*=(A-B)(A- 2 Z), (ii) Y=o, X=-B, X*=(B-A)(B- 2 Z). Hence we have two equal focal parabolas, with axes along the axis of z and vertices in opposite directions ; each passes through the focus of the other. In the case of the elliptic paraboloid one of these cuts the surface orthogonally in the two real umbilics; the other parabola, and both the confocal parabolas in the case of the hyperbolic paraboloid, meet the surface in imaginary points. 12-51. Confocal paraboloids. The tangential equation of the paraboloid x 2 /A+y*IB=2z/C is AP + Bm 2 = 2Cnp, and therefore the tangential equation of the system of quadrics confocal with the paraboloid is AP +Bm t -zCnp-X{P+tn i +n 2 )=o. xn] FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES 241 The point-equation corresponding to this equation is then found to be va ,+ y* _2Z A-X^B-X~C C 2 * Assuming A>B, when A > A the quadric is an elliptic para- boloid with vertex downwards, when A>X>B a hyperbolic paraboloid, and when A < B again an elliptic paraboloid, but with vertex upwards. The focal parabolas are limiting cases separating these series. The third focal conic, which should exist in the general case, coincides in the case of the paraboloids with the circle at infinity. Through any point [X, Y, Z] there are again three quadrics of the confocal system, corresponding to the roots of the cubic equation in A : 4>(X)=X(X-A)(X-B)-C*X i (X-B)-O i Y*(X-A) - 2 ZC(X-A)(X-B)=o. When A=-oo, B, A, +00, <£(A)is - + - +. Hence one root, < B, gives an elliptic paraboloid ; the second, between B and A, gives a hyperbolic paraboloid ; and the third, > A, gives another elliptic paraboloid. Exceptional cases occur here also for special positions of the point [X, Y, Z], when one or more of the confocals degenerate. 12-6. Foci of a cone or cylinder. The polar of any point P with respect to a cone is a plane passing through the vertex O, and this is also the polar-plane of any point on the line OP. The vertex itself is the pole of any plane, and the pole of a plane which does not pass through the vertex is the vertex. The ideas of foci and focal axes in the case of a cone or cylinder require modification, for when a cone is considered as the limit- ing case of a hyperboloid of one sheet, say, the tangent-planes become planes through the vertex. But only those are considered as tangent-planes which meet the surface in coincident lines, and the surface possesses only a single infinity of tangent-planes. Through an arbitrary line there are no tangent-planes, and 8AG l6 242 FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES [chap. through a point there is no tangent-cone but only a pair of tangent-planes. In the case of the general quadric the tangent-planes through a focus envelop a circular cone, and this meets the plane at in- finity in a conic having double-contact with the circle at infinity. In the case of a cone or a cylinder there are just two tangent- planes through a point, and if this point is a focus these planes meet the plane at infinity in a pair of lines both touching the circle at infinity. 12»61. In the case of a cone there is a proper conic at infinity C, and the tangent-planes are planes through the vertex and touching this conic. C and the circle at infinity D have four •common tangents which intersect in pairs in six points, of which two are real and two pairs of conjugate imaginaries. If F is one of these points any point on OF is a focus. The foci therefore lie on three pairs of lines through O, and these are degenerate focal conies. The pair of tangent-planes through a focus form a circular cylinder of zero radius and their line of intersection, OF, is therefore also a focal axis. There are thus only six focal axes, and not an infinite number as in the case of the general quadric. Let the equation of the cone be x z /A+y 2 IB+z !i /C=o, then if the line [I, m, n] is a focal axis the point at infinity [/, m, n, o] is the point of intersection of two common tangents to the conic at infinity zo=o, x*/A+y 2 IB+z*IC=o and the circle at infinity. The tangential equations of these two conies are A pair of intersections of common tangents is a degenerate conic- envelope of the system A$*+Br ) *+Ci;*-$$P + r ) *+p) = o. xii] FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES 243 This degenerates when A =A, B or C. Taking X=A we get which represents the two points [o,V(B-A), ±V(A-Q, o]. Hence we have a pair of focal axes *=o, ^— ■, + ■ — B-A ' C-A ' which are also loci of foci or a degenerate focal conic. Two other pairs lie in the other coordinate-planes, viz. y=°> A^B + CT^B =0 ™ d *=°> A^C + B^C =0 - Of these, one pair are real and the others imaginary. 12-62. In the case of a cylinder the intersection with the plane at infinity is a line-pair through a point C. Tangent-planes to the cylinder all pass through C. From C there are two tangents i, j to Q, and through each of these there are two tangent-planes to the cylinder. These tangent-planes intersect in four lines, besides i and j, two real and two imaginary, passing through C. All points on these lines are foci and the lines in pairs form de- generate focal conies. They are also focal axes since the tangent- planes through any one of them cut the plane at infinity in i and j. If I and / are the points of contact of i and j with O, any section of the cylinder by a plane through IJ will be a conic whose foci are the points in which the plane cuts the four focal axes. These planes are principal planes of the cylinder, per- pendicular to the direction of the axis C. 12-63. Confocal cones and confocal cylinders. - Confocal cones — cones having the same focal axes — have a common vertex. Taking this as origin we find, as in 12-4, the equation of a confocal system L_^ J- ._ 0> A+X B+X^C+\ 16-2 244 FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES [chap. The conies in which these cut the plane at infinity have for their tangential equation (^+A)^+( J B+A) 1? 2 +(C+A)^ = o, and therefore form a linear tangential system touching the four common tangents of the circle at infinity £ 2 + ij 2 + £ 2 = o, and the conic-envelope Hence all the cones of a confocal system have four fixed tangent-planes, i.e. the focal-developable in this case reduces to four planes, their intersections in pairs being the six focal axes. 12-64. The equation »2 4,2 x* _y__ A+X + B+X~ 1 represents a system of confocal cylinders. The four focal axes are the lines parallel to the axis of the cylinder and passing through the real and imaginary foci of the transverse section, i.e. x=o,y= ±^(B-A) and y = o, x= ±^{A-B). The two tangents i and j to O from the point at infinity C on the axis of the cylinder are the vestiges of two other focal axes. 12*7. Conjugate focal conies. Let there be given any real proper conic S, say z=o, x 2 IA+y 2 /B = i, vrithA>B. This can be considered as a degenerate quadric-envelope, its tangential equation being AP+Bm 2 =p 2 . A confocal system of quadrics AP + Bm 2 -p 2 + A (P + m 2 + n 2 ) = o is then determined, whose point-equation is x 2 y 2 z^_ A+\ + B+X + X~ I - One focal conic of this system (for A = o) is the given conic S. The other real focal conic (for A= — B) is y=o, x 2 j(A-B)-z 2 jB=i, xn] FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES 24s which is a hyperbola or an ellipse according as B is > or < o, i.e. according as S is an ellipse or a hyperbola. Hence when S is given, a second real conic S' is uniquely determined ; if one is an ellipse the other is a hyperbola. If S is a parabola, the confocal system consists of paraboloids, and S' is also a parabola, equal to the former. Such pairs of conies are called conjugate focal conies. They lie in orthogonal planes, the real foci of the one coinciding with vertices of the other. Since the focal conies form the locus of vertices of circular Fig. 43 tangent-cones, each of the two conies is the locus of vertices of circular cones which project the other. The axis of the circular cone which has its vertex P on the conic S is the tangent to S at P. If F, F' are the foci of S, and therefore vertices of S', the angle FPF' is the vertical angle of the cone. If 5 is either a hyperbola or a parabola, as P moves from the vertex to infinity along the curve the vertical angle varies from 180 to o, and therefore takes all possible values. If S is an ellipse, however, the least value of the angle, which occurs when P is at the end of the minor axis, is 2 sin-W(B/A) = 2 tan-W{Bf(A-B)}, and is therefore equal to the angle between the asymptotes of the 246 FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES [chap. hyperbola. Thus an ellipse or a parabola of given dimensions can be cut out of any circular cone, but in the case of a hyperbola the asymptotes cannot be inclined at an angle greater than the vertical angle of the cone. Ex. i. If a is the semi-vertical angle of a circular cone and the angle which a given plane makes with the axis, prove that the eccen- tricity of the section is cos 0/cos a. Ex. 2. Prove that conjugate focal conies have reciprocal eccen- tricities. Ex. 3. If the square of one of the eccentricities of one of the focal conies of a quadric is represented by the cross-ratio (ABCD), show that the squares of one of the eccentricities of the other focal conies are (BCAD) and (CABD), and that the squares of the other eccen- tricities are respectively (CBAD), (ACBD) and (BACD). 12-8. The foci of a given quadric are foci also of any confocal quadric, since the focal conies belong to the whole confocal system. The tangent-cones, with any focus F as vertex, to all the quadrics are circular and have a common axis, the tangent to the focal conic at F. It is true also that the focal axes of a given quadric are focal axes of any confocal quadric. If the two planes [/, m, n, p] and [/', m', n', />'] are conjugate with regard to each of the quadric- envelopes Al 2 +Bm 2 +Cn 2 -p 2 =o and l 2 +m 2 +n 2 =o, we have All' + Bmm' + Cnn' -pp'=*o and ll'+mm' + nn' = o. Therefore (A+$$ll' + (B+X)mm' + (C+X)nri -pp' = 0,
i.e. the two planes are conjugate with respect to the confocal

Al 2 + Bm 2 + Cn 2 -p 2 + (I 2 +m 2 + n 2 ) = o.

Hence if their line of intersection is a focal axis for one quadric it
is a focal axis also for any quadric of the confocal system.

12-81. We can now prove that the focal axes of a quadric are
the generating lines of the quadrics of the confocal system.

Let I be any generating line of a quadric 5 of the confocal
system. Then every plane through / is a tangent-plane to S, and

xii] FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES 247

since lis self-conjugate with respect to S, any two planes through
/ are conjugate with respect to S. I is therefore a focal axis.

Conversely, if / is not a generating line of any quadric of the
confocal system there are two quadrics S, S' of the system which
touch /, and the tangent-planes a, a' at the points of contact
A, A' are orthogonal. Pairs of planes through I conjugate with
respect to S consist of the tangent-plane a and any other plane
through /; only one such pair, viz. a and a', are orthogonal.
Hence / is not a focal axis ; and therefore every focal axis must
be a generating line of some quadric of the system.

On an arbitrary plane there, are two focal axes ; these are the
lines in which the plane is met by that quadric of the confocal
system which touches the given plane.

Through a given point there are six focal axes, viz. the gener-
ating lines of the three confocals through the point. Of these
focal axes two are real and four imaginary.

The congruence of focal axes is therefore said to be of class 2
and order 6.

Ex. 1 . Prove that the tangent-cones from a point Pto the quadrics
of a confocal system have a common system of principal planes, and
form a system of confocal cones.

Ex. 2. Show that the six focal axes through any point P are the
focal axes of the tangent-cones from P to the quadrics.

12-9. Deformable framework of generating lines of a

If the generating lines of a quadric are considered as thin wires
pivoted at their points of intersection, the framework is de-
formable*.

Consider the hyperboloid of one sheet
x i /a t +y i /b i -z*/c i =i.
Freedom-equations in terms of two parameters A, ju, are

x/a=Xfi+i,
y/b = \-n,
z/c=X[i—i,
w = X + ijl,
• This was discovered accidentally in 1873 by O. Henrici when he set
his students at University College, London, to construct a model of a hyper-
boloid of one sheet by tying together a series of thin rods.

248 FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES [chap.

and the generating lines of the two systems are represented by
A = const, and /*= const. Thus these values of x, y, z, w are the
homogeneous coordinates of the point P of intersection of the
generators A and fi. Let P' be another point on the generator A,
and let p' be the generator of the other system through P' ; then
the coordinates of P' are given by

x'la=\jj.' + i, etc.
We find then

PP' 2 = {a 2 (A 2 - i)*+ 4 ^A* + c 2 (A a + iH^-^VCA+^CAH-^') 2 -
Keeping A, /jl, /j,' fixed we may vary a, b, c in such a way that PP'
remains constant. If a, b, c are changed into a', b', c', PP' will
remain unaltered if

a 2 +c 2 =a' 2 + c' 2 , and a 2 -zb 2 -c 2 = a' 2 -zb' 2 -c'\

hence if a' 2 = a 2 + k, then c' 2 = c 2 -k and b' 2 = b 2 + k.

Hence without altering the distances between intersections
along any generator the hyperboloid can be transformed con-
tinuously into the hyperboloid

X 2 , V 2 , IS 2

a 2 +k b 2 + k -c*+k

which is confocal with the given hyperboloid. When k = c 2 the
framework flattens out in the plane z = o and the lines envelop
the focal ellipse

x 2 /(a 2 + c 2 ) +y 2 /(b 2 + c 2 ) = i ;

and (assuming a>b) when k= — b 2 it flattens out in the plane
y = o and the lines envelop the focal hyperbola

as 2 /(a 2 -& 2 )-* 2 /(& 2 + c 2 )=i.

12-91. In the case of the hyperbolic paraboloid

x 2 /a 2 -y 2 /b 2 =2z/c
the freedom-equations are

x/a = X + fi,
yjb = X-iM,
z/c = 2X[J,,

A = const, and //, = const, representing the two systems of gener-

xii] FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES 249

ators. The distance between the two points P=[X, fi\ and
P' = [A, [j.'] is given by

PP' 2 = (a 2 + i 2 + 4c 2 A 2 ) (fi - ti'f.
Keeping A, fi, \t! constant and changing a, b, c into a', b', c' the
distance PP' is unaltered if

a 2 + b 2 = a' 2 + b' 2 , c=c'.

Putting a' 2 = a 2 + k we have b' 2 = b 2 — k and on changing the

origin we obtain the confocal paraboloid

x 2 y 2 _zz k

at+k -&»+*~T + ?*

12 95. EXAMPLES.

1 . Show that the foci of any plane section of a spheroid are the
points of contact of the two spheres which can be drawn having
ring-contact with the surface and touching the plane.

2. Find the locus of intersection of three mutually perpen-
dicular planes which touch respectively three confocal central

Ans. A sphere.

3. Show that the focal conies are the loci of umbilics of the
confocal system.

4. Show that all the normals through a given point to the
cone.

5. Show that the locus of points on confocal central quadrics
at which the normals are parallel is a rectangular hyperbola of
which one asymptote is parallel to the normals.

6. Show that the normals to confocal quadrics at points the
tangent-planes at which pass through a fixed line generate a
hyperbolic paraboloid.

7. Prove that the axes of a tangent-cone to a quadric are the
normals to the three confocals which pass through the point.

Def. Corresponding points on two ellipsoids whose semi-axes
are a, b, c and a', b', c' are points whose coordinates satisfy the
equations x/a=x'/a', yjb=y'jb', zjc=z'jc'; and similarly for
points on two hyperboloids of the same species.

25© FOCI AND FOCAL PROPERTIES [chap, xii

8. Prove Ivory's Theorem : that the distance between points
P and Q' on two confocal quadrics is equal to the distance be-
tween the corresponding points P' and Q.

9. If P, Q are two points on an ellipsoid, and P', Q' are the
corresponding points on a confocal ellipsoid, prove that

OP 2 - OQ 2 = OP' 2 - OQ' 2 .

10. If P and Q lie on one generator of a hyperboloid and
P', Q' are the corresponding points of another hyperboloid of
the same species, show that P' and Q' lie on one generator; and,
if the hyperboloids are confocal, PQ=P'Q'.

1 1 . Show that an umbilic on one ellipsoid is the corresponding
point of an umbilic on a confocal ellipsoid.

12. A quadric has perpendicular directrices «, /? corre-
sponding to foci A, B respectively. Show that another quadric,
with the same planes of circular section, has directrices a, ]3
corresponding to foci B and A respectively.

(Math. Trip. II, 1913.)

Arts. If the given quadric is ax 2 +by 2 + cz 2 =i, with foci
[X, o, Z] and \X\ Y', o], the other quadric is

ax 2 + by* + cz 2 - 1 = b {(x - Xf +y* + (z - Zf)

+ c{(x-X') 2 +(y- Y') 2 +z 2 }.

CHAPTER XIII

13*1. If 5=o and S' = o are the point-equations of two

S-XS' = o

represents for all values of A a quadric passing through all the
points common to S and S'. This is called a linear one-parameter
system or pencil of quadric loci, or a point-system.

13*11. The points common to two quadrics form a curve
which has the property that it is cut by an arbitrary plane in four
points. For a plane cuts the quadrics in two conies, and these
intersect in four points. This curve, the base-curve of the pencil,
is therefore of the fourth order. It will be considered in more
detail in the following chapter.

13-12. Through any point there passes just one quadric of the
system, for when the coordinates of the point are substituted in
the equation we have a linear equation to determine A.

13- 13. An arbitrary line is cut by the quadrics in pairs of points
which form an involution. For if P is any point on the line there
is a unique quadric of the system through P and this cuts the
line again in a unique point P'. Thus to P corresponds P 1
uniquely, and in the same way to P' corresponds P. Hence the
points are connected by a symmetrical (1,1) correspondence.

13-14. The involution has two double-points, and these are
the points of contact of the quadrics of the system which touch
the line. Hence in general there are two quadrics of the system
which touch a given line. These may be real or imaginary. If they
should be coincident the involution on the line is degenerate;
the double-point D then corresponds to every point on the line
and therefore D must be a point on the base-curve. Hence if the
line cuts the base-curve in a point D there is just one quadric of
the system which touches the line, and its point of contact is D.
If the line cuts the base-curve in two distinct points D, D', a

252 LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QUADRICS [chap.

quadric of the system can be determined to pass through another
point P of the line DD', and DD' is thus a generating line of this
quadric; if D and D' coincide, so that DD' is a tangent to the
base-curve, the line touches every quadric of the system at D,
and there is, moreover, a quadric of the system having the line
as a generator.

13-15. An arbitrary plane cuts the quadrics in a system of
conies (pencil) which pass through the four fixed points A, B,
C, D in which the plane cuts the base-curve. In this pencil of
conies there are three line-pairs, viz. AD, BC; BD, CA ; CD, AB,
and the plane is a tangent-plane to the quadrics of which these
are the sections. Hence in general there are three quadrics of the
system which touch a given plane. Special cases may arise when
coincidences occur among the four points A, B, C, D.

13-16. Two quadrics have in general a unique common self-polar
tetrahedron. If the point [X, Y, Z, W] has the same polar-plane
with regard to the two quadrics the two equations

dS , dS dS dS
X dX +y dY +Z dZ +w dW = °'

dS' , dS' dS' dS'
X dX +y dY + *-dZ + tD dW=°

are identical. Hence

aX+hY+gZ+pW hX+bY+fZ+qW
a'X+h'Y+g'Z+p'W h'X+b'Y+f'Z+q'W

_ gX+fY+cZ+rW pX+qY+rZ+dW
g'X+f'Y+c'Z+r'W p'X+q'Y+r'Z+d'W

Equating each of these to t , we have the four equations

{a-ta')X+(h-th') Y+(g-tg')Z+(p-tp')W=o, etc.;

and eliminating X, Y, Z, W,

a — ta' h—th' g-tg' p — tp' =o.

h-th' b-tb' f-tf q-tq'

g-tg' f-tf c-tc' r-tr'

p-tp' q-tq' r-tr' d-td'

xin] LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QUADRICS 253

This is an equation of the fourth degree in t . Each root then
determines one set of values of [X, Y, Z, W], and we have four
points forming a tetrahedron.

When this tetrahedron is taken as the tetrahedron of reference
the equation of each quadric reduces to the form

ax* + fry 2 + cz 2 + dzv* = o.
Special cases may arise when there are equalities among the
roots, but we shall consider at present only the general case.

The equation of the system of quadrics can now be written
(ax* + fry 2 + cz* + dw*) -X(a'x* + b'y* + c'z* + d'w 2 ) = o.
Hence the same tetrahedron is self-polar with respect to all the

13-17. The discriminant of this equation is

( fl - Xa') (b - Xb') (c - Ac') (d-Xd')

and if this vanishes the quadric becomes a cone. Hence in a
pencil of quadrics there are four cones, and their vertices are the
vertices of the common self-polar tetrahedron.

Ex. When the vertices of the four cones are real and distinct, show
that the four cones are either all real or two real and two virtual.

13-2. If S = o and S' = o are the tangential equations of two

S-AS' = o

represents a system of quadrics which touch all the planes which
are tangent to both S and 2'. This is called a linear tangential
one-parameter system or pencil of quadric-envelopes.

13-21. The assemblage of common tangent-planes forms a
figure (one-dimensional envelope) which is dual to a curve in
space (one-dimensional locus of points). It is called, for a reason
that will appear later, a developable. It is to be distinguished from
a surface, which is a two-dimensional envelope and is dual to a
surface as a two-dimensional locus. The tangent-developable of
two quadrics may in certain cases reduce to two cones, as in the
case of two spheres, and a cone is a particular case of a de-
velopable. Reciprocally the curve of intersection of two quadrics
may reduce to two conies (this also occurs in the case of two

254 LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QDADRICS [chap.

spheres), and we have already seen that a quadric cone is dual
to a conic. The tangent-developable of two quadrics is said to be
of the fourth class since there are four tangent-planes which pass
through an arbitrary point, the common tangent-planes of the
tangent-cones to the two quadrics with the given point as vertex.
Developables will be treated at greater length in the following
chapter.

13-22. Theorems, dual to those for a point-system, hold for
the tangential system. Thus : there is one and only one quadric of
the system which touches a given plane.

13-23. The pairs of tangent-planes through a given line are in
involution. The double-planes of the involution being the
tangent-planes to the quadrics which touch the given line it
follows as for the point-system that there are two quadrics of the
system which touch a given line.

13-24. With an arbitrary point P as vertex there is a system of
tangent-cones to the quadrics, all touching four fixed planes
a, /}, y, 8, the tangent-planes of the developable which pass
through P. Three of these cones degenerate to line-pairs, viz.
the intersections of the planes aS, j8y; /J8, ya; yS, a/?; and P is
then a point on the corresponding quadrics. Hence in general
there are three quadrics of the tangential system which pass through
a given point.

13-25. When the two quadrics 2, S' are referred to their
common self-polar tetrahedron their tangential equations are
2 =A£* +Br,* +C£» +£a> 2 =o,
S' = ^'| 2 + £Y+C'^ + i)'a> 2 =o,
and the quadric S-AS' = o will degenerate to a conic for four
values of A. Thus in a tangential system of quadrics there are four
which degenerate to conies, and their planes are the faces of the
common self-polar tetrahedron.

13-3. An example of a tangential system of quadrics is a con-
focal system. The above properties are then verified. The four
degenerate quadrics are the three focal conies and the circle at
infinity.

The orthogonal properties of the confocal system can be in-
terpreted in the general tangential system, taking one of the four

xiii] LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QUADRICS . 255

conies as absolute. Thus, considering the two quadrics which
touch a given line, their tangent-planes at the points of contact
are conjugate with regard to every quadric of the system, and
therefore with regard to each of the four conies.

Considering the three quadrics through a point P: a, 0, y, S
being the tangent-planes through P to the tangent-developable,
the tangent-planes at P to the three quadrics are the planes
& 77, £ containing the line-pairs (ocS), ()9y) ; (£8), (ya) ; (y8), (a/?).
These three planes are mutually conjugate with regard to any
quadric which touches the four planes a, £, y, S; i.e. with regard
to every quadric of the system and therefore in particular con-
jugate with respect to each of the four conies.

In a confocal system therefore the tangent-planes to the three
quadrics which pass through any point P are mutually orthogonal
and conjugate with respect to every quadric of the system.

13-31. Lines of curvature.

A given quadric of the system is cut by the other quadrics
in curves, two passing through each point and therefore forming
a network on the surface. If £ is the tangent-plane to the
given quadric at the point P, the tangents to the two curves
through P are the lines (£77) and (££), while (aS) and (^y) are the
generators through P of the given quadric. These two pairs are
harmonic. In the confocal system (£77) and (f £) are also at right
angles and therefore the two systems of curves cut orthogonally;
also (£77) and (|£) are mutually polars with respect to the quadric.
Let P' be a point on the curve of intersection of the quadric with
77, very near to P, and let £' be the tangent-plane at P'. Then the
line (££') is the polar of PP' and ultimately coincides with (££)
when P'^-P. The line (17?) is the normal at P, and the plane 77
which contains both P and P' is ultimately normal to (££') and
therefore contains the normals at both P and P'. Hence the
normals at P and P' ultimately intersect and the curve of inter-
section is a line of curvature. Hence the quadrics of a confocal
system intersect in lines of curvature.

13-32. The section of a quadric by a plane very near to the
tangent-plane at a point P is a conic, and the limiting form of the
section in the neighbourhood of P when the plane becomes the

256 LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QUADRICS [chap.

tangent-plane is called the indicatrix at P. Its asymptotes are
the generators through P, and its principal axes are the bisectors
of the angles between the generators. At an elliptic point the
indicatrix is the limiting form of an ellipse, the asymptotes and
therefore the generators through the point being imaginary.
A line of curvature has thus the property that the tangent at any
point is one of the principal axes of the indicatrix at the point.
At an umbilic the indicatrix is a point-circle and the directions
of the lines of curvature appear to be indeterminate. The
umbilics are in fact exceptional points. The four real umbilics
of the ellipsoid x z /a 2 +y 2 /b*+z 2 /c 2 = i, where a > b > c, lie on the
plane y =o, and there is no other quadric of the system through
one of these umbilics except the double-plane y=o. The inter-
section of this plane with the ellipsoid passes through the four
umbilics and is the only real line of curvature which passes
through them. But the tangent-plane at the umbilic U cuts the
surface in two imaginary lines UH, UK, where H, K are points
on the circle at infinity, hence these lines are isotropic. Any plane
UH T through UH is a tangent-plane, and the normal is the line
joining U to the pole of HT with respect to D. But this point lies
on the tangent to Q, at H. Hence the normals at points on UH
all lie in one plane, the isotropic plane through U touching O at
H. Similarly the normals at points of UK all lie in the isotropic
plane through U touching O at K. These two lines are therefore
lines of curvature. In addition to the real lines of curvature,
which are the curves of intersection of the quadric with its con-
focals, there are therefore eight imaginary lines of curvature, the
generators through the umbilics, each passing through one
absolute point and three umbilics (cf. 10-71). These lines of
curvature have the special property that the normals at all points
lie in one plane ; these planes are isotropic planes and are at the
same time tangent-planes and normal planes.

13-33. The lines of curvature on an ellipsoid resemble con-
focal conies, the umbilics taking the place of foci. It can be
shown, in fact, that if the lines of curvature are projected from
the point at infinity on one of the axes (parallel projection) on to
a plane of circular section which is not parallel to this axis the
projections form a system of confocal conies.

xiii] LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QUADRICS 257

Consider the ellipsoid

S=x 2 /a* +y 2 lb* + z 2 /c* - w* = o (i)

and its intersections with the confocal system

tf-^+A+A-*"- < 2 )

Taking the point C= [o, o, i, o] as centre of projection we find
the equations of a projecting cone (cylinder) by eliminating z
between (i) and (2) :

(3)

The intersections of this system of cylinders with the plane z = o
thus form a linear tangential system of conies, and therefore the
cylinders (3) have four common tangent-planes, which intersect
in three pairs of edges through C. For A = a 2 , 6 2 , or c 2 , U de-
generates to one of the focal conies, U a , etc., and as A -* 00 it
degenerates to the circle at infinity Q. For A = a 2 the cylinder
degenerates as an envelope to two parallel straight lines, which
form a pair of common chords of the focal conic U a in x=o and
the section of the ellipsoid S by this plane, and therefore pass
through pairs of umbilics. These are two of the lines of inter-
section or edges of the common tangent-planes. Similarly for
A= A 2 . As A ->-co we get the third pair of edges which form a pair
of common chords IT, //' of the circle at infinity with the conic
at infinity on the ellipsoid.

Hence a plane through one of the other common chords, say
//, i.e. a plane of circular section not parallel to the axis of the
cylinders, will cut the four common tangent-planes in two pairs
of lines passing through / and /, and the cylinders in a system
of conies touching these four lines and therefore forming a con-
focal system. The foci of the system are the intersections of the
plane with the pairs of parallel edges through C, and are there-
fore the projections of the umbilics.

This may be proved also as follows. The central planes of real
circular sections of the ellipsoid are z= ±x tan0, where

SAO 17

258 LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QUADRICS [chap.

Hence projecting from the plane of xy on to the plane z = x tanfl
with the axis of z as axis of
projection, the equations of
transformation are x \

x=x'cos9, y=y'.
The equations (3) then be-
come

„ a 2 -c* a 2 (ft 2 -c a )

a 2 (a 2 -A)Z> 2 (a 2 -c 2 )

+y

n.

£ 2 -

b\¥-X)

= 1,

Fig. 44

v '»

i.e.

& 2 -A

b*

a*-\^ b*-\ b*-c 2 '
which represents a system of confocal ellipses and hyperbolas.

13-34. Lines of curvature of a cone or a cylinder.

A cone or cylinder is a specialised quadric locus, and only a
one-way envelope of planes; dually, a conic is a specialised
quadric envelope, and only a one-way locus of points.

Instead of a developable, as the assemblage of common
tangent-planes of a cone and the circle at infinity, we obtain just
four imaginary planes through the vertex of the cone. If the
point-equation of the cone is x i /A+y i /B + z i jC=o > the vertex
being the origin, its tangential equations are
o) = o, A? + Br? + Ct? = o,
and the circle at infinity is

£ 2 +ij 2 + £ 2 =o.
Then the equations

*, = o, A?+Br)*+C?-$$e+ri 2 +F) = o represent a system of cones touching the four common tangent- planes, and we can call this a system of confocal cones. The point-equation is x% ■ y % ~7a + s-a + ; ;=0. A-X ' fi-A' C-A If ^4 >B>C the cone is real if either ^4 >A>B or B>A>C, and through any point there pass just two real cones of the system, and these cut orthogonally. A triple orthogonal system can then xin] LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QUADRICS 259 be obtained by adjoining to this system the system of spheres with common centre at the vertex. The lines of intersection of pairs of cones (generating lines) and of a cone with a sphere then form the lines of curvature. For a cylinder the lines of curvature are the generators and the transverse plane sections. 13-35. The curve of intersection of a cone with a sphere whose centre is at the vertex is called a sphero-conic. These curves are also of course lines of curvature on the sphere. Lines of curvature on a sphere, however, are really indeterminate; any curve drawn on a sphere has the property that normals at con- secutive points intersect, since all the normals to a sphere pass through the centre. 13-36. The system of sphero-conics on a given sphere, formed by the intersections with a system of confocal cones, have, how- ever, in a special sense the properties of lines of curvature. They form, in fact, a concrete representation of confocal conies in elliptic plane geometry, in which the circular points or absolute are replaced by a virtual proper conic. Thus if x, y, z are homo- geneous point-coordinates in a plane, and £, 17, £ the corre- sponding line-coordinates, the absolute may be represented by the point-equation x*+y 2 +z 2 =o and the line-equation £ 2 +rj a +£ 2 =o. Then the equation AP+Brf+CP-\(!p+rf+P)-o represents a system of conic-envelopes touching the four com- mon tangents of Ap+Btf + Cp^o and £ 2 +7? a +£ a =o. The foci are the intersections of these tangents. A sphero-conic or non-euclidean conic has one pair of real and two pairs of imaginary foci. In non-euclidean geometry the "distance" between two points P, Q is defined as \i log(PQ, XY), where (PQ, XY) denotes the cross-ratio (defined projectively) of the two points P, Q and the points X, Y in which PQ cuts the ab- solute. This is an extension of the well-known expression for the angle between two lines referred to the two tangents from the vertex to the absolute (or in particular the circular points). With this definition of distance we find that the sum (or difference) of 17-a z6o LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QUADRICS [chap. the distances of any point on a non-euclidean conic from a pair of foci is constant. For a sphero-conic this means that the sum {or difference) of the angles between any generator of a cone and a pair of focal lines is constant. Let the equation of the cone be The confocal system is ^ x % y 2 z 2 _ fl 2_A + & 2 -A~c 2 + A _ °' and the real focal lines are found by putting A= J 2 , viz. x 2 z 2 y=°> -a^b*-s+b 2 =°' i.e. [(a 2 -b*)l, o, ±(c* + l Let [A, fi, v] be the direction-cosines of any generator, and 6, 0' the angles which it makes with the two focal lines. Then A"/a" +/*■/*■ -"V c,,= » A 2 +/i 2 + v a =i, and A(« 2 -6 2 )* + v(6 2 + c 2 )* , A(a 2 -6 2 )*-v(6 2 +c 2 )* C0Sd (*T^j* ' (a*+c>)i Eliminating /j, we have c 2 (a i -b i )X i +a 2 (b i +c i )v 2 =a z c\ Write \(a*-b i )i=acos<f>, then v (£ 2 + c 2 )* = c sin <£ ; write also a = (a 2 + c 2 )* cos ^, c = (<z 2 + c 2 )* sin ^f. Then cos0 =cos<f> cos^t+sin^ sin^=cos(<£ — t/i), cos0' = cos<£ cosifi — sin<f> sin</r = cos(<£ + ^r), whence either 6+6' or 6—6' = 2kn±2^, a constant angle. There is a similar property for the lines of curvature on an ellipsoid : viz. the sum or difference of the geodesic distances from a pair of umbilics to any point on a given line of curvature is constant (see Salmon, Analytic geometry of three dimensions, 7th ed. § 400). xin] LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QUADRICS 261 13-41. The polar of a point P= [x^y^, z u wj with respect to a quadric of a linear point-system is P-AP' = o, where P= o represents the polar of P with respect to the quadric 5=0, and P' = o that with respect to S' = o. Hence the polar s of a given point all pass through one line I. There is one quadric S t of the system which passes through P-y. Let <x be the tangent-plane to S t at P 1 . Then there are two other quadrics S 2 and S 3 which touch a ; let P 2 and P s be their points of contact. Then the polar of P t with respect to S ± is a. The polar of P 2 with respect to S t is also a and it passes through P l7 therefore the polar of P x with respect to S 2 passes through P 2 . Similarly the polar of P x with respect to S s passes through P 3 . But the polar of P x with respect to S t passes through both P 2 and P 3 . Therefore the polars of P x with respect to all quadrics of the system pass through both P 2 and P 3 . P^Pg is therefore the line through which the polar planes of P, all pass. 13-42. To every point P there corresponds in general one line I such that the polar planes of P zvtth respect to all the quadrics of the system pass through I, and the whole assemblage of such lines I form a quadratic complex. If / passes through a fixed point Q=[X, Y, Z, W], P lies on a fixed line, the line which corre- sponds to Q. We have then ax x X+ ... =0, a'x x X+ ... =0, and, [x, y, z, to] being any point on I, ax x x+ ... =0, a'x 1 x+ ... =0. Eliminating *x»Ji> z u w i between these four equations we obtain = 0, ax by cz dw a'x b'y c'z d'w aX bY cZ dW a'X b'Y c'Z d'W 262 LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QUADRICS [chap. which represents a quadric cone through [X, Y, Z, W]. Hence the complex of lines is of class 2, or it is a quadratic complex. In a given plane there are two lines of the complex through any point, hence all the lines of the complex which lie in a given plane envelop a conic. 13-43. The locus of points which correspond to lines of the com- plex which lie in a given plane is a cubic curve. Let P= [X, Y, Z, W] and let the given plane be oc= [l,m,n,p\. Then the condition that the line of intersection of aXx + bYy +cZz +dWw =6 and a'Xx+b'Yy + c'Zz+d'Ww=o should lie in the plane Ix + my + nz +pw = o is that the matrix -aX bY cZ dW a'X b'Y c'Z d'W J m n p _ should be of rank 2. Hence l(cd'-c'd)ZW+n(da' - d'a) WX+p(ac' - a'c)XZ= o and m(cd' - c'd)ZW+ n(db' - d'b) WY+p(bc' - b'c) YZ=o. The locus is therefore the intersection of these two quadrics which have the generating line Z=o= W in common, and this locus is a cubic curve. 13-431. Since the polars of P with respect to 5 and S' inter- sect on the plane a, a is the polar plane of P with respect to one quadric of the system S- AS". That is the locus of poles of a fixed plane with respect to the quadrics of the system is this cubic curve. This may be shown also directly as follows. If P= [X, Y, Z, W] is the pole of the plane [/, m, n, p] with respect to S-XS', then (a-Xa')X/l=(b-Xb')Y/m=(c-Xc')Z/n=(d~M')W/P- The locus of Pis therefore represented by the freedom-equations x=l(b-Xb')(c-Xc')(d-Xd'), etc. xin] LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QDADRICS 263 Ex. 1. Show that the polar quadratic complex of the system (ax 2 + by 3 + cz 2 + dw 2 ) + A (a' x 2 + V y 2 + c'z 2 + d' to 2 ) = o is represented by any one of the equations PoiPn _ PoaPsi _ P03P12 (da') (be') ~ (db') (ca') ~ (dc 1 ) (ab') ' where (be') stands for be' —b'c, etc. Ex. 2. Prove that the polar lines of the line aXx + b Yy + cZz + dWw = o, a'Xx + V Yy + c' Zz + d' Ww = o with respect to the system (ax 2 +...)+X(a'x 2 + ...)=o generate the quadric S (be') (ad') (yzXW+xwYZ)=o. 13-44. Polar of a fixed line with respect to a pencil of quadrics. If / is any line of the complex the polar planes of all points on it with respect to all the quadrics of the system pass through the corresponding point P. Hence the polar lines of / with respect • to all the quadrics of the system are concurrent in P. If / is an arbitrary line and (x^, (x z ), two points upon it, the polar planes of (x x ) and (x 2 ) are P 1 + AP 1 ' = o and P 2 +AP 2 ' = o. Eliminating A we have P^P^ — P 1 'P 2 =o which represents a quadric. Hence the polar lines of an arbitrary fixed line generate a regulus. The other regulus of this quadric consists of those lines of the polar complex which correspond to points on /. 13-45. The polar complex is an example of the tetrahedral complex, which is the complex of lines which are cut by four fixed arbitrary planes in a constant cross-ratio. The lines of the polar complex are in fact cut by the faces of the tetrahedron of reference in a constant cross-ratio. A line of the complex is represented by aXx +bYy +cZz +dWw =0, a'Xx + V Yy + c'Zz + d 'Ww = 0. 00, 264 LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QUADRICS [chap. We obtain freedom-equations by taking the two points of reference 0112=0 and w = o ; thus x = {bc')YZ + t(bd')YW\ y = (ca')ZX +t(da')WX z = (ab')XY w= t{ab')XY ) where (be') stands for be' — b'c, etc. The line cuts the planes x=o, y=o, z=o, w=o respectively where the parameter t has the values _(bS)Z K) Z (bd') W (da') W The cross-ratio (tt tt ^- tlt -(bc')(da') (h*2, Wu-Wt-lbd'^ca')' which is independent of X, Y, Z, W. 13-5. The polar properties of the tangential system follow reciprocally. Thus if a is an arbitrary fixed plane, its poles with respect to the quadrics of a tangential system lie on one line /, and the assemblage of such lines, when the plane a is varied, form a tetrahedral complex. With certain exceptions, to every plane corresponds one line of the complex, and vice versa. If the plane a is a plane of the tangent-developable, so that it touches every quadric of the system, the points of contact are its poles and these lie on one line, which is a generating line of the developable. If a is one of the principal planes, its poles all coincide, and any line through a vertex of the fundamental tetrahedron belongs to the complex. If a passes through a vertex X, its poles lie in the opposite face and / lies in this face. The assemblage of polar planes of a fixed point is a cubic de- velopable, and this is also the assemblage of planes which corre- spond to lines of the polar complex which pass through the given point. The polars of a fixed line / with respect to the quadrics of a tangential system generate one regulus of a quadric ; the other regulus of this quadric consists of the lines of the polar com- plex which correspond to planes through /. xm] LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QUADRICS 365 Ex. Show that the polar complex of the confocal system x* y 2 z 2 - 7 + 1^ + ^^ = 1 ^a t 6*-A c 2 -A" is represented by rfpoiPta + PPnPsi + <?PosPi2 = °- 13-61. A quadric is in general completely determined by nine points, provided these nine points do not lie on a quartic curve which is the intersection of two quadrics. If eight points are given, the system has one degree of freedom and the quadric is completely determined by one other point. Let S t and 5 2 be two quadrics through the eight points. Then every quadric of the system S 1 +XS l =o passes through the eight points, and since A can be determined so that this may represent a given quadric through the eight points, the general linear system is the system of quadrics through eight fixed points. All the quadrics which pass through eight arbitrary points have a quartic curve in common. 13-62. Eight points do not, however, always determine a one- parameter system. For any three quadrics S lt S 2 , S 3 have eight points in common, and then any quadric of the two-parameter system S 1+ XS i+l ,S 3 =o passes through these eight points. Eight points which form the basis of a two-parameter system are constituted in a particular way. The two-parameter system requires only seven points to determine it, for any seven of the base-points being taken a quadric of the system is determined by two other points. All the quadrics will then pass also through the eighth point. Hence all quadrics which pass through seven given points will pass also through an eighth fixed point. A group of eight points having this character is called a set of eight associated points. Ex. Show that the vertices of any hexahedron form eight associated points. When the eight points are divided into two sets of four, each set forms a tetrahedron self-polar with respect to one and the same quadric. 266 LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QUADRICS [chap. Thus the system X(yz+xw) + n(zx+yw) + v(xy+zw) = o passes through the eight points [i, o, o, o], [o, i, o, o], [o, o, i, o], [O, O, O, i], [- I, I, I, i], [i, - I, I, I], [i, I, _ I; xl [ I( I? Xj _ j]. The first four and also the last four form self-polar tetrahedra with respect to x 2 + y 2 + z 2 + w 2 = o. For the general proof of this theorem see 15-212, Ex. 2. 13-7. As a particular case of the theorem 13-431 the locus of centres of a linear point-system of quadrics is a cubic curve. This cuts the plane at infinity in three points. Hence the system in general contains three paraboloids. This appears also other- wise, since there are three quadrics of the system which touch the plane at infinity. The directions of the axes of the three parabolas form a set of conjugate directions for each quadric of the system. The locus of centres of a linear tangential system of quadrics is a straight line ; but reduces to a fixed point if (as in a confocal system) the plane at infinity is a face of the common self-polar tetrahedron. The condition for a rectangular hyperboloid (zv=o being the plane at infinity) is (a+b+c)-X(a' + b' + c') = o. Hence mere is in general one rectangular hyperboloid in a linear point-system. If there are two, then a + b + c = o and a' + b' + c' = o, and every quadric of the system is a rectangular hyperboloid. As the con- dition a+b+c=o is linear in the coefficients, a rectangular hyperboloid is in general determined by eight points. But if the eight points form an associated group every quadric through seven of them will pass through the eighth. All rectangular hyper- boloids which pass through seven given points form a one-parameter system and have in common a quartic curve. If six points are given there is a two-parameter system of rectangular hyperboloids, which is determined when three such hyperboloids are given. But these three intersect in eight points, which are common to all. Hence all rectangular hyperboloids which pass through six given points form a bundle and pass through two other fixed points. The condition for an orthogonal hyperboloid is (b - Xb') (c - Ac') + (c - Ac') (a - Xa') + (a- Xa') (b -Xb') = o. xiii] LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QUADRICS 267 Hence there are in general two orthogonal hyperboloids in a linear system. If there are three, then bc+ca+ab=o, b'c'+c'a' + a'b' = o, be' + b'c+ca' + c'a+ab' + a'b=o, and every quadric is an orthogonal hyperboloid. This requires a'/a=b'lb=c'/c, and the quadrics are then homothetic. 13-8. Classification of linear systems. A linear point-system of quadrics, which is determined by two given quadrics, may be specialised in various ways, according to the nature of the base-curve. 13-81. [nil]*. In the general case the curve of intersection is a quartic curve without singularities. The two quadrics have a unique common self-polar tetrahedron and when this is taken as tetrahedron of reference the equation of each quadric is of the form ax* + by* + cz* + dw* = o. Further, by a suitable choice of unit-point we may obtain as canonical equations S= ax 2 + by* + cz* + dw 2 = o, S' = x i +y s +z 2 +w 2 =o. The four cones of the system S—XS' = o are determined by the equation (a-$$(b-X)(c-X)(d-X) = o.

There are three special cases when equalities occur among the
roots.

13-811. [(n) n]. If a=b two of the cones coincide and de-
generate to two planes, so that the base-curve reduces to the two
conies in which these planes cut all the quadrics. If the planes
are w = o, v = o, the equation of the system is of the form

S— Xuv = o.
The planes of the two conies intersect in a line which cuts S in
two points A, B which are points on each of the conies. (We
assume that AB is not a generating line of S.) The two conies
therefore intersect in two points. The base-curve thus consists
of two conies which intersect in two points, and any two quadrics
of the system have double-contact at A and B.

• These symbols are explained later (13-86).

268 LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QUADRICS [chap.

Ex. i. Show that the system S— Xuv=o has a single infinity of
polar tetrahedra and two proper cones.

Ex. 2. If two conies intersect in two points, show that there are
two centres from which one of the conies can be projected into the
other.

13-812. [(iii)i]. If a=b=c the two planes u and© coincide
and the base-curve becomes a double-conic. The equation of the
system is of the form

S-Xu i =o.

Any two quadrics of the system have ring-contact along this
conic. An arbitrary plane cuts the system in a system of conies
having double-contact at the points in which the plane cuts the
double-conic. There is just one proper cone in the system and
this is a tangent-cone to every quadric of the system. There are
oo 3 self-polar tetrahedra.

An example of a system of this type is a system of homothetic
and concentric quadrics, in which case the double-conic is in the
plane at infinity and the common tangent-cone is the asymptotic
cone. Two concentric spheres have ring-contact along the circle
at infinity.

13-813. [(ii)(ii)]. If a—b and c=d, the base-curve is the
intersection of two pairs of planes, i.e. a skew quadrilateral. The
equation of the system can be written in the form

xy— \zw=o.

All the quadrics of the system have four common generating
lines, two of each system, say a, b of the one system and a', V
of the other. The planes aa', ab', ba', bb' are tangent-planes to all,
system is self-dual and forms also a linear tangential system in
which the tangent-developable reduces to four planes.

13-814. [(mi)]. The case a = b = c—d is trivial, the two

13-82. [21 1]. When the quadrics have simple contact at a point
O every plane through O cuts the quadrics in conies which touch
at O and therefore meets the curve of intersection in two coin-
cident points at O. O is therefore a double-point on the curve ;

xin] LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QUADRICS 269

the base-curve is a nodal quartic. In general the curve has two
distinct tangents at O which lie in the tangent-plane to the
quadrics at O. The lines joining O to the other points of the
base-curve generate a cone which is cut by any plane through O
in two lines ; hence this is a quadric cone, and is, in fact, one of
the cones of the linear system. The generators of this cone which
lie in the tangent-plane at O are the tangents to the curve at its
double-point.

Taking 2=0 as the common tangent-plane at Os[o, o, o, 1],
and as x=o and y=o two planes through O which form with
this plane a self-polar triad for the cone with vertex O, the
equations of the two quadrics each reduce to the form

ax* + by 2 + cz 2 + zrzw = o.

The plane cz+zrw=o may then be taken as the fourth plane of
reference w=o, thus making c=o. Further by choosing the
unit-point suitably we obtain as canonical equations of the two
quadrics S=ax* + by* + z 2 + 2rzw = o,

S' = x 2 +y i +2zzv=o.

The cones of the system S— A5' = o are then found to corre-
spond to the roots of the equation

(A-r) z (A-a)(A-*)=o.

Hence two of the cones coincide, (a — r)x 2 + (b — r)y 2 + sr 2 = o is
the cone which projects the base-curve from the node.

Here again there are three special cases when equalities occur
among the roots.

13-821. [(21)1]. If a=r the tangents at the double-point
coincide and the quadrics are said to have stationary contact. The
cone which projects the base-curve becomes two distinct planes,
so that the base-curve reduces to two conies which touch at O.

13-822. [2(11)]. If a = b the cone S—aS' = o reduces to two
planes z=o and z+z(r — a)w = o, while S—rS' = o is a proper
quadric cone. The plane z=o cuts all the quadrics in two fixed
generators z=o, x±iy = o; the plane z+z(r— a)w=o cuts all
the quadrics in the same conic. Thus the base-curve consists of
this conic and two intersecting lines meeting the conic in distinct

270 LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QUADRICS [chap.

points [±i, i, o, o]. All the quadrics have the same tangent-
planes at these two points and at the intersection of the common
generators ; they have therefore triple contact.

13-823. [(211)]. Ifa=6=rthesystemisoftheformS-Ai? 2 =o
and the base-curve is a double-conic, but this double-conic
breaks up into two double-lines. All the quadrics of the system
have contact along these two lines.

13-83. [22]. If the two quadrics 5 and S' have a single gener-
ator in common the remainder of their intersection is a space-
cubic. An arbitrary plane through the common generator cuts
each of the quadrics S, S' in a straight line, and the intersection
of these lines gives one point on the space-cubic; hence the
common generator must be a bisecant and thus the base-curve
consists of a space-cubic together with a bisecant. The quadrics
have double contact at the points, A and B, say, where the bisecant
cuts the cubic curve. We assume that A, B are distinct points;
the case in which they are coincident will be treated later (13-85).
Let AC and BD be the other generators of S' through A and B
respectively. There is one generator of S', of the system to which
AB belongs, which is cut harmonically by AC, BD and the
quadric S; let this be CD, and take ABCD as tetrahedron of
reference. Then by suitable choice of unit-point we obtain
canonical equations of the two quadrics

S = #* + ro a + 2fyz + 2pxw = o,
S' = 2yz+2xw=o.

There are two distinct cones in the system S— AS' = o, de-
termined by the equation

(A-/) 2 (A-/») a =o.
13-831. [(22)]. If p=f the two quadrics have in common, in
addition to the generator z = o = w (twice), two generators
ss ± iw = o, x + iy = o, and the base-curve consists of a double-line
and two lines mutually skew but each cutting the double-line. In
this case the quadrics touch all along the double generator.

13-84. [31]. In the case of stationary contact (13-821 above),
which was derived as a special case of simple contact when the
base-curve is a nodal quartic, the base-curve degenerated to two

xni] LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QUADRICS 271

conies touching one another. Another case of stationary contact
occurs when the base-curve becomes a cuspidal quartic. Let the
point of stationary contact be D [o, o, o, 1] and the tangent-plane
z=o, then the equation of each of the quadrics is of the form

ax i 4. j,yi + cz i + 2 fyz + 2gzx + 2hxy + zrzw = o.
The plane z=o cuts the two quadrics in pairs of lines

ax*+by i +2hxy = o, a'x 2 +b'y 2 +2h'xy=o,
and there is a pair of lines harmonic with regard to each pair.
Taking these as DB(z=o = x) and DA(z=o=y) we have
h=o = h'. The cone r'S -rS' = o projects the quartic curve from
the cusp and is cut by the tangent-plane z=o in lines

(ar' - a'r) x* + (br' - b'r)y* = o ;
these are coincident, say z=o=x, therefore br' = b'r. We may
choose the vertex C as a point on the quartic curve and the
tangent-plane to S' at C as w = o ; then c = o, c' = o, g' = o, /' = o.
The point C has still one degree of freedom and we can choose
it so that the tangent at C to the quartic curve cuts DA ; then
£=0. Lastly by a suitable choice of unit-point we obtain the
canonical equations

S = ax* + b (y 2 + 2zw) + 2yz = o,
S' = x a +(y 2 +2zw) = o.
There is a proper cone with vertex D which projects the quartic
curve, viz. (a—b)x i +2yz = o.

13-841. [(31)]. If a=b this cone degenerates to two planes.
The two quadrics meet the tangent-plane z=o in the same two
lines x 2 +y 2 =o. These are common generators and form part of
the base-curve; the remainder of the curve is the conic y=o,
x i +2zw=o, on which the two common generators intersect.
The base-curve thus consists of a conic and two lines intersecting
each other on it.

13-85. [4]. We consider now the case in which the base-curve
is a space-cubic together with a tangent. The cubic curve which is
represented by the parametric equations

x: y.z :w = P: t 2 :t:i
passes through the points A [1,0, o, o] and D [o, o, o, 1], and

272 LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QUADRICS [chap.

the tangent at A is z = o = to (for every plane w = fiz through this
line meets the curve in two coincident points at A). The equation
of a quadric containing the line z=o = w is

cz 2 + dw 2 + 2fyz + zgzx + 2pxzv + zqyw + zrzw = o.
Substituting x=t 3 , y=t 2 , z=t, ra=i and equating to zero the
coefficients of the several powers of t we obtain g=o,f+p=o,
c+2q=o, r=o, d=o. Then writing /= Ac we have the pencil of
quadrics z 2 -yw + zX(yz-xw)=o.

The discriminant of this is A 4 , so that there is just one cone
z 2 — yw=o in the system.

13-86. Invariant-factors.

These various cases are distinguished according to the nature
of the discriminant | S— AS' |=o, whose roots determine the
four cones of the general system. In the general case the roots
Aj, Aa, A s , A 4 are all distinct, and different cases arise when there
are equalities among the roots.

In general the matrix [S — AS'] is of rank 4, but when A is equal
to one of the roots it is in general of rank 3. When A 1 =A 2 ,
[S— \S'~\ may still be of rank 3, but it will be of rank 2 if A— A x
is a factor of each of the first minors.

Conversely, if A— Aj is a factor of each of the first minors
it will be a repeated factor of the determinant. If V is the
determinant formed from the first minors of a determinant
A of order n, V=A n ~ 1 ; and if each element of V contains the
factor /, V is divisible by/", but A" -1 could not be divisible by
f n unless A itself were divisible by / 2 .

When \= Ajj= A 3 , [S- A X S'] may be of rank 3, 2, or 1 ; in the
first case the first minors are not all divisible by A — A x ; in the
last case the second minors are all divisible by A— A x and there-
fore the first minors are all divisible by (A— A^ 2 ; in the second
case the first minors may be divisible by A — A x or (A — AJ 2 while
the second minors are not divisible by A— A x . These properties
are of an invariant character and correspond to the geometrical
characteristics of the system. They provide an exact method of
distinguishing the different types of linear systems, and we shall
explain briefly the notation which is used.

Def. Let the determinant A contain the factor A- k to the

xin] LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QUADRICS 373

power 4> and let l t , 1%,... be the indices of the powers of this
factor which will divide all of the first, second, . . . minors respec-
tively. ThenZ >/ 1 >4>--.. Writel —l 1 =e 1 ,l 1 —l 2 =e i ,.... Then
(A — k)\ (A — k)\ . . . are called invariant-factors to the base A — k.

e lt e 2 , ... are each > o and their sum = lg , hence the sum of the
indices for all the invariant-factors, corresponding to all the
factors of A, is equal to the order of the determinant. Further
it can be proved (see Bromwich, Quadratic forms and their
classification by means of invariant-factors, Cambridge Tracts,
1906) that £ , 1 ><?2>^3> ••••

If e lt e % , ..., e-l, e%, ... are the indices of the invariant-factors
to the bases (A— k), (X—k r ), ..., the system is denoted by the
Segre characteristic

[(e 1 e 1 ...)(e 1 'e a ' ...)...].

These characteristics have been attached to the various cases above.

13-87. There is one other type of pencil, for which there are
no invariant-factors, and for which the discriminant | S-XS' |
vanishes identically. This is called the Singular case. Every
quadric of the system is a cone. We exclude the case in which the
cones have a common vertex, as by taking this vertex as the
point [o, 0,0, 1] we have a system in three variables which is
analytically equivalent to a pencil of conies.

Since the polar-planes of a given point with respect to the
quadrics of a linear system form an axial pencil, and since in the
case of a cone the polar-plane passes through the vertex, it
follows that the vertices of all the cones lie on one line. Further,
since the polar-plane of any point on this line passes through the
point itself the line is a generator of every cone, and all the cones
touch the same plane along this line. Thus part of the base-curve
is a double-line ; the remainder is a conic cutting the line in one
point. To obtain canonical equations take A [1, o, o, o] as vertex
of iS" and C [0, o, 1,0] as vertex of S and the common tangent-
plane v=o. Take B [o, 1, o, o] as a point on the conic and let the
tangent at B cut y = o in D, so that BD is x = o = z and the plane
of the conic is z = kx. Then by suitable choice of unit-point the
equations become S=zc 2 + 2 xy,

S'=dw 2 +2yz.

SAG iS

274 LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QUADRICS [chap.

13-9. EXAMPLES.

i. Show that the locus of a point whose polar-planes with
respect to two given quadrics are at right angles is another quadric.

2 . If three quadrics have a common conic, show that the planes
of their other conies of intersection have a common line.

3. If ax 2 +by 2 +cz 2 =i is an ellipsoid, show that as A varies
from — 00 to + 00 or the reverse, the quadric

X(ax 2 + fry 2 + cz 2 - 1) - (a'x 2 + b'y 2 + c'z 2 - 1) = o
passes through one of the two series E, H lt H 2 , H lt E, or
E, H u H 2 , Virtual, E.

4. Show that the surfaces

z 2 + 2xy+2az=o and z 2 +2xy+2bz=o
touch one another at three points, and have two generators
common. Show also that they have a common enveloping cone
whose equation is {z (a + b) + zab} 2 + Sabxy = o.

(Math. Trip. II, 1915.)

5. Find the intersection of the pairs of surfaces:
(i) x 2 —2y 2 +yz+2zx—xy—xw + 2yw = o,

x 2 —y 2 +yz+zx—xzv +yw — o.
(ii) x 2 + 2,z 2 -2yz-2yw+^zw=o,

x 2 + 3# 2 — \yz + ^zx — 2yw = o.
(iii) x 2 +y 2 — 2xz+2yw—o, ^x 2 -y 2 —2yz+ 2x10=0.
(iv) 2x 2 —y 2 +z 2 +2yz—2xw=o,

x 2 —2y 2 —zv 2 —2zx—2xy + 2yw + 2zw = o.
(v) 2X 2 — y 2 +w 2 — 3yz — 8zx+qxw — 32810 = 0,

4X 2 —5y 2 — zv 2 +2zx—gxy—xw — 6yw=o.
(vi) 2x 2 +2y 2 — 32 2 +«> 2 — ^yz—^zx— /\xy—2zw=o,

x 2 +y 2 +$z 2 +w 2 +2yz + 2zx—2xy+/[ztv=o. (vii) 6x 2 +y 2 + 6z 2 + 2yz + 1 6zx — ^xy — 2xw — ^zw = o, 5x 2 +5y 2 +6z 2 — 6yz+i2zx— 4>cy— 2x1a— ^zw=o. (viii) — 2^ 2 + 8y 2 +w 2 + Syz — 2zx + 6xy — 2xw — 4yw — ^zzo = o, ^x 2 — §y 2 — z 2 + w 2 — byz + zzx — 2xy + qxw + 2yw + 2zw = 0. (ix) 2X 2 +y 2 — 2zv 2 + 2yz + 2zx — 2yw — 2zw = o, x 2 + y 2 — z 2 — 3a; 2 + 2yz + 2xw — 2yw = o. (x) 3X 2 — 4y 2 +s; 2 +K! 2 — 8yz+^zx— 4x^=0, x 2 + 2y 2 + 2yz + zx — 2xzo — yw —$zw = o.

xin] LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QUADRICS 275

(xi) x i -z 2 -zx-xy+xzo-2yw—2zzo=o,

3x 2 -2z 2 -3za s -4zx-2xy+4xw-6yw-iozzo = o.
(xii) x 2 +y i +z 2 +szo*+2xw-2yw+4zzv=o,

x 2 + 2y 2 +z 2 + 8w 2 + 2yz + 2zx + $xw~2yw +6zw = o. (xiii) x 2 +y 2 + z 2 + w 2 - zyz - zzx +xy-xzo+yzo = o, x 2 —y 2 +yz-2xy—2xzo+zw=o. Ans. (i) [(11) (11)] Two real lines, x=o=y, z=o=x+y-zo; and two imaginary lines, (x+y)±i(x~y) = o, x+y-w=±iz. (") [(3 1 )] Conic (z = o,x 2 ~ 2yw = o), and two generators 2x-y-zw = o, (y-zz-zzo)(y-6z-zu>) = o inter- secting on conic, (iii) [2(11)] A conic in plane x+y+z+w=o, and two lines x = o—y, x=y = z — w. (iv) [(hi) i] Ring-contact in plane x+y+z-w=o. ( v ) [(")(")] Four generators (x-zy-z)(zx+y + w) = o, (3x+y+w)(y-2z+w) = o. (vi) [(11) 11] Double contact at [1, 1, o, o] and [o, o, 1, - 1]. (vii) [(21)1] Two conies touching, (x + 2y) (x - zy + 42) = o. (viii) [2(11)] Conic 5* - 133; - z + 6w = o, and two genera- tors x+y+z=o, w(zx+w) = o. (ix) [(211)] Two double-lines (x+z-zv) 2 =o, (y + zz)(zx-y+zz)~o. (x) [22] Cubic curve and a bisecant (x + z = o, zy - w = o). (xi) [(22)] A double-line {z + zzo = o, * + 3*0 = o), and two single lines (x+z=o, *+3w=o), {x-zy-z=o, x-zz-w=o). (xii) [31] Cuspidal quartic. Cusp at [1, -1, i, _i]. (xiii) [4] Cubic curve and a tangent (x=zo, x+y=z) at [1, -1, o, 1]. 6. When two quadrics cut in a conic and two straight lines passing through the same point A of this conic, the sections of the two quadrics by any plane through A have second order 18-2 276 LINEAR SYSTEMS OF QUADRICS [chap, xin contact at A ; but if the plane passes through the tangent at A to the conic the contact is of the third order. 7. If two quadrics have two common intersecting generators and touch at all points of the one generator and at one point of the other, then they will touch at all points of the second generator also. 8. Show that P x=t(t*+i), py=t*+i, pz= -2{f-p)t\ pzv = 2 (f-p) t are freedom-equations of the cubic curve of inter- section of the quadrics z i +w i +2fyz+2pxw=o, yz +xw=o. 9. Show that every quadric of the linear system determined by the two quadrics y* + z 2 + w % +yz + xy — xw — yw — t,zw = o, 2J 2 + 2 2 + W z + 2Xy — 2XW — 2yiO — 2ZZ0 = o is a cone. Find the locus of their vertices and the equation of their common conic. Ans. y — z=w. Plane of conic x+y—z=o. Common tangent- plane y= w. 10. At a point A of one given quadric U a tangent is drawn which touches another given quadric U' in a point B'. At B' a second tangent of U' is drawn to touch U in C. At C another tangent of U is drawn to touch V in D'. Find the positions possible for A in order that AD' should touch U in A and V in U. (Math. Trip. II, 1915.) 11. Prove (i) that if a fixed line through one vertex of the common self-polar tetrahedron of a linear system of quadric loci meet a variable surface of the system in P and P', the tangent- planes at P, P' touch a quadric cone; (ii) that the conies de- termined by the intersection of the surfaces of the system with a fixed tangent-plane of one of the four quadric cones of the system have all contact in two points. Obtain the properties of the con- focal system which correspond to these two results respectively. (Math. Trip. II, 1914.) 12. If u = o, m' = o; v=o, v' = o; w = o, w' = o represent pairs of opposite planes of a hexahedron with quadrilateral faces, show that the general equation of a quadric which passes through the eight vertices is Xuu' + fiw' + vww' = o ; deduce that the vertices of a hexahedron form a set of eight associated points. CHAPTER XIV CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES 14*1. A curve is a one-way locus of points. A plane (analytic) curve can always be represented by an equation f(x, y) = o con- necting the cartesian coordinates x, y in its plane; when it is regarded as being in three dimensions we must supply another equation z=o, representing the plane in which it lies, for a single equation in x, y, z represents a surface, and in particular the equation f(x, y) = o, which does not contain z, represents a cylinder. The curve is thus represented as the intersection of a plane with a cylinder. More generally, two equations in the cartesian coordinates x, y, z (or the homogeneous coordinates x, y, z, w) represent a curve in space as the intersection of two surfaces. A curve may also be represented by parametric equations in which the coordinates x, y, z, w are expressed in terms of a single parameter. Still more generally, we may have any number of equations connecting the coordinates x,y, z, w and any parameters/), q,.... If these are satisfied by a single infinity of sets of values of the coordinates (real or imaginary) they represent a curve. If the equations are all algebraic and involve the parameters rationally the curve is called an algebraic curve. In particular if the co- ordinates can be separately expressed as rational algebraic func- tions of one parameter the curve is called a rational algebraic curve. For example, the intersection of two quadric surfaces is an algebraic curve, but, as we shall see later, it is not in general rational. The parametric equations px= t 3 , py=t % , pz=t, pw=i represent a rational algebraic curve. Eliminating t in different ways we find that it is the curve common to the three quadrics xz=y*, xw=yz, yw = z 2 . 14-11. An algebraic curve is cut by an arbitrary plane in a finite number of points (real or imaginary) ; this number is called the order of the curve. The intersection of two surfaces of order 278 CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES [chap. m and nisa curve of order tnn, for a plane cuts the two surfaces in plane curves of orders m and n and their mn points of intersection are the points of intersection of the plane with the given curve. Thus the intersection of two quadrics is in general a curve of the fourth order. The rational curve x:y :x: zv=t 3 :t 2 :t:i is of the third order, since an arbitrary plane Ix + my + n% +pw — o cuts the curve in the three points whose parameters are the roots of the cubic lt 3 + mt 2 +nt +p = o. In this case to every value of the parameter t there corresponds just one point, and con- versely. 14*12. For any rational algebraic curve the homogeneous co- ordinates can be expressed as polynomials in a parameter t (with no common factor), for if they are expressed as algebraic frac- tions we can multiply each of these by the least common multiple of the denominators since only the ratios of the coordinates are significant. To every value of the parameter there corresponds then just one set of ratios of the coordinates and therefore one point. The converse, however, is not always true, as is seen at once from the simple example x:y :z : zv=u e : u* : u 2 : i which reduces to the above cubic by putting w 2 = t , so that to every point correspond two values of u, viz. ±\/t. Provided there is a (i, i) correspondence between the points and the parameters, a system of parametric equations of the form px=f(t), etc., where the functions f(t), etc., are polynomials of degree «, represents a rational algebraic curve of order n. 1413. Luroth's Theorem. The following theorem enables us to determine the order of a curve from its parametric equations and to obtain a (i, i) corre- spondence between the points and the parameters. Suppose a curve to be represented by the parametric equations pxi=fi(t) (* = i, 2, 3,4), where /< denote polynomials of degree n with no common factor, xiv] CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES 279 and suppose that to any point there correspond v different values of the parameter, t 1} t 2 , ..., t v . Then it is always possible to find another parameter A, a function of t, such that there is a (1, 1) correspondence between the values of A and points on the curve. Since t x , ..., t v all correspond to the same point, we have fi(t r ) :Mt r ) :/,(*,) :/*(*,) =/i(*.) :/.(*.) :/.(*.) :/«(*.) m-fiMMtj-Mtml) (*= 1, 2, 3)- These are polynomials in t, of degree n, which all vanish for t=t 1 , ..., t v ; they therefore have the common factor (t-h){t-t i )...{t-t v ), and no other common factor which contains t. They may also have a common factor which does not contain t ; as it will involve t t denote the highest such factor by <£ (*i). Then the highest common factor of F lt F z , F s is Mh)(t- h) ...(*- t v ). t 2 , ..., t v are of course not contained in this explicitly, but only t and t lt and we shall write it in the form H=<f> (ti)(t-td-(t-t v ) F lt F 2 , F 3 are all skew symmetrical in t and t^, the common factor t— t x is also skew symmetrical, and the remaining factor of each is symmetrical. Hence H is skew symmetrical in t and t x , and as it is of degree v in t, it is also of degree v in t t . At least one of the functions <f>, say <£,(*i), is therefore of degree v. Let <f> k {t^) be any other of the coefficients which has no factor in common with ^i(^) and write A=^(t)M»(0- The coordinates can now be expressed rationally in terms of the new parameter A. Since (t— f x )...(f— t v ) is symmetrical in t lf ...,t v the ratios <£ t -/0 o af e symmetrical, and therefore A is symmetrical. To every point correspond v values of t, and to each of these corresponds the same point. Hence there is a (1, 1) correspondence between the points and the values of the parameter A. a 2 «3 a i h b 3 h c* c 3 C t a8o CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES [chap. In the parametric representation of a rational curve we shall assume generally this (i, i) correspondence. Ex. i. Show that the equations px=u? + 2, py = 2u?-u +$,

pZ = 2U 2 — 2M + 8,

pw=4ii 2 -2u+ ii,

represent a straight line, and find a parameter A for a (i, i) corre-
spondence.

[A = (m 2 + 2)/(m-i); p*=A,p3; = 2A-i,ps: = 3A-2 ) pa)=4A-3.]

£■*. 2. Prove that the condition that the parametric equations
p* i = a i i 2 + J i f+c j (1 = 1,2,3,4) should represent a straight line is
that the matrix

h

should be of rank 2.

14-14. The complete intersection of two algebraic surfaces
may consist of two or more distinct curves. Thus the intersection
of two quadrics may break up into two conies. If two quadrics
have a generating line in common the remaining part of the
curve of intersection or residual is a cubic curve. In these cases
the complete curve of intersection is said to be reducible. A plane
curve /(x, y) = is reducible simply when/(», y) breaks up into
factors. To obtain a criterion for the reducibility of a curve in
space we consider a cone which contains the curve. If we project
the curve from the centre 0= [o, o, o, 1], say, we obtain a cone
whose homogeneous equation f(x, y, z) = o is found by elimi-
nating w between the equations of the two surfaces. This cone,
and therefore the curve, will be reducible if f(x, y, z) breaks up
into factors.

It is not always possible to represent an irreducible algebraic
curve as the complete intersection of two algebraic surfaces. In
the case of a cubic, for example, the only factors of 3 being 1
and 3, the curve cannot be the complete intersection of two
algebraic surfaces unless it is a plane cubic. But two quadrics in
general intersect in a curve of order 4 and if they have a common

xiv] CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES 281

generator the residual is a curve of order 3, which cannot be a
plane cubic since a plane cannot cut a quadric in a cubic curve.
The cubic x : y : z : w= t 3 : t 2 : t : 1 is the partial intersection of
any two of the quadrics xz=y 2 , xw=yz, yw = z 2 , and can be
represented exactly as the curve common to these three quadrics.
To represent an algebraic curve exactly by the intersections of
surfaces as many as four surfaces may be required.

14-21. A line does not in general meet a given curve in any
point, but as 00 2 lines pass through any point of the curve there
are 00 3 lines which meet the curve. These form a complex.

Again, there are 00 2 lines, bisecants or chords, which cut a
curve in two points, since each of the points has one degree of
freedom. These lines form a congruence.

The lines which pass through a given point and cut a curve of
order n form a cone of order n, and the lines which lie in a given
plane and cut a given curve of order n form n plane pencils. The
complex is therefore of degree n and can be represented by a
single homogeneous equation of degree n in the line-coordinates,
the line-equation of the curve.

The number of bisecants which lie in a given plane is
J«(»— 1), the number of lines connecting the n points in which
the plane cuts the curve. Hence the order of the congruence of
bisecants is fra(»— 1). The class of the congruence is equal to
the number of bisecants which pass through a given point O.

14-22. If the curve is projected on a plane from an arbitrary
point O the projection is a curve of order n. Corresponding to a
bisecant through O we have a double-point on the projection.
Viewed from O the given curve has thus an apparent double-point
there. The number of bisecants which pass through a given
point O is thus equal to the number of double-points on the
projection from O. This is a definite number for a given curve.

14-23. A plane curve of order n is determined by £m(« + 3)
points, for this is one less than the number of coefficients in its
equation, viz. \(n + 1) (n + 2). The maximum number of double-
points which it can possess is \{n— i)(n— 2), for if it had one
more, then through these |(w 2 — 3« + 4) double-points and » — 3
other points on the curve, i.e. altogether |(ra— 2)(n+ 1), a curve

28a CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES [chap.

of order n— 2 is determined which would meet the given curve
in (» 2 — 3«+4) + (ra— 3) = ra 2 — 2«+i points, whereas a curve of
order »— 2 cannot cut a curve of order n in more than n(n— 2)
points.

14- 231. A plane curve which has its maximum number of double-
points is rational, for through the \{n— i)(n — 2) double-points
and n— 2 other points on the curve, i.e. altogether \{n— 2) (n+ 1),
a curve of order n — 2 is determined ; and if only n — 3 additional
points are taken, then a linear system of curves of order n— 2 is
determined, each meeting the curve in

(»— 1)(»— 2) + (»-3) = »(» — 2) — 1

given points, and therefore meeting it in one variable point. If
in particular these n — 3 points are taken on a given straight line
the variable curve of order n — 2 meets this line in one other
variable point. Hence there is a (1, 1) correspondence between
the points of the given curve of order n and the points of the
straight line.

Ex. 1. The plane cubic curve y 3 + azx 2 + bxyz=o has a double-
point at [o, o, 1]. The liney =Xx, which passes through the double-
point, cuts the curve again where X s x + az + bXz=o. Hence we have
the parametric equations

px = a + bX

py=aX + b\ 2 ■ .

P z=-X*

Ex. 2. The cardioid, whose polar equation is r = a (1 +cos 8), and
whose homogeneous cartesian equation is

(* a +y 2 - axzf = a* (x 2 +y 2 ) z 2 ,

has a cusp at the origin [0,0,1], and cusps also at the circular points
[i,±i, o]. A conic through these three points and another fixed
point on the curve, say [aa, o, 1], is a circle

(*-«) a + (v-A) 2 = a 2 + A 2 ,

i.e. ac a + y 2 = z(ax+ Ay) z.

Eliminating z between the two equations we find, after removing the
factors (* 2 +^ 2 ) 2 and y,

4aA« = (a 2 -4A 2 )^.

xiv] CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES 283

Hence we obtain the parametric equations

p* = 2a 3 (a 2 -4A 2 ),

py = 8a%

P2 = (a a + 4A 2 ) 2
or, putting 2\=ap,

p» = 2a(i— /x 2 )'

14-232. A plane curve which has its maximum number of
double-points, and is therefore rational, is said also to be uni-
cursal, since all the real points of the curve (with the possible
exception of certain isolated points, acnodes or double-points at
which the tangents are imaginary) can be traced by the variation
of a single parameter through all real values from — 00 to + co.
The number by which the number of double-points falls short
of the maximum is called the deficiency or genus, usually de-
noted by p.

14-24. The maximum number of apparent double-points (for
an arbitrary point 0) for a space-curve of order n is therefore
also i(n— i)(w— 2). If the point O lies on the curve, the pro-
jecting cone is of order n— 1. An apparent double-point in this
case corresponds to a trisecant, hence the maximum number of
trisecants which pass through an arbitrary point of the curve is
\{n— 2)(n— 3). When the curve has the maximum number of
apparent double-points for a given point O it is rational, for
taking O as the point [o, o, o, 1] and the plane of projection as
ro=o there is a (1, 1) correspondence between a parameter A and
the points P' on the plane w = o, and between these points and
the points P of the curve there is also a (1, 1) correspondence.
It can be proved that the number by which the number of ap-
parent double-points falls short of the maximum is the same
from any general view-point, and this is called the deficiency or
genus of the curve. This follows from Riemann's theorem that
any two curves between which a (1, 1) correspondence exists
have the same genus, but it would be beyond the scope of
this book to go further into it.

284 CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES [chap.

14-3. A line which meets a curve in two coincident points,
i.e. the limiting case of a bisecant, is a tangent-line. The tangent-
lines form a one-dimensional series like the points on the curve.
The planes which pass through tangent-lines form a two-
dimensional system like the tangent-planes of a surface, and can
be represented by a single equation in plane-coordinates (£), the
tangential equation of the curve. Thus an equation in (£) may
represent, not a surface, but a curve.

A plane which meets the curve in three coincident points is
called an osculating plane. At each point on the curve there is in
general a unique osculating plane. These form a one-dimensional
series, represented by two equations in plane-coordinates.

14-4. Thus there are three one-dimensional systems associated
with a curve: (i) the points on the curve, (2) the tangent-lines,
(3) the osculating planes. There is a symmetry among these
systems. (3) is dual to (1), while (2) is self-dual, a tangent-line
being as well the limiting line of intersection of two osculating
planes as the limiting line joining two points. Any one of the
three systems determines the other two. We have also the two-
dimensional system of planes through tangent-lines, and dual
to this we have the two-dimensional system of points on tangent-
lines. But the latter is a sort of surface ; it is represented by a
single equation in (x) just as the system of tangent-planes is re-
presented by a single equation in (£). Psychologically a locus of
points has a concreteness which is much more difficult to at-
tribute to assemblages of lines and planes, and this surface has
been elevated to importance under the name developable, the
significance of which will appear later. As a two-dimensional
locus of points it is a sort of surface, but it differs from an
ordinary surface just as essentially as a curve does. A surface
as a locus is dual to a surface as an envelope, both being two-
dimensional assemblages, the one of points, the other of planes.
A curve as a locus of points is dual to a developable as an en-
velope of planes, both being one-dimensional assemblages of
their respective elements ; a curve as an envelope of planes is
dual to a developable as a locus of points, both being two-
dimensional assemblages; finally a curve as an assemblage of
lines (tangents) is dual to a developable as an assemblage of lines

xrv] CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES 283

(generating lines). From the last point of view a developable has
the character of a ruled surface, the characteristic distinction
being that the tangent-planes of a ruled surface form a two-
dimensional system so that at each point of a generating line
there is a different tangent-plane, while in the case of a developable
the tangent-planes at all points of a given generator are the same
and they form only a one-dimensional series.

Fig. 45. A developable, with its edge of regression and generators

14-41. Starting with the developable as a one-dimensional
series of planes depending on a single parameter, we obtain the
generating lines as the limiting positions of the lines of inter-
section of two planes which come into coincidence, and the locus
of the limiting positions of points which lie in three ultimately
coincident planes is the curve. The generating lines are tangents
of the curve, and the planes are its osculating planes. From this
point of view the curve is called the edge of regression of the
developable.

14-42. The term "developable" refers to a characteristic
property of the figure considered as a deformable surface or
material sheet. By a succession of small successive rotations
about the generating lines the surface can be laid flat or developed
on to a plane, without any stretching or tearing. A cone has this

288 CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES [chap.

through cuts the curve in two other points and therefore the
cone in two lines. A single infinity of quadric cones can therefore
be passed through a space-cubic, each having as vertex a point
of the curve.

Consider two such cones, vertices O t and 2 . O x 2 is a
generating line of each cone, and each cone contains the whole
curve. The intersection of the two cones then consists of the
cubic curve and the line O x 2 . If 3 is a third point on the curve
we obtain another quadric cone containing the whole curve. The
three cones have in pairs the lines 2 O s ,0 3 1 , O x 2 in common,
but these three lines have no common point, hence the cubic
curve is represented as the complete intersection of three quadric
cones.

14-62. A line cannot cut a space-cubic in more than two points,
for suppose A, B, C to be three collinear points on the curve,
and P any other point on the curve, then the plane PABC meets
the curve in more than three points. Hence there are no tri-
secants. All the bisecants which pass through a given point of the

Two bisecants cannot cut one another except at a point on the
curve, for if they did they would determine a plane meeting the
curve in more than three points.

14-631. Let AA', BB', CC be three bisecants, and a any plane
through AA'. a cuts the curve again in a single point P, and this
determines with BB' a unique plane j8 and with CC a unique
plane y. Hence we have three pencils of planes related in pairs
in (i, i) correspondence. Conversely, the curve can be generated
by the common point of a set of corresponding planes of three
homographic pencils of planes whose axes have no point in
common. As an example, let ABCD be the tetrahedron of re-
ference. Then the pencils with axes CD, AB and AD can be
represented by the equations

x—Xy, z = (j.zo, y = vz.
The simplest (i, i) correspondence is represented by

A = fi = v = t.
Then x/y —y/z = zjw = t,

xiv] CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES 285

(generating lines). From the last point of view a developable has
the character of a ruled surface, the characteristic distinction
being that the tangent-planes of a ruled surface form a two-
dimensional system so that at each point of a generating line
there is a different tangent-plane, while in the case of a developable
the tangent-planes at all points of a given generator are the same
and they form only a one-dimensional series.

Fig. 45. A developable, with its edge of regression and generators

14-41. Starting with the developable as a one-dimensional
series of planes depending on a single parameter, we obtain the
generating lines as the limiting positions of the lines of inter-
section of two planes which come into coincidence, and the locus
of the limiting positions of points which lie in three ultimately
coincident planes is the curve. The generating lines are tangents
of the curve, and the planes are its osculating planes. From this
point of view the curve is called the edge of regression of the
developable.

14-42. The term "developable" refers to a characteristic
property of the figure considered as a deformable surface or
material sheet. By a succession of small successive rotations
about the generating lines the surface can be laid flat or developed
on to a plane, without any stretching or tearing. A cone has this

286 CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES [chap.

property and is a developable, but its curve reduces to a single
point — the vertex. A plane curve, which is dual to a cone, has its
developable already flat — it is the plane of the curve.

14-43. Consider the section of a developable by a plane. The
plane cuts the curve of the developable in n points (n being the
order of the curve). It cuts each of the generating lines in a
point, and the locus of these points is the curve of section C.
Finally it cuts each of the planes of the developable in a line, and
these lines are tangents to C. At an arbitrary point on C there is
a unique plane of the developable and therefore a unique tangent
to C; but at a point P on the edge of regression there are two
coincident generators and the curve C has a double-point there;
further there are two coincident planes of the developable
passing through this generator, and the tangents to C at the
double-point are coincident. Hence P is a cusp on the curve of
section ; that is, any plane in general cuts the developable in a
curve having a cusp on the edge of regression. The edge of re-
gression is thus a cuspidal edge. The developable considered as
a surface consists of two sheets which meet at the cuspidal edge.
The tangents to the curve are divided at the points of contact,
the two parts belonging to the two separate sheets. In a similar
way the assemblage of planes which pass through tangents of the
curve, and produce the curve as an envelope, have the develop-
able as a singularity or assemblage of double-planes. The en-
velope consists of two parts ; each plane is divided by the tangent-
line of the curve, and the two portions belong to the two parts of
the envelope.

14-51. In addition to the order n of a curve there are other
numbers which characterise it. It must always be borne in mind
that we have to deal with not merely a curve but three one-
dimensional systems, of points, lines and planes. The order is the
number of points which the system of points has in common
with an arbitrary plane field of points. Reciprocally, the class m
is the number of planes which the system of planes has in com-
mon with an arbitrary bundle of planes, i.e. the number of
osculating planes of the curve, or planes of the developable,
which pass through an arbitrary point. This is clearly equal to

Xiv] CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES 383

(generating lines). From the last point of view a developable has
the character of a ruled surface, the characteristic distinction
being that the tangent-planes of a ruled surface form a two-
dimensional system so that at each point of a generating line
there is a different tangent-plane, while in the case of a developable
the tangent-planes at all points of a given generator are the same
and they form only a one-dimensional series.

Fig. 45. A developable, with its edge of regression and generators

14-41. Starting with the developable as a one-dimensional
series of planes depending on a single parameter, we obtain the
generating lines as the limiting positions of the lines of inter-
section of two planes which come into coincidence, and the locus
of the limiting positions of points which lie in three ultimately
coincident planes is the curve. The generating lines are tangents
of the curve, and the planes are its osculating planes. From this
point of view the curve is called the edge of regression of the
developable.

14-42. The term "developable" refers to a characteristic
property of the figure considered as a deformable surface or
material sheet. By a succession of small successive rotations
about the generating lines the surface can be laid flat or developed
on to a plane, without any stretching or tearing. A cone has this

286 CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES [chap.

property and is a developable, but its curve reduces to a single
point — the vertex. A plane curve, which is dual to a cone, has its
developable already flat — it is the plane of the curve.

14-43. Consider the section of a developable by a plane. The
plane cuts the curve of the developable in n points (n being the
order of the curve). It cuts each of the generating lines in a
point, and the locus of these points is the curve of section C.
Finally it cuts each of the planes of the developable in a line, and
these lines are tangents to C. At an arbitrary point on C there is
a unique plane of the developable and therefore a unique tangent
to C; but at a point P on the edge of regression there are two
coincident generators and the curve C has a double-point there;
further there are two coincident planes of the developable
passing through this generator, and the tangents to C at the
double-point are coincident. Hence P is a cusp on the curve of
section; that is, any plane in general cuts the developable in a
curve having a cusp on the edge of regression. The edge of re-
gression is thus a cuspidal edge. The developable considered as
a surface consists of two sheets which meet at the cuspidal edge.
The tangents to the curve are divided at the points of contact,
the two parts belonging to the two separate sheets. In a similar
way the assemblage of planes which pass through tangents of the
curve, and produce the curve as an envelope, have the develop-
able as a singularity or assemblage of double-planes. The en-
velope consists of two parts ; each plane is divided by the tangent-
line of the curve, and the two portions belong to the two parts of
the envelope.

14-51. In addition to the order » of a curve there are other
numbers which characterise it. It must always be borne in mind
that we have to deal with not merely a curve but three one-
dimensional systems, of points, lines and planes. The order is the
number of points which the system of points has in common
with an arbitrary plane field of points. Reciprocally, the class m
is the number of planes which the system of planes has in com-
mon with an arbitrary bundle of planes, i.e. the number of
osculating planes of the curve, or planes of the developable,
which pass through an arbitrary point. This is clearly equal to

xiv] CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES 287

the number of apparent inflexions of the curve, i.e. the number
of inflexions of an arbitrary plane projection of the curve, or the
number of inflexional or stationary tangent-planes of the pro-
jecting cone. Reciprocally, the order is equal to the number of
stationary points or cusps on an arbitrary plane section of the
developable, which agrees with what has been already observed.
The class is also equal to the class of an arbitrary plane section
of the developable. A third number is the order of the develop-
able, i.e. the order of the plane curve obtained by taking a section
of the system of planes by an arbitrary plane. This is called the
rank r. Reciprocally it is also the class of the cone which pro-
jects the curve from an arbitrary point, or the class of an arbitrary
projection of the curve.

14-52. For a plane algebraic curve the fundamental numbers :
order n, class m, number of double-points 8, cusps k, double-
tangents t, and inflexions i, are connected by Plucker's equations,
by means of which, any three of the numbers being given, the
other three can be determined. These are

m=n(n— 1) — 28 — 3K,
3« (» — 2) = 1 + 68 + 8k,

and two others obtained by interchanging the pairs n, m ; 8, t ;
k, 1. Now consider a space-curve of order n, rank r, class m, and
having h apparent double-points, H actual double-points, K
cusps, and J actual inflexions. Then for an arbitrary plane pro-
jection we have a plane curve for which

n'=n, m'=r, 8'^h+H, k'=K, i'=m+I.

Hence if n, h, H, K and / are given, the rank and class are de-
termined by the equations

r=n(n-i)-2(h+H)-3K,

m=3n(n-2)-6(h+H)-8K-I.

14-6. The space-cubic.

We shall consider now more particularly the curves of the
third order or cubics.

14-61. If O is any point on the curve, the lines joining O to
other points of the curve generate a quadric cone, since any plane

288 CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES [chap.

through O cuts the curve in two other points and therefore the
cone in two lines. A single infinity of quadric cones can therefore
be passed through a space-cubic, each having as vertex a point
of the curve.

Consider two such cones, vertices O x and 2 . OxO^ is a
generating line of each cone, and each cone contains the whole
curve. The intersection of the two cones then consists of the
cubic curve and the line O t % . If 3 is a third point on the curve
we obtain another quadric cone containing the whole curve. The
three cones have in pairs the lines O a 3 ,0^0^ O x 2 in common,
but these three lines have no common point, hence the cubic
curve is represented as the complete intersection of three quadric
cones.

14r62. A line cannot cut a space-cubic in more than two points,
for suppose A, B, C to be three collinear points on the curve,
and P any other point on the curve, then the plane PABC meets
the curve in more than three points. Hence there are no tri-
secants. All the bisecants which pass through a given point of the

Two bisecants cannot cut one another except at a point on the
curve, for if they did they would determine a plane meeting the
curve in more than three points.

14-631. Let AA', BB', CC be three bisecants, and a any plane
through AA'. a cuts the curve again in a single point P, and this
determines with BB' a unique plane j3 and with CC a unique
plane y. Hence we have three pencils of planes related in pairs
in ( i , i ) correspondence. Conversely, the curve can be generated
by the common point of a set of corresponding planes of three
homographic pencils of planes whose axes have no point in
common. As an example, let ABCD be the tetrahedron of re-
ference. Then the pencils with axes CD, AB and AD can be
represented by the equations

x — Xy, z = [x.w, y = vz.
The simplest (i, i) correspondence is represented by

\ = /j.= v—t.
Then x/y =y/z = z/w = t,

xrv] CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES 289

and therefore the coordinates of the common point of corre-
sponding planes are ^

In a similar way it may be shown that for the general case of any
three homographic pencils whose axes are not concurrent the
coordinates of the common point of three corresponding planes
are represented by polynomials of the third degree.
Now the equations

x=t 3 , y = t*, z=t, w=i
are freedom-equations of a space-cubic, for the plane

Ix + my + nz +pw = o
cuts the curve in the three points whose parameters are the roota
of the equation 7j „ „

The general space-cubic is therefore a rational curve.

14-632. The plane x = o or BCD meets the curve in three
coincident points at D and is the osculating plane at D(t = o).
Similarly the plane w=o or ABC is the osculating plane at
A(t = co). Any plane x=Xy through CD meets the curve in two
coincident points at D ; the line CD also meets the curve in two
coincident points at D and is therefore the tangent at D.
Similarly AB is the tangent at A.

14-64. xz=y* and yw=z* represent cones which contain the
curve and have their vertices at D and A respectively. The
equation xzv=yz represents a quadric, also containing the curve.
This is generated by the line of intersection of the two homo-
graphic pencils

x=ty, z=tw,

and is therefore a quadric containing the bisecants CD and AB
as generating lines. For all values of A, fj,, v the quadric

A (y* — zx) + ft. (yz — xw) + v (z 2 — yw) = o
contains the curve. Hence through a space-cubic there are oo a
given space-cubic is therefore equivalent to seven linear condi-
tions. An arbitrary quadric cuts a given cubic curve in 2 x 3 = 6
points ; if it contains seven points of the curve it will therefore^
contain the whole curve.

SAO I(j

29° CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES [chap.

14-641. When a conic and a cubic lie on the same quadric
they intersect in three points, the points in which the plane of
the conic meets the cubic curve. Hence, in particular, of two
intersecting generators one meets the cubic in two points and the
other in one point. It follows that each generator of one system
meets the cubic in two points and each generator of the other
system meets it in one point.

14-642. The bisecant generators of any quadric which con-
tains the curve therefore determine an involution on the curve,
since its points are thus made to correspond in pairs. Conversely
an involution on the curve determines a regulus and therefore a

Analytically, the line joining two points t, t' on the cubic is
given by

px =ut 3 + vt' 3 ,

py =ut i + vt' i ,

pz =ut +vt',

pw = u +v,

where u/v is a variable parameter. Substituting in the equation

A(y* — zx) + [i(yz — xw) + v(z* — yw) = o,

we obtain wo (t - t'f {Xtt' + fi(t+t') + v} = o.

u = o and v = o give just the two points of the curve ; the equation,
however, is identically satisfied if

Xtt' + fj,(t+t') + v=o.

When A, p., v are given, this determines an involution ; and when
the involution is given, A, p., v are determined, fixing the quadric.

14-643. If S and S' are two quadrics containing the curve
they have in common a generating line / which is a bisecant of
the curve. This is the line joining the pair of points common to
the two involutions which determine the quadrics.

A unique quadric can be drawn to contain the curve and have
two given (non-intersecting) bisecants as generators, for these
two bisecants determine an involution on the curve.

xiv] CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES 291

14-651. Through any point O, not on the curve, there passes one
and only one bisecant. Join O to any point R on the curve. If
OR is not a bisecant a plane through OR will cut the curve in two
other points P, P', and these pairs form an involution. The lines
PP', which all intersect OR, form one regulus of a quadric, and
the line of this regulus which passes through O is the bisecant
required. From this result it follows that a cubic curve possesses
one and only one apparent double-point. Every plane projection
is a cubic having a double-point and is therefore rational.

14-652. A space-cubic cannot have an actual double-point, for
if it had, then through this point and two other points on the
curve a plane could be drawn which would have four points in
common with the curve and would therefore contain the curve.
The curve would then be a plane cubic. Further, a space-cubic
cannot in general have an apparent cusp. A space-curve in fact
can only have an apparent cusp viewed from an arbitrary point
when it has an actual cusp ; it will have an apparent cusp when
the point of view lies on the developable.

The plane projection of the general cubic from an arbitrary
point is thus in general a nodal cubic, which is of class 4 and has
three inflexions. Hence the class of the space-cubic is also 3 and
its rank is 4. It is a self-dual figure.

14-66. A space-cubic can be made to pass through six arbitrary
points, no three of which are collinear and no four in one plane.
For the five points B, C, D, E, F determine a quadric cone with
vertex A, and the five points A, C, D, E, F a quadric cone with
vertex B. The intersection of these cones is the line AB together
with a definite space-cubic which passes through the six points.

14-671. On a given quadric surface U there are two systems
of cubic curves ; the one system has the A-generators as bisecants,
and the other the /i-system.

Consider two cubics C x and C 2 of the same system, and let V x
and V t be two quadrics which contain them; these cut U further
in two generators A x and \ of the same system, which are bisecants
of both curves. The three quadrics have eight points in common ;
these all lie on either Cj or A^ and on either C 2 or \. Now A x

19-3

29a CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES [chap.

and Aj are both bisecants of both Q and C 2 and do not intersect
one another ; this accounts for four of the eight points and the
remaining four must be common to C x and C 2 .

If Cj and C 2 belong to different systems on U, the quadrics V t
and V % cut U in generators A x and /^ of different systems.
A x cuts C 2 in one point, /* 2 cuts C x in one point, and A x cuts /j 2 m
one point. Thus just three of the eight points are accounted for
and the two curves have five points in common.

14-672. Through five arbitrary points on a given quadric there
pass two space-cubics which lie entirely in the surface. Let /, m
be the generators of the surface through E. Then a definite
quadric cone with vertex E is determined to contain the points
A,B,C,D and the generator /. The intersection of this cone with
the given quadric consists of the common generator /and a space-
cubic which passes through A,B,C,D and E. A second space-
cubic is determined by the cone with vertex E which has m as
generator. The former has / and all the generators of this system
as bisecants, the latter has m and all the generators of the other
system as bisecants. Besides these two there are no others, for
two cubics of the same system can have only four points in
common.

Ex. If a conic cuts a cubic curve in three points, show that there
is a unique quadric surface which contains them both.

14-681. The tangent at t is the limiting position of the chord
joining t and t' when t' -+t. The line-coordinates of the chord tf
are given by the matrix

t 3 t* t r
t' a t' 2 f i
and are therefore (cancelling the factor t—t')

[t 2 +tt' + t'\ t+t', i; -tt', tt'(t+t'), -tH'*\.
The coordinates of the tangent are therefore
[ 3 t% zt, i; -t\ zt\ -t*\.
These can also be obtained from the matrix

I" t 3 t 2 t. i~
[ 3* 2 zt i o

the second line being obtained by differentiating the first.

xiv] CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES 293

14-682. The osculating plane at t is that which meets the

curve in three coincident points at t , and its equation is therefore

x—3ty+2t i z—t 3 w=o.
The osculating plane at t = o is x = o, and at t = 00 is w = o. These
three osculating planes intersect at [o, t, 1, o]. The plane through
the three points t, o, 00 is y — zt, and this passes through the
common point of the three osculating planes. Hence the
osculating planes at any three points intersect on the plane con-
taining the three points.

14-683. The plane -n (lx+my+nz+pw=o) cuts the curve in
three points A lt A 2 , A 3 whose parameters t 1} t 2 , t a are the roots
of the equation

lt a +mt 2 +nt+p = o.

The osculating planes at these points are

x-3t i y + 2t i 2 z-t ( 3 w=o (i=i, 2, 3).
The coordinates of the point P common to these are

[3*1*2*3. 2*i*2> 2*i, 3]»
i.e. [-3P/A n l l > ~ m / l > 3]

or [3/), -n, m, -3/].

There is thus a correlation between the planes it and the points
P, forming a null system since each point lies on the corre-
sponding plane, and the self -corresponding lines of the system
form a linear complex. The self-corresponding lines, or lines of
the complex, are those which pass through any given point and
lie in the corresponding (polar) plane. Among these lines are the
tangents to the cubic curve, for the osculating plane a at a point
A contains the tangent a at A; any plane it which contains a cuts
the curve in A and two other points B, C, and the osculating
planes at A, B, C intersect on w at the point P on a which is the
pole of the plane w. Thus the tangent a lies in 77 and passes
through P.

Since the coordinates of the tangent at t are
/><n = 3* 2 . Po2=2t, p oa =i; p 23 = -t\ p 31 =2t 3 , p 12 = -t\
there is just one linear relation connecting them, viz.

^01 + 3/ > 23 = O-

This represents a linear complex which contains all the tangents,

294 CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES [chap.

and is the only linear complex in which they are contained. It is
therefore the linear complex determined above. This follows
also from the equations of the correlation or null system, viz.

pio=Xi, p€i=-x , ^2=3x3, />£,= -3X;,

i.e. Ooi= i> «23=3> while the other coefficients are zero.

The polar of any point on the curve, with regard to the linear
complex, is the osculating plane at that point, and in general the
polar of any point P is the plane through the points of contact of
the three osculating planes which pass through P.

14-69. Projectively, all space-cubics, like all conies, are
equivalent. Metrically, space-cubics are classified according to
their relation to the plane at infinity and the circle at infinity.
In general the plane at infinity cuts the curve in three distinct
points, and then the curve goes to infinity in three different
directions; the tangents at the three points at infinity are
asymptotes, and the osculating planes are asymptotic planes. The
asymptotes are all mutually skew. The asymptotic planes inter-
sect in a point on the plane at infinity, and therefore form a tri-
angular prism.

There are four types of curves :

(1) The cubical hyperbola. Three real and distinct points at
infinity; three finite asymptotes and asymptotic planes. The
cone containing the curve and having its vertex at one of the
points at infinity becomes a cylinder ; and as there are other real
points at infinity it is a hyperbolic cylinder. The curve is there-
fore the intersection of two hyperbolic cylinders which have a
common line at infinity, i.e. having one asymptotic plane of one
cylinder parallel to one of the other.

(2) The cubical ellipse. One real point at infinity and two con-
jugate imaginary points ; one real asymptote. The curve is the
intersection of an elliptic cylinder and a cone.

(3) The cubical hyperbolic parabola. Two coincident points at
infinity, and one single point; one finite asymptote. The curve
is the intersection of a hyperbolic and a parabolic cylinder which
have a common line at infinity, i.e. having one asymptotic plane
of the hyperbolic cylinder parallel to the axial plane of the para-
bolic cylinder.

xiv] CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES 295

(4) The cubical parabola. Three coincident points at infinity.
The plane at infinity is an osculating plane. The curve is the
intersection of a parabolic cylinder and a cone, the tangent-plane
to the cone along the common generator being parallel to the
axial plane of the cylinder.

Ex. 1. Show that the equations

x : y : z : w = t (t-i) : t (t+i) :« 2 -i :t (t 2 -i)

represent in cartesian coordinates a cubical hyperbola, and that the
equations of the hyperbolic cylinders which contain it are

— yzo+yz +zzo =0,

xw — zw + xz =0,

xzo — wy + zxy = o.

Ex. 2. Show that the intersection of the cone y 2 + z 2 — zx = o and
the elliptic cylinder y z + z 2 —yze = o is a cubical ellipse which can be
represented by the parametric equations

x:y:z:w = t (fi + i) : t 2 :t:t 2 +i.

Ex. 3. Show that the intersection of the parabolic cylinder
z 2 — wy = o with the hyperbolic cylinder zw + wx— xz=o is a cubical
hyperbolic parabola

x:y :z:to = t:t 2 (t — i):t(t — i):t — 1.

Ex. 4. Show that a cubical parabola can be represented by the
equations

x : y : z : w = 1? : t 2 : t : 1,

and that it is the intersection of the cone y 2 = zx with the parabolic
cylinder z 2 = wy.

14-7. Quartic curves.

A curve of order 4, or space-quartic, is met by an arbitrary
plane in four points, and by an arbitrary quadric surface in eight
points. Through nine arbitrary points on the curve a definite
quadric is determined which must contain the whole curve pro-
vided it does not degenerate. Hence at least one quadric S=o
can be determined to contain a given quartic curve. If a second
quadric S' = o can be drawn containing the curve, the curve is.
linear system S+\S' = o contains the curve.

396 CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES [chap.

We have to distinguish then two different species of space-
quartics :

First Species : those which are the intersection or base of a

Second Species : those through which only one quadric passes.

14-71. Space-quartics of the First Species.

A space-quartic of the First Species is the complete inter-
section of two quadrics which do not have a common generator;
as we have just seen, it lies also on every quadric of the linear
system determined by these two.

14-711. Every generator of a quadric S which contains the curve
cuts it in two points. Let I be any generating line of S. A plane
through I cuts S in another generator /' as well, and cuts any
other quadric S' of the linear system in a conic C. But C cuts /
and /' each in two points which, being common to S and S', lie
on the curve.

Conversely, if a quartic curve K on a quadric P cuts every
generator in two points it is a quartic of the First Species, i.e. a
second quadric can be drawn to contain the curve. Take eight
arbitrary points A 1 ,... i A i on K and let O be any other point.
These nine points determine a quadric O which cuts P in a
quartic curve K' of the First Species also passing through the
eight points A, since these are common to P and Q. We have to
prove that, with the given conditions, K' coincides with K.
With centre A t project K and K' on to an arbitrary plane a. The
projections are two plane cubics C, C", which, if they are distinct,
intersect in nine points; seven of these are the projections
J5g,...,5 8 of the common points A 2 ,...,A S . Further, the two
generators of P through^ are by hypothesis bisecants of K, and
they are also bisecants of K', since K' is a quartic curve of the
First Species ; hence the remaining two points of intersection of
the two plane cubics are the points, G and G', say, where these
two generators cut a. Now a plane cubic is in general uniquely
determined by nine points, and through eight given points a linear
system of oo cubics can be drawn. Any two cubics which pass
through the eight points intersect in a ninth point which is
common to all the cubics of the linear system ; this point is then

xiv] CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES 297

determined when the eight other points are given. Thus nine
points uniquely determine a cubic unless they are associated in
a particular way. But the nine points B 2 , . . . , B g , G, G' are not so
associated, since B 2 ,...,B S axe all independently variable, hence
the cubic through these is uniquely determined and therefore C
and C" coincide. As the projections of K and K' from any other
point A t must similarly coincide, these two quartics must them-
selves coincide.

14-712. A quartic curve of either species can be considered
as the partial intersection of a quadric with a cubic surface. The
complete intersection is a curve of order 6, and the residual is a
conic, two skew lines or a double-line of the cubic surface. If the
residual is a conic, any generator of the quadric meets this in just
one point, the point in which it meets the plane of the conic ; the
two other intersections of this generator with the cubic surface
must therefore be on the quartic curve. Thus every generator of
the quadric is a bisecant, and the quartic is of the First Species.

14-713. A quartic curve of the First Species, being the com-
plete intersection of two quadrics, has no trisecants, for if the
line / cut the curve in three points A, B, C, a plane through /
would cut the two quadrics in conies intersecting in three col-
linear points A, B, C, which is impossible. Hence, viewed from
any point on the curve, it has no apparent double-points. The
cubic curve which is the plane projection from a point on the
curve is therefore not unicursal but with deficiency 1. It follows
that the quartic curve is not rational, i.e. its coordinates cannot
be expressed rationally and algebraically in terms of a parameter.

14-714. Assuming that the two quadrics do not touch, they
have a common self-polar tetrahedron. By a suitable choice of
unit-point the equations can be expressed in the forms

S=x 2 +y 2 -z*-w* = o, S'sax i + by 2 + cz 2 -w 2 = o.
The coordinates of a point on S can be expressed in terms of
parameters t , u

px=t+u, py=i — tu, pz=i + tu, pw=t—u.
Substituting in the equation of the other quadric we have an*
equation which is of the second degree in both t and w. It is not

298 CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES [chap.

possible to eliminate one of the parameters and express *, y, z, to
rationally and algebraically in terms of one of them.

The linear system XS+ S' = o contains four cones. Suppose,
by another choice of unit-point, the equations of two of these are

x 2 +y 2 — W 2 = 0, k 2 x 2 + z 2 — w 2 = o.
The parametric equations of the former can be written

px=sin8, py=cos0, pw=i,
and substituting in the second we have
z 2 =i-k 2 sm 2 6.
Write 0=am(a, k) (an elliptic function), then

px=sa.u, py — en u, pz=dau, pw=i.
Thus the coordinates of a point on the quartic are expressed
parametrically in terms of elliptic functions. On this account
this type of quartic curve is called elliptic. It can be shown
generally that a curve is elliptic when its genus = i. For higher
genera other functions (hyperelliptic) are required for a para-
metric representation.

14-715. If the quadrics touch, the curve of intersection has a
double-point there. This is a particular case of the general
theorem for any two surfaces. At an ordinary point of inter-
section P the tangent-planes are distinct and determine one
definite tangent to the curve of intersection, and any plane
through this line cuts the surfaces in curves which touch at P.
But when the surfaces touch at P every plane through this point
cuts the surface in curves which touch at P.

14-7151 . To express most simply the equations of two
quadrics which touch, take the point of contact O = [o, o, o, i]
and the common tangent-plane # = 0. Then the equations of the

ax 2 + by* + cz 2 + zfyz + zgzx + zhxy + zzw = o.
Since the quadrics do not have a common generating line the
pairs of generating lines in the common tangent-plane are distinct
and there is a unique pair of lines which are harmonic conjugates
with regard to each pair. Choosing these as axes of x and y,
h=o = h'. We can then choose the vertex A = [x, o, o, o] of the
tetrahedron of reference so that its polar-planes with respect to

xiv] CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES 299

the two quadrics coincide, and as this plane must pass through
OB we can choose it as the plane #=0. Then g=o=g'.
5s[o, 1, o, o] can similarly be chosen so that its polar-plane
with respect to each is y = o. Then/= o =/'. The line OC is then
determined as the intersection of these planes, and C may be
chosen arbitrarily, as also the scales on the three axes. The
equations of the two quadrics can thus be written
U= ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 + zzw = o,
U' = a'x 2 + b'y 2 + c'z 2 + 2zw = o.
In the linear system U—XU' = o there are three cones, the values
of the parameter being X=a/a', bjb' and 1 (twice). A=i gives

(a-a')x 2 +(b-b')y 2 +(c-c')z 2 =o.
Adjusting the scales on the three axes we may reduce this
equation to x 2 +y 2 -z 2 =o.

Freedom-equations for this are px — zt, py = t 2 —i, pz = t 2 +i.
Substituting in U we get for w a biquadratic in t divided by
z(t 2 + 1). Hence putting p = \p'l{t 2 + 1) we have

p'*=4*(* 2 +i), p'y = z{t i -i), p'z=z(t 2 +i) 2
and p'w = a quartic polynomial in t.

The nodal quartic curve is therefore rational.

14-716. The common tangent-plane z = o cuts the cone with
vertex O in the two lines (a — a') x 2 + (b- b')y 2 = o, which are the
tangents to the quartic curve at the double-point. They may be
real or imaginary. If they are coincident the two quadrics have
stationary contact, and the quartic curve has a cusp. This will be
the case if b = b'. We cannot, however, now take/=/', for then
the cone with vertex O would break up into two planes and the
curve of intersection would reduce to two conies. Keeping
g=g' = o, the equations of two quadrics of the system are
U= ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 + zfyz + zzw = o,
V = a'x 2 + by 2 + c'z 2 + zj'yz + zzw = o,
and the cone with vertex O is

(a - a') x 2 + (c-c')z 2 +z (f-f')yz = o.
With scales adjusted this can be simplified to
x 2 +z 2 -zyz=o.

300 CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES [chap.

Freedom-equations of this are px=zt, py=t*+i, pz—z, and
substituting in U we obtain again for w a quartic polynomial
in t of the form pw=pt i +qt 2 +r.

14-717. Through a quartic curve of the first species there pass
a linear system of quadrics, of which the curve forms the base.
All the generating lines of these quadrics are bisecants, or chords
of the curve, and conversely every bisecant of the curve is a
generating line of a quadric of the system. All the bisecants form
a congruence. Since there is just one quadric of the system
through a given point, and through this point there are two
generators of the quadric, there are two bisecants through any
arbitrary point which does not lie on the curve. Also since there
are three quadrics which touch a given plane, and each is met by
the plane in two generators, there are six bisecants in any plane.
The congruence of bisecants is therefore of order 2 and class 6.
This agrees with the general result in 14*21.

If the curve is projected from an arbitrary point, the projecting
lines form a quartic cone and the projection is a plane quartic
curve with just two double-points. This is not a rational curve,
since a rational plane quartic has three double-points. But when
the space-quartic has itself a double-point, its projection has
three double-points and is rational.

From the equations in 14*52 we find the rank and class of the
quartic curves of the First Species to be as follows :

n r m

The general elliptic quartic curve 4 8 12

Nodal quartic ... ... ... 4 6 6

Cuspidal quartic... ... ... 4 5 4

Ex. 1 . Show that the general quartic curve of the first species is
uniquely determined by eight arbitrary points, of which no three are
collinear, and no five lie in one plane.

Ex. 2. Show that through eight associated points on a quadric
surface there pass a linear system of quartic curves, one through each
point on the surface, and two touching each generating line.

Ex. 3. Show that all chords of a given quartic which cut a given
chord are generators of one quadric.

xiv] CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES 301

14-718. The figure which is dual to the quartic curve of inter-
section of two quadrics is the assemblage of common tangent-
planes of two quadrics. This is a developable, an important
example of which being the focal developable determined by a
given quadric and the circle at infinity. It is in general of class 4,
order 12, and rank 8. To a bisecant of the quartic curve corre-
sponds a line lying in two common tangent-planes, a " line-in-
two-planes" or axis. The axes form a congruence of order 6
and class 2; in each plane there are two axes and through
any point there are six axes, and these axes are all generators
of quadrics of the same linear tangential system. In the case
of the focal developable the axes are the focal axes (cf. 12*21
and i2-8i).

14-72. Space-quarries of the Second Species.

A space-quartic of the Second Species is the partial inter-
section of a quadric surface with a cubic surface when the
residual consists either of two skew lines or of a line which counts
double on the cubic surface.

14-721. Let U be a quadric surface and K a quartic curve of
this species lying on it and therefore such that there is no other
quadric but U which contains the curve. If the curve is pro-
jected from a point O on itself, projecting lines form a cubic cone
and the plane projection is a cubic curve. In the case of a quartic
of the first species without double-point this cubic curve has no
double-point, and the cubic cone has no double-line ; the quadric
and the cone have two intersecting generators (a degenerate
conic) in common. If the quartic curve (still of first species) has
a double-point or a cusp, the cone has a double-line or a cuspidal
edge passing through O, but this is not a generating line of the
generators common. If, however, the cubic cone has a double-
line and this coincides with a generator of the quadric, the pro-
jection from O of the quartic curve of intersection is a rational
cubic, and the quartic curve is rational. This is also the case for
the intersection of a quadric surface with any cubic surface
which has a double-line coinciding with a generator of the

303 CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES [chap.

14-722. Again, consider a quadric and a cubic surface with
two non-intersecting lines A and A' in common, belonging there-
fore to the same A-set of generators of the quadric. Every other
generator of the quadric cuts the cubic surface in three points,
and in the case of the A-generators these three points all belong
to the quartic curve. But a /i-generator cuts both A and A', and
therefore cuts the quartic curve in just one point. On a given
quadric surface there are therefore two distinct systems of quartic
curves of the second species : one cutting each of the A-generators
in three points and each of the /^-generators in one point, the
other cutting the //.-generators in three points and the A-generators
in one point.

14-723. A quartic curve of the second species has thus a
single infinity of trisecants, which are the generators of one
system of the quadric surface which contains the curve. There
can be no trisecants which are not generators of this quadric
since a line cannot cut a quadric in three points. Through each
point on the curve passes one trisecant, and therefore the pro-
jection of the curve from any point on itself is a cubic having one
double-point and therefore is rational.

A quartic curve of the second species can have no actual
double-point, for if it had, the projection from an arbitrary point
on the curve would be a cubic with two double-points and the
curve would degenerate. Further, as the curve is rational, its
projection from an arbitrary point is a plane quartic with three
double-points. Hence through an arbitrary point there pass three
bisecants.

14-724. Parametric equations of the general quartic curve of
the second species can always be expressed by first forming
parametric equations of the quadric which contains the curve in
terms of two parameters A and /i such that the generators are
expressed by A = const, and fi = const., and then connecting A, p
by a (3, 1) relation of the form

H («o A 3 + 3ai X* + ia 2 A + a a ) + (b A 3 + 3^ A 2 + 3 6 2 A + b a ) = o.

14-725. Three essentially different types are found according
to the existence of stationary or inflexional tangents, i.e. tangents
which meet the curve in three coincident points. The cubic curve

xiv] CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES 303

and the quartics of the first species, since they have no trisecants,
can have no inflexional tangents. The conditions that the cubic
equation in A (14-724) should have three equal roots are

[ia 1 + b 1 _ fj,a i + b i _ fj,a 3 +b 3

[iciQ + bo n^ + bx /xa 2 +6 2
These give two quadratics in /a, and eliminating ft we find a rela-
tion connecting the coefficients. In general therefore (First
Type) there are no stationary tangents. If the condition is
satisfied there is (Second Type) one stationary tangent corre-
sponding to the common root of the two quadratics in /j,. If
further these two quadratics have both their roots in common
we have (Third Type) two stationary tangents.

The class and rank of the three types of quartics of the Second
Species are therefore as follows :

First Type (no inflexions) ... 4 6 6

Second Type (one inflexion) ... 4 6 5
Third Type (two inflexions) ... 4 6 4

14-8. Number of intersections of two curves lying on a

Let C x denote a A-generator, C-l n /^-generator, C 2 a conic, C 8
a cubic which cuts a A-generator in one point and a fi-generator
in two points, C 3 ' a cubic of the other system, C 4 a quartic of the
first species, K^ a quartic of the second species which cuts a
A-generator in one point and a /x-generator in three points, K t '
a quartic of the other system. Then the following table shows
the number of intersections of each pair* :

c\

c/

c 2

c s

C 3 C 4

K 4

K,'

<k

I

I

I

2 2

1

3

CY

I

2

1 2

3

1

c %

2

3

3 4

4

4

c 3

4

5 6

5

7

c 3 '

4 6

7

5

c 4

8

8

8

K t

6

10

* The general result, from another point of view,

is given

in 14-95, Ex. 6

304 CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES [chap.

Some of these results have been already proved (see 14*641,
14-671, 14-711, 14-722). The others can be left as an exercise to
the reader. The method can be illustrated in one case; for
example, to prove that {KiK^} = 10. Let U be the given quadric,
Q and Q' cubic surfaces containing K t and K± respectively.Then
the intersection of U and Q consists of K A and two generators
C/ and K-l ; the intersection of U and Q' consists of K t ' and two
generators C x and K x . The three surfaces U, Q, Q' have
2x3x3 = 18 points in common, and we can write symbolically

{UQQ'} = 18 = {KtKn + {KtCJ+iKtKJ + {C/iQ'}

+ {Ci'Q} + {CSKJ + {K.'K,'} + {K.'C,} + {KJK&
But each of the last eight terms = 1, hence {K X KJ} = 10.

14-9. As an example of a quartic curve of the second species
we shall consider the line of striction of a quadric surface. Two
generators of the same system have a unique common per-
pendicular, and in the limiting case, when the generators come
to coincide, the foot of the common perpendicular is a unique
point on the generator. The locus of this point is called the line
of striction for this system of generators.

Consider the hyperboloid

# 2 /a 2 + y/6 2 - « 2 /c 2 = ra 2 .

Its freedom-equations are

px/a=i—Xfi, py/b—X + fi, pz/c=i+X[j,, pw = \ — n,

and the generating lines correspond to A = const, and /*= const.
The equations of the generator A = const, are

xja — zjc = A (w —yjb),

A (x/a + zjc) = w +y/b,

and its direction-cosines are proportional to

a(i-A 2 ), 2*A, c(i+A 2 ).

The direction-cosines of the line joining the points (A, fi) and
(A + 8A, /* + §/*) are proportional to

a{(i- /i 2 )§A-(i-A 2 )8 M },

2b(fiSX—X8fi),

e{(i + ,*--)8A-(i+A*)8/*}.

xiv] CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES 305

The condition that this line should be perpendicular to the
generator A is

a 2 (i-A 2 ){(i - M 2 )BA-(i -A^SpHtPAOtft-ASp)

+ <: 2 (i+A 2 ){(i + / a 2 )oA-(i+A 2 )S / x} = o.

Expressing also the condition that it should be perpendicular to
the generator A+SA, and subtracting, we obtain

-a 2 A{(i -p*)8X-(i -\*)SiJ.} + 2P(ii8\-\Sfi)

+ c 2 A{(i + fi 2 )SA-(n-A 2 )o>} = o.

Eliminating SA and S/z. between the last two equations we obtain,
after cancelling the factor A— /a,

«- 2 (i -A a )(i -A,z) + 2&- 2 A(A+ M ) + c- 2 (i +A 2 )(i +A/*)=o,
or juA(A 2 +^)+^A 2 +i = o,

where A = (zb~ 2 + c~ 2 - ar 2 )/(« -2 + c~ 2 ).

Thus we have A, p connected by a (3, 1) relation, and the locus
is a quartic curve of the second species which cuts every
A-generator in one point and every /i-generator in three points.
Substituting for fi in terms of A in the freedom-equations of the
quadric we obtain the parametric equations of the curve

px/a=(i+A)\(\*+i), P y/b=\*-i,

pz/c = (i-A)\(\ i -i), pzo=M+-zA\ 2 +i.

The curve passes through the vertices of the principal sections of
the quadric. In certain cases the line of striction degenerates.

Ex. 1. Show that for the paraboloid x 2 ja 2 —y 2 /b 2 =zw the lines
of striction are the parabolas in which the surface is cut by the two
planes b 3 x± cPy = o.

Ex. 2. Show that for the paraboloid x 2 —y 2 =zw the lines of
striction are the two generating lines in which the surface is cut by
the plane z=o and the two lines at infinity w=o, x 2 =y 2 .

Ex. 3. Show that for a hyperboloid of revolution the two lines of
striction coincide with the principal section (a circle).

Ex. 4. Show that the curve of striction of the quadric

ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 = i

has in general no inflexion, but has two inflexions if

(za — b—c) (zb—c—a)(zc — a — b)=o.

SAG 20

306 CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES [chap.

14 95. EXAMPLES.

i. Show that parametric equations of the cubic curve which
passes through the vertices of the tetrahedron of reference and
the points [i, i, i, i] and [a, b, c, d] are

x:y:z: w=a/(t-a) : bj{t-b) : cj(t-c) : dj{t-d).

2. Find the equations of the six cones which pass through the
six points [i, o, o, o], [o, i, o, o], [o, o, i, o], [o, o, o, i]
[i, i, i, i], [a, b, c, d] and have one of these points as vertex; and
show that they have one cubic curve in common.

3. Prove that a quadric surface can be drawn through a cubic
curve in space to contain two assigned chords of the curve.

Show that if A, B, C, A', B', C be six assigned points of the
cubic, the three quadrics containing the curve and, respectively?,
the three pairs of: chords AA', BC ; BB', CA' ; CC'„AB' y hzve
all a common generator. (Math. Trip. II, 1915.)

4. Show that the problem of finding a polygon of n sides
whose corners lie on a twisted cubic curve and whose sides
belong to a linear complex is poristic. (Math. Trip. II, 1914.)

5. Prove that any four points on a twisted cubic curve and the
osculating planes at the points, are the vertices and faces of two
tetrahedra each of which is inscribed, in the other.

A variable tetrahedron has its vertices on, a cubic. The cubic
is given by equations xjt 3 =yjt 2 =z/t=w, and the parameters of
the vertices u+\v=-o, where u and v are quartics in t, and A is
variable. Show that the faces of the tetrahedron are osculating
planes of another cubic curve and that the tetrahedron is self-
polar with respect to a fixed quadric. (Math. Trip. II, 1914.)

6*. If the quadric xw — yz = o is represented by the para-
metric: equations as ~,y : z 1 w= X/j. : X : fi : t, show that an alge-
braic equation <f> (A, fi) = o in A, /x, of degree p in A and q w. p.
(j>+q=n) represents a curve, to be denoted by (p, q), lying on
the quadric and having the following properties :

(i) It is met by an arbitrary plane in n points, and is therefore
of order n.

• See Cayley, Coll. Math. Papers, vol. v, pp. 70-3.

xiv] CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES 307

(ii) It meets every A-generator in q points and every ^-gener-
ator in p points.

(iii) For a given value of n there are, according as n is even or
odd, \n or \{n— 1) essentially different species of curves without
singularities.

(iv) If p—q show, by substituting X^yjw, [a—z/w in the
equation <f>(X, /x) = o, that the curve is the complete intersection
of the quadric with a surface of order p.

(v) If p>q show that we can derive from the equation

zv"<f>(X,fi)f(fi, i) = o,

where /(/*, 1) is any polynomial in /x : 1 of degree p — q, by
substituting for A, fi in terms of the coordinates, an equation of
the form Pf(x, y) + Qf(z, w) = o, where P and Q are homo-
geneous polynomials in x, y, z, w of degree q; and deduce that
the curve (/>, q) is the partial intersection of the quadric and a
surface of order/), the remaining intersection consisting oip — q
/^-generators which may be arbitrarily selected.

(vi) Show that the equation </>(A, /*) = o represents in the
(A, /x)-plane a curve passing p times through the point [o, 1] and
q times through the point [1, o]. Deduce that two curves (p, q)
and (/>', q') on the quadric intersect one another in pq' +p'q
points.

(vii) From the number of constants in the equation

<£(A, m) = °

show that a curve (p, q) on a quadric is determined by pq+p+q

(viii) If the quadric has no real generating lines show that the
only real curves which lie upon it are curves of even order, of the
type (p, p).

7. Show that the coordinates of any point on the developable,
which is the envelope of the polar-planes of a fixed point
[x' t y', z'] with respect to quadrics confocal with

x i la+y 2 jb+z a jc=i,

308 CURVES AND DEVELOPABLES [chap, xiv

may be written in the form

XX ~ (a-b)(a-c) ' yy ~ (b-a){b-c) ' ZZ ~ ( c -a)(c-b) '
where A, /x are parameters. Show that the equation A = const,
defines a generator, and that the equation /x = const, defines a
parabola, which together with a generator makes up the com-
plete intersection of the surface by the polar-plane with respect
to the confocal of parameter p. (Trinity, 1914.)

8. Show that the constant-number of a conic in space is 8 ; of
a space-cubic 12; of a quartic curve of the first species 16.

CHAPTER XV

INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS

15- 1. We have seen that a single quadric has only one pro-
jective invariant, the discriminant A, whose vanishing is the
condition that the quadric should be specialised as a cone. We
now consider a system determined by two quadrics

S=1Sa ra x r x,

and S' = ISa„'x r x t .

In the linear system

\S+S'=o

we have seen that there are in general four cones, corresponding
to the roots of the equation

Afloo+Ooo' ...Afloa+Ooa' =0.

Aom + 'ho • • • ^33 + ^33'
This is a quartic equation in A, and we shall write it in the form

A (A) == AA 4 + 0A 3 + <DA 2 + 0'A + A' = o.
A and A' are the discriminants of 5 and 5', of the fourth degree
in the respective coefficients ; 0, <E>, 0' are functions of the co-
efficients of both 5 and S', of degrees 3 and 1, 2 and 2, 1 and 3
respectively.

If the quadrics are referred to any other tetrahedron of re-
ference, i.e. if their equations are subjected to a linear trans-
formation, the values of A for which AS+»S" = o represents a
cone will remain the same, provided the coefficients of S and S'
are not multiplied separately by different factors. The roots of
the quartic equation are therefore unaltered, and therefore the
ratios of the coefficients are invariants.

But if M is the modulus of the transformation it has been
shown that the discriminant A is transformed into A x , where

A 1= M 2 A,
and since <S" has been subjected to the same transformation

310 INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS [chap.

A and A' are the projective invariants of S and S' separately;
0, O, 0' are simultaneous invariants of the two quadrics.

IS- 11. The vanishing of one of these simultaneous invari-
ants represents some projective relationship between the two
quadrics. By a particular choice of the frame of reference the
forms of these invariants may be simplified and their meanings
arrived at.

Choose a tetrahedron of reference self-polar with respect to
S', and a suitable unit-point. Then we can write

S's=x*+y i + z i + w 2 = o,

S=ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 + dw* + zfyz + zgzx + zhxy

+ zpxw + zqyw + zrzw = o.
The invariants then become

@'=a+b+c+d,

d> = (be -p) + (ca -g 2 ) + (ab - h 2 ) + (ad-p 2 )

+ (bd-q*) + (cd-r*),
=A + B + C+D,

where A is the cofactor of a in the determinant A.

15*2. If S is circumscribed about the tetrahedron of reference,
a, b, c, d, all vanish, and therefore 0' = o ; that is, if there is a
tetrahedron inscribed in the quadric S and self-polar with respect
to the quadric S', the projective invariant 0' = o.

This result is somewhat remarkable, for we might expect it
to be possible always to find a tetrahedron self-polar with respect
to one quadric and inscribed in another, without any relation
whatever between the two quadrics. For the number of con-
ditions required in order that a given tetrahedron should be self-
polar with respect to a given quadric is 6, each pair of vertices
being conjugate ; and the number of conditions required in order
that a given tetrahedron should be inscribed in a given quadric
is 4. But a tetrahedron can in general be constructed to satisfy
twelve conditions since each vertex has three degrees of freedom.
What we should expect then is that there should be a double
infinity of tetrahedra satisfying the given conditions. Actually no
tetrahedron at all exists unless the two quadrics are related in a

xv] INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF Q.U.ADRICS 3"
particular way. We shall show now, conversely, that if this con-
dition, ©' = 0, is satisfied there is a triple infinity of such tetra-
hedra. A problem of this sort is said to beporistic.

15-21. Assuming the condition 0' = o, choose the tetrahedron
of reference with one vertex A onS. The polar-plane of A with
respect to S' cuts 5 in a conic ; choose the second vertex B on
this conic. The polar-line of AB with respect to S' cuts S in two
points; choose one of these as the third vertex C. Then choose
D as the fourth vertex of the self-polar tetrahedron with respect
to S'. Three of its vertices A, B, C lie on S, and therefore
a=o, b=o, c=o; and since 0' = o it follows that d=o as well,
hence D also lies on S.

Hence 0' = o is the necessary and sufficient condition that there
should be one tetrahedron (and therefore a triple infinity of tetra-
hedrd) inscribed in S and self-polar with respect to S '.

IF capital letters denote the cofactors of the corresponding
small letters in the determinant A', the tangential equation of S'
in the general case is

E's^'£«+ ... +2F'- n i+ ... +2P'£co+ ... =0,
and Q'saA' + ... +zfF'+ ,.. +2pF+ ...,

i.e. 0' is linear in the coefficients of S and 2'. Following Baker,
we say that the quadric locus S is outpolar to the quadric
envelope S', S being circumscribed to a tetrahedron whidh is
self-polar with respect to S'.

15-211. Again, if we choose a tetrahedron of reference self-
polar with respect to S, so that/, g, h, p, q, r all vanish, 0' will
vanish if A', B', C, D' all vanish, i.e. if the tetrahedron is
envelope S' is inpolar* to the quadric locus S, 2' being inscribed
in a tetrahedron which is self-polar with respect to S. Hence
0'=o is also the necessary and sufficient condition that there should
be one tetrahedron (and therefore a triple infinity of tetrahedra)
circumscribed to 2' and self-polar with respect to S.

Since 0' is linear in the coefficients of 5 and 2' it follows that
if two quadrics 5j and S z are both outpolar to 2' all quadrics of
the linear system Sj + ASg are outpolar to 2'.

• The term apolar is also used for both outpolar and inpolar.

312 INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS [chap.

15-212. Ex. i. The vertices of two self-polar tetrahedra of the same

We may take one of the tetrahedra as frame of reference and the

S = x 2 +y 2 +z 2 + w 2 = o.

Let 5" = a'x 2 + b'y 2 + c'z 2 + d'to 2 + . . . be any quadric passing through
the vertices of the second tetrahedron and through three vertices
A, B, C of the first. Then since the second tetrahedron is self-polar
with respect to S and is inscribed in S', S' is outpolar to S and there-

a' + b' + c'+d'=o.

But a' = o, b' = o, and c' = o, therefore d' = o and <S" passes also through
the fourth vertex D. Hence every quadric which passes through
seven of the vertices passes also through the eighth.

Ex. z. Conversely, if eight associated points are divided in any way
into two sets, the two sets of four points form self-polar tetrahedra with

Choose the four points A, B, C, D as frame of reference. Any
quadric for which ABCD is self-polar is represented by

S = ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 + dw 2 = o .

The ratios of the coefficients will be determined by the three con-
ditions that A', B', C" are mutually conjugate. Let D x be the pole of
the plane A'B'C with respect to S when thus determined. Then
ABCD and A'B'C'D X are both self-polar with respect to S, hence
they form a set of eight associated points. But since ABCDA'B'C'D'
also form such a set and since the eighth point is uniquely determined
by the other seven, D' coincides with D ± .

15-22. To determine the meaning of the vanishing of O we
note that 4> = o if all the six terms (bc-f 2 ), ..., (ad-p 2 ), ...
vanish. But bc—f 2 = o is the condition that the edge y = o = z
of the tetrahedron of reference should touch S, and similarly
for the other conditions. Hence <J> = o when there is a tetra-
hedron self-polar with respect to S' and having all its edges
touching S

To construct a tetrahedron, self-polar with respect to one
twelve conditions, just the right number to determine a tetra-
hedron in general, but the above result shows that <J> = o is a
necessary condition. Hence no tetrahedron exists satisfying the

xv] INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS 313
given conditions unless the quadrics are suitably related, and
then there will be a single infinity. As O is symmetrical as re-
gards the coefficients of S and S' it follows that if $= o there will be an infinity of tetrahedra self-polar with respect to S and having all their edges touching S'. 15-31. The invariant <& involves the coefficients of the line- equations of the two quadrics. The point-equation of a quadric being S=lSa r ,x T x s = o, the line-equation is Y = SSSS (a i} a kl - a ik a n )pup ik . Changing the notation so that S=sax 2 + ... +2fyz+ ... +2pxzo+ ... =o, ; and writing the line-coordinates />23 = «1> / ) 31 = «2» Pii = U »> Poi = Vl> P02=V2> P<Xi = ' V 3> we find that the line-equation is a homogeneous quadratic in the six variables %, ..., v^ viz. YscuMjH ... +C u v^+ ... +k 11 u 1 v 1 + ... +K n v 1 u 1 + ... + 2^281/2^8+ ...+ 2023^2 1> 8 + ... + 2k i3 U^V i + ... + 2K23V2U3+ ... =0, where c 11 = bc-f\ C n = ad-p 2 , hi = K 11 =gq-hr, c&=gh-af, C i3 =fd-qr, k a =gr-cp, K^bp-hq, the other expressions being written down by the simultaneous permutations (123), (dbc), (fgh), (pqr); corresponding small and capital letters represent complementary minors of the de- terminant A. Then the invariant$ of two quadrics is the bilinear ex-
pression

® = C U C U '+ ... + & 11 £ u ' + ... +2C i! gC S!s '+ ... + 2k^K^'+...

+ C11 Cji+ ... +«u /£ji+ ••• +2C23 C23+ •••

~r 2/?23 -K-Ei * • • • •

314 INVARIANTS OF A RAIR OF QUADRICS
15-32. Invariants for the reciprocal system.

If we take the linear tangential system of quadrics
A2 + E'=o,
where H=A^+ ... +2Ftf+ ... +zP&+ ... =o,
we obtain the discriminant

V(A)sA s A 4 +A 2 0'A 3 +AA'<I>A a +A' 2 0A+A' 3 ;
for the determinant

[chap.

V= J

1 H G P

=A» f

/

J B F Q

C

} F C R

f

> Q R D

as is found
Also

A

ay muhiplyi

B F Q -
F C R

rig together \

= a h g p
hbfq

'.A.

. I o o o
HBFQ

Q R D

g f * r

G F C R

p q r d

P Q R D

■■ a o o o
h A o o
g o A o
p o o A

=A 3 a,

and

A(AB-H*) =

a h g p .
hbfq

A H G P
HBFQ

g f c r

O O I o

p q r d
A,o gp
O Afq
o o c r

O O I

=A 2 (cd-r 2 ).

o o r d

Hence

B F Q

= A 2 a,

A H | = A

c r

F C R

H B 1

r d

Q R D

etc.

xv] INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS 31S

If

GH-jlFmy^FD-QR^T^ GR-CPsk^, BP-HQ^K*,

then AA'a> = y u IY + etc.

15-33. Absolute invariants.

The five invariants A, 0, $, 0', A' are relative. To form an absolute invariant it is necessary to take a function of these which is not only of zero dimensions in the five invariants, i.e. involves only their ratios, but is also of zero dimensions in the coefficients of both quadrics. Such expressions, of the form A a 0' 8 <D>, can be formed with any three of the five invariants. To determine a, jS, y we express that the dimensions in the coefficients of the two quadrics are each zero. Hence, for this example, we have 4a + 3J3+2y = o and j3 + 2y = o, which give also <x+jS + y = o. Hence a : j8 : y = — 1:2: — 1. Ten absolute invariants such as this can be obtained, but only three of these are independent. If we write <b» 0a 0' 2 P=—— 0=— O' — —- 00" ^~A<1>' *~A'0' we can eliminate any two of the quantities A, 0, <I>, 0', A' be- tween these equations; thus any invariant equation involving the five invariants can be expressed in terms of P, Q, Q'. It is proved further in text-books on invariant-theory* that the five invariants form a complete system in the sense that any polynomial simultaneous invariant of the two quadrics can be expressed in terms of these. 15-34. A general procedure in finding an invariant equation corresponding to a projective relationship between two quadrics is as follows. First choose a convenient frame of reference so as to simplify the equations of the quadrics. Express the five in- variants and form P, Q, Q', or some other set of independent absolute invariants. If a single invariant equation exists, P, Q, Q' can be expressed in terms of two variable parameters alone, and by eliminating these we get an equation connecting the three, * See, for example, Turnbull, The theory of determinants, matrices, and invariants (London: Blackie, 1928), p. 304. 316 INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS [chap. which can then be transformed to a homogeneous equation in the five invariants. Ex. i. Condition that there should be a tetrahedron inscribed in one quadric »S and having two pairs of opposite edges as generators of another quadric S' . Taking the tetrahedron as frame of reference we have S = zfyz + 2gzx + zhxy + zpxw + zqyw + zrzw = o, S' = zf'yz + zp'xw = o. We find A'=/' 2 / 2 , & = 2fp'(f'p+fp'), O = UP' +f'P? + 2fp' {fp -gq -hr), ®= 2 Up'+fp)UP-gq-hr). Write />'=«, fP'+f'p = P, fp-gq-hr=y, then A'=a 2 , 0' = 2a0, <^=^ + 2a.y, = 2$/.

Without using the absolute invariants we see that as these four
expressions are homogeneous in a, /?, y we can eliminate the latter
and obtain an equation homogeneous in A', 0', (S>, 0. The result is

4A'0'<D=0' 3 + 8A' 2 0.

Ex. 2. Condition that there should be a tetrahedron whose six

We have here the exact number of conditions required to deter-
mine a tetrahedron, but we shall find that the problem is again
poristic.

Taking the tetrahedron as frame of reference we find that the

S=ax 2 + ...+2fyz + ...+2pxzv + ...=o

satisfy the six equations

be —f 2 = o,ad —p 2 = o, etc.

Writing a=a 2 , b = fP, c=y 2 , d=B 2 , we have/= ±/?y, etc. There are
sixty-four possible combinations of sign, but it can be verified that
the only ones which do not make A vanish are that in which the signs
are all negative and those obtained from this by changing the signs of
a, /8, y, or 8. It is therefore quite general to take the signs all negative.
Choose the other quadric S' similarly with a', /?', y, S' instead of
a, j8, y, 8. Then we find

A = - i6a 2 ,8 V8 2 , A' = - i6a' 2 i3' 2 / 2 8' 2 ,

= - 4S (a' 2 jS VS 2 + 2)3'/ • a 2 ft/S 2 ),

0'= -4S (a 2 j 8' 2 / 2 8' 2 + 2^y.a' 2 )3'/8' 2 ) >

<!>=-8Z<x 2 Py.P'y'S' 2 .

xv] INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS 317

If we write a' =pa, P =q$, y' =ry, 8' =sS and -4a. t Pf& = k, the invariants are expressed as homogeneous polynomials in p, q, r, s. Then writing p= As, q = fis,r = vs, we obtain A =4&, 0=fo 2 (EA+i) 2 , 0'=fo 6 (S M v+AH 2 . A'=4Jb 8 AVV, <D = 2fo 4 {(SA+i) (2f«>+Afu>)-4V}- Finally, writing SA + 1 = 2«, Sftv + A/uv = zv, A/xi> = w, we have A=4A, 0=4fo 2 « 2 , 0' = 4 /w 6 «; 2 , A'=4Jb 8 w 2 , <X> = 8fo 4 («»-«>)• Then we have the absolute invariants 00'/AA' = m 2 » 2 /w 2 , <t> 2 /AA' =4 {uv-wfjwK Eliminating uvjw we have O 2 =4{(00') 4 -(AA') J } 2 , or rationalising (4AA' +400' -<X> 2 ) 2 = 64AA'0©'. 15-35. Contact of quadrics. The complete conditions for the various sorts of contact of two quadrics require invariant factors, as we have seen in 13-8, but certain conditions can be expressed in terms of the invariants A, 0, O, 0', A'. These are the conditions which depend only on equalities among the roots of the quartic equation A(A)=o. Let us write this equation in the form A(A) = a A 4 +4a 1 A 3 +6(2 i jA 2 +4«3A+a 4 =o. Then it may be transformed by the substitution a A+a 1 =/i to the form M *+ 6ify 2 + 4 Gj* + (a *I- 3 tf 2 ) = o, where Hsa a 2 —a 1 i , G=2a 1 3 -2a ^i a 2+ a o 2a ay I =a a 4 -4a 1 a 3 + 3a 2 2 - 15-351. The condition for simple contact (denoted by [21 1] in invariant-factor notation) is that two roots of the equation A(A) = o should be equal. This is expressed by the vanishing of the discriminant P — 2'jJ 2 = o, where / = a,, a 2 a t — aoOg 2 + 2a x a 2 a 3 — a x 2 a t — a a 8 . This discriminant is called a tact-invariant. 3i8 INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS [chap. The same condition is satisfied in the case of double contact [(ii)ii], and the two cases have to be distinguished by con- sidering the rank of the matrix [A (A)]. In the case of double contact the curve of intersection of the two quadrics has two double-points and breaks up into two conies. For some value of A, therefore, XS+S' = o represents two planes. The conditions for this are that for some value of A the matrix [A (A)] should be of rank 2. 15-352. The conditions for three equal roots A x are /= o, J —o. This happens in the cases of ring-contact and the two forms of stationary contact. In the first form of stationary contact [31], when the curve of intersection is a cuspidal quartic, the matrix [A(Aj)] is of rank 3 ; when the curve of intersection consists of two conies touching one another [(21) 1] the matrix is of rank a ; and in the case of ring-contact [(in) 1] it is of rank 1. 15-353. The conditions for two pairs of equal roots A, and Ag are G=o, i2H 2 =a£I. (Thk condition is symmetrical; with G=o the second condition is equivalent to 2a 3 a_ 3<Z2«304+ ai#4 2 = o.) In this case the quadrics have at least one generator in common. When the matrices [A(Aj)] and [A(Ajj)] are both of rank 3 there is just one common generator, the remainder of the curve of intersection being a space-cubic of which the generator is a bisecant, and the quadrics have double contact [22]. When [A(A X )] is of rank 3 and [A(Ag)] is of rank 2, there are two common intersecting generators and the quadrics have triple contact [2(11)]. When [A (A x )] and [A (A2)] are both of rank 2, the quadrics have four common generators and have quadruple contact [(»)(»)]• 15-354. The conditions for four equal roots A x are ajao = ajay = a 3 /a 2 = ajog . When [A(A t )] is of rank 3 the curve of intersection consists of a space-cubic and a tangent, and the quadrics have stationary con- tact at the point of contact [4]. When [A(Aj)] is of rank 2, there are two cases according as A— A x or (A— Aj) 2 is a factor of each of the first minors. In the former case the curve of intersection xv] INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS 319 consists of a conic and two lines intersecting upon it ; the two quadrics touch at this point [(31)]. In the latter case the base- curve consists of a double-line and two mutually skew lines both cutting it; the quadrics touch along the double-line [(22)]. When [A(A X )] is of rank 1 the base-curve consists of two inter- secting double-lines; and the quadrics have contact along them both K211)]. Ex. r. Show that if two quadrics have simple contact and the generating lines through the point of contact are harmonic, 00' =4AA' in addition to the condition for simple contact. Ex. a. In a pencil of quadrics; having double; contact show that each quadric is paired with another,, such that the generating lines at either point of contact are harmonic 15-36. In- interpreting the meanings of the simultaneous in- variants we have assumed that neither of the quadrics. is a cone. Let us consider the case in which A' = 0, so that S' is a cone,, say S'sx?+y*+z*=o, the vertex being D = [o, o, o, 1], and the edges through D forming a self-conjugate trihedron. Assume S to be general : S=ax 2 + ... + zfyz+ ... +2pxw+ ... =0. Formingthe linear system S+XS' = a the discriminant equationis A (A) s dX* + A 2 S (ad-p*) + XLA + A = o, so that &' = d, <DsE(ad-p 2 )„0:=£A @' = o, when the vertex of S' lies, on S.. The invariants and <& can be interpreted by considering the tangent-cone T from D to S. This is f = d{ax* + by 2 + cz*-V- zfyz + 2gzx+-2kxy)- (J>x+ qy+rz)* =0. T and S' are homogeneous in x, y, z, and with zo = o represent two conies € and C We can form the simultaneous invariants of these two conies. The discriminant equation of the linear system T+XS r =o is A 1 'X a +Q 1 'X 2 +@ 1 X+^=o, where A/=i, © 1 ' = E(arf-/> 2 ) = 0, & i ^-L{{bd-q i )(cd-r i )-(fd-qry} = d&, A x =rf 2 A. 33o INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QDADRICS [chap. (The last result is obtained by multiplying together the two determinants •) d o o —p ah g p o d o — q hbfq o o d —r g f c r o o O I p q r d If = 0, so that ©i = o, the conic C is inpolar to C". Hence there is an infinity of trihedra with vertex D, self -conjugate with respect to the cone S' and having their faces touching the quadric S. If <E> = o, so that 0/ = o, there is an infinity of trihedra with vertex D, self-conjugate with respect to the cone S' and having their edges touching the quadric S. 15 # 37. Reciprocally, if one of the quadrics 2' reduces as an envelope to a conic C" in the plane w = o, its tangential equation referred to a self-polar triangle is S' = ^+7, 2 +C 2 =o. The general quadric S cuts this plane in a conic C. The discriminant equation for the linear system 2+AE'=o is (cf. 15-32) Z>A 3 +A 2 Z)Z(£c-/ 2 )+AA 2 Za+A 3 =o, so that 0'=Sa, A'0»sS(6c-/ 2 ), A' 2 0=D. If = the plane of the conic C touches the quadric S. If <I> = o there is an infinity of triangles in the plane of the conic self-conjugate with respect to the conic S' and circum- scribed about C. If 0'=o there is an infinity of triangles self-conjugate with respect to S' and inscribed in C. Ex. 1. If S and S' are both cones, not having a common vertex, show that = is the condition that the vertex of S lies on S', and if 0=o the tangent-planes to the two cones through the line joining their vertices are harmonic. Ex. 2. If S' breaks up into two planes show that 0=o is the condition that the two planes should be conjugate with respect to S, and that O =0 is the condition that the line of intersection of the two planes should touch S. xv] INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS 321 Ex. 3. If every quadric of the linear system S + XS'=o is a cone (not with common vertex) show that all the cones pass through a fixed conic C and have their vertices on a fixed line / which cuts C. Ex. 4. If S +AE' = represents a system of conies (not all in one plane) show that all the conies lie on a fixed cone C and that their planes all pass through a fixed fine / which touches C. 15-4. Metrical applications. A metrical invariant of a quadric is a function of the co- efficients which is unaltered by an orthogonal transformation. The orthogonal transformation, equivalent to transformation from one set of rectangular cartesian coordinates to another, is; a particular case of the general linear transformation, and is characterised by the property that it preserves the circle at in- finity unaltered. 15-41. The general linear or projective transformation trans- forms the point-coordinates (*<) into (*/) 3 */= S l iT x r (1=0,1,2,3), and the inverse transformation by which (x t ) are expressed in terms of (*/) is 3 Lx { = S L ri x r ' (i=o, 1, 2, 3), where L is the determinant of the coefficients l {i , and L tj is the cofactor of l (j . L must not vanish. If * =o represents the plane at infinity, after the transforma- tion this becomes I,L r0 x r '=o. In order that the plane at infinity should be unaltered, i.e. re- presented by x ' = o after the transformation, L 10 = o, L x = o r .£,30=0; and as x '=o is transformed by the inverse transforma- tion into x =o, loi=o, 4 2 =o, 4s =0. Taking ^, = 1, so that x =x ', we can take #„== 1, and the equations assume the form *1 = 'll'*-l + »12'' (; 2 + tl3' >:; 3"l"'l0» ^2 = *21#1~T*22^2"' - ^23^3 ~f~ ^20) ^»3 == '31^ ( 'l"r'32^»2"f'^33^'3"r , ^80» SAO ax 32a INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS [chap. which are the general equations of transformation of cartesian coordinates, the plane at infinity remaining unaltered. This is called the general affine transformation. 15-42. The circle at infinity is represented by the tangential equation !i 2 + £ 2 2 + £ 3 2 = o, and we have to find the equations of transformation of the plane-coordinates £ , f x> £%, £ 3 . The plane 2£ r a: r =o is transformed into the plane S{£ r (SL ir O}=o or S£/*/ = o. r i Hence £/=EL ir £ r , r and, inversely, L 3 | f =E/ rj £ r '. Now if & 2 + & 2 + & 2 = o is transformed into &'« + &' 2 + 6,' 2 = o we have 3 and S4<4<= ^hthi =2/^/^ = 0. But these are just the conditions that the transformation should be orthogonal. 15-43. The metrical properties of a quadric should therefore be expressible in terms of the simultaneous invariants of the quadric and the circle at infinity considered as a specialised quadric. Now taking the circle at infinity as £ 2 +ij i + £ a = o, which is equivalent to assuming rectangular cartesian co- ordinates, we found in 15-37 ^ e simultaneous invariants D, S(Ac-/ 2 ), and 2a, and these are exactly the metrical invariants which were found in 8-8a. These are really simultaneous invariants of the circle at in- finity Q. and the conic at infinity C on the quadric, and we shall denote them by A„, @ and @ '. 15-44. Thus Ea = o, or o ' = o, is the condition that there should be an infinity of triangles inscribed in C and self-polar with respect to £2. But since two lines are at right angles when their points at infinity are conjugate with respect to £2, the quadric has an infinity of sets of three mutually rectangular generators of each system (rectangular hyperboloid). xv] INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS 323 When 2(fc-/ s )=o, or o =o, there is an infinity of triangles circumscribed about C and self-polar with respect to Q, and hence the asymptotic cone of the quadric has an infinity of sets of three mutually orthogonal tangent-planes {orthogonal hyper- boloid). 15-45. There is another special form of hyperboloid to which the name orthogonal was given by Schroter, which we shall now explain. In general a quadric possesses no generating line which is perpendicular to a plane of circular section, but if it has one pair of parallel generators per- pendicular to one set of circular sections, there is a pair of parallel generators perpendicular to the com- plementary circular sec- tions also. This follows from a well-known theorem for the conic. Let Q be the circle at infinity, AB jy and A'B' two chords, C Fig. 46 and C" their poles. Then the inscribed quadrangle ABA'B' and the circumscribed quadrilateral CDC'D' formed by the tangents at A, B, A', B' have the same harmonic triangle, and therefore AA', BB', CC and DD' are concurrent. Hence by the converse of Pascal's theorem the six points AA'C'B'BC lie on one conic. Let S be any quadric which contains this conic. The planes through AB and A'B' are complementary planes of circular section ; the two generators through C are perpendicular to the former, and those through C" to the latter. When ABCA'B'C is a proper conic and the planes of circular section, and the corresponding generators, are real, the quadric is either a cone or a hyperboloid of one sheet. We shall call such quadrics orthocyclic cones and hyperboloids. If AB and A'B' are con- jugate lines with respect to Q., so that AB passes through C and A'B' through C, the conic ABCA'B'C reduces to these two lines, and the quadric is either a rectangular hyperbolic paraboloid, a rectangular hyperbolic cylinder, or two orthogonal planes. 324 INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS [chap. There are no proper circular sections, however, in this case; a circle reduces to a generating line and a line at infinity lying in the same plane. In the case of the paraboloid all the generators of one system are parallel to one plane and there is one generator of the other system perpendicular to this plane. In the case of the cylinder the only generator through C is the line at infinity CA'B', and the property in question fails altogether. If C denotes the conic at infinity and S' the circle at infinity, the invariant equation corresponding to this property is O '3+8A O '2A O = 4 A O '0 O O '. Ex. i. Show that the condition that the quadric ax 2 + by i + cz* = i should be orthocyclic is ( — a + b + c) (a — b + c) (a + b — c) = o. Ex. 2. Prove that the locus of a point whose distances from two skew lines have a constant ratio k (^ i) is an orthocyclic hyperboloid ; and that if k = i the locus is a rectangular hyperbolic paraboloid. If the two lines intersect, the locus is a cone, or (if k = i) two orthogonal planes. Ex. 3. If the squares of the distances of a variable point from two fixed lines satisfy a linear equation, show that the locus is an ortho- cyclic quadric, which may be an ellipsoid, a hyperboloid of one or of two sheets, or a hyperbolic paraboloid. (If the two lines are conjugate imaginaries the locus may also be an elliptic paraboloid.) 15-46. The theorem in plane geometry which is reciprocal to the theorem on which the property of orthocyclic quadrics is based is that if AB and A'B' are the chords of contact of tangents drawn from any two points C and C" to a given conic the six sides of the two triangles ABC and A'B'C all touch one conic. Let the given conic be the circle at infinity and let S be any quadric which contains the conic which touches the six lines, O the vertex of its asymptotic cone. Then OC and OC are focal lines of the cone, since the tangent-planes through these lines touch the absolute. Also OAB is a tangent-plane of the cone and is perpendicular to OC. Hence the cone has the property that one pair of focal lines are perpendicular to tangent-planes. In general a cone does not possess a focal line which is perpendicular to a tangent-plane. The above theorem shows that if it possesses one then it possesses a pair. These focal lines are then generators xv] INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS 325 of the reciprocal cone. We shall call such a cone orthofocal, and likewise any quadric of which it is the asymptotic cone. The reciprocal cone passes through ABCA'B'C and is therefore orthocyclic. As the equation of the reciprocal cone is Ax* + ... +2Fyz+ ... =0, where A = bc~f 2 , ..., F=gh—af, ..., the condition for an orthofocal cone is (-A+B+C)(A-B+C)(A+B-C)=o. The relation between the reciprocal cones is brought out more closely by considering their intersections with a sphere whose centre is at the vertex, sphero-conics. In the case of an ortho- cyclic cone the ratio of the distances of any point from two fixed intersecting lines is constant. Hence on the sphere we have two fixed points M, N and a variable point P such that sin MOP : sin NOP= const. For an orthofocal cone we have reciprocally two fixed great circles on the sphere and a variable great circle which is such that the ratio of the sines of the angles which it makes with the fixed great circles is constant. Hence an orthofocal cone with vertex O can be generated by a plane through O which moves so that the ratio of the sines of the angles which it makes with two fixed planes through O is constant. Ex. Prove that the envelope of a plane through O which moves so that the ratio of the sines of the angles which it makes with the two fixed planes y = ± fix is constant is I 2 + /* V + (1 + M 2 ) £ 2 + *Hv = o. 15-51. Contravariants. An arbitrary plane €x+T)y + £z + u>w = o cuts a linear system of quadrics 5+AS' = o in a linear system of conies C+XC' = o. The projective properties of this system are the same as those of any system into which it may be projected. Thus if we eliminate w between the equation of the plane and the equa- tion of the quadric we obtain a homogeneous equation in x, y, z which represents the projection from the vertex W upon the plane «> = o. The coefficients are expressions of the second degree in f , -q, £, o>, but linear in the coefficients of the quadric. 326 INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS [chap. The discriminant of the conic C+AC'=o, which expresses that the plane (£) should touch the quadric S+XS'=o, is of the form 2 + tA+t'A 2 +2'A 3 =o, where 2, t, t', 2' are expressions of the second degree in g, 17, £, to, and of degrees 3, o; 2, 1 ; 1, 2; o, 3 in the coefficients of S and S' respectively. Thus if S= ax 2 + by 2 + cz* + dzo*, S' s x 2 + v a + z* + w\ we find, after dividing by w*, 2 sbcd^ + acd^ + abd^ + abcco 2 , t =(bc+bd+cd)^ + (ac+ad+cd)r] a + (ab + ad+bd)^ + (bc+ca + ab)a)*, T'={b+c+d)?+{a+c+d)Tf+{a+b + d)t?+{a+b + c)a>\ S's? + ij« + P + <o». 2 = o is the condition that the plane (£) should touch the quadric S, and is the tangential equation of S; similarly S' = o is the tangential equation of S'. t = o is the condition that the conic C should be outpolar to the conic C", and is the tangential equation of a quadric projectively associated with the two given quadrics. Similarly t' = o is the tangential equation of a quadric . which is the envelope of planes cutting S and S' in conies C and C such that C is outpolar to C. These envelopes, which are thus associated with S and S', are called simultaneous contra- variants of S and S'. Any equation homogeneous in 2, t, t', 2' and involving the invariants of the two quadrics, homogeneous in the coefficients of both quadrics, is a simultaneous contra- variant and represents some envelope projectively associated with the two quadrics. 15-52. Tangential equation of the curve of intersection of two quadrics. As an example let us find the condition that the plane (£) should contain a tangent to the curve of intersection (SS 1 ) of the two quadrics. The four points of intersection of the conies C and C" are the points in which the plane (£) cuts the curve (SS'). If C and C have simple contact the plane (£) contains a xv] INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS 327 tangent-line of (SS'). The condition for this, which is the dis- criminant of the cubic 2 + tA+t'A 2 +S'A s =o, viz. ( 9 EZ'-tt') 2 =4(3Zt'-t 2 )(32't-t' 2 ), is therefore the tangential equation of the quartic curve (SS'), an equation of the eighth degree in (f ) and of the sixth degree in the coefficients of each of the quadrics. Ex. Show that the osculating planes of the curve of intersection of the two quadrics satisfy the equations 3 St'=t 2 , 3 S't=t'«. 15-53. Covariants. Reciprocally, the tangent-cones from an arbitrary point (*) to a linear tangential system of quadrics 2+A2' = o form a linear system which is projectively the same as that represented by the equation eo = o together with the equation obtained by eliminating to between the equation of the point x(; + ... =0 and the tangential equation of the quadric. We thus get an equation K+XK' = o in £, 7], £. Taking the canonical forms S = bed? + acdif + abdt? + abeco*, 2' s £ 2 + -rf + t? + w 2 , we find, after dividing by w*, the equation A 2 5+ATA+A'rA 2 +A' 2 5'A 3 =o, where S ^ax^+by^+cs^+dw 2 , T =a(b + c+d)x i +..., T'sa(bc+bd+cd)x 2 + ..., S'=x 2 +y i +z 2 +zv\ A*S, AT, AT', A' 2 5' are of degrees 9, o; 6, 3; 3, 6; o, 9 re- spectively in the coefficients of S and S'. S, T, T, S' are covariants of the two quadrics, S and S' being of course just the quadrics themselves. Ex. Show that the point-equation of the circumdevelopable of the two quadrics is (oAA'ss' - Try = 4 (3A'sr - t 2 ) ( 3 A5t- r 2 ), an equation of degree 8 in *, y, z, w, and degree 10 in the coefficients of each of the quadrics. 328 INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS [chap. 15-54. The point-, line-, and tangential equations of a quadric can from a certain point of view be considered as invariants. The tangential equation, for instance, is a simultaneous invariant of the quadric and a plane L=$x+7)y+£z+cozo=o,

involving the coefficients of S in the third degree and those of
L in the second, viz.

= o,

a

h

8

p

e

h

b

f

Q

V

g

f

c

r

t

P

<1

r

d

CO

t

V

z

CO

o

and its vanishing is the condition that L should touch S.
Similarly the point-equation is an invariant of the quadric S
and a point P=x£ +yrj+z£+wco = o, involving the coefficients
of S in the third degree and x, y, z, w (the coefficients of P) in
the second, and its vanishing is the condition that P should lie
on S. The line-equation T=o is a simultaneous invariant of S
and two planes, involving the coefficients of S and those of each
of the two planes L, L' all in the second degree ; and it is also a
simultaneous invariant of S and two points P, P' ; its vanishing
is the condition that the line of intersection of L and L' or the line
joining P and P' should touch S. Any covariant or contravariant
can in fact be considered as an invariant; it is a question of
view-point.

15-61. Reciprocal of one quadric with respect to another.

The locus of the pole, with respect to a given quadric S , of a

Let S =ax i +by 2 + cz 2 +dw !t =o,

S s X z+y* + z* + w 2 = o.

The tangential equation of the pole P of the plane (£') with
respect to Z s£ a +i? 2 +£ 2 +a> 2 i s

£'$+r)' v + Z'£ + co'co = o, xv] INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS 329 i.e. the coordinates of P are [£', ij\ £', a/]. But the plane (£') is a tangent-plane to 2, therefore MP* + acdrj' 2 + aW£' 2 + afc*/ 1 = o, i.e. P lies on the quadric S' = bcdx 2 + acdy 2 + abdz 2 + abcw 2 = o. Similarly it may be shown that the envelope of the polar with respect to S of a variable point on S is the quadric whose tangential equation is S' = ef« + fcj« + ct? + do 2 = o, but this is just the tangential equation of S'. The two quadrics S and S' are symmetrically related with respect to S , and each is said to be the reciprocal of the other with respect to <S . 15-62. The reciprocal of S with respect to 5' is a simultaneous covariant of 5 and S', and can be expressed in terms of the co- variants T, T' and the simultaneous invariants of S and S'. Let S=ax 2 + by i + cz 2 +dzv i , S' = x 2 +y*+z 2 +u)\ Then the reciprocal of S with respect to S' is R = bcdx 2 + acdy* + abdz 2 + abcw 2 = o. Now T = (acd+ abd+ abc) x 2 +... = S abc . S x 2 — 2 bcdx 2 . Therefore R=@S'-T'. We verify that the expression on the right is homogeneous in the coefficients of each quadric, the degrees being 3 and 2 re- spectively. Similarly the reciprocal of S' with respect to S is ®'S- T= o. Ex. Prove that the tangential equation of the reciprocal of S with respect to S' is 0'2'-AV=o. 15-7. The harmonic complex of two quadrics. The line-equation of the quadric S is (see 15-31) Ysc n u 1 2 + ... +C 11 z> 1 2 + ... +k 11 u 1 v l + ... +K 11 v 1 u 1 + ... + 2C23«2«3+ ••- +2C230 a £;,+ ... +2& Z3 W S1 » 3 + ... + 2K iB V a tl 3 + ... =0; 330 INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS [chap. this represents the quadratic complex of lines touching the quadric. Replacing S by S+XS' we have Y A sT+AY+A 2 Y', where T' = c u '% 2 + . . . = (b'c' -/' 2 ) u^ + . . . and Y = (be' + b'c- zff) u^+ .... Y is obtained from T by the usual "polarising" process re- presented by the summation extending over all the coefficients of S. Y=o represents a quadratic complex associated with the two quadrics. It is the complex of lines which are cut harmonically by the two quadrics. Let the line (/>) be determined by the two points (x x ) and (x 2 ), so that u 1 sp w =y 1 z i -y 2 z 1 , etc. A variable point on the line is represented by x=x x +Xx 2 . Substituting in 5= o we have S 1 + 2\(ax 1 x i + ...)+X z S 2 =o, and the roots of this quadratic in A determine the two points of intersection with S. A similar equation determines its inter- sections with S'. The condition that the two pairs of points should be harmonic is (ax 1 2 + ...)(flV+ ...) + (ax 2 * + ...)(aV+ ...) = z(ax 1 x 2 + ...)(a'x 1 x 2 + ...), and this reduces to (be' + b'c - zff) ( yi z 2 -J,*,)' + • . • = o, i.e. Y=o. This is called the Harmonic Complex or Complex of Battaglini. Similarly the assemblage of lines through which the tangent- planes to S and S' are harmonic is another harmonic complex (BC'+B'C- 2 FF')p 01 *+ ... =o. A particular case of the last complex is obtained when we take 2' as the circle at infinity. We have then the complex of lines through which the tangent-planes to the quadric S are orthogonal. xv] INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS 331 15-81. Line-equation of the curve of intersection of two quadrics. An arbitrary line is cut in involution by the quadrics of a linear system, the double-points of the involution being the points of contact of the two quadrics of the system which touch the line. The line-equations of the two quadrics S and S' being T=o and T' = o the line-equation of S+XS' = o is Y+AY+A 2 Y'=o. If the line-coordinates of an arbitrary line I are substituted in this equation we have a quadratic in A which determines the two quadrics which touch I, and their points of contact are the double-points of the involution on I. But if I cuts the curve of intersection (SS') of the two quadrics, the involution degenerates, for then one point of each pair is this point of intersection. The two quadrics which touch I then coincide and 4 TT' = T 2 . This is therefore the line-equation of the curve (SS'). It re- presents a quartic complex of lines. 15-82. If the line / is a tangent to (SS') it touches every quadric of the system and we have Y = o, Y' = o, T = o, three equations in line-coordinates determining a line-series, in fact the assemblage of tangents to the curve. These tangents are also of course the generating lines of the developable belonging to the curve. A curve and its developable can be represented in six different ways: (1) The curve as a one-way locus of points is represented by two equations in point-coordinates (»S'=o, iS"=o). (2) The curve as a one-way assemblage of its tangent-lines is represented by three equations in line-coordinates (T=o, T' = o, T=o). The same equations represent the developable as a one- dimensional assemblage of its generating lines. (3) The curve as the complex of lines passing through its points is represented by a single equation in line-coordinates (4TT' = T 2 ). The same equation represents the developable as the complex of lines lying in its generating planes. 332 INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QDADRICS [chap. (4) The curve as a two-dimensional envelope of planes is re- presented by a single equation in tangential coordinates (15-52). (5) The developable as a one-dimensional envelope of planes is represented by two equations in tangential coordinates ( 3 St'=t*, 3 £'t=t' 2 ). (6) The developable as a two-dimensional locus of points is represented by a single equation in point-coordinates. We have still to find this last representation. 15-83. Point-equation of the developable belonging to the curve of intersection of two quadrics. If P is any point on a tangent-line to the curve (SS') its polar- plane with respect to any quadric of the linear system passes through the point of contact of the tangent-line ; all such planes pass through one line, which therefore cuts the curve. If we express the condition that the line of intersection of the polar- planes of P with respect to S and <S" cuts (SS') we shall obtain an equation involving the coordinates of P, and this will be the point-equation of the developable. Taking S=Y,a r x r \ S'=Hx r \ and P= [x ', Xx', x 2 ', x 3 '], we have the line of intersection of the two planes 2« r <* r =o, 2*/* r = o, viz. ^u=Pki = {ai-a,)x i 'x i '. Then YsZS^a^./, T' = SS^, TeeSS (a, +«,)/>„*, and the equation required is Y2- 4 YY'=o. This has now to be expressed in terms of the point-coordinates x r ', and we can do this by means of S, S' and the covariants T, T. Thus T ='Ea i (a j +a k +ai)x i z s'La i .'Ea i x i !i -I,a i 2 x i 2 , 7" = 2 (a { a t a k + a t a, a, + a t a k a^x* ='Za i a j a k .'Zx i *-'Za j a k a l x f ' !i . Therefore 2 afx? = ®'S - T, Xa j a k a l x i i = @S'-T f . xv] INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS 333 Now = SS a k a x (a* 2 + a?) x? x t * - za^ a x a 2 a 3 S2 x? x? = S a< x ( 2 .Hidjdkat x t * — A (E a:,- 2 ) 2 , therefore T = 5(05' - T) - A5' 2 . Similarly T' = S'(0'5-r)-A'5 2 . Again, Y = SS (a* +a l ) (a t - c,) 8 *<**,*. T is symmetrical and of degree 3 in the coefficients of each of the quadrics, and by comparing dimensions we see that it can be expressed only in terms of (ST+S'T'), <&SS', and (05' 2 +0'5 2 ). Comparing coefficients we find T=055'-(5r+5'r). Hence the point-equation of the developable is (®SS'-ST-S'T')* =4(055' - ST' - A5' 2 ) (©'55' - 5' T- A'5 2 ). 15'91. Conjugate generators of a quadric. We shall consider tiie generators of the quadric 5 which are conjugate with respect to another quadric 5'. Let 5 = ax 2 +by 2 +cz 2 + dw*=o and S'sx*+y i + z* + w* = o. The generators of one system of 5 are V^-J+V — c.z = \(\/ — a.x+^d.w), A(\/b.y—\/~c.z)=T/—a.x-<\/d.it>. The line-coordinates are thus p & =2\\/(-ad), p 01 = - 2A V( - be), Pa = - (A 2 + 1) V(bd), pn = (A 2 + 1) VM, *n=(A"-i)V(-«9. A»= -(A 2 -i) V(-«*). The polar of with respect to 5' is [pn> •••> Pz3> •'•}> 334 INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS [chap. and the condition that two lines (p), (p') should be conjugate, or that (p) should intersect the polar of (/>'), is P01P01 + ••• +PwPt3 + ••• =0, i.e. -4(bc+ad)M + (oz+ta)(A 2 + i)(A' 2 +i) - (ab + cd) (A 2 - 1) (A' 2 - 1) = o. Write for shortness bc+ad=l, ca+bd=m, ab + cd=n, then we have a (2, 2) symmetrical relation between A, A' (m - n) A 2 A' 2 + (m + n) (A + A') 2 — 2{m + n J r2T)Xk' + (m — m) = o. If we put A' = A we get an equation of the fourth degree in A (»/-m)(A 4 +i) + 2(ot+«-2/)A 2 = o. Hence there are four self -conjugate generators. In general there are two generators conjugate to a given generator A', corresponding to the roots of the quadratic equa- tion in A {(w-«)A' 2 +(OT+M)}A 2 -4/A'A+{(w+re)A' 2 +(m-M)} = o. If the two generators which are conjugate to A' are conjugate to one another, the roots A 2 , A 3 of this equation must be connected by the same equation, i.e. (m — n) A 2 2 A3 2 + (m + n) Q^, + A 3 ) a — 2 (m + n + 2/) Ag A 3 + (m — n) = o. On substituting the values of the symmetric functions A^Ag and )^X 3 we obtain the equation {(m-n)(X' i +i) + 2(m+n-2l)\' 2 }(mn+nl+lm) = o. If Stmm^o we obtain again the quartic equation giving the four self-conjugate generators, and there are no sets of three generators mutually conjugate. But if Smn = o the equation is identically satisfied and there is an infinity of sets of three mutually conjugate generators. The condition Hmn = o is now easily identified with @©'-4A/Y = o, for S mn = S a 2 be = S a . 2 bed — /[abed. Hence, since the condition is symmetrical, 00' — 4AA' = o is the necessary and sufficient condition that each of the quadrics S, S' should have an infinity of triads of generators of each system mutually conjugate with regard to the other quadric. xv] INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS 335 The cross-ratio of the four generators of a quadric S which are self -conjugate with respect to a quadric S' is evidently a simul- taneous invariant. In particular the condition that it should have the value — i is the vanishing of the invariant J of the quartic equation*. This gives (m+n-2l)(n+l-zm)(l+m-2n) = o, which is equivalent to 2 O s - 900'O - 72AA'<» + 27 (A©' 2 + A'0 2 ) = o. If the roots of the quartic form an equianharmonic tetrad, with cross-ratio a complex cube root of unity, the invariant I=o. This gives S(P-m»)=o, which is equivalent to$2_30©' + I2 AA'=o.

15-92. The results of the last section can be interpreted in an
interesting way in non-euclidean geometry in which the circle
S' = x 2 +y 2 +z i +w 2 = o. Two lines which are conjugate with
respect to S' are perpendicular, and we have the result that in
the general quadric there are four lines (imaginary) which are
self-orthogonal, and when a certain condition is satisfied the
generators, the non-euclidean rectangular hyperboloid.

In euclidean geometry the general quadric has four self-
orthogonal generators of each system. These are the (imaginary)
generators which pass through the four points of intersection of
the conic at infinity with the circle at infinity.

If the four points of intersection of the circle at infinity with
the conic at infinity form a harmonic set on the conic at infinity,
one pair of common chords of the conic and circle at infinity are
conjugate with respect to the conic. In this case one pair of
complementary planes of circular section are conjugate with
respect to the quadric. If the four points form a harmonic

• See Analytical Conies, chap. XIX, § 19.

336 INVARIANTS OF A PAIR OF QUADRICS [chap.xv
tetrad on the circle at infinity, one pair of complementary planes
of circular section are orthogonal.

Ex. If A,,, O , O ', Ao' are the simultaneous invariants of the
conic at infinity C and the circle at infinity C", show that the condition
that the four self-orthogonal generators of S should be harmonic is

20 o 3 - oAo©,,©,/ + 2 7 A 2 A ' = o.

15 95. EXAMPLES.

i. If two quadrics have a common generator, show that
A0' 2 =A'0 2 .

2. If two quadrics have in common two generators of one
system and one generator of the other system, show that

A0' 2 =A'0 2

and (00' + 8AA') a =i6O 2 AA'.

3. If two quadrics touch along a generator and have also two
generators of the other system in common, show that

4A/0 = 30/2O = 2<&/3©' = 074A'.

4. If a hexahedron, which is a projection of a parallelepiped,

i6A 3 A' - 8A 2 00' +4A0 2 3> -0 4 =o.

5. If two spheres are orthogonal show that 4AA' = 00', and
conversely if 4AA' = 00' either the spheres are orthogonal or
d 2 =2(r i +r' 2 ), where r and r' are their radii and d the distance
between their centres.

6. Prove that the volume of an ellipsoid is $rr( — A 3 /D 4 )*. 7. Show that a 2 +y (1 - 1*) ± 2 (tyz + ax) = o represents two hyperboloids of revolution having contact along the generator x = o=y; and that if t=i they have contact along two generators. [This arrangement affords a system of bevel gearing, the axes of rotation being inclined at the angle 2 tan- 1 1.] Xq Xi X% **3 jo yx y* y*. and ;]■ CHAPTER XVI LINE GEOMETRY 16-11. A line is determined uniquely by either two points or two planes, and in either case we have a four-by-two matrix, the coordinates of the two points and the coordinates of the two planes SO fel ?2 ?3 -Vo Vx Vi Vs- We denote the six determinants x t y } — Xjy { by p tj , and the six determinants f 4 ij, — ^ij« by tn« . From the fundamental incidence 60 ^0 + % 1 *1 "t" £2 X i + b 3 #3 = ° which expresses that the point (#) lies on the plane (£) we derive the relations (2-523) r<7 01 : E7 02 : T7o3 : t^ : w 31 : w 12 ^/^ •' Psx '• Pn '• P01 '■ P02 '■ Pos > so that the ratios of one set of numbers (p) determine the ratios of the other set (w). Further, since the determinant Xq X-i X% X3 y yx y* y* 2 2 X& yo yx y 2 y 3 is identically zero, we have the identical relation (O (P& , . . . , p 01 , . . .) =poip23 +P02P3X +PoSpX2 = O. The set of six numbers (/>) connected by this identical relation are Pliicker's coordinates of the line ; the numbers (w) are some- times, to distinguish them, called the axial coordinates, and (p) the ray coordinates. 16-12. Two lines have an incidence relation when they have a point in common and therefore also a common plane. Ex- panding the determinant Xq Xx X2 x$

yo

yx

yz

y*

Xq

X-^

X%

#3

yo

yx

yi

yz

SAG

2*

338 LINE GEOMETRY [chap.

which vanishes identically, we have

/Was' +PwPsi +Pa&Pvi +/>23/>oi' +PsiPm' +/W03' = °>
which is 2 pJ = — = o.

Conversely, if (p) and (/>') are the coordinates of two lines
which are connected by this equation, the lines intersect.

16'13. A single homogeneous equation in (p) represents a
three-dimensional assemblage of lines or complex ; two equations
represent a two-dimensional assemblage or congruence; three
equations determine a line-series such as the regulus of a quadric,
or the tangents to a curve ; and four equations determine a finite
number of lines.

16*14. If a line is given to pass through a fixed point it is de-
prived of two degrees of freedom. The conditions that the line
(/>) should pass through the point (x) are any two of the linear
equations *«£» + *,/>« + **/>« = <>,

where i, j, k are given any three of the values o, i, 2, 3.

Similarly, if a line is given to lie in a fixed plane it is deprived
of two degrees of freedom. The conditions that the line (w)
should lie in the plane (£) are any two of the linear equations

16-15. The lines of a complex which pass through a given
point form a one-dimensional assemblage or cone. Let the
equation of the complex h&f{p%s, ..., p 01 , ...) = o, homogeneous
and of the «th degree in (p). If we substitute p {i =x i y j —x i y i
in the equation we obtain an equation which is homogeneous
and of degree n in the coordinates (x) and also in the coordinates
( v). If (y) is fixed, the equation then represents a cone of order
n. Similarly the lines of a complex which lie in a given plane
envelop a curve. If we substitute to w = &t^ — £^,- we obtain an
equation of degree n in (f) and also in (rj), and if (17) is fixed the
equation represents a curve of class n lying in this plane.

The number n is called the degree of the complex and is thus
both the order of the cone formed by all the lines through an
arbitrary fixed point and the class of the curve formed by all the
lines lying in an arbitrary fixed plane.

xvi] LINE GEOMETRY 339

16-16. The linear complex.

A complex of degree 1 is called a linear complex. All the lines
through a given point P lie in a plane it, and all the lines in
a given plane it pass through a point P, in each case forming
a plane pencil. The point and plane so associated are called pole
and polar with respect to the complex.

The general equation of the linear complex is
Sa /> =o
and thus depends upon the ratios of six numbers a tl . There is
no loss of generality in making the convention that

««=-««. <z» = o.
With this convention the equation when written in terms of the
coordinates of two points (x), (y) is

If ( y) is fixed this equation represents the polar-plane of ( y).
Since the equation is skew symmetrical in (x) and ( y) it follows
that if the polar-plane of P passes through Q, that of Q passes
through P. If (y) belongs to a linear range of points (y+Xz) the
polar-planes form an axial pencil

2 a it x t yj +XZia ii x i z i =o.

Thus to a line Z as a range of points corresponds a line /' as the
axis of a pencil of planes. If P and Q are points on /, and P' and
Q' points on /', the polar-planes of P' and Q' both pass through
P and Q, hence the relation between / and /' is symmetrical;
each line is called the polar of the other.

Two polar lines do not intersect, for if / cuts /', and P is any
point on /, the polar-plane of P contains P and the line /' and is
therefore the fixed plane (PI') or (//'), unless / and /' coincide;
and if I and /' coincide, the polar-plane of any point on / contains
/ and therefore / belongs to the complex.

Any line of the complex which meets a line I meets also its polar
I', for iip cuts / in P the polar of P contains p and V ; thus p and
/' lie in one plane and therefore intersect.

Ex. Prove that the polar of the line (q) with respect to the linear
complex ?««i>« = o is

?«' = «jm Sa r , q„ — q (i to (a„).

340 LINE GEOMETRY [chap.

16-2. Line-geometry is perhaps best studied in connection
with geometry of higher dimensions. The geometry of ordinary
space is said to be of three dimensions because in it a point has
three degrees of freedom. A plane has also three degrees of
freedom, and if the plane is taken as the element we have again
a three-dimensional geometry, dual to point-geometry. But the
line has four degrees of freedom, and a geometry in which the
line is the element should be of four dimensions.

16-21. Four-dimensional geometry.

There is no difficulty in extending analytical point-geometry
to four and more dimensions. For a space of four dimensions
S t we define a point as a set of values of the ratios of five
numbers x , ..., x t taken in a fixed order; these are the
homogeneous coordinates of the point. If the numbers are all
multiplied by the same factor k, not zero, they will continue to
represent the same point. If

F'sfe' */] and P"=[x " */]

are two given points, the coordinates

px i = x/+Xx i *

represent for all values of A a point on the line P'P". Similarly

px { = Xi + Xx/ + fiXi"

represents points on the plane determined by three fixed points,
and

pX, = Xf*> + XXi W + pXi<-*> + vxj*>

represents a point having three degrees of freedom and lying in
the space determined by four given points. In the last case,
eliminating A, p., v and p between the five equations we obtain
an equation of the first degree and homogeneous in x , ..., x t ,
the equation of the space. This is of the form

g x + ...+i i x l =o,

and involves the ratios of five numbers £ , ..., | 4 which may be
regarded as homogeneous tangential coordinates of the space.
With two simultaneous linear equations we can express x (
linearly in terms of two parameters. Thus two equations de-
termine a plane as the intersection of two spaces. Three equa-

xvi] LINE GEOMETRY 34*

tions determine a line, and four equations a point. A space cuts
a space, a plane, and a line respectively in a plane, a line, and a
point. A plane cuts another plane in a point, and does not in
general cut a given line.

16-22. A homogeneous equation of the second degree

1Sa rs x r x s = o

represents a three-dimensional assemblage of points which is
cut by an arbitrary line in two points. We shall call this a quadric
variety or simply a quadric, and denote it by the symbol V a 2 .
A quadric in three dimensions is F 2 2 . The theory of pole and
polar can be extended in an obvious way. Two points (x) and
(y) are conjugate with respect to the quadric

TSa r ,x r x,=o
when 2Ea r ,x r y,=o.

If (y) is fixed and (x) is variable, the equation

Z£a rs y r x a =o
represents a three-dimensional space or three-flat, the polar
three-flat of (y). If (y) lies on the quadric this is the tangent
three-flat at (y).

If two points P and Q are conjugate and each lies on the quadric,
all points of the line PQ lie on the quadric. (Proof as in 8-22.)

16-23. As in three dimensions, therefore, it appears that a
locus of points conjugate to P is a three-dimensional tangent-
surface ; if Q is any point on this two-dimensional quadric the
line PQ, since it joins two conjugate points both lying on the
a generating line of the two-dimensional quadric. The latter is
therefore a quadric cone with vertex P. Through every point P on
the quadric there is thus a cone of generating lines. On this cone
take a point Q. Then the polar of Q is a three-dimensional tangent-
space fi which cuts a in a plane, the polar-plane of the line PQ.
This plane cuts the quadric in a conic consisting in part of the line
PQ, and such that every line in its plane cuts PQ in two coincident
points ; hence the conic consists of the line PQ counted twice.

342 LINE GEOMETRY [chap.

16-24. If the quadric variety V 3 * contains a plane a, let P be
any other point on the variety, then the polar of P is a tangent-
space which cuts a in a line/). All points onp are conjugate to P
and lie on the quadric, therefore all the lines joining these points
to P lie on the quadric. The quadric therefore contains also the
plane (Pp). If Q is another point on the quadric we obtain
similarly the plane (Qq). p and q both lie in the plane a and
intersect in a point O. The planes (Pp) and (Qq) both pass
through O, but have no other point in common, for if they had
another point in common they would have a line in common and
the three planes would all be contained in one three-dimensional
space S. The intersection of this space with the quadric variety
would then be a quadric V£ containing these three planes ; this
is impossible unless the quadric variety contains the whole of S
and degenerates to two three-flats, S and another.

Assuming then that the quadric variety does not degenerate,
the point O is conjugate to all points in either of the planes (Pp)
and (Qq), and therefore to any point on any line joining two
points, one on each of these planes, i.e. to any point in 5 4 . Then
if R is any point of the quadric, and r the line in which the
tangent-space at R cuts a, the plane (Rr) passes through O. The
quadric variety is in this case a hypercone with vertex O. Its
section by a space not passing through O is a quadric V 2 2 , and
the hypercone is generated by lines joining O to the points of
V^. The planes determined by O and the generating lines of V 2 *
all lie on the hypercone. Thus a hypercone in S t has two singly
infinite systems of planes all passing through the vertex O. Two
planes of the same system have only the point O in common, two
planes of different systems have a line through O in common.
A quadric variety in S if not specialised, has no planes but a triple
infinity of lines, through every point a cone of lines.

16-25. The generating lines of a quadric in S t are not divided
into two systems like those of a hyperboloid. If we project
stereographically from any point O on the quadric on to a space
a, the tangent-space t at O cuts a in a plane and this plane cuts
the cone of generators through O in a conic C. The generating
lines through O are then projected into points of this conic. If
/ is any other generating line it cuts the tangent-space t in a
point P which lies on the quadric and therefore on the cone ;

xvi] LINE GEOMETRY 343

P is therefore projected into a point P 1 lying on C, and / into a
line through P'. Thus all the other generators of the quadric are
projected into lines in a which meet the conic C. The generators
form a three-dimensional assemblage and are projected into the
points of the conic C and the complex of lines which meet C.

16-3. Five-dimensional geometry.

It is possible to represent the lines of S 3 by points of S t ,
but the most symmetrical representation requires space of five
dimensions, taking the six homogeneous coordinates of a line in
S 3 as homogeneous coordinates of a point in S 5 .

16-31. We shall therefore sketch further the geometry of five
dimensions so far as it is required for this representation. In S 6
we have points, lines, planes, three-dimensional spaces or three-
flats (S 3 ), and four-flats (S 4 ), represented respectively by freedom-
equations in o, 1, 2, 3, and 4 parameters, and by 5, 4, 3, 2, and
1 linear equations respectively in x , ...,x 5 . The dual elements
are point and four-flat, line and three-flat, plane and plane.

16-32. A quadric variety V£ in S s is cut by a four-flat in a
quadric variety V<? of one dimension fewer, by a three-flat in an
ordinary quadric, by a plane in a conic, and by a line in two
points. If P and Q are conjugate points with respect to V t 2 and
both lie on the quadric variety, all points of the line PQ lie on
F4 2 . The tangent four-flat a at P meets V t 2 in a hypercone with
vertex P. If Q is a point on this hypercone the tangent four-
flat j8 at Q cuts a in a three-flat and this three-flat meets F 4 2 in a
quadric which has the line PQ as a double-line and therefore
consists of two planes which lie entirely in the quadric variety.
Thus a quadric variety in S 6 possesses not only lines but also planes,
two through each line.

16-33. The planes of a Vf, like the lines of a quadric in S 3 ,
are separated into two systems, but two planes of the same system
always intersect in^ point, while two planes of different systems
either intersect in a line or not at all.

Project the Vf from a point O upon it on to a four-flat it. The
tangent four-flat r at O cuts it in a three-flat and meets the
quadric variety in a hypercone V 3 2 with vertex O. This hyper-
cone possesses both lines and planes, and these are projected into

344 LINE GEOMETRY [chap.

the points and lines of a quadric V 2 2 in the space of intersection
of -n- and t. Thus the planes of F 4 a through O, which are also the
planes of the hypercone, are separated into two systems corre-
sponding to the two systems of generators of V 2 2 ; two planes of
the same system have only the point O in common, two planes
of different systems have a line in common. Through each point
O there is a single infinity of planes of each system.

Let a be any plane of V t 2 not passing through O. a cuts t in a
line / which is projected into a line V of V 2 2 , and a is projected
into a plane a' in it, which passes through /'. The planes of ir in
general cut the space of V 2 2 in lines which cut V 2 2 in pairs of
points, those which are the projections of planes of the quadric
V t 2 pass through lines of V 2 2 . Also lines of w which are pro-
jections of lines of F 4 2 pass through points of V 2 2 .

Let a, j3 be two planes of V£ of the same system, not passing
through O. Their projections a', j8' on w cut the space of V 2 2 in
two generating lines of V 2 2 of the same system and therefore
non-intersecting, a' and /}' do not then intersect in a line but
have just one point C in common. As C" is not on V 2 2 it is the
projection of just one point C on V t 2 and this point is common
to oc and /J. Hence two planes of the same system have always
one point in common, and we have proved above that they have
only one point in common.

Let now a, /3 be two planes of V£ of different systems. If they
have one point in common we have proved above that they have
a line in common. We shall now show that they may have no
point in common. Let / and m be two generators of V 2 2 of
different systems, C their point of intersection. Let A be a. point
in it, not in the space of V 2 2 and call the plane (Al) a'. Let B be a
point in it, not in the space of V 2 2 nor in the three-flat {Aim), and
call the plane (Bm) /?'. Then oc' and /}' are the projections of two
planes a and /Jof V? not passing through O, and since a' and /J' do
not lie in the same three-flat they have no line in common, therefore
a and /2 have no line in common and therefore no point in common.

A F 4 2 in S & has 00 4 points, oo 5 lines, and two systems of oo 3
planes. Through each line there are two planes, one of each
system. Through each point there are oo 2 lines and two systems
of 00 planes belonging to a hypercone V 8 2 .

xvi] LINE GEOMETRY 345

16-34. A four-flat cuts a V? in a V 3 * which has in general no
planes. A four-flat which contains a plane of F 4 2 meets V 4 2 in a
hypercone and is therefore a tangent four-flat, the vertex of the
hypercone being the point of contact; the four-flat then contains
oo planes of V t a .

A three-flat cuts V t 2 in a quadric. If the three-flat contains
three concurrent lines of V? it meets V£ in a cone and is a
tangent three-flat, the vertex of the cone being the point of
contact. If the three-flat contains a plane of F 4 2 it meets V£ in
two planes and is a tangent three-flat along the line of inter-
section of the two planes. Similarly a plane may touch a V t 2 at
a point or along a line, or lie entirely in the V^.

A line / cuts a F 4 2 in two points P, Q. The tangent four-flats
at P and Q intersect in a three-flat L which is the polar of the
given line. A plane through PQ and containing a generating line
through P is a tangent-plane, hence through PQ there are oo 2
tangent-planes to Vf. As the point of contact is the intersection
of a generator through P with a generator through Q, all the
points of contact lie in the polar three-flat and their locus is a
quadric. Through the three-flat L there are just two tangent
four-flats, their points of contact being the points in which the
polar line / cuts the quadric. If the line I is a tangent at P, its
polar three-flat L is also a tangent at P and all the tangent-planes
through / lie in L.

The tangent four-flats at the points in which V£ is cut by a
plane/) all pass through another plane/)', the polar of p, and the
tangent four-flats which pass through p all have their points of
contact in p' .

16-4. We take now the six homogeneous coordinates p a , ...
of a line as homogeneous coordinates of a point in S 6 . The
identical relation

PaiPn +P«iPsi +P03P12 = o,

being homogeneous and of the second degree, represents a
quadric variety F 4 2 . We shall denote this by to and the function
on the left by <*>(/>). A line / of iS 3 is then represented by a point
/ on this quadric. We shall use the same symbols in heavy type
to denote the objects of S s which represent objects of S a .

346 LINE GEOMETRY [chap.

16-41. The condition that two lines p, p' should intersect is

and this is the condition that the points/),/)' should be conjugate
with respect to co ; all points on the line pp' then also lie on co,
so that pp' is a line of co. The condition that two lines p, p'
should intersect is therefore that the points p, p' should lie on
the same line of co.

16-42. A plane P in to contains co 2 points, every two of which
are conjugate. It therefore represents a doubly infinite system
of lines of S 3 of which every two intersect, i.e. either a system of
all lines lying in one plane (plane field of lines), or a system of all
lines passing through one point (bundle of lines). These two
systems correspond to the two systems of planes of to ; we shall
call them field-planes and bundle-planes. Two planes of co of the
same system have always one point in common ; this corresponds
to the fact that two bundles of lines or two plane fields of lines
have in each case one line in common. But a plane field of lines
and a bundle of lines have no line in common unless the vertex
of the bundle lies in the plane of the field, in which case they
have a plane pencil in common. A line of to, through which
always two planes of different systems pass, therefore represents
a plane pencil of lines.

16-43. If the lines p and p' intersect, (/><,!+ A/> 01 ', ...), or
shortly (p + Xp'), represents for all values of A a line which cuts
both p and p'. These are represented by the points of the line
pp'. Hence when p and p' are intersecting lines, (p+Xp') re-
presents the plane pencil of lines determined by p and p'. The
vertex of the pencil is represented by the bundle-plane through
pp' and the plane of the pencil by the field-plane through pp'.

Ex. Prove directly that when p and p' are intersecting lines,
(p+Xp') always represents a line and that it passes through the point
of intersection ofp and/)' and lies in the plane determined hyp and/)'.

16-5. A linear complex OotPoi+ ••• =o is represented by the
intersection of to with a four-flat, i.e. by a V 3 2 ; a linear con-
gruence by the intersection with a three-flat, i.e. by a quadric;
and a linear series by the intersection with a plane, i.e. by a conic.

xvi] LINE GEOMETRY 347

16-51. The linear complex a^pm. + ... =o has an invariant,
viz. the simultaneous invariant of this with co, or the condition
that the four-flat should touch co. This is

the tangential equation of co.

16-52. When Q = o the complex is said to bespecial or singular.
The condition Q = o shows that [a^ , . . .] are the coordinates of a
line, and the equation of the complex expresses that the linep cuts
this line. Hence a special linear complex consists of all the lines
which cut a fixed line. It is represented in 5 6 by the intersection
of co with a tangent four-flat, i.e. by a hypercone. The vertex of
this hypercone represents the fixed line or directrix of the complex.

16-53. The polar of a three-flat is a line and this cuts w in two
points d ly d 2 , which are therefore conjugate to all points of the
three-dimensional section. Hence a linear congruence is the
assemblage of all lines which meet two fixed lines d lt a\, its
directrices. The congruence is called hyperbolic or elliptic ac-
cording as these two lines are real or imaginary.

16-531. If the directrices intersect, d x and d z are conjugate, and
the line d x d 2 lies on co. In this case the three-flat, whose inter-
section with to represents the congruence, touches co along this
line. This line is a double-line on the quadric, which therefore
becomes two planes. The congruence then consists of all the
lines which lie in the plane ns^iij) together with all the lines
which pass through the point of intersection P of d\ and c/ 2 . The
directrices d x and d z really lose their identity and can be replaced
by any two lines lying in a and passing through P. This con-
gruence is said to be singular.

16-532. When the directrices coincide, the three-flat touches
co in a point, and its intersection with co is a cone with vertex d.
The congruence thus consists of all plane pencils of lines which
have a line d in common. It is called a parabolic congruence.

16-54. A linear series is represented by the intersection of ta
with a plane u. This plane is determined by three points, and
therefore the linear series is determined by three of its lines. The
polar of u is another plane «', which also is determined by three

348 LINE GEOMETRY [chap.

points. To this corresponds another linear series ; and since every
point of u is conjugate to every point of «', every line of the one
series cuts every line of the other series. Hence a linear series is
the assemblage of all lines which meet three fixed lines, i.e. a
regulns. The two series, corresponding to the two mutually polar
planes, are the two reguli which belong to the same quadric.

If the plane u touches co at a point p, u' also touches co at p.
The two linear series have then a line/) in common, u meets co in
a pair of lines I, m, and u' meets co in a pair of lines V, rri. Each
linear series consists of two pencils with a common line. Since /
is conjugate to /' and to m', the planes //' and Irri lie in co ; these
are the bundle- and field-plane through I, and similarly ml and
mm' are the field- and bundle-plane respectively through m.
Hence this linear series consists of two pencils {A, a) and (B, /?),
the line AB which joins the vertices coinciding with the line of
intersection a£ of the two planes ; and the polar series consists
of the two pencils (A, jS) and (B, a).

If the plane u touches to along a line I the series degenerates
further to two coincident pencils. The polar plane «' touches co
along the same line and determines the same pencil. The vertex
and plane of the pencil are represented by the bundle-plane and
the field-plane through Z.

Finally if « is a plane of co it represents either a bundle of lines
through a point, or a plane field of lines.

In general the lines common to two linear complexes form a
linear congruence, and the lines common to three linear com-
plexes form a regulus, but the congruence and the regulus may
be specialised in one of the ways noted above.

16-55. Three points I, m, n of to determine a conic on a> ; three
lines I, m, n, in S 3 , determine a regulus. Four points on to de-
termine a three-flat cutting co in a quadric; four lines in S 3
determine a congruence, the directrices of the congruence are
the two transversals of the four lines. Five points on co determine
a four-flat ; five lines in S 3 determine a linear complex.

16*6. Polar properties of a linear complex.

16-61. Let C denote the four-flat in S s which corresponds to
a linear complex C. To the lines of C which pass through a point

xvi] LINE GEOMETRY 349

P correspond the points common to the four-flat C and the
bundle-plane P of co. But P cuts C in a line I, and this represents
a plane pencil. The plane of the pencil {polar plane of P) is
represented by the field-plane p through I, the point P (pole)
being represented by the bundle-plane P through I.

16-611. It will be more convenient to use the symbols
«!,..., * 6 for the line-coordinates p iS . The six equations »i=o,
..., x 6 = o represent six four-flats of reference. These intersect
in fifteen three-flats, twenty planes, fifteen lines, and six points,
and form a figure called a simplex, the analogue of a triangle and
a tetrahedron. A change of the simplex of reference is effected
by a linear transformation of the coordinates, and the funda-
mental quadric w may be represented by a general homogeneous
equation co(x) = o of the second degree in x lt ..., x 9 .

16-621. A linear complex is represented by the two equations
a>(x) = o, Za#=o.
The condition that it should be singular is that the four-flat
?iax=o should touch o>; this is represented by the tangential
equation of the fundamental quadric with the coordinates a of
the four-flat substituted, i.e. £2(a) = o.

16-622. A linear congruence is represented by three equations
{t>(x) = o, Hax=o, T,bx=o.
The directrices are represented by the two points in which to
is cut by the line joining the poles of the four-flats ~Lax=o and

?)0
Zfoc=o. The coordinates of the pole of Za#=o are A t =~—,

and freedom-equations of the line joining the two poles are

Xi^XAi+fiBf (t=i, ..., 6).
Substituting in a>(*) = o we obtain a quadratic in A//x,

A»cu(i4)+V214 d ^+n*o>(B)=o,
and this is equivalent to

A a Q (a) + AjuSa ^ + /»» Q (6) = o.

If Q(a) = o, Cl(b) = o, and Sa-^r-=o, the directrices are in-
determinate and the congruence is singular.

35° LINE GEOMETRY [chap.

16-623. A linear series or regulus is represented by four
equations wW=0> z ax=0> 2fo=o, 2c*=o.

The complementary regulus is determined by

«(*)-* * l -A g5 . + Mg g- + v^ (,-i 6).

Substituting these values for *, in co(x) = o we have a homo-
geneous quadratic in A, p, v which may be represented by a conic
in a (A, //,, v)-plane. When this conic breaks up into two lines the
regulus breaks up into two pencils. The condition for this is
therefore that the discriminant of the quadratic

/. da da da\

should vanish.

16-63. Polar lines with respect to a linear complex.

Consider a linear complex C and any line /. The complex is
represented by the intersection of co with a four-flat C, and the
line by a point / of co. The points on / and the planes through /
are represented respectively by the bundle-planes and the field-
planes of co which pass through the point /. These all lie in the
tangent four-flat T to to at I. Now T cuts the four-flat C in a
three-flat A, and through A there is a second tangent four-flat
T" to w touching it at the point V . A cuts co in a quadric V 2 2 , and
the planes of w which pass through either / or /' cut A in lines
of this quadric. The bundle-planes through /and the field-planes
through /' contain the lines of one regulus of V 2 2 , the field-planes
through / and the bundle-planes through /' contain the lines of
the other regulus. Hence the polar-planes, with respect to the
complex, of all points on the line / pass through /', and vice
versa, so that / and /' are polar lines with respect to the linear
complex.

The quadric F 2 a in which A cuts co represents the linear con-
gruence consisting of lines of the complex which cut /; / is one
directrix of this congruence and /' is the other.

The lines joining pairs of points I, V which represent polar
lines with respect to a linear complex C all pass through one

xvi] LINE GEOMETRY 35i

point, the polar of the four-flat C with respect to to. Any line of
the complex is polar to itself.

Ex. Show that the two directrices of the linear congruence com-
mon to two given linear complexes are polar lines with respect to
each of the complexes.

16-64. Conjugate linear complexes.

If the four-flats C and C are conjugate with respect to o» the
corresponding linear complexes C and C" are said to be
conjugate*.

If O and O' are the poles of the conjugate four-flats C and C,
O is conjugate to O', C passes through O', and C through O.
A self-conjugate complex is singular, for if O = O', O lies on a>
and C is the tangent four-flat at O. If one complex C is singular,
so that O lies on w, the four-flat C corresponding to any con-
jugate complex passes through O, hence the directrix O of the
singular complex is a line of the other. If both complexes are
singular and conjugate, OO' lies in co and represents a plane
pencil belonging to both complexes; the two directrices O and
O' intersect and the common pencil is that determined by the
intersecting directrices.

16-65. If / is a line common to two linear complexes C and C",
a homography is set up on the line / by the poles P, P', with
respect to C and C", of a variable plane/) through /. The homo-
graphy is not in general symmetrical, lip' is the polar of P with
respect to C", and P" the pole of p' with respect to C, P" will
generally be different from P'. Project from the point I on to a
four-flat it. The lines and planes of a> through I are projected
into the points and lines of a quadric Q whose three-flat T is the
projection of the tangent four-flat r to cu at I. The four-flats C
and C, which pass through I, are projected into three-flats which
cut T in two planes C t and C/. If O is the pole of C it lies in r
as its projection O x lies in T. The polar of the line Ol is the
three-flat (Ct) ; every point of Ol is conjugate to every point of
(Ct) with respect to co, and therefore, cutting these by tt, O x is
the pole of C x with respect to Q.

• Klein used the term " in involution," Hudson used " apolar, " Baker uses
"apolar" or "conjugate."

Fig. 47

352 LINE GEOMETRY [chap.

Through / take a field-plane p of a>. This cuts C and C in
lines a and a', and through these we
have the bundle-planes P and P'.
The bundle-plane P cuts C and C
in a and 6', and the bundle-plane P'
cuts C and C in 6 and a'. In the
projection (Fig. 47) C and C are re-
presented by plane sections of Q ; the
planes p, P and P' by generators of
the quadric Q ; and the lines a, a', b
and 6' by points where these cut C
and C. Corresponding to the homo-
graphy of points P, P' on a fixed
line /, we have a homography of
generators P, P' of the quadric Q when the generator p is
varied, and the condition that the homography be involutory is
that 66' should be a generator of Q ; then the lines ab and a'b'
are polarswith respect to Q and the planes Cand Care conjugate.

Hence the homography on lis involutory only if the complexes
are conjugate.

Ex. 1. Two non-intersecting pairs of polar lines with respect to
a linear complex belong to the same regulus.

For the corresponding points /, I' and tn, tn' of w lie on two lines
through O and therefore all lie in one plane.

Ex. 2. If two lines / and m intersect so also do their polars.

16-7. Just as the equation of a quadric can be expressed by
the sum of four squares, by taking a self -polar tetrahedron as
frame of reference, so a quadric in S 5 is expressed by the sum of
six squares when referred to a self-polar simplex. By suitable
choice of unit-point the equation can finally be reduced to the

IOrm *.2i v 2j_ v 2j_ v 2i v 2j_ v 2 n

The expression for the identical relation connecting the six
homogeneous coordinates of a line can, in fact, be reduced to this
form by taking new coordinates which are linear functions of the
old. One such transformation, which is due to Klein, is

Pol = **1 ~^" **4 > Poi = %2 ' **6 ) PoS = ^3 • **6 >
p2fl ~%1 ^4 > p31 === ^2 ^5 > Pl2 = ^"3 ^6 •

xvi] LINE GEOMETRY 353

Then the six linear complexes x 1 =o, ..., * 6 =o are all conjugate
in pairs. (It is not possible by a real transformation to reduce the
equation to the sum of six squares. It can always be reduced
to the form a 1 * 1 2 + ... +a 6 « 6 2 = o; thus writing J ft tt =*i+*4,
p23=x 1 —x i , etc., we have

<v 2 1 iu\ 2 1 -v» 2 __ v 2 __ v 2 __ \t 2 — — fv
**1 T tA-2 " **3 **4 **5 *6 — *

So long as the transformations are real, half the coefficients
«!,..., a e must be positive and the other half negative. This is an
instance of Sylvester's Law of Inertia. Geometrically, when the
coordinates are real the quadric has real planes only when the
signs are three + and three — ; when four are of one sign and
two of the other, the quadric has real lines but no real planes ;
when five are of one sign and one of the other sign, the quadric
has real points but no real lines or planes; and when the signs
are all the same, the quadric has no real points.)

A quadratic complex is represented by a homogeneous
quadratic equation U=o in the six line-coordinates, and in S s
is represented by the intersection of the quadric a> with another

U+Xco = o
all correspond to the same quadratic complex, so that U by itself
has no particular significance. We shall denote the quadratic
complex by K, and the three-dimensional variety in S & which
represents it by K. In general U and w have a common self-
polar simplex ; taking this as frame of reference we can write
oi = ~Lx 2 , U=Tikx 2 .

16-81. The intersection K of U and <a is a three-dimensional
variety which is cut by an arbitrary plane in four points. Hence
a quadratic complex has four lines in common with an arbitrary
regulus. A special quadratic complex consists of the tangent-lines
to a quadric, hence, as a particular case, we have the result:
There are four generators of each system of one given quadric which

All the lines of a quadratic complex which pass through a
given point P form a quadric cone, and all the lines which lie ia
sag 23

354 LINE GEOMETRY [chap.

a given plane p envelop a conic. A plane P lying in o> cuts U in
a conic, and this conic lies in all quadrics of the linear system
U+Xca. If P is a bundle-plane the conic in P represents a
quadric cone, the complex cone, and if it is a field-plane the
conic represents a conic-envelope, the complex conic.

16-82. If the quadric cone through P has a double-line and
therefore breaks up into two planes, the point P is called a
singular point, and if the conic in the plane p has a double-
tangent and therefore breaks up into two pencils, p is called a
singular plane. The planes of tu which correspond to singular
points and planes all touch K, and envelop in o> a certain variety
S, which represents the locus of singular points and the envelope
of singular planes. This surface S is called the singular surface of
the quadratic complex. We shall show presently that it is of
order 4 and class 4, i.e. that it is cut by an arbitrary line in four
points, and has four tangent-planes through an arbitrary line.

16-83. Polar of a line with respect to a quadratic complex.

The polar four-flat K n of a point 7= (y) of ca with respect to
the quadric V has the equation

while the polar four-flat of I with respect to co is the tangent
four-flat t at J, and its equation is

oy

The polar four-flats of / with respect to the quadrics of the linear
system U+Xa> form a pencil of four-flats

*{ X dy: + Xx dy-) =

all passing through the three-flat L of intersection of A v and t.
This represents a linear congruence, the polar congruence of the
line / with respect to the complex. The pole of r with respect to
co is the point of contact /; let l v ={u) be the pole of K v with
respect to o>. Then the directrices of the congruence are re-
presented by the two points in which the line ll v cuts ca, one of

xvi] LINE GEOMETRY 355

these being / itself. Taking the canonical equations a) = Ear 2 and
U=1,kx 2 , u i =k i y i . The points on the line ll v joining (y) and
(m) are given by

x i =y i +>lt i y t ,

and the points of intersection of this line with to are determined

E(;y +AA:j) 2 = o.

But Ey 2 =o, hence one root is A=o, and the other is given by

AS#y+2Sfcy 2 =o.

16-831. If (y)szl is a line of the complex, Efcy 2 =o, and the
second directrix of the polar congruence coincides with I. In
this case the congruence (which is parabolic) is called the tangent
linear congruence for the line /. l v is conjugate to I with respect
to a) and lies on t, and the line ll v lies on t.

16-84. Further, if l v lies on a>, 2k a y a =o; the line ll n lies on
a> and represents a plane pencil of iS 3 . The directrices of the
tangent linear congruence become indeterminate; all the four-
flats of the pencil

H X dy- + Xx dy-r°'
i.e. 2kyx+XEyx=o, are tangent to <o at points of the line ll v .
The tangent congruence is now singular, and consists of a plane
pencil containing /, its vertex and plane being represented by
the bundle-plane P and field-plane p through the line ll v . In
this case the line I is called a singular line. We shall see that P
and p represent a singular point and a singular plane incident
with this line.

Let (z) be a point on one of the two planes P, p, so that
Saf a =o, 2^=o, Efcys=o, 2y 2 =o, S^y 2 =o, S#y=o,
then all the points on one of these planes are represented by

Xi = Aar f + i*y t + vktfi .
This plane meets K or U at points (*) where Sfev a =o, i.e.

A 2 Efcr 2 + v 2 SA s y+ 2AvS k*yz=o.
Since this quadratic in A, fi, v breaks up into factors the plane
touches K and therefore corresponds to a singular point or a

23-2

Fig. 48

356 LINE GEOMETRY [chap.

singular plane. A point (x) thus determined is conjugate to
/= (y) both with respect to w and with respect to U, for

2 xy = AS yz + /*£ y* + vZ ky 2 = o

and 'Lkxy=X£iky2+(JLLky 2 +vLk*y*=o.

Therefore the two planes P and p through ll v both touch K
along lines passing through /. These
lines of contact represent two pencils
of lines of the complex, one with vertex
P and the other with plane p, and the
singular line I belongs to each pencil ;
the line ll v represents another pencil
of lines of the complex having vertex
P and plane/*. P is therefore a singular
point, and p a singular plane. The
complex cone at P breaks up into the
plane p and another plane passing through the singular line /;
the complex conic in p breaks up into the point P and another
point lying on /.
The coordinates of singular lines (y) of the complex satisfy the

three equations

Zy=o, Zky i =o, ~Lk*y 2 =o.

Hence the singular lines form a two-dimensional system or con-
gruence represented by the points I common to these three
quadrics, co, Uand V, say. (V is the reciprocal of a> with respect
to U.) They are tangents to the singular surface S.

16-85. We consider now the singular points on a given line /,
and the singular planes through /. These are represented by
bundle-planes and field-planes of w passing through the point /,
and touching K. The whole assemblage of lines and planes of a>
which pass through / form a hypercone V lying in the tangent-
four-flat t to (o at /. Denote as before by L the three-flat common
to all the polar four-flats of I with respect to the quadrics of the
linear system U+Xzo. L cuts V in an ordinary quadric V t , and
every quadric U+Xu> in a quadric V 1 . The planes of w which
pass through / cut L in the generators of the quadric V x , bundle-
planes corresponding to one system of generators, and field-
planes to the other. In order that one such plane should touch

xvi] LINE GEOMETRY 357

K, the corresponding generator of V x must touch V x . Now a
regulus has four lines which touch a given quadric, hence there
are four bundle-planes and four field-planes of <o through the
point / which touch V x and therefore K, and for each the conic
breaks up into two lines. Hence on any line / there are four
singular points of the complex, and through / there are four
singular planes. The singular surface S is therefore of order 4
and class 4.

The coordinates of a singular line of the quadratic complex

2* 2 =o, 2&e 2 = o, (1)

are determined by these and the further equation 1,k 2 x* = o.
(kx) is then a line, and the two lines (x) and (kx) intersect and
determine a point P and a plane p which are both singular. Now
we can obtain a single infinity of quadratic complexes whose
singular lines are lines of the pencil (P, p). If (y) is any line of
the pencil determined by (x) and (kx)

yi=kiXi-Xx { (2)

and x i =(k i —X)- 1 y i .

Sy=o, Z(ft-A)-y=o, (3)

in which A is given a particular value. Its singular lines are de-
termined by the two equations (3) and 2 (A— A)- 2 _y 2 =o.
Now 2(&-A)- 2 ;y 2 =2* 2 ,

2(Ai-A)- 1 : j/ 2 =2(£-A)tf 2 =2/b; 2 -A2* 2 ,
2y 2 = 2 A 2 * 2 - 2 A2 kx 2 + A 2 S x\

Hence if (y) is a singular line of the complex (3), 2ar 2 =o,
2&*; 2 = o and 2£ 2 # 2 = o, so that (x) is a singular line of the com-
plex (1) ; and vice versa. There is one line of the pencil

y i =k i x i —iix i ,

viz. that for which j«=A, which is a singular line of the complex

(3) ; P and p are a singular point and a singular plane for both

complexes.

Hence all the quadratic complexes of the system

2* < 2 = o, 2(* < -A)- 1 * < 2 =o,

358 LINE GEOMETRY [chap.

for all values of A, have the same singular surface. These form a
co-singular system. The original complexes must be included in
this series. We have

and another quadric of the linear system is

i.e. Sfec 2 +iSA 2 x 2 +...=o,

which becomes 2foc 2 =o

as A -* oo.

The co-singular complexes are represented in S 6 by the inter-
section of Sx 2 =o with quadrics of the system

S(A-A)- 1 * 2 =o.

These form a linear tangential system. Instead of this system we
may take

i.e. Si%(^-A)- 1 * 2 =o.

The tangential equation of this is

S(*-A)*-^»-o,

i.e. S| 2 -AE| 2 /£=o.

E£ 2 =o is the tangential equation of w, and S£ 2 /£=o that of V
or 2fce 2 =o. All the quadrics of this system touch all the four-
flats which touch both to and U. We may thus compare a co-
singular system of quadratic complexes with a confocal system

16-9. We have considered the general quadratic complex in
which the singular surface S is of order 4 and class 4, and
possesses 16 nodes or points at which the tangent-lines form a
quadric cone, and sixteen tropes or tangent-planes in which the
tangent-lines envelop a conic. This type of surface is called a
Kummer surface.

xvi] LINE GEOMETRY 359

For quadratic complexes of special form the singular surface
becomes specialised.

The complex being represented by two quadratic equations
o>(*) = o and U(x) =o, consider the discriminant of the linear

s y stem t/-Ao>=o.

This is an equation of the sixth degree in A, and for each root of
the equation the quadric is specialised as a cone. The vertices of
these six cones are the vertices of the common self-polar simplex.
In the general case the six roots are all distinct.

Fs ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 + dw 2 = o.
We have Us adx? + bdx 2 2 + cdx 3 2 + bcx t 2 + cax 6 2 + abx 6 2 = o
with ca s2(« 1 ar 4 +« a a; 6 +*ja; 6 )=o,
where *i = Ah> •••» x t =p wt ....

The discriminant of U— Ao» is (X 2 —abcd) i =o, so that the roots
are in two sets of three. Hence the six hypercones reduce to two.
Taking A= + ^{abcd), U—Xa> becomes

W(ad) Xl - V(bc)xJ 2 +{V(bd)x 2 - V{ca) X& ) 2

+{v'M«s-v'W*(} ! =o

which represents a specialised hypercone having a double-plane
C as edge determined by the three equations

\/(ad)x 1 = -v/(&0#4> V(bd)x2= \/(ca)x s , \/{cd)x s = \/(ab)x g .

The plane C cuts U and a> in the same conic ; U and to touch at
all points of this conic. Similarly taking A= — \/(abcd), we ob-
tain another conic C at all points of which V and at have contact.
The two planes C and C are conjugate with respect to both w
and V, and the two conies represent the two reguli of the given

The singular surface is the quadric F itself, taken twice, and
every tangent, i.e. every line of the complex, is singular.

16-92. The quadratic complex of tangent-lines to a cone, or
of lines through a conic, is represented by the intersection of <o

360 LINE GEOMETRY [chap.

with a hypercone having a double-plane as edge. In particular
the complex of lines through the conic

x 2 +y 2 +z*=o, a>=o
is (see 11*71)

U=x 1 i +x i *+x s i =o, w = 2(x 1 x i +x 2 x i +x 3 x e )=o.
The discriminant of t/+Aa> is A e =o, so that all six roots are
equal. The double-plane * 1 =o, x 2 —o, x 8 =o is a plane of w.

16-93. The tetrahedral complex.

There is one other quadratic complex of special interest, the
complex of lines which cut the four planes of a given tetrahedron
in a fixed cross-ratio. This is called the tetrahedral complex.

Taking the tetrahedron as frame of reference let (p) be a
variable line determined by the two points {x', y', z' , to') and
(x", y", z", to"). Freedom-equations of the line are

This cuts the four planes x=o, y=o, z=o, w=o where A has
the values ^*", y'/y", z'jz", to'/zv",

and the cross-ratio of these four numbers is

x'/x'-z'lz" j y'lf-z'lz" _p 13 IP*

x'lx" - w'/w"/ y'/y" - w'/w" ~p 10 / p w '

The tetrahedral complex is therefore represented by the equation

Poip3i + kpoip23 = °>
where k is constant. Taking with this

o> s Poip2s +P02P31 +P03P12 = o
we can represent it symmetrically by

w = o, U= ap ol p w + bpwpn + cpwpn - o.
If the cross-ratio of the range formed by the intersections of the
line (p) with the planes x=o, y=o, z=o, w=o, in this order, is
denoted by (XY, ZW) we have

(XY, ZW) = (a- c)/(b -c).
Through the line (p) there is a sheaf of four planes passing
through the vertices of the tetrahedron. The equation of the
plane through the given line and the vertex [1, o, o, o] is

«i =Psoy +P<&z +Psa w = o-

xvi] LINE GEOMETRY 361

Similarly u^ =p x x+p 01 z+p ls w= o,

m, =£ 20 »+/>oij> +pnw = o,

Us and m 4 can be expressed in terms of m x and «g, thus

/>0S«8- -/»01«1+/ , 02"21
/•03"4= — />31 "1-^23 «2-

Hence the cross-ratio

(1^, MsM4) = (o, <x>;pdpoi, -pjpai)

= -&^=(XY,ZW).
PoiPw

The discriminant of £7— Aco is (A— a) 2 (A— 6) 2 (A— c) 2 =o, so that

the roots consist of three pairs. The three hypercones have each

a double-line.

16*94. The harmonic complex of lines cut harmonically by

F = ax i + by i + cz 2 + dzv 2 = o
and F'=a'x i +by+c'z*+d'w i =Q

is U= (be' + b'c)pz? + ...+ (ad' + a'd)p ^ + . . . = o,

U> =2(/> 2S /)oi+Al/ > 02+^12/ ) Os) = 0.

The discriminant of U+Xco is

{A 2 - (be' + b'c) (ad' + a'd)} {A 2 - (ca' + c'a) (bd' + b'd)}

x {A 2 - (ab' + a'b) (cd' + c'd)} = o.

The six roots are distinct, but they form three pairs equal but of
opposite sign. This complex was studied by Battaglini as an
example of the general quadratic complex ; but it was shown by
Klein that while the general quadratic complex involves nine-
teen independent constants, Battaglini's complex depends only
on seventeen.

The singular surface of a harmonic complex is a particular
form of Rummer's surface called the Tetrahedroid. A special case
of the harmonic complex is afforded when one of the quadrics
becomes the circle at infinity; it is then the locus of intersection
of pairs of orthogonal tangent-planes to a quadric. This is called
Painvin's complex, and its singular surface, when the quadric is
an ellipsoid, is Fresnel 's Wave Surface.

36a LINE GEOMETRY [chap.

16-95. EXAMPLES.

i. Show that the assemblage of normals to a given quadric
forms a congruence of order 6 and class 2.

Verify that on any plane section there are two points the
normals at which to the curve of section are normals to the
quadric : viz. the points where the given plane section is cut by
the diametral plane conjugate to the normal to the given plane.

2. Show that the assemblage of all normals to quadrics of a
confocal system form a tetrahedral complex, the planes of the
tetrahedron being the three principal planes and the plane at
infinity.

3. If (p), (q), (r) are the coordinates of three lines and the

matrix ,- ^

P01—P12

r 01 ... r 12
is of rank 2, show that the lines are coplanar.

4. If (J>), (q), (r), (s) are the coordinates of four lines and the

'Poi--Pli'
?01 ••• ?12
r 01 '•• r is

. s 01 ... s 12 J
is of rank 3, show that the lines belong to the same regulus.

5. If (p) are the Plucker coordinates of a line which is an axis
of some plane section of the quadric ax 2 + by 2 +cz 2 =i, prove that

Poip2a _ Poipsi _ Po3p\2
a(b—c) b(c—a) c(a—b)'

6. The condition of tangency of a line [/, m, n, A, (i, v] and a
quadric being given by T=o, where T is quadratic in the co-
ordinates of the line, show that the coordinates of the polar line

. , dT dT
are proportional to -^-, ..., -»^, ....

Prove that if four lines are mutually conjugate (each meeting
the polar of any other) then their two transversals are also con-
jugate. How may the double-six of lines be thus constructed ?

(Math. Trip. II, 1913.)

matrix

xvi] LINE GEOMETRY 363

7. Show that the lines common to three linear complexes
given by

and two similar equations, generate a quadric ; and find linear
complexes containing the other system of generators.

Show that the condition for a line to touch the quadric is

where

■'11 'u 'is -*m

= 0,

■'21 ■'28 ■'23 ■"•2

■'31 ■'38 •'33 -^8

Ki K 2 K 3 O

2l 12 sOi(t i + &i/2 2 + Ciy»+ Oa«i+ hfii+ <*7i«

(Math. Trip. II, 1913.)

CHAPTER XVII

ALGEBRAIC SURFACES

17*1. An algebraic surface is the locus of points (real or
imaginary) whose homogeneous coordinates x, y, z, w satisfy an
equation F(x, y, z, «))=o, where F denotes a rational integral
algebraic function. If F breaks up into rational factors the sur-
face is reducible. We shall generally suppose that it is irreducible.

17-11. Considering first the equation written in non-homo-
geneous cartesian coordinates x,y, z, let it be arranged in groups
of terms according to their degree

Fn+F~*+ ...+F 2 +F 1 +F =o,
each term being homogeneous in x, y, z t its degree being in-
dicated by the subscript. Any line through the origin is repre-
sented by x=lp, y=mp, z=np, where p is the radius-vector and
/, m, n are direction-ratios. When these expressions are sub-
stituted for x, y, z the equation becomes

P n 4>n+P n - I 4>n-1+ ». +P 2 <Pz + P<t>l + <f>0 = O,

where <f> r denotes a homogeneous polynomial in I, m, n of degree
r. Hence an arbitrary line through O cuts the surface in n points.
This number n, the degree of the equation F=o, is independent
of the frame of reference, and is called the order of the surface.
Any plane section of the surface is an algebraic curve of order n,
for any line in, its plane meets the surface, and therefore the
curve, in n points.

17-12. If F =<f> =o, one root of the equation inp isp=o, and
O is a point on the surface. A second root will be p=o if also
<£i=o. This is a linear homogeneous equation in /, m, n, say
al+bm + cn = o, and represents an assemblage of directions
through O belonging to one plane ax+by + cz = o. Every line
through O in this plane meets the surface in two coincident
points at O, and the plane is called the tangent-plane at O. Thus
when ^=0 the surface passes through O and the equation of
the tangent-plane at O is 2^=0.

chap.xvii] ALGEBRAIC SURFACES 365

17-13. The tangent-plane at O cuts the surface in a curve which
has a double-point at O, for every line through in this plane
meets the surface, and therefore the curve, in two coincident
points there.

17-14. There are in general two lines through O, in the
tangent-plane, which meet the surface, and therefore the curve
of section, in three coincident points at O. These are the tangents
to the curve at its double-point. They are called the inflexional
or principal tangents to the surface at O. Their directions are
determined by the two equations 0i=o and ^> 2 =o. Now F 2 =o
represents a quadric cone, therefore the tangents to the curve
at O are the generators of this cone which lie in the tangent-plane.
According as these lines are real and distinct, imaginary, or
coincident, the point O is called a hyperbolic, elliptic, or parabolic
point. A hyperboloid of one sheet and an ellipsoid are examples
of surfaces whose points are all respectively hyperbolic or elliptic.

If we take the plane z=o as the tangent-plane at O, the
equation of the surface is

F = z + ax* + by 2 + cz % + zfyz + zgzx + 2 hxy + higher terms,
and the inflexional tangents at O are

z=o, ax 2 +by 2 +zhxy=o.
The point O is then hyperbolic, parabolic, or elliptic according
as h*-ab is positive, zero, or negative.

17-15. Equation of the tangent-plane at a given point.

Let P' = (x') be the given point and P=(x) any other point.
Then a variable point on the line PP' is represented by (Xx+x r ).
We find where this line cuts the surface by substituting in the
equation of the surface and then expanding by Taylor 's theorem :

o=F{Xx+x', ...)
^F(x',y',z',w')+X{x~+...)

This is the equation of the «th degree whose roots determine the
n points in which the line cuts the surface. Since (#') is on the
surface, F{x',y', z', io') = o and one root is A=o.

366 ALGEBRAIC SURFACES [chap.

17-16. A second root is also A=o if, in addition,

dF , dF dF dF

If P==(x) is a variable point, this equation represents the locus
of points such that PP' is a tangent at F, i.e. the tangent-plane
at (*').

17-17. Two tangents at O are said to be conjugate when they are
harmonic conjugates with respect to the principal tangents at O. If
we take the tangent-plane at O as z=o, and Ox, Oy as a pair of con-
jugate tangents, the equation of the surface is

F = z + ax* + by 2 + cz 2 + 2fyz + zgzx + higher terms,

the principal tangents being z = o, ax 2 + by 2 =o. The tangent-plane
at a point P=[Bx, o, o] on Ox, very near to O, is (neglecting ox*)

2aSx.x + (i +2g8x) z=o,

and this cuts z = o in Oy.

Hence each of two conjugate tangents at O is the limiting position
of the intersection of the tangent-plane at O with the tangent-plane
at a point very near O on the other tangent.

In the case of a parabolic point O the two principal tangents at O
coincide, and this tangent t is conjugate to any other tangent at O ;
in this case the tangent-plane at any point P very near to O ultimately
passes through t, and if P lies on t, near O, the tangent-plane at P
ultimately coincides with that at O. The tangent-plane at the para-
bolic point O is therefore said to be a stationary plane.

The inflexional tangents become indeterminate if the quadric cone
F % breaks up into the tangent-plane and another plane, i.e. when F t
contains F x as a factor. Then the three lines in which the cubic cone
F s meets the tangent-plane meet the surface in four coincident
points. The curve of section of the tangent-plane at O has then a
triple point at O. The point O is called a point of osculation.

17-2. Curvature.

The distinction between hyperbolic and elliptic points can be
explained with reference to curvature. Consider a section of the
surface by a plane passing through a fixed line ON, and let OT,
OT be the two inflexional tangents through O. The plane NOT
meets the surface in a curve which is met by OT in three coin-
cident points at O, hence O is a point of inflexion on the curve,
and the section has zero curvature at O. As the plane is rotated
about ON, the curvature of the section becomes reversed, or

xvn] ALGEBRAIC SURFACES 367

changed in sign, when the plane passes through OT or 07". In
the case of an elliptic point all sections through O have curvature
of the same sign.

Ex, If every point of a surface is a parabolic point, prove that the
surface is a developable.

17-21. Meunier's Theorem.

We shall assume now rectangular coordinates with z = o as the
tangent-plane at O, and therefore Oz z
the normal ; and first we shall consider
sections through a fixed tangent Ox.

Let the plane of section make an
angle <f> with the normal plane xOz.
Take any point P on the curve of
section, near O ; let L be its projection
on Ox and N on xOy. A definite circle is
determined which passes through P and
touches Ox at O, and in the limit when
P approaches O this circle becomes the
osculating circle or circle of. curvature of the curve of section.
If its radius is p, then approximately LP(2p—LP)=x 2 . But
LP=zsec(f>, hence

/» = Lim %(x z /z) cos<f>.

Substituting y = z tan<f> in the equation of the surface

z+ax*+by a +cz 2 +zfyz+2gzx+2hxy+ ... =0,
dividing by z and letting * and x-»owe find

p= cos<A.

Hence of all sections through a given tangent the normal
section has the greatest radius of curvature, and if this is
denoted by />„

p = p n COS<f>.

This is known as Meunier's Theorem*.

Fig. 49

• Jean Baptiste Marie Charles Meusnier (1754-93): Memoire tur la
courbure des surfaces, 1776.

368 ALGEBRAIC SURFACES [chap.

17-22. Measure of curvature.

We consider next the sections through the normal. Let the
plane of section make an angle 6 with the plane of xz; let K be
the projection of P on the plane of xy and OK= r. Then we find
by a similar method the radius of curvature

p = Lim %r 2 /z,

r-j-0

and the curvature of the section

ct=/3 _1 = - z(a cos 2 + zh cosO sind + b sin. 2 d).

If O is an elliptic point, h 2 —ab<o and a is always of the same
sign ; but if O is hyperbolic, a vanishes and changes sign when
the plane passes through one of the inflexional tangents OT,
OT'. In either case a acquires a maximum or minimum value

when tzn z6=zh/(a-b).

The two planes which correspond to these directions bisect the
angles between ZOT and ZOT' and are at right angles. If a x
and a 2 are the maximum and minimum values we find

a 1 (7 2 =\(ab-h i ) and i((r 1 + o- 2 )= -(a + b),

both of which are invariants of the quadratic expression

ax 2 +zhxy+by a

for orthogonal transformations. ff x a 2 is called the Gaussian
measure of curvature* of the surface at O, and the positive value
°f i(°i + a i) i s called the mean curvature. At an elliptic point the
measure of curvature is positive, and at a hyperbolic point it is
negative. At a parabolic point one of the curvatures is zero,
corresponding to the section which contains the inflexional
tangent, and the measure of curvature is zero.

A quadric surface has its measure of curvature everywhere of
the same sign, but in general on a surface there are regions of
positive curvature and regions of negative curvature, and these
are separated by an inflexional curve or locus of parabolic points.
A familiar example is the anchor-ring which is generated by a
circle of radius b rotating about an axis in its plane at a distance

* Carl Friedrich Gauss (1777-1855): Disquisitiones generates circa super-
ficies curvas (1827). English trans, by J. C. Morehead and A. M. Hiltebeitel,
Princeton Univ. 1902.

xvii] ALGEBRAIC SURFACES 369

a from the centre. A concentric sphere of radius \/(a 2 +b 2 ) cuts
the surface in two circles which separate the outer positively
curved region from the inner region of negative curvature.

17-3. Polars.

The equation (17-16), whether the point (x') lies on the sur-
face or not, represents a definite plane associated with the point
(x') ; this is called the polar-plane oi (x'). The equation may be
expressed in the following notation

(xD x .)F=o,

where (xD lf ) mx *- + y £ + ,£ + „£.

This is called the polarising operator. A repetition of this operator
gives / r> \2 2 8a , , 32

(xD x .) 2 = X 2 ^- r + ... +2ZW-,

dx'* " "dz'dw"

since x, y, z, w are independent of x', y', z', w'. The equation
(17-15) can then be written

F(x',y', z', w')+\{xD«)F+%\*{xD 7 ,yF+ ... =0
or e KlxD x' ) F=o.

Equating to zero the coefficient of A 2 we obtain a quadratic
equation (xDJ) % F= o, which represents a quadric called the
polar quadric of (x') ; and similarly a series of polar surfaces is
obtained by equating to zero the coefficients of the various
powers of A. It is conventional to reckon the series of polars
from the end, and the first polar is a surface of order n—i re-
presented by the equation

x ' d l + > d l +z > d l +w > d I =0
dx * 9y fa $w or (x'D x )F=o. The rth polar of (x') with respect to F is (x'D x ) r F= o, and the rth polar of (#') with respect to this surface is (x'D x ) r+8 F=o, which is the (r + s)th polar of (x r ) with respect to F. In particular the polar plane of (x') with respect to F is also the polar plane of (x') with respect to any of the polar surfaces of (x') ; and if (x') lies on F, so that its polar plane is the tangent-plane at (x'), this is also the tangent-plane to each of the polar surfaces. Hence all the polar surfaces of a point on F touch one another at this point. SAG 24 370 ALGEBRAIC SURFACES [chap. 17-31. The first polar of P(x') passes through the points of contact of all the tangent planes or lines through P. Let (#j) be the point of contact of a tangent-plane through P; the equation of the tangent-plane at this point is (xD Xl )F= o. Since it passes through P, (x'D^F^o, hence (xj lies on the locus (x'D x )F=o which is the first polar of P. 17-32. The Hessian. Returning to the section of the surface by the tangent-plane at a point P, the tangents to the curve of section at the double- point P are lines which meet the curve, and therefore the surface, in three coincident points at P. These are determined therefore by the two equations (xD„)F=o, (xD,)*F=o, which represent respectively the tangent-plane at P and the polar quadric of P. But since P lies on the surface the polar quadric touches the tangent-plane at P and its two generators through P are therefore the tangents to the curve of section at the double-point. When P is a parabolic point the two generators through P coincide and the polar quadric becomes a cone. The condition for this is expressed by the vanishing of the discriminant of the d 2 F quadric. Dropping the dashes, let F xx denote ~-j , and so on, then the condition is x vx F J- yy F x vz F * 1/10 F x zx F F ■* zz F *■ zw F ± wx F x wv F ± wz " wu This equation represents a surface of order 4(^ — 2) which is called the Hessian of F. It is the locus of points whose polar quadrics are specialised as cones. The parabolic or inflexional points on a surface therefore lie on a curve of order 4«(» — 2) which is the intersection of the surface with its Hessian. 17-33, The Hessian of a given surface is one of a series of wcovariants, the discriminant surfaces whose equations are formed xvii] ALGEBRAIC SURFACES 371 by equating to zero the discriminants of the various polars of a variable point. The Hessian is formed from the discriminant of the polar quadric and is the locus of points (y) whose polar quadrics are cones. If (xD„) 2 F= o is a cone with vertex (x), the coordinates (x) satisfy the four equations (see 8*31) d 2 F d*F d 2 F d*F (1) Eliminating (x) we get the equation of the Hessian in current coordinates (y). Eliminating (y) we get the locus of the vertices of those polar quadrics which are specialised as cones. But this eliminant is the discriminant of the first polar of (y), viz. (xD y )F=o. This locus, whose order is 4(71 -2) 3 , is called the Steinerian of the given surface. Thus the Steinerian is either the locus of vertices of polar quadrics which are specialised as cones, or the locus of points whose first polars have a double-point. Similarly the Hessian is either the locus of points whose polar quadrics are cones, or the locus of double-points of those first polars which have a double-point. Similarly we have a locus H' of points whose polar cubics have a double-point and this is also the locus of double-points of those second polars which have a double-point. Associated with this there is a locus S' of the double-points of those polar cubics which have a double-point, and this is also the locus of points whose second polars have a double-point. And so on. Evidently for a cubic surface the Hessian and the Steinerian are one and the same, and it has no other covariants of this kind. If P(y') is a point on the Hessian there is a corresponding point Q(x') on the Steinerian, the vertex of the quadric cone which is the polar quadric of P. The polar plane of P with respect toFis w dF dp dp X dy j + Xl g^, + * 2 ^ + Xa g-; _ o. For a variable point (/) on the Hessian the envelope of these polar planes is determined by eliminating (y') between the four consistent equations d / dF \ 24-2 372 ALGEBRAIC SURFACES [chap. but the resultant is the equation of the Steinerian. Hence the polar plane with respect to F of any point on the Hessian is a tangent-plane to the Steinerian. The point of contact is in fact the corresponding point on the Steinerian, for multiplying the four equations ( i ) respectively by y , . . . , y 3 and adding we obtain dF dF dF dF_ x ° dy +Xl 9ji + x * ty, 3 dy s ~°' i.e. the polar plane of (y) passes through the corresponding point (x) on the Steinerian. We have seen that the Hessian of a surface F meets F in the locus of parabolic points. The polar planes of these points are the (stationary) tangent-planes to the surface. These therefore form a developable circumscribing the Steinerian. If F is a de- velopable all its points are parabolic points and therefore, in this case, the Hessian contains F, breaking up into F and another surface which Cayley called the Prohessian. 17-4. The general homogeneous equation of the nth degree in four variables contains \(n+ i)(w + 2)(« + 3) terms; as only the ratios of the coefficients are significant an algebraic surface of order n is in general determined by |(w+i)(M+2)(ra+3)-i = i«(w 2 +6«+n) constants. This is called the constant-number of the surface. Since the condition that a given point should lie on the surface is expressed by a linear homogeneous equation in the coefficients, an algebraic surface of order n is in general determined uniquely by £ra(w 2 +6«+n) points. 17-41. The class of a surface is equal to the degree of its tangential equation and is the number of tangent-planes which pass through an arbitrary line. Let the line be PQ. The point of contact of a tangent-plane through P(xi) lies on the first polar of P, say Wi = o, and the point of contact of a tangent-plane through Q(x 2 ) lies on the first polar of Q, say 1^ = 0. The first polar of any point (x! + Xx 2 ) on PQ is w 1 +A« 2 = o, hence the first polars of points on the given line all have a curve in common, of order («- 1) 2 , and this cuts the given surface in n(n- 1) 2 points. Hence the class of a surface of order n cannot exceed n(n-i) 2 . The xvn] ALGEBRAIC SURFACES 373 actual number may fall short of this for, as we shall see, some of the intersections may be double-points, etc., of the surface and not points of contact of tangent-planes. The class of a surface is also equal to the class of the tangent- cone from an arbitrary point to the surface, and this is equal to the class of an arbitrary plane section of the cone. 17-42. Reciprocal surfaces. If F(x, y, z, zv) = o is the point-equation of a surface, F(£, "Hi £> <«>) = o is the tangential equation of another surface called the reciprocal of the former. If <t>(|, 17, £, w)=o is the tangential equation of the former, <&(#, y, z,w)=o is the point- equation of the latter. The relationship between the two surfaces is symmetrical ; each is the reciprocal of the other. More gener- ally, if F=o is a given surface and/=o a given quadric, the envelope of the polar planes, with respect to/, of points on F is a surface called the polar reciprocal or simply the reciprocal of F with respect to the quadric/. Whenf=x 2 +y z +z 3 + w 2 the polar reciprocal of F(x, y, z,w)=o is F($, 77, £, w) = o. The order of
the reciprocal surface is equal to the class of the original surface, and
vice versa. Hence if m is the class, the order cannot exceed m (m — 1 ) 2 .

17-5. Double-points.

When the order is given the class is reduced, as in the ana-
logous case of a plane curve, by the existence of certain point-
singularities, and when the class is given the order is reduced by
the presence of certain tangential singularities.

17-51. Consider again the equation in 17*11. If F =o and
also ^ = identically, so that the equation contains no terms of
lower degree than the second in x, y, z, every line through the
origin meets the surface in two coincident points there, and
there is a quadric cone of lines F 2 =o which meet the surface in
three coincident points. In this case the origin is a singular point
(double-point) which is called a node or conical point.

17-52. From the equation (17-15) we see that (x) will be a
node if the coordinates satisfy the five equations

dF dF dF dF
F(x,y,z,w)=o, ^=0, ^=0, ^ = 0, ^=0.

374 ALGEBRAIC SURFACES [chap.

These are equivalent, however, to four only, since

xF x +yF y + zF z + wF w = nF.

These four equations cannot in general be satisfied simultane-
ously, hence a surface does not in general possess any double-
points. Eliminating x, y, z, w between the four equations F x = o,
F y = o,F z =o,F w =o we obtain a relation between the coefficients
which is called the discriminant of the surface.

17>53. When P is a node the cone of tangents at P may break
up into two planes, distinct or coincident. P is then called a
biplanar or a uniplanar node; these terms are sometimes con-
tracted to binode and unode. Every plane through a conical point
P cuts the surface in a curve having a double-point at P, but the
proper tangent-planes at P are those which touch the cone, and
these meet the surface in a curve having a cusp at P. When P is
a biplanar node every plane containing the line of intersection
of the two planes meets the surface in a curve having a cusp at
P; either of the planes meets the surface in a curve having a
triple-point at P.

17-531. When a surface has no double-points the tangent-
cone from an arbitrary point is of class n(n— i) 2 . We consider
how this number is reduced when the surface has a double-
point. Take the double-point as D= [o, o, o, i], and the vertex
of the cone as A = [i, o, o, o]. The equation of the surface is of
the form

F= (ax 2 + by 2 + cz 2 + zfyz + zgzx + zhxy) w n ~ 2

+ terms of lower degree in zo=o.
The first polar of A is

F' = (ax +hy+gz)zo n - 2 + terms of lower degree in w=o.

The equation of the tangent-cone from A is obtained by elimi-
nating * between these two equations and is of degree n(n — i) ; it
is generated by lines joining A to the points of intersection of F
and F'. F' passes through D, and the tangent-plane there is

ax+hy+gz = o.

This cuts ax 2 +by 2 +cz 2 +2fyz+2gzx+2kxy=o

xvn] ALGEBRAIC SURFACES 375

(the assemblage of tangents to F at the double-point) in general
in two distinct lines, and A determines with them two planes
a, /? whose equation

— (hy +gz) 2 + a (by 2 + zfyz 4- cz 2 ) = o

or (ab — h 2 )y 2 — 2 (gh — af)yz + (ca —g 2 ) z 2 = o

is obtained by eliminating x. The left-hand side is the co-
efficient of the highest power of w in the equation of the
tangent-cone.

Any section of the cone by a plane 7 has then a double-point,
the tangents at which are the intersections of y with a and /}.
If the double-point at D is a binode, ax 2 + ... =0 breaks up into
two planes and the discriminant A of this quadratic vanishes.

But

(ab - h 2 ) (ca -g 2 ) - (gh - aff = aA = o,

hence in this case the section of the cone has a cusp. If there is
a unode at D, ax 2 + . . . = o reduces to two coincident planes and
ab — h 2 , gh — a/ and ca—g 2 all vanish. Hence the section of the
cone has now a triple-point.

Since the class of a curve is diminished by 2 for a node, by 3
for a cusp, and by 6 for a triple-point, which is equivalent to
three double-points, we deduce that the class of a surface is
diminished by 2 for every conical point, by 3 for every binode, and
by 6 for every unode.

Ex. 1. Show that the cubic surface

#3 + ^3 + #3 + ( 2 p _ (j) ^s _ 2x 2 w — (2p — 3) xw 2 — 6y 2 w

— (p — 12) yzv 2 + qz 2 w +pxyw = o

has a double-point at [1, 2, o, 1] and determine its character.

Transform to a new tetrahedron of reference XYZW where
W'=[i, 2, o, 1]. The equations of W'YZ, W'ZX, W'XY, XYZ
are x— w=o, y — 2x0=0, z=o, w = o, and the equations of trans-
formation are

x' —x—zv, therefore x=x'+zo';

y' =y - 2W, y =y' + 2«>' 5

z' =z, z=z';

376 ALGEBRAIC SURFACES [chap.

Substituting in the cubic equation we find the coefficients of to' 3 and
w' 2 to be

I + 8 + (2/>-9)-3-(2/>-3)-24-2(/>-I2) + 2/> = 0,

3*' +12/ -6*' -(2^-3)*'— 24-y' -(p- iz)y' +p(zx' +y')=o,
and the coefficient of to' is

3*' 2 + 6/ 2 - 3*' 2 - ey't+qz't+px'y' .
Hence the tangent-cone at the double-point is

px'y' +qz' 2 =o.
In general it is a conical point; a binode if q=o and a unode if p=o.
Ex. 2. Show that the cubic surface

ayzio + bxzto + cxyzo + dxyz = o
has four conic nodes.

Ex. 3. Show that the tangential equation of the cubic surface in
Ex. 2 is

(«£)* + ibrj)i + (cQi + (d<o)i = o,

and that it is of class 4.

Ex. 4. Show that the quartic

A (* 2 ro 2 +y 2 z 2 ) + 1* (yW + s 2 * 2 ) + v (z*zo* + x^y*) = o,

where X + fj. + v = o, has twelve conic nodes.

Ex. 5. In the assemblage of tangents at a node show that (if n > 3)
there are six which meet the surface in four coincident points.

Ex. 6. Show that the cubic surface 3«yar+fe» s = o has three
binodes, and that it is of class 3.

17-54. When a surface F has a conical point, or singular point
at which there are 00 tangent-planes touching a cone, the reci-
procal surface <D has a singular plane which has 00 points of
contact lying on a conic. This singularity is called a trope. The
tangential coordinates of a trope satisfy the equations

ao 3<d eo> 3<D

Corresponding to a binode we have a tangent-plane with two
points of contact {double tangent-plane). A double tangent-plane
in general meets the surface in a curve having two double-points.

xvii] ALGEBRAIC SURFACES 377

Ex. Find the tangential equation of the anchor-ring

F={x*+y i +z* + {a i -b*) t^f-^fi (* 2 +;y 2 ) w 2 =o.

Show that it has two conical points and two tropes.
Ans. {(a 2 - fi 2 ) (I 2 + 1) 2 ) - &T + to 2 } 2 = 4 a 2 «> 2 (? + V).

17-55. If a plane section of a surface is a curve having a
double-point at O, either the surface has a double-point at O or
the plane touches the surface at O. If the plane section has two
double-points the plane either passes through two double-points
of the surface, or touches the surface and passes through a
double-point, or is a double tangent-plane, touching at two
points. If the plane section has three double-points, and the
plane does not pass through any double-points of the surface, it
is a triple tangent-plane or tritangent-plane. One condition is
required in order that a given plane may touch the surface, hence
a surface has co 2 tangent-planes, and these envelop the surface.
The condition, expressed in terms of the coordinates of the
plane, is the tangential equation of the surface (n - 3).

17-56. Hence also a surface without double-points has in
general a single infinity of double tangent-planes ; these form the
planes of a developable doubly circumscribed to the surface,
or bitangent developable. Further, a surface without double-
points has in general a finite number of triple tangent-planes ;
and in general has no tangent-planes of higher multiplicity un-
less it is specialised. (A quadric surface has no double tangent-
planes, for a conic, in order to have two double-points, must de-
generate to two coincident straight lines. A cubic surface may
have double tangent-planes, but the line joining two points of
contact must lie entirely in the surface.)

17-57. The reciprocal relations may be deduced from the
tangential equation. The assemblage of planes through the point
P= [x', y', z', w'] tangent to the surface <£(£, ij, £, <o)=o is re-
presented by the simultaneous equations

$(£,17, C,o)) = o, x'£+y'r)+z't + w'«>=*o, and forms the tangent-cone from P to the surface, a cone of order m equal to the class of the surface. If the point P lies on the surface, the tangent-cone has the tangent-plane at P as a 378 ALGEBRAIC SURFACES [chap. double-plane ; and conversely if the tangent-cone from P has a double-plane, either this plane is a double tangent-plane for the surface or P lies on the surface. If P does not lie on any double tangent plane and the tangent-cone from P has two double- planes, P is a double-point on the surface ; and if the tangent- cone has three double-planes, P is a triple-point. A surface with- out double tangent-planes has in general a single infinity of double-points (binodes), forming a double-curve on the surface ; and a finite number of triple-points. 17-6. The curves which lie on a surface are of interest ; we shall consider in particular straight lines and conies. We have seen that a quadric has two singly infinite systems of straight lines, a cubic surface (not ruled) has a finite number, while a surface of higher order does not in general possess any straight lines. A conic in space is determined by eight conditions : three to determine its plane and five to determine it in the plane. A conic cuts a surface of order n in 2« points, and if it contains zn+i points of the surface it will lie entirely in the surface. For n=z therefore only five conditions are given in order that a given conic may lie on a given quadric surface, hence there are oo 3 conies on a quadric, one for each plane in space. For n = 3 , seven conditions are required, hence a single infinity of conies lie on a cubic surface. For «>3, more than eight conditions are re- quired, therefore in general no conies lie on a quartic or any surface of higher order. The plane which contains a conic lying on a cubic surface cuts the surface also in a straight line; the conic and the line form a cubic curve having two double-points, hence the plane is a double tangent-plane. Thus, as we have seen already, a cubic surface in general has a single infinity of double tangent-planes. There is, however, only a finite number of lines since through each line pass a single infinity of planes, thus accounting for the single infinity of conies which lie on the sur- face. A ruled cubic has a single infinity of lines and oo 2 conies. A quartic surface which has a double-line contains 00 conies, since every plane through the double-line meets the surface again in a conic. There is a remarkable quartic surface, the xvii] ALGEBRAIC SURFACES 379 Steiner Surface, which contains oo 2 conies. It is known that the only surfaces which contain oo 2 conies are the quadric, the ruled cubic and the Steiner surface. We shall consider now some general properties of ruled sur- faces, and in particular the ruled surfaces of the third and fourth orders. 17-7. Ruled surfaces. 17-71. A ruled surface is generated by a straight line having one degree of freedom. It is therefore the complete or partial intersection of three complexes. Let the degrees of the three complexes be « 1( n^, n 3 , then, since in general there is one generating line through every point of the surface*, in order to determine the order of the ruled surface we have to find the number of generators which meet an arbitrary line. Let (a) be the line-coordinates of the line, and (p) those of a generator which meets it. Then S ap = o. But (p) also satisfy the equations of the three complexes <f>i(J>) = °> <f>2(P) = °> <M/>) = ° which are of degrees « 1( «2, «s respectively. They also satisfy the fundamental quadratic equation co(p) = o. These five equations determine the ratios of the p's and give 2tiin i n z solutions. The order of the ruled surface is therefore ZH^n^. Ex. i. The lines common to three linear complexes form one regulus of a quadric. Ex. 2. Show that for all values of u and v the linear complex upm + vp n +/>03 +PM = o contains one regulus of the quadric xy - zw = o and upfo + apis, +/>os -pn=° contains the other. Ex. 3. If the two pairs of generators which the regulus x=Xz, to= Ay has in common with the linear complexes 2a tf /> y =o, ^buPij =0 are harmonic, show that 2 K1 b& + figs 601) = ( fl os — a u) (*os - hi) ■ Ex. 4. The lines which meet each of three fixed curves, plane or skew, of orders %, «a, n^ respectively, is in general a ruled surface of order 27i 1 «2 n 3 • • In the case of a quadric there appear to be two generating lines through every point, but only one set (a regulus) belongs to three given linear com- plexes ; with regard to these the other set must be considered as directrices (see 17-77). 380 ALGEBRAIC SURFACES [chap. 17-72. Let F(x, y, z,w) = o be the equation of the surface and (x') an arbitrary point on it. Through this point there is a gener- ating line; let (x") be any point on it, then (x'+Xx") must be a point on the surface for all values of A. Expanding by Taylor's theorem F(x'+*x", ...)=F(x', ...)+\(x"~,+ ...) + ... =o. (x"D x )F=o is the condition that (x") should lie on the tangent- plane at (x'). Hence the generating line through any point P lies in the tangent-plane at P, and conversely the tangent-plane at any point P contains the generating line through P. There is there- fore a (i, i) correspondence between the range of points on a generating line and the pencil of planes consisting of the tangent- planes at these points. 17-73. An arbitrary line / cuts the surface in n points ; through each of these points there passes a generating line, and each of these with / determines a tangent-plane passing through /. Also every tangent-plane which contains / contains one of these generating lines. Hence there are n tangent-planes through the arbitrary line /, and therefore the class of the ruled surface is equal to its order. Either of these may therefore be called the degree of the surface. The reciprocal of a ruled surface is a ruled surface of the same degree. The degree of the equation in point- coordinates is equal to the degree of the equation in plane- coordinates. 17*74. The order of any plane section of a surface is equal to the order of the surface, and the class of any tangent-cone is equal to its class. Consider the class of a plane section. This is equal to the number of tangent-lines through an arbitrary point and lying in the plane. But this is equal to the degree of the complex of tangent-lines to the surface, or the degree of the equation in line-coordinates. Again, the order of a tangent-cone is equal to the number of generating lines of the cone which lie in a plane through the vertex ; this is also the number of tangent- lines of the surface lying in a given plane and passing through a given point of the plane. This number is called the rank of the surface. (This applies whether the surface is ruled or not.) xvn] ALGEBRAIC SURFACES 3»i 17-75. Consider any plane section of a ruled surface, not con- taining a line of the surface. There is a (i, i) correspondence between the points of the section and the generating lines of the surface, since each line cuts the plane in one point. Hence there is a (i, i) correspondence between the points of any two plane sections. All plane sections are therefore of the same genus, and this is called the genus of the ruled surface. Thus, if any section of the surface is a rational curve, every plane section is rational and the surface is rational; a point on the surface can be ration- ally represented by two parameters, one for the generator through the point and one for its position on the generator. 17-761. A plane (tangent-plane) containing a generator g of a ruled surface of order n meets the surface again in a plane curve of order n - 1 , and this curve cuts g in n - i points ; these are all double-points on the complete curve of intersection of the plane with the surface, and are either points of contact of the plane with the surface or else double-points on the surface. Now at an ordinary point on the surface there is a unique tangent-plane, and reciprocally an ordinary tangent-plane has a unique point of contact. Of the ra-i double-points on the curve of inter- section with the tangent-plane, one is then the point of contact and the remaining n-z points are double-points on the surface. By varying the tangent-plane we obtain a locus of double-points which form a double-curve on the surface. 17-762. Similarly the tangent-cone from a point P of the sur- face consists of the pencil of tangent-planes having as axis the generator g through P together with a cone of class n - 1 . Through g there are n- i tangent-planes of this cone. One of these is the tangent-plane to the surface at P, the remaining n - 2 are double tangent-planes of the surface. By varying P we obtain an as- semblage of double tangent-planes which form a bitangent de- velopable of the surface. Every generating line cuts the double- curve in n - z points, and through every generating line there are n-z planes of the bitangent developable. 17-763. If the surface is rational an arbitrary plane section is a rational algebraic curve of order n, and this has \ (n- i)(n- z) double-points. This must therefore be the order of the double- 382 ALGEBRAIC SURFACES [chap. curve on the surface. More generally, if the surface is of genus p, an arbitrary plane section has %(n-i)(n-z)-p double- points, i.e. the order of the double-curve on a ruled surface of degree n and genus p is i(n-i)(n-2)-p. Reciprocally, this is also equal to the class of the bitangent developable. 17-77. A curve on the surface which is met by every generator is called a directrix curve; reciprocally, a developable on the sur- face, i.e. all of whose planes are tangent-planes of the surface and such that through every generator there is at least one plane of the developable, is called a directrix developable. The double- curve is a directrix curve, and the bitangent developable is a directrix developable. In general any plane section, not con- taining any generator, is a directrix curve. A ruled surface may be determined by three directrix curves, and if these are of orders m, n, p, the degree of the ruled surface is in general zmnp. If, however, the curves intersect or have multiple points the degree of the surface is lowered. In par- ticular if the surface has two line-directrices a, b, and a plane curve K of order m which cuts each of the lines in a single point, A, B respectively, part of the complete assemblage of lines which meet a, b and K consists of the planes aB and bA, and the order of the surface is reduced by 2. More generally, if A, B are multiple points on K of multiplicities a and j8, the order is re- duced by a + £. For a ruled surface of order n, which has two line- directrices a, b, it is always possible to choose a plane section (curve of order n) as a third directrix. The condition is that the curve of section should have multiple points where it is cut by a and b, of multiplicities a and £ such that a + /? = n ; the two lines must then themselves have these multiplicities on the surface. Thus for a cubic surface with double-line / as directrix (nodal directrix) and a single directrix- line /', an arbitrary plane section is a cubic curve cutting /' and having a double-point where it cuts /. 17-78. Ruled cubics. For a ruled cubic the double-curve is a straight line /, and reci- procally the bitangent developable is of class one, i.e. it consists of a pencil of planes through a line /'. We have to consider whether / and /' may be (a) intersecting, (b) skew, or (c) coincident. xvii] ALGEBRAIC SURFACES 383 / and /' are both directrix-lines, hence (a) if they intersect, every generator lies either in their plane or passes through their point of intersection. The surface would thus degenerate to either a plane curve or a cone. We shall consider as the general case (b) that in which / and /' are skew. A plane w through I meets the surface again in a generating line^; every such plane is a tangent-plane, its point of contact being the point P in which g cuts I. Every general point P on / is a binode, and there is a second tangent-plane at P. The pairs of tangent-planes which pass through / form an involution, and the double-elements of this involution are tangent-planes at two unodes, C and D, cuspidal points or pinch- points on /. These may be real or imaginary. The tangent-cone from a point P' on V breaks up into the pencil of planes with axis V (counted twice) and another pencil of planes through a generator/. P' lies on the surface and the tangent-plane w' at P is the plane (g'V). Every plane through /' is a bitangent, and there is a second point of contact of the plane ta' on /'. These pairs of points on I' form an involution, and the double-points of this involution are two points, A and B, onZ'. Let P be any point on /, and let the two tangent-planes at P cut /' in P' and Q' ; PP' and PQ' are generating lines, and the plane PP'Q' meets the surface in a cubic curve consisting of three straight lines and having three double-points. P is the intersection of this plane with the double-line /, therefore P' and Q' are the two points of contact of the bitangent plane PP'Q'. Again if P' is any point on I' there is a unique tangent-plane at P' which cuts / in a unique point P. Hence there is a ( 1 , 2) corre- spondence between the points of I and the points of /'. Through every point of I there pass two generators, and through every point of /' one. The pairs of points on V which correspond to points of I form an involution which may be either hyperbolic or elliptic. The simplest algebraic expression of a (1, 2) corre- spondence in which the involution is hyperbolic is t=u z . Taking /as x=o=y, V as z=o = w, P=[o, o, i, t] and P' = [u, 1, o, o], so that t=w/z and u = xjy, the equation of the ruled surface is x 2 z— yho=o. 384 ALGEBRAIC SURFACES [chap. This (i, 2) correspondence may be produced geometrically as follows. Let C be a conic which cuts / in one point O, but does not cut /'. The ruled cubic is generated by lines which meet /, V and the conic. Let P' be any point on /' ; the lines through P' which cut / generate a plane which cuts the plane of C in a straight line through O, and this line cuts the conic again in a unique point Q, and P'Q cuts / in a unique point P. Starting with P, the lines through P which meet /' generate a plane which cuts C in two points Q, R distinct from O ; QP and RP cut /' in two distinct points P', P". 17-781. In the case (c) where /' coincides with /, as before every point of / is a binode and every plane through / is a bi- tangent. But the involutions of pairs of tangent-planes at points on /, and pairs of points of contact on / of bitangent-planes through /, are degenerate. One plane of each pair is fixed and one point of contact of each bitangent is fixed, i.e. there is one plane, say x=o, which is a tangent at all points of /, and one point, say [o, o, o, 1], which is a point of contact for every plane through /. The general equation of a cubic surface with * = o =y as a double-line is (a 1 x+b 1 y + c 1 z + d 1 w)x 2 -\-(a2X + b 2 y + c 2 z + d i zv)y 2 + 2{c 3 z+d s zo)xy = o. Every line in the plane x= o meets the surface in three coincident points on /. Hence c i = o = d i . Also [o, o, o, 1] is a unode, there- fore every plane section through this point has a cusp there. Hence d 3 =o. a 2 x+b 2 y=o is then any plane through /, except # = 0, and we may take this for the plane y = o, thus choosing #2 = 0. Also a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 z + d 1 w = o is any plane not passing through [o, o, o, 1], and we may take this for the plane zv = o. Then by suitable choice of unit point the equation of the surface reduces to the form zox 2 — y s + xyz = o. This is known as Cayley's ruled cubic. Ex. Show that for the surface z(x 2 — y 2 ) — 2xyw=o the tangent- planes at all points on the double-line x=y = o are real, while for the surface x 2 z — y 2 zv = o the tangent-planes may be real or imaginary. xvii] ALGEBRAIC SURFACES 385 17-79. Ruled quartics. 17-791. Among ruled quartics has to be included the de- velopable whose curve is the general space cubic curve. There is no developable, other than a cone, of lower order than the fourth. The class of the quartic developable is three. If the freedom-equations of the cubic curve are x: y :z : w=t a :t 2 :t:i, the equation of the developable is (xw —yz) 2 — 4 (y 2 — xz) (z 2 —yw) = o. 17-792. The non-developable ruled surfaces of the fourth order may be classified according to the nature of the double- curve and the bitangent developable. When the surface is rational the double-curve is of order 3. It may be (a) A space cubic. (It could not be a plane cubic, for then a line in this plane would meet the surface in six points.) (b) A conic and a straight line. The plane of the conic cannot contain any other points of the surface, for any line in this plane already meets the surface in four points. Hence the straight line must meet the conic in one point. (c) Three distinct straight lines. For the same reason as in (a) the three lines cannot be coplanar. Nor can they be all mutually skew. In fact if a quartic surface has two mutually skew double- lines a and b, and c is a third line on the surface, skew to both, all the transversals of a, b, c meet the surface in more than four points and are therefore generators. But these form a regulus ; hence in this case the surface resolves into two quadric surfaces. If all three lines are concurrent we shall see (17-93) tnat ^ e sur " face is the Steiner surface and is not ruled. If two of the double- lines intersect these form the complete intersection of their plane with the surface and the third line must meet one of them. We have then two skew lines /, V and a third line g meeting both. No generating line cuts^, for a plane through £ meets the surface again in a conic and this cannot break up into two lines since the surface has no other double-points. But every generating line, SAG 25 386 ALGEBRAIC SURFACES [chap. meets either I org and either /' or g, therefore it meets both / and V ; these are therefore directrix lines, g itself is one of the gener- ating lines. (d) Three straight lines of which two are coincident (directrices), and one double generator meeting it. (e) Three coincident lines, i.e. a triple line. The bitangent developable, in general (a) a quartic develop- able on a space cubic curve, may be specialised similarly as (b) a quadric cone and a straight line (i.e. pencil of planes), or three straight lines, (c) distinct, (d) two coincident, or (e) all coincident. In the case of the elliptic ruled surfaces of the fourth order the double-curve is of order 2 and can only be either two skew directrices, or a directrix counted twice. If a quartic surface has a double-conic it is necessarily rational (see i7 - 9-8). This classification is carried out by W. L. Edge, The theory of ruled surf aces (Cambridge, 1931), who enumerates ten rational ruled quarries and two elliptic. Cayley at first enumerated only eight, but later added two which he had overlooked. His memoirs on ' ' skew surfaces, otherwise scrolls ' ' are contained in vols, v and vi of his Collected Papers ; they were written between 1863 and 1868. Ex. 1. Show that the locus of bisecants of the cubic curve x:y:z:w = fi:t 2 :t: 1 which belong to the linear complex £2%/^ = o is C 12^1 2_C 01^2 2 - C OS^3 2 - C 02^2^3 + ( C 01 + C 23)^3^1- C 31^1^a = °. where fazzxz-y 2 , <f> 2 = xw-yz, <f> a =yw-z 2 , and that the linear complex to which the ruled quartic SSa M <f> t fa = o belongs is <W>oi + 2e haPm + a saPoa ~('hi + 2a si) P& + 2a iiPsi - a uPn = °- Ex. z. In Ex. 1 if the complex is special, so that a w 2 + 2a^a 31 -4a 2S a 12 + a 11 a 33 =o, show that the surface has also a directrix-line /; through every point of / there passes one generating line and through every point of the cubic curve two. Show also that the bitangent developable is the pencil of planes through I counted three times. xvii] ALGEBRAIC SURFACES 387 Ex. 3. Show that x 2 y 2 = x 2 z (ax + by) +y 2 w (ex + dy) is a ruled quartic with a triple line and that the bitangent develop- able is a proper quartic. Show that the tangential equation is {(ad-be) ?-w (bi+ar,)} {(ad-bc) v 2 -£ (d^+erj)} ={(ad-bc) g v -c&-bria,-£<o}*. Ex. 4. Show that x 2 y 2 = (ax + by) (x 2 z +y 2 w) has a triple line, and that the bitangent developable consists of a pencil of planes through this line, and a quadric cone. Ex. 5. Show that x 2 z (ax + by) +y 2 zo (ex + dy) = o has a triple line / and that the bitangent developable is a pencil of planes through another line /' counted three times. (Tangential equation «(4f-o J )-7 , «(*f-ai,)=o.) Ex. 6. Show that x 2 y 2 - (Ax 2 + 2Bxy + Cy 2 ) (xz +yw) = o has a triple line / and that the bitangent developable is a pencil of planes through / counted three times. (Tangential equation ?<o 2 - (AC 2 + zBfr + Cm 2 ) («+,») = o.) Ex. 7. Show that the lines joining corresponding points of two conies which are in (1, 1) correspondence generate a ruled quartic. Ex. 8. If C is a conic and / a line meeting it in one point P, and their points are connected by a (2, 2) correspondence in which P corresponds to itself doubly on both loci, show that the lines joining corresponding points generate a ruled quartic. Ex. 9. Show that x 2 z 2 + axyzw + ( bx + cy ) yw 2 = o has three double-lines. Ex. 10. Show that a ruled quartic with three double-lines (one a generator and two directrices) is generated by the lines which meet two skew lines and a conic which has no point in common with either of the two lines. 25-2 3 88 ALGEBRAIC SURFACES [chap. Ex. ii. Show that (xz -j 2 ) 2 + a (xz -y 2 ) yw + (bx+ cy) yw 2 = o has a double-line and a double-conic. Ex. 12. If a cubic surface has a double-conic it degenerates to a quadric and a plane. Ex. 13. Show that z(x 2 -y 2 )- 2xyw=o is a ruled cubic in which the involution of pairs of points of contact of bitangent planes is elliptic, and show that if P=[o,o, i,t] and P' = [u, 1,0, o] are corresponding points on the double and the single directrix re- spectively, m 2 — 2tu — 1=0. Ex. 14. Show that the equation of a ruled cubic can be expressed in the form ^2 + p y * + 2yxy =Q> where a, jS, y are expressions of the first degree in x, y, z, w. Ex. 15. Find the tangential equations of the cubics (i) zx 2 -zoy 2 = o, (ii) z (x 2 -y 2 )-2xyzv = o, (Hi) wx 2 +xyz-y i = o. Am. (i) U 2 +wtf=o, (ii) u>(?— i 2 ) + 2^=o, (iii) fo>«+^«+P=o. 2&. 16. Show that a quadric surface is generated by a straight line which meets a fixed conic and two straight lines each of which meets the conic in one point. Ex. 17. Show that the lines joining corresponding points on two skew lines which are in (2, 2) correspondence generate a ruled quartic (in general irrational). Ex. 18. Show that (xw +yz+ azwf = zw (x +y) 2 has a double-line and a double-conic, and that the bitangent de- velopable is a pencil of planes counted three times. Ex. 19. Show that (yz — xy + axwf =xz(x— z) 2 has two coincident double directrix-lines and a double generator. 17-8. Cubic surfaces. Analytically, the general cubic surface is the locus of the general homogeneous equation of the third degree in *, y, z, w. Geometrically, there are several ways in which the surface may be generated. We know that a conic can be generated by the intersection of corresponding lines of two related pencils in a xvii] ALGEBRAIC SURFACES 389 plane ; a quadric surface is generated by the line of intersection of corresponding planes of two related pencils with axes mutually skew ; a space cubic curve is generated by the point common to a set of corresponding planes of three related pencils whose axes have no common point. If in the last case the planes have each just one fixed point so that they have two degrees of freedom, but are still connected mutually in (1, 1) correspondence, the locus of their common point is a surface, and, as we shall show, it is a cubic surface. 17-81. If O is a fixed point and a=o, /?=o, y=o represent three planes through O, any plane through O is represented by the equation la. + mfi+ny = o. If O' is a second point the planes through O', Vol' + m'fi' + n'y = o say, are correlated to those through O when /', m', ri are connected with /, m, n by linear homogeneous equations of the form l' = a 1 l+b 1 m + c 1 n, where a i> W> c i are constants. To each plane through O corresponds uniquely a plane through O' and vice versa. If a', /8', y are the planes which correspond respectively to a, ft y the equations of correlation are simply l' = al, m' = bm, n' — cn. Changing the notation, let O x and 2 be the two fixed points, a x , j8 x , y x three given planes through O x and a', ft, y the corresponding planes through 2 so that to the plane /a 1 +/wj3 1 + wy 1 = o through O x corresponds laai.' + mb^' + ncy' = o through 2 . Then if we write ^i ft, y 2 for act!, bfi', cy' the corresponding plane through 2 is /a2+OT^ 2 +«y 2 =o. Similarly we have a corresponding plane h 3 +mP 3 + ny s = o through a third fixed point O s . Eliminating /, m, n between these three equations we obtain the cubic equation <*i Pi Yi =°. «2 ft y 2 «3 ft Va which represents the locus of points common to three corre- sponding planes. The surface passes through each of the points O x , 2 , O a , since the determinant vanishes when a x = o = ft = y x , etc. 17-811. We have still to discover a geometrical determination of the correlations between the bundles of planes. Consider the quadrics fty 2 — fty^o, y^o^— y 2 a x =o and «xft~ a 2 j3 1 =o. Each 390 ALGEBRAIC SURFACES [chap. pair has a line in common, viz. the first pair has the line y x = o = y % in common, and the residual intersection is a space cubic curve which is common to the three quadrics and lies on the cubic surface; it also passes through the points x 1 = o = /? 1 = y 1 and a 2 = o = /?2 = y2> i- e - Oi and O a . An arbitrary plane /a x + mjSj + ny x = o through O x cuts the curve of intersection of the two quadrics PiYi-PtV\ = °> ri a 2-72«i=o in four points ; one of these is its intersection with the line Yi = 0=z n> one is the point a 1 =o = /J 1 =y 1 , i.e. O t ; eliminating o^ and jSj (y x and y 2 being <£ o) we find to determine the other two /a 2 + OTj8 i! +My 2 = o. Hence the corresponding planes h 1 + mp 1 + ny 1 = o and l<x^+mp z +ny 2 =o cut the cubic curve in the same two points. Finally, to generate the cubic surface we take two space cubic curves C and C both passing through a point O. An arbitrary plane through O cuts the first cubic in two points A, B and the second in two points A', B'. The cubic surface is the locus of the intersection of AB and A'B'. We may verify as follows that there is a unique cubic surface which contains two space cubic curves having one point O in common. If nine other points are taken on each cubic curve we obtain nineteen points and these determine a unique cubic sur- face ; but this surface must contain each of the cubics, for a cubic surface can intersect a cubic curve in only nine points while this has ten points in common with each. 17-82. We can now prove that every cubic surface is rational, i.e. can be rationally represented on a plane. To every plane h. 1 +m^ 1 + ny 1 = o through O x there corresponds a unique point P on the surface and also a unique point P' with coordinates [/, m, n] on a fixed plane. Conversely, if P is any point of the cubic surface there is xvii] ALGEBRAIC SURFACES 391 through P a single bisecant of each of the cubic curves and each of these determines with X the same unique plane. Algebraically, the three equations h 1 + mfi 1 + ny 1 = o, lx 2 + mp 2 +ny 2 = o, fa 3 + mp 3 + ny 3 = o which are linear and homogeneous in x, y, z, w can be solved for the ratios of x, y, z, w, and thus the coordinates of any point on the surface are expressed by homogeneous polynomials of the third degree in /, m, n. 17-83. We have seen that a cubic surface has a finite number of straight lines. It has also, like any algebraic surface, a finite number of tritangent-planes. A tritangent-plane cuts the surface in a cubic curve having three double-points and therefore re- ducing to three straight lines. If / is a line lying on the surface a plane through / cuts the surface in this line and a conic ; these form a plane cubic curve having two double-points. Hence if I does not pass through a double-point of the surface every plane through / is a double tangent-plane. Conversely, a double tangent-plane meets the surface in a straight line and a conic. The bitangent developable therefore consists of a finite number of pencils of planes whose axes are lines of the surface. 17-84. Through each line of the surface there pass a finite number of tritangent-planes which are determined by forming the condition that the residual conic should break up into a pair of straight lines. If we take x = o = to as one line of the surface, the equation of the surface is of the form where <j> and ifi are quadratic expressions. A plane w = /x,x through this line cuts the surface again in a conic which is the inter- section of the plane w=(jjc with the quadric cone <f>'+fxtfi'=o, <f>' and 1(1' being the expressions obtained by substituting w=iim in <f> and t/>. <f>' and ifi' are homogeneous quadratics in x, y, z, and in each the coefficients of x 2 , y*, z*, yz, zx, xy contain /j, to the powers 2, o, o, o, i, i respectively. The elements of the de- terminant of <f>' + iu[>', whose vanishing is the condition for 392 ALGEBRAIC SURFACES [chap. factorisation, are functions of /* of degrees according to the scheme 722 211. 211 Equating this determinant to zero we obtain an equation of the fifth degree in /*. Hence through any line of the surface there are five tritangent-planes. 17-85. Consider now the double-points on a cubic surface. Writing the equation in the form F 3 +wF 2 +w*F 1 +w s F =o, the origin 0= [o, 0,0, 1] lies on the surface if F =o, and is a double-point if also F x = o ; it cannot be a triple-point unless the surface is a cone. When O is a double-point, F 2 = o represents the quadric cone of tangents at O ; this is cut by the cubic cone F 3 = o in six lines which meet the surface in four points at O and there- fore lie entirely in the surface. Hence through a double-point there pass six lines of the surface. Conversely, if three lines of the surface, not in a plane, pass through a point, this point is a double-point. Let OX, O Y, OZ be lines of the surface. Then since the equation is satisfied identically by y = o = z and by z = o = x and by x = o =y, it is of the form F 3 +wF 2 = o, where F s =1i ayz and F 3 = 2 cy 2 z + dxyz. Hence O is a double- point. 17-861. We can now find the number of lines on a general cubic surface without double-points. Starting with a tritangent- plane we obtain as its intersection with the surface three lines a, b, c forming a triangle ABC. Through each of the lines a, b, c there pass four other tritangent-planes, each meeting the surface in three lines, and since no other lines besides a, b, c can pass through A, B or C we have 3 x 4 x 2 = 24 lines in addition to the first three. And besides these 27 lines there are no more, for if / is any fine of the surface other than a, b or c, it cuts the plane of xvii] ALGEBRAIC SURFACES 393 abc in a point lying on one of these lines and has therefore been enumerated among the 24. Hence there are precisely 27 lines on the surface. These lines may not all be real. The following equation* represents a cubic surface with 27 real and distinct lines : /x y z w \ / xz jw \ \x 2 y 2 z 2 wj V#i#i yiwj _lx y z w\ (^__y^_\ ~ \Xi y~i *i wj \x 2 z 2 y 2 wj ' 17-862. The number of tritangent-planes is now easily de- termined. Through each line there are five tritangent-planes, and each tritangent-plane contains three lines, hence the number of tritangent-planes = \ x 5 x 27 = 45. The 27 lines and 45 planes and their points of intersection form a configuration which is represented by the scheme 135 10 27 2 27 3 9 5 45 Each line is met by five pairs of other lines in the five tritangent- planes through the line, therefore iV 01 = 10. Through each point there are two lines a, b and through each of these there are four other planes besides the plane (ab), hence ^20= 9- Also on each line there are ten points, each of which belongs to two lines, hence the total number of points is 135. 17-863. Schlafli's notation for the lines on a cubic surface. Let a x and b x be two non-intersecting lines on the surface. Through each of these there are five tritangent-planes, each containing two lines which cut the given line. Denote the pairs of lines which cut a 1 by ft 2 , c lz ; b a , c 13 ; 6 4 , c M ; b b , c 16 ; b e , c 16 . Any other line must cut each of the five planes, and must therefore cut one of each of these five pairs of lines ; hence b t cuts, say, c 12 , c 13 , c 14) c 15 and c 16 . Hence any two non-intersecting lines of the surface have five common transversals on the surface. Denote the * See A. Henderson, The twenty-seven lines upon the cubic surface, Cam- bridge Tracts, No. 13 (191 1). Also Cayley, Collected Math. Papers, vii, 316-30 and VI, 359-455. 394 ALGEBRAIC SURFACES [chap. remaining five lines which intersect b t by a 2 , a 3 , a if a s , a 6 , pairing these respectively with c 12 c 16 . We have now 17 lines such that a t cuts b 2 , ..., b 6 , c lit ..., c 16 , and b t cuts a 2 , ..., a e , c 12 , ..., c 16 , and they form 10 tritangent- planes. Each line of the surface cuts one and only one line of each triad. Hence since a 2 cuts b x and c n , it does not cut «!, Og, ..., a e , c ls , ..., c 16 , b 2 ; and since a 2 does not cut a x it must cut b s , . . . , b „ . Similarly i 2 cuts ^ , « 3 , . . . , a e and c 12 . Thus of these 17 lines we have 12, a, and b t (i= 1, ..., 6), such that a t meets b t (i¥=j) but does not meet b t . Of the other five lines c lt (i=2,...,6), each meets both a t and i^ a,- and b t . Now each line of the surface is met by five pairs of inter- secting lines ; but so far a% is met by just one pair, b x and c 12 , and four single lines £ 3 , A 4 , 6 5 , 5 6 , no two of which intersect. Hence there are four other lines, say c & , C&, c^, c 26 , pairing respectively with these. Now b 2 meets one of each of the triads: a^, b 3 , c^', «2, b t , Cm.; Oi, A 5 , c 25 ; a^, S 6> c 26 ; and since it does not meet 02, b 3 , b it b b or b 6 it must meet c^, c u , c i5 and c 26 . Further, a 8 does not meet (% or b s , therefore it meets c^; similarly a 4 meets c u , a h meets c 25 , and a e meets c 26 . We have now Og cut by the two pairs b t , c 13 and b 2 , c w , and also by b it b s , b 6 , no two of which intersect. Hence we have three more lines, say c M , c 35 , c S9 , paired with these. Then by the same reasoning b 3 meets these three lines, and as a 4 does not meet a a or 64 it must meet c^; similarly a s meets c S5 and a 6 meets c z6 . a 4 is now cut by the three pairs b x , £ 14 ; b 2 , c u ;b 3 , c^ and by b b and b e which do not intersect. Hence we have two more lines, say c 45 and c 46 , paired with these. Lastly we have the line c M meeting a 6 , a 6 , b 5 and b a . We have now obtained the 27 lines a iy b ( (1=1, ..., 6), c u (^j =1 6), and the whole scheme of intersections is given by the statements that di meets bj (i^j), a t and b t meet c M , c tj meets c M (i^j^k^T). The 45 triads which determine the tritangent-planes are ytoitiibjCH, and 15 of c H c kl c mn . xvn] ALGEBRAIC SURFACES 395 17-87. The set of 12 lines Oi Oj! ... a e ) &j b 2 ... bj which are such that each one intersects only the five which do not lie in the same row or column is called a double-six. There are 36 of these, the others being of the types #1 &1 C 23 C 24 C 25 C ia) flj 2 C iS C 14 C 15 C 16' and a x a 2 a s c 6e c M c u ] . 4» C 31 C 12 h h K> To determine a double-six take two non-intersecting lines, say at, and <v, write down the pairs which intersect them: a x meets b 2 (b 8 ) (i 4 ) (6 5 ) (& e ) (c 12 ) C w C 14 C 1B C ie Oa meets b x (b 3 ) (ft 4 ) (ft 8 ) (K) ( C 2l) C 23 C 24 C 25 C 26 Then delete the symbols of the lines which are common to the two sets, fix is then taken with the remainder of the lines which meet a^, and vice versa. 17-88. Classification of cubic surfaces according to the reality of the 27 lines. The surface being assumed to be general (without double- points), and the 27 lines all distinct, the reader may verify that there are the following five cases : (1) All the 27 lines real and all the 45 planes real. (2) [Every imaginary line of the first species, i.e. meeting its conjugate.] Three real lines (forming a triangle), 13 real planes, 15 real points (12 elliptic and three hyperbolic). (3) [Some imaginary lines of the second species, i.e. not meeting their conjugates.] (3 fl ) [The five transversals of two non-intersecting conjugate imaginary lines all real.] 15 real lines, 15 real planes, 45 real points (all hyperbolic). 396 ALGEBRAIC SURFACES [chap. (3^) [Three real transversals.] Seven real lines, five real planes, 11 real points (two elliptic and nine hyperbolic). (3c) [One real transversal.] Three real lines, seven real planes, nine real points (six elliptic and three hyperbolic). 17-89. The projective classification of cubic surfaces, without regard to the reality of the lines, is based on their singularities. A cubic surface cannot have more than four conical points, for the class is diminished by two for every conical point, and the class of the general cubic surface is »(w-i) 2 = 12. If there were five nodes the class would be reduced to two, but a surface of class 2 is a quadric. There are 21 species when we distinguish biplanar and uniplanar nodes, and whether the planes of a binode contain lines of the surface, and so on. A conical point is represented by C 2 , an ordinary binode by B 3 , an ordinary unode by U t , other varieties by B iy B 5 ,B 6 , £/„ U B . The suffix in each case denotes the number by which the class (12) is reduced. (All com- binations are possible except 25 4 ,C 2 +U 6 ,C 2 +U 7 and B z + U e .) Ex. 1. The surface w (x+y + z) (lx + my+nz)-kxyz=o has a single binode B s at [o, o, o, 1]. Find the equations of the planes at the binode and the six lines through it. Ex. 2. The surface xzw — (x+z) (x z -y* + z 2 ) = o has a binode B t at [o, o, o, 1]. Show that the plane x+z = o touches the surface at all points of the edge of the binode (i.e. the edge is tarsal; it is a line of the surface). Ex. 3 . The surface xzw +y*z + x* y — z 3 = o has a binode B s at [o, o, o, 1]. Show that the edge of the binode is torsal and the tangent-plane at any point of it coincides with one of the planes of the binode. Ex. 4. The surface xzw + y 2 z + x 3 — z 3 = o has a binode B e at [o, o, o, 1]. Show that the edge of the binode is oscular, i.e. one of the planes of the binode meets the surface in three coincident lines. xvu] ALGEBRAIC SURFACES 397 Ex. 5. The surface w (x + y + zf + xyz = o has a unode U e at [o, o, o, 1] whose plane meets the surface in three distinct lines. Ex. 6. The surface wx 2 + xz 2 +y 2 z=o has a unode U 7 at [o, o, o, 1] whose plane meets the surface in three lines, two of which are coincident. Ex. 7. The surface wx 2 +xz 2 +y a =o has a unode U s at [o, o, o, 1] whose plane meets the surface in three coincident lines. 17-9. Quartic surfaces. 17-91. There is a very great variety of surfaces of the fourth order and we shall consider only a few types. A quartic surface does not in general possess any lines; at the other extreme we have ruled quartics having an infinity of lines. It is known that a quartic surface, not ruled, cannot have more than 80 lines, but whether a quartic surface can possess so many lines without being ruled is not known. The Weddle surface (locus of vertices of quadric cones through six given points) contains 25 lines, and Richmond* has given an example x i - 6x 2 y* +y i =z i - 6z 2 w 2 + w i which contains 48, only 24, however, being real. 17*911. Ex. The Weddle Surface. Show that the locus of vertices of quadric cones which pass through the six points [1,0,0,0], [o, 1, o, o], [o, o, 1, o], [o, o, o, 1], [1, 1, 1, 1], [a, b, c, d] is to^a (b-c)yz-ivZ(a-d)x (cy* - bz*) - dxyzY, (b-c)x = o. Prove that each of the six points is a conical node and that the surface contains the 15 lines joining these points, and the 10 lines of intersection of pairs of planes each containing three of the points. 17-92. A quartic surface is not in general rational, and there is no very simple criterion for its rationality. There are three main types of rational quartics, viz. quartics with (1) a triple-point, (2) a double-line, (3) a double-conic. • Edinburgh Math. Notes, October, 1930. 398 ALGEBRAIC SURFACES [chap. But in addition to these there are some other isolated forms. We shall confine our discussion of quartics to examples of these three types of rational surfaces. 17-921. A surface of order n which has a multiple point O of order n is necessarily a cone, for any line through O and one other point of the surface meets the surface in more than n points and therefore lies entirely in the surface. A surface of order n which has a multiple point O of order «- 1 was called by Cay ley a Monoid. A monoid of any order is a rational surface, for any line through O meets the surface in just one other point; there is therefore a (i, i) correspondence between the points of the surface and the lines through O and therefore the points of a plane. A quartic surface with a triple point is a particular case of a monoid. Ex. Show that if P and Q are multiple points of orders r and s on a surface of order n, and r + s>n, the line PQ is a multiple line on the surface, of order r+s — n. 17-93. The Steiner surface. A quartic monoid of special interest is one which has three double-lines passing through the triple-point. Taking as the triple-point [o, o, o, i] and as the double-lines y = o = z, z=o = x, x=o=y, the equation of the surface is of the form ay*z 2 + bz*x 2 + cx 2 y* + xyz(fx +gy + hz+ kw) = o. Changing the plane of reference w=o, and choosing the unit- point suitably, the equation can be reduced to the simpler form y z* + z 2 x* + x 2 y % - zxyzw = o. The surface is named after Steiner who studied it during a visit to Rome, and it is sometimes called the Roman surface. 17-931. To obtain parametric equations write px=2ftv, P y=2v\, P z=2Xfj,, then we find pw=X i + f ^+ v 2 . From these a symmetrical form of the equation can be obtained, referred to another tetrahedron. We have p(to + x+y + z) = (X + f i + v) !i , p(to+x-y-z) = (-\+[<i+ v y, etc. xvn] ALGEBRAIC SURFACES 399 Hence writing w+x-y—z=X, to—x+y—z=Y, w-x—y + z=Z, w+x+y+z=W, we have X*+ Yi+Z*+ W*=o. 17-932. This shows that each of the four planes of reference X=o, etc., meets the surface in a conic twice. These are not double-conies on the surface, but each of the four planes is a singular tangent-plane or trope touching the surface at all points of the conic. The triple-point is [i, i, i, i] and the double-lines are Y=Z, X= W\ Z=X, Y= W; X= Y, Z= W. Ex. i. Show that the tangential equation of the Steiner surface S«* =o is Zf -1 =o, and that it is therefore of class 3. Ex. 2. Show that the Steiner surface is the reciprocal of a cubic surface with four conic nodes. Ex. 3. Show that the four conies at which the surface 2*4 =0 is touched by the planes * = o, etc., touch the edges of the tetrahedron of reference, and that the six points of contact, one on each edge, are unodes. 17-933. Every plane section of the Steiner surface is a quartic curve with three nodes, where the plane cuts the three double- lines. The section by a tangent-plane has an additional node and therefore breaks up into two conies. As there are oo a tangent- planes the surface contains oo 2 conies. 17-934. In the (A, /*, v)-plane when the parametric equations x'.y :z: w=2fiv: avA: 2A/1. : A 2 +/* 2 +v a a plane section £x+r}y + £z+ww=o is represented by a conic For the tangent-planes this breaks up into two straight lines. The condition for this gives a homogeneous equation of the third degree in £, tj, £, to which is the tangential equation of the surface, viz. 400 ALGEBRAIC SURFACES [chap. 17-935. The parametric equations of the Steiner surface are all of the second degree in the parameters, and conversely freedom-equations of the second degree in general represent a Steiner surface. Let px=U 1> py=U it pz=U 3 , pw=U i , where U t are homogeneous quadratic expressions in A, p, v, and there- fore U t = o represent four conies in the (A, p., r)-plane. We shall assume that these conies have no point common to all four. There is then a pencil of conic-envelopes all in-polar to each of these. When we choose the triangle of reference so that the four common tangents of the pencil are ±X±p.±v = o the tangential equation of the pencil is Ag 2 +Br) 2 + C£ 2 = o with A + B + C = o. The conic U = aX 2 + bp? + cv 2 + zfpv + zgvX + zhXp. = o is out-polar to every conic-envelope of the pencil if a = b = c. Hence U t are linear homogeneous functions of X 2 + p, 2 + v 2 , pv, vX, Xp, and by changing the tetrahedron of reference we can express the freedom-equations in the form px=zpv, py=zvX, pz=zXp, pw=X 2 +p 2 +v*. We have seen (0/73 1) that if the four conies have one point in common the parametric equations represent a ruled cubic; if they have two points in common they represent a quadric ; with three points in common they represent a plane ; and with four points in common a straight line. 17-94. The surface of Veronese. The plane sections of a Steiner surface represent the conies of a three-parameter system. The system of all conies in a plane depends upon five parameters and would require space of five dimensions for its representation. If x i {i= 1,2, ..., 6) are homo- geneous coordinates in S s , and C/ 4 are homogeneous quadratic expressions in A, p, v, the equations pXi=U t (i=i, ..., 6) are parametric equations of a two-dimensional surface in S 5 . This is called the Surface of Veronese. Simpler parametric equations can be obtained by solving these equations for A 2 , p z , v s , p,v, vX, Xp,, considering them as six equations linear in these xvn] ALGEBRAIC SURFACES 401 six quantities; each is then expressed as a linear homogeneous function of x lt ...,x t , and then by a change of the frame of reference we may express the parametric equations in the form px 1 =X 2 , pX 2 =fl 2 , px s =v i , pX i =2flV, px s = zv\, px a =zXp. To every point in the (A/xv)-plane corresponds a unique point in S s , and to every point on the surface of Veronese corresponds a unique point in the (A/xv)-plane. Any conic in the (Aju.v)-plane is represented by a homogeneous linear equation in x t , and is therefore represented in S & by the curve of section of the surface with a four-flat. A three-flat cuts the surface in points which correspond to the four points of intersection of two conies in the (A^-plane. Hence the surface, of Veronese is cut by an arbitrary three-flat in four points, i.e. it is of order 4. An arbitrary plane does not in general meet the surface in any point, but since any three points determine a plane there are planes which meet the surface in three points. A plane cannot in general meet the surface in more than three points, for if the plane oc cuts the surface in four points, then through these four points and one other point on the surface there is determined a three-flat meeting the surface in five points. An arbitrary line does not in general meet the surface, but there are lines which meet the surface in two points. No line can meet the surface in more than two points. Ex. Show that there are no straight lines lying on the surface. 17-941. There are special planes, however, which meet the surface in a curve, and since a line cannot cut the surface in more than two points these curves are conies. These conies are re- presented by straight lines in the (A/iv)-plane ; for a straight line in this plane is represented by a linear homogeneous equation in A, p., v. Substituting for v in terms of A and p, in the parametric equations we express the coordinates as quadratic functions of the single parameter X/p,; the locus is therefore a conic. The surface therefore possesses oo* conies, corresponding to the lines of the (A/ii>)-plane, and it contains no other plane curves. sag 26 402 ALGEBRAIC SURFACES [chap. Ex. Show that the equations of the plane of the conic corre- sponding to a\ + b[i.+cv=o are expressed by equating to zero the determinants of the fourth order in the matrix I o o V L x i I i i C * 3 O O I bcx t o — i 2 cax, abx t — 2 — I o 17-942. An arbitrary four-flat cuts the surface in a quartic curve, but if the four-flat contains a given conic of the surface the rest of the intersection is another conic. The four-flat Z£ r # r =o cuts the surface in points whose parameters A, /a, v are connected by the equation liA 2 + & /x 2 + £, " 2 + 2& V + 2& *A + 2& Xfl = o. The curve of intersection breaks up into two conies if the left- hand side of this equation factorises, and the condition for this is li le Is =o. 56 S2 64 Is S4 S3 Hence the four-flats which cut the surface in pairs of conies envelop a variety of class 3. The point-equation of this variety is easily obtained, for denoting the determinant by A the co- ordinates Xt are proportional to ^. For x lt x 2 , x z these are the cofactors of | 1} | 2 , | 3 , and for x t , x 6 , x 9 they are double the co- factors of | 4 , | 5 , | g . But the determinant formed from the co- factors = A 2 =0, hence =0. 2X ± X$

*5

X$2X2 x* X 6 x* 2X S The variety is therefore of order 3. As a locus it may be denoted by M 4 3 and as an envelope by <J> 4 3 ; the surface of Veronese itself is denoted by V a K xvii] ALGEBRAIC SURFACES 403 17-943. Two conies aX+bfi+cv=o, a'X+b'(i+c'v=o inter- sect in one point whose parameters are (bc' — b'c, ca' — c'a, ab'—a'b)', and this is the only point common to their planes. Through any point of Fjj 4 there pass 00 conies. A four-flat which contains two conies touches IV at their common point. The tangents to the two conies at this point then determine a plane, the tangent- plane to Fa 4 at this point. Ex. The equations of the tangent-plane at [A, fi, v\ are expressed by equating to zero the determinants of the fourth order in the matrix %2 #3 *4 *5 * 6 O V /* V- V A V M A Three equations determining the tangent-plane are therefore v 2 ;*2 + /x 2 * 3 — /*v* 4 = o, A 2 * 3 + v i x 1 — v\x & = o, (i?X 1 + \ 2 X2—\pX 9 = <3. 17-944. If the four-flat (£) meets IV in two coincident conies £1 '• £2 : & = & = £5 : £e=" 2 : v 2 : zv* : vw : wu : uv. These four-flats form a two-dimensional assemblage 2 * of class 4, the exact reciprocal of V a *. The four-flats of this as- semblage which pass through an arbitrary point form a one- dimensional quartic assemblage (reciprocal of a quartic curve), which reduces to two quadric cones when the point lies on Af 4 s , and to two coincident quadric cones when the point lies on F 2 4 . A four-flat which meets V t * in two coincident conies touches F 2 4 at all points of this conic. M 4 3 contains not only all the points of V a * but also all its tangent-planes. The tangent four-flat to M t 3 at the point (y) is (43W»-:y4 2 K+ ... +(y 5 y«-2yiyi)xt+ ... =°> and if (y) is a point on IV this becomes indeterminate. Hence F 2 4 is a double-surface on M 4 S . 26-8 404 ALGEBRAIC SURFACES [chap. 17-95. Normal varieties. A curve of order r always lies in a space of r dimensions or fewer, for the r-flat determined by r+i points on the curve would meet the curve in more than r points and must therefore contain the curve. A curve of order r which cannot be contained in a space of fewer than r dimensions is called a normal curve. Examples are : straight line, conic, space cubic, etc. Similarly a surface of order r, V 2 r , always lies in a space of r+ 1 dimensions or fewer, for if it be supposed to lie in an S n (n>r+i), the r-flat determined by r+ i arbitrary points on the surface would meet the surface in more than r points. More generally, a variety of p dimensions and of order r, V/, is always contained in a flat space of r +p — i dimensions or fewer ; for if it lies in S n but not in £„_! an arbitrary S n _ P cuts it in r points. But the 5„_j, may be determined by n-p+ 1 points on the variety, hence n —p +i^r, i.e. n^r +p — i . A V p r which cannot be contained in a space of fewer than r+p — i dimensions is called a normal variety. 17-951 . A normal variety V P r in S^,,^ is rational. To prove this we observe that a V/ in Sf+j,^ is cut by an arbitrary (r— i)- flat in r points. Also the (r— i)-flat is determined by r points. If r — i of these points are fixed points on V/ and the remaining point is on a fixed ^>-flat we have a (i, i) correspondence be- tween this variable point and the rth point in which the (r— i)- flat cuts the variety. That is, the points of the variety are in (i, i) correspondence with the points of a given />-flat. 17-952. A normal variety has no double-points, for an (r— i)- flat passing through a double-point and r — i other points of the variety would meet the variety in more than r points. The surface of Veronese is a normal surface in S & . 17-96. Projections of the surface of Veronese on space of three dimensions. A figure in space of five dimensions may be projected from a point on to a four-flat by lines passing through the point. It may be projected on to a three-flat from a line by planes passing through the line. There are different cases according as the line does not meet the surface or meets it in one or in two points. xvn] ALGEBRAIC SURFACES 405 (1) Projection on to a three-flat a. from a line a not meeting the surface. If P is any point on the surface the plane Pa does not in general meet the surface again and cuts a in a point P'. An arbitrary three-flat through a cuts the surface in four points and a in a line. Hence the projection is a surface of order 4. A four- flat through a and a conic-plane of the surface gives a conic in the projection. Hence the projection is a quartic surface having oo 2 conies. Let the line a be the join of the points A[o, 1, —1, o, o, o] and B[i, o, — 1, o, o, o], and let the three-flat « be x 1 = o = * 4 . Taking any point P[X, p., v] on the surface, freedom-equations of the plane ABP with para- meters u and v are pX 1 = V + X 2 , pX 4 =2p.V, px i =u + p, i , px 5 = 2v\, pX s = — U — V + V % , /MC 6 = 2A/Z. Hence freedom-equations of the projection are pX 3 = A 2 + p.* + J> 2 , pX t = 2pv, px s = 2vX, px e = zXp., and these represent a Steiner surface. (2) If the line a meets the surface in one point A an arbitrary three-flat through a meets the surface in just three other points, hence the projection is a cubic surface. The tangent-plane at A cuts a in a point A'. Through A there are 00 conies on the sur- face. The three-flat determined by a and the plane of one of these conies cuts a in a straight line. Hence the projection is a ruled cubic surface. (3) If the line a meets the surface in two points A, B, the pro- jection is a quadric surface, and its two sets of generating lines are the projections of the conies which pass through A and those which pass through B. The quadric, the ruled cubic, and the Steiner surface (all pro- jections of the surface of Veronese) are the only surfaces in three dimensions which possess oo 2 conies. 17-97. Quartic surfaces having a double-line. If a quartic surface possesses a double-line / every plane through this line cuts the surface again in a conic, and so there 406 ALGEBRAIC SURFACES [chap. is a single infinity of conies lying on the surface. If the double- line / is x=o=y the equation of the quartic surface is of the form Px*+2Qxy+Ry 2 =o, where P, Q, R are expressions of the second degree. A plane through the double-line, y — tx, cuts the surface where * 2 = o and again in a conic, the intersection of I with P' + 2Q't+R't*=o, where P', Q', R' are quadratics in x, z, w obtained from P, Q, R by substituting y = tx. In this equation the coefficients of * a , z z , h> 2 , zzv, wx, xz contain t to the powers 4, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3 re- spectively, hence its determinant is of degree 8 in t. There are therefore eight planes through / which cut the surface in pairs of lines, and hence in addition to / there are 16 lines on the sur- face, all of which cut /. There are in general no other lines on the surface. Now an algebraic surface has a certain number of tritangent- planes. Any one of these meets the surface in a curve having the three points of contact as double-points, and there is in the present case a fourth double-point at its intersection with /. This quartic curve therefore reduces to either two conies or a nodal cubic with a straight line ; in the former case one of the points of intersection of the two conies lies on /, and in the latter case one of the points of intersection of the line with the cubic lies on /. Now let w be any plane and P any point on it, and let C be a conic in a tritangent-plane. The plane PI cuts C in two points, one of which is its intersection with /. There is therefore just one variable point Q and the line PQ cuts the surface in one other point P' which is associated with P. Conversely P' determines P uniquely. Hence there is (with certain exceptions) a (1, 1) correspondence between the points P' of the quartic surface and the points P of the plane. The surface is therefore rational. 17-98. Quartic surfaces having a double-conic. If a quartic surface possesses a double-conic C, a tri- tangent-plane cuts the surface in a quartic curve having five double-points and therefore breaking up into a conic and two straight lines. Two of the five double-points, A and B, are the intersections of the plane with C, and since neither of the lines rvn] ALGEBRAIC SURFACES 407 can lie in the plane of C the two lines must pass one each through A and B. Let / be the line through A. Take any plane w and any point P on it. The plane PI cuts C in two points, one of which is A ; let Q be the other point. The line PQ cuts the surface in two points at Q, one point on Z, and one remaining point P'. Con- versely, P' determines a plane with I; this plane cuts Cm A and another point Q, and P'Q cuts w in P. Hence there is a (1, 1) correspondence between the points P' of the surface and the points P of the plane w. The surface is therefore rational. Ex. 1 . Show that the anchor-ring { X 2 4.3,2 + «2 4. ( fl 2 _ J2) a>2}2 = 4 a 2 H> 2 (* 2 +>> 2 ) has the circle at infinity as a double-conic. Ex. 2. Show that the anchor-ring contains the four lines x±iy = o = z±cw, where c 2 = b 2 — a a . Ex. 3. Show that the equation of the anchor- ring can be reduced to the form (XY+ZWf-kXY (Z- Wf=o by the transformation x+iy=X, z+ao=Z, x—iy=Y, z—cw = W, where c 2 = b* - a 2 and k = a 2 /c 2 . Ex. 4. Show that the surface has freedom-equations P F=v 2 (/ i +v) 2 , pZ^VOi+v), p W= Ap-v (fe/x — v). Ear. 5. Show that freedom-equations of the anchor-ring are ptf = 2C 2 *(« a — i), pj, = C 2 (* 2 -i)(« 2 -i), pz = 2bcu(P + i), pa, = (* 2 +i){a(K 2 -i) + &(« 2 + i)}. [If a>b write c = ic' and u=iu'.] 408 ALGEBRAIC SURFACES [chap. 17-981. The general equation of a quartic surface having a double-conic w=o, F 2 =ax i +by i +cz 2 +2fyz+zgzx+2hxy=o is F 2 i + zwF t G 1 +to*G a =o, where G t and G 2 are homogeneous expressions in x, y, z, to of degree one and two respectively. [G ± indeed need not contain w.] An arbitrary plane section is a quartic curve with two double- points. In the special metrical case where the conic is the circle at infinity, so that the equation in rectangular cartesian co- ordinates is (x 2 +y* + z*) 2 + 2wG x (x* +y* + z 2 ) + w*G 2 = o, w = o being the plane at infinity, the surface is called a Cy elide, and an arbitrary plane section is a quartic having double-points at the circular points in its plane, i.e. a bicircular quartic. 17-982. A binodal plane quartic curve is the projection of the quartic curve of intersection of two quadrics. A quartic surface which possesses a double-conic has an analogous properly of being the projection of the surface of intersection of two quadric loci in space of four dimensions. Let Q=o and R = o represent two quadric loci in 5 4 , Q and R being homogeneous quadratic expressions in x , x lt x 2 , x 3 , # 4 . Then Q + \R = o represents a linear system of quadric loci all containing the quartic surface F 2 4 common to Q and R. If this is projected from any point O on to a three-flat S s we obtain a quartic surface F in S 3 . Through O there passes one quadric, say Q, of the system, and the tangent three-flat at O meets Q in a cone with vertex O which is cut by S 3 in a conic C and this conic lies on F. But every generating line of the cone meets the other quadrics of the system, and therefore V 2 *, in two points, and each such pair of points is projected into one point. Hence C is the locus of double-points or a double-conic on F. 17-99. EXAMPLES. i. Show that the constant-number of a rational algebraic curve of order n in a plane is 3»— i. [The parametric equations contain 3(»+i) coefficients; but xvn] ALGEBRAIC SURFACES 409 by the fundamental theorem of projective geometry to any three points may be assigned arbitrary values of the parameter, and, further, only the ratios of the coefficients are significant, so that the number of essential constants is reduced by four. Other- wise : the constant-number of the general plane curve of order n is |«(m + 3), and the rational curve has \(n— i)(»— 2) double- points; subtracting these we get 3»— 1.] 2. Show that the constant-number of a rational curve of order n in space is 4*1. 3. Show that on an algebraic surface of order n there are in general oo 4r -' rn + 1 » rational algebraic curves of order r; in par- ticular oo 2r_1 rational r-ics on a quadric surface and oo r_1 on a cubic surface. Deduce also that on a general surface of order 4 or more there are no rational curves of any order. 4. Find the number of conditions in order that a surface should possess (i) a conical point, (ii) a triple point. Am. (i) 1, (ii) 7. 5. Show that nine conditions are required in order that a quartic surface should possess a double-line, and find the num- ber of conditions in the case of a surface of order n. Am. 3»— 3. 6. Show that the constant-number of the general ruled cubic surface is 13. 7. Show that the constant-number of the Steiner surface is 15. 8. Show that a cubic surface may have as many as four nodes but cannot have more ; also that if it has four nodes the tangent- cone from any point of the surface consists of two quadric cones. (Math. Trip. II, 1914.) 9. Show that upon a cubic surface there are two families of skew cubic curves associated with any double-six of lines of the surface, and that the quadric surfaces which pass through these curves are all linear functions of nine of them. Prove also that 4io ALGEBRAIC SURFACES [chap, xvn the first polar of any point in regard to the cubic surface is a linear function of these nine quadrics. Find the general form of these cubic curves, and of these quadric surfaces, so far as they exist, for the surface (Math. Trip. II, 1914.) 10. Of five non-intersecting lines in space the five pairs of transversals of each set of four of these lines are constructed. Prove that the five transversals of these pairs which can be drawn from an arbitrary point of space are coplanar. (Math. Trip. II, 1915.) 11. Prove that a ruled surface of order n has in general a double-curve cutting each generator inn — 2 points. Show that the normals of an ellipsoid at the points of a given plane section are chords of a twisted cubic curve, and generators of a ruled surface of order 4. Prove that if the plane of the section touch a certain surface of the fourth class, the cubic curve is replaced by a straight line ; and investigate the character of this line upon the ruled surface. (Math. Trip. II, 1914.) INDEX Absolute, the, 67; circle (see Circle at infinity) ; lines, 64, 87 Absolute invariants, 150, 315 AfiSne transformation, 323 Algebraic curves, 188, 277 — surfaces, 364 ff. Anchor- ring, 112, 368; freedom- equations, 407; tangential equa- tion, 377 Angle between two lines, 4, 7 ; planes, 15; generating lines of cone, 99; of intersection of two spheres, 78; logarithmic expressiorl, 64 Apolar conies, 104; linear complexes, 351 ; pairs of numbers, 51 ; quad- rics, 311 Apparent cusp, 291 ; double-point, 281 ; inflexion, 287 Associated points, 265 Asymptotes of plane section of quad- ric, 203 ; of space-cubic, 294 Asymptotic cone of sphere, 87 ; hyper- boloid, 128 — planes of cylinder, 105 ; of cubic curve, 294 Axes of coordinates, 1 — of quadric, 166; of plane section of quadric, 200 — of rotation, no; of symmetry, 121 Axial coordinates, 337 — pencil, 23 Baker, H. F., 311, 351 Barycentric coordinates, 69 Base-curve, 251 Battaglini's complex, 330 Bilinear symmetrical expression, 5, 7. 3°. Si. 79, 126, 147, 313 Binode = biplanar node, 374, 378 Bisecants, 281 ; of cubic curve, 291 ; of quartic curve, 297, 300, 302 Bitangent developable, 377 ; of ruled surface, 381 Biunivocal = one-to-one, 25 (see Cor- respondence) Bundle of lines and planes, 23, 46 Bundle-planes, 346 Canonical equation of plane, 13 ; of quadric, 158 ; of two quadrics, 267 ff. Cartesian coordinates, 1, 69 ; general, 7 Cayley, A., 306, 372, 386, 393, 398 Cayley's ruled cubic, 384 Centre of sphere, 74 ; of quadric, 163 ; of plane section of quadric, 132, 200 — of symmetry, 121 Circle, equations of, 77 — at infinity, 68, 86 Circular cone, 95, 113 ; cylinder, 106, "3 — points at infinity, 67 — sections, 204 Class of space-curve, 286 ; of surface, 215, 372 Classification of conies, 159; cubic curves (metrical), 294; cubic sur- faces, 39s , 396 ; quadrics (metrical), 164; (projective), 160, 221 Coaxial spheres, 81 Collinearity, 20 Complex of lines, 218, 338 ; meeting a curve, 281 — , linear, 339 ff.; relation to null system, 157; special or singular, 185, 347; containing the tangents of a cubic curve, 293 ; represented inS 6 , 346 — , quadratic, 261, 353 ff. — of tangents to quadric, 330, 359 — , harmonic, 329, 361 — , tetrahedral, 263, 360 Cone, 94 ff.; condition for, 149; as quadric with parabolic points, 148 ; as specialised quadric, 158 ; dual to curve, 216 Configuration of lines on cubic sur- face, 393 ; of umbilics, 208 Confocal quadrics, 23s ff., 254; cones and cylinders, 243 Conformal transformation, 86 Congruence of lines, 218, 338; of bisecants of curve, 281 ; of normals to quadric, 362 — , focal, 228 — , linear, 347, 349; singular, 347, 349 Conical point, 373 Conic at infinity on quadric, 163 412 INDEX Conies on a quadric, 145 ; on a sur- face, 378 Conjugate diameters, 132 — focal conies, 244 — generators, 333 — imaginary elements, 30 — linear complexes, 351 — lines, 130 — planes, 126 — points, 125, 147 — tangents, 366 Constant-number, 25; of algebraic surface, 372; of quadric, 144; of rational curve, 408 t Contact of quadrics, 317 ff.; along a line, 270, 318; along two lines, 270, 319; double, 267, 270, 318; quad- ruple, 268, 318; ring, 268, 318; simple, 268, 317; stationary, 269, 270, 318; triple, 270, 318 Contravariants, 325 Coordinates, r; axial, 337; bary- centric, 69 ; cartesian, 1, 69 ; homo- geneous, 18; line, 26, 218, 337; plane, 25, 212; Plucker, 28, 337; projective, 48, 60; quadriplanar, 68; ray, 337; rectangular, 2; superabundant, 2, 28; volume, 69 Coplanar points, condition for, 12, 20 Correlations, 155 Correspondence, one-to-one, 47; between points and coordinates, 1 , 25, 47 ; between points and para- meters, 278; geometrical, 53 Corresponding points on two quad- rics, 249 Co-singular quadratic complexes, 357 Covariants, 327 Cross-ratio (metrical), 47; (pro- jective), S3 ; of four numbers, 49 Cubical ellipse, 294; hyperbola, 294; hyperbolic parabola, 294; para- bola, 295 Cubic curve, 189, 270, 271, 287 ff.; always rational, 190, 289 ; generated by three related axial pencils, 288; lying on a quadric, 291 ; metrical classification, 294 — surface, 388 ff.; always rational, r 95, 39°; generated by three re- lated bundles of planes, 389 ; ruled, 194, 382 ff. ; with four conic nodes, 91, 376; with three binodes, 376; classification, 395 Curvajure of a surface, 366 ; measure of, 368; mean, 368; positive and negative, 368 — , lines of, 139, 255 ff. Curve, algebraic, 188, 277 ff. — , cubic (see Cubic curve) — , quartic (see Quartic curve) — , rational, 188, 277 Curves on a quadric, 306 Cuspidal edge, 286 — points, 383 Cyclide, 408 Cylinders, 105, 174 Dandelin's theorem, 234 Deficiency of a curve, 283 (see Genus) Deformable models, 205, 247 Degenerate quadrics, 158, 221 Degree of complex, 338; of ruled surface, 380 Developable, 107, 284 ff.; has only parabolic points, 367, 372; Hes- sian of, 372; bitangent, 377; of cubic curve, 385 — circumscribing two quadrics, 253 ; point-equation, 327 — of curve of intersection of two quadrics, 331 ; point-equation, 332 Diameter, 131, 162 Diametral planes, 131, 162 Direction = point at infinity, 17 Direction-angles, 2; cosines, 2; ratios, 7 Director sphere, 128 Directrix corresponding to focus, 225 ; of linear congruence, 347 ; of special linear complex, 158, 347 — curve, 382; developable, 382 Discriminant of quadric, 149; of surface, 374 — surfaces, 370 Discriminating cubic, 166 Distance between two lines, 32 ; from point to plane, 31; from point to straight line, 32 — formula, 4, 7, 65 Double contact, 267, 270, 318 — curve on surface, 378; on ruled surface, 381 Double-points of homography, 56 — of plane curve, 281 ; of surface, 373 ; on plane section, 377 — , apparent, 281 Double-six, 395 INDEX 4i3 Double tangent plane, 377; of cubic surface, 377 Dual (see Reciprocal) Edge, W. L., 386 Edge of regression, 285 Eight associated points, 265 Ellipsoid, 113; model, 206 Elliptic cylinder, 105; involution, 56; linear congruence, 347; para- boloid, 114; point, 148, 365; quartic curve, 298 Envelope, 114, 213 Enveloping cylinder, 128 Equianharmonic tetrad, 50 Euler's equations of transformation, 39 Field, plane, 46 Field-plane, 346 Five-dimensional geometry, 343 Five points on a sphere, condition, 76 Flat space, 62, 341 Focal axes, 224, 227, 246, 301 ; con- gruence, 228, 247, 301 ; conies, 229; developable, 238, 301 Foci, 225, 229 Four-dimensional geometry, 340 Four-flat, 343 Four skew lines, transversal of, 186 Freedom-equations (see Parametric equations) Fresnel's wave-surface, 361 Fundamental theorem of projective geometry, 54 Gaussian measure of curvature, 368 Generating lines of quadric, 181 ff.; cone, 98; hyperboloid, 115; para- boloid, 116; V»*, 341 — , rectangular, 102 — , reality of, 117, 153 — of one quadric which touch another quadric, 353 — of ruled surface, 379 Genus of plane curve, 283; space- curve, 283 ; ruled surface, 381 Harmonic set of four numbers, 50; collinear points, 53 — complex, 329, 361 — conic-envelope of two conies, 104 Henderson, A., 393 Henrici, O., 247 Heron's formula, extension to tetra- hedra, 36 Hessian, 370 Homogeneous coordinates, 60; car- tesian, 18, 69 Homography, 55, 70 Hudson, R. W. H. T., 351 Hyperbolic cylinder, 105; rect- angular, 106, 223 — involution, 56 — linear congruence, 347 — paraboloid, 114; rectangular, 323 — point, 148, 365 Hyperboloid of revolution, in; of fVo sheets, 113 ; of one sheet, 113, 1 15 ; models, 115, 247 ; orthocyclic, 323; orthofocal, 325; orthogonal, 128, 267, 323; rectangular, 127, 266, 322 Hypercone, 342 Imaginary elements, 30 Indicatrix, 256 Infinity, points and lines at, 16, 65; plane at, 18, 21, 69 — , circle at, 68, 86 Inflexional curve, 368, 370 — tangents, 365; of quartic curve, 302 Inflexions, apparent, 287 Inpolar conies, 104; quadrics, 311 Intercepts, 13 Intersection of line and plane, 16; two planes, 14; three planes, 21; two lines, 23, 29; straight line and quadric, 122, 147 ; curves lying on quadric, 290, 291, 302, 303, 307 — of three complexes, 379 — , curve of, of two surfaces, 277; of confocal quadrics, 255; of two quadrics, 251, 267, 280, 295; tan- gential equation, 326, line-equa- tion, 331 Invariance of angles under inversion, 8 5. Invariant-factors, 273 Invariants, 150 ff. ; absolute, 150, 315; metrical, 172, 321; simulta- neous, 309 ff.; of linear complex, 347 Inverse transformations, 37 Inversion, 84 Involution, 56, 70; linear complexes in, 351 ; on a cubic curve, 290 — , skew, 162 4H Isotropic lines and planes, 87 Ivory's theorem, 250 INDEX Jacobian of four spheres, 81 Joachimsthal's formulae, 6; ratio- equation, 125, 147 Klein, F., 351, 352 Kummer surface, 358 Laguerhe, E., 65 Limiting points of two spheres, 82 Linear complex (see Complex) — congruence (see Congruence) — systems of spheres, 81 ; quadrics, 251 ff.; cones, 273 Line-equation of conic, 219; quad- ric, 219, 220, 313, 328; space- curve, 281 Line-series, 218, 338 Lines of curvature, 139, 255 ff. Lines on a surface, 181, 378; cubic surface, 391 ff.; quartic surface, 397 Liiroth's theorem, 278 Matrices, 19, 27, 150, 159, 161, 165, 167, 221, 272, 280 Mean curvature, 368 — point, 6 Measure of curvature, 368 Meridian curve, no Metrical geometry, 64 — invariants, 172, 321 Meunier's theorem, 367 Mobius net, 60 Models, 115, 205, 247 Modulus of transformation, 39, 151 Moment of two lines, 33 Monoid, 398 n dimensions, 62, 340, 400, 408 Net of rationality, 60 Node, 373 Non-euclidean geometry, 65, 186, 259. 335 Normal varieties, 404 Normals to quadric, 123, 137, 140, 362 Null-system, 156; connected with space-cubic, 293 Oblate spheroid, no Order of algebraic curve, 189, 277, 286; surface, 215, 364 Orientation of plane, 13; =line at infinity, 17 Origin, 1 Ortnocentric tetrahedron, 43, 92; pentad, 43, 92 Orthocyclic quadric, 323 Orthofocal quadric, 325 Orthogonal cone, 103; hyperboloid, 128, 323 — spheres, 78 — transformation, 321 Orthoptic sphere, 128 Oscular line, 396 Osculating plane, 284 ; of cubic curve, 289, 293 Osculation, point of, 366 Outpolar conies, 104 ; quadrics, 3" Painvin's complex, 361 Parabolic cylinder, 106, 175; linear congruence, 347; point, 148, 36S Paraboloid, 173; elliptic, 114; circu- lar sections, 205; hyperbolic, 114; generators, 183; models, 117, 206, 248 Parallelism, 5 Parametric equations of curve, 188, 378; surface, 191 ff.; anchor-ring, 407 ; cardioid, 282 ; conic, 189, 190 ; cubic curve, 189, 289, 295, 306; cubic surface, 391; ellipsoid, 193; elliptic quartic curve, 298; hyper- bolic paraboloid, 188 ; hyperboloid of one sheet, 188; nodal or cuspidal quartic curve, 299; plane, 12, 20, 62 ; quartic curve of second species, 302; straight line, 11, 18, 61, 280; ruled cubic, 194; Steiner surface, 194, 398; curve of striction, 305; surface of Veronese, 401 ; second degree, 194, 400 Pencil of planes, 22; quadric loci, 251; quadric envelopes, 253; spheres, 81 — , plane, 46, 346 Perpendicularity, 5 Perspective, 53 Pinch-points, 383 Plane, 12; lying on V*, 343 — section of quadric, 145, 199 ff.; algebraic surface, 364 Plucker's coordinates, 28, 337; equa- tions, 287 INDEX 4i5 Point, double (see Double-points); elliptic, parabolic and hyperbolic, 148, 365; of osculation, 366 Point-sphere, 74 Polar congruence, 354 — lines w.r.t. quadric, 129, 149, 220; w.r.t. linear complex, 339, 350 — of line w.r.t. quadratic complex, 354 — plane w.r.t. algebraic surface, 369 ; cone, 100; quadric, 124, 147; sphere, 79; tetrahedron, 63 — quadric, 369; three-flat, 341 — tetrahedra, 129 Polarising operator, 330, 369 Polarity, 154 Pole of given plane, 125 Porisms, 102, 143, 146, 310, 312, 316 Position-ratio, 6 Power w.r.t. sphere, 75 Prime, 62 Principal diametral planes, 136, 166; directions on a quadric, 138 ; foci, 230; tangents, 365 Prohessian, 372 Projection of lines of curvature, 256; of surface of intersection of quad- ric varieties, 408; of surface of Veronese, 404 — , stereographic, 85, 192, 342 Projective coordinates, 60 ; geometry, 46 ; invariants, 152, 309 ; ranges, 54 Prolate spheroid, no Ptolemy's theorem, 77 Quadratic complex, 353 Quadratic representing pairs of ele- ments, 50, 70 Quadric variety, 341 Quadrics, 144; determined by three generators, 14s ; generated by re- lated pencils of planes, 183; by transversals of three skew lines, 184; through nine points, 144; through a cubic curve, 289; of revolution, 17s Quadriplanar coordinates, 68 Quartic curve, 267, 295 ff.; cuspidal, 271, 299; elliptic, 298; nodal, 269, 298 — surfaces, 397 ff.; developable, 385 ; rational, 397 ; ruled, 385 ; with double-conic, 406; with double- line, 405 ; with twelve conic nodes, 376 Radical axis, 78; centre, 78; plane, 78 Radius-vector, 2, 7 Rank of matrix, 20; space-curve, 287; surface, 380 Rational algebraic curve, 188, 277; plane curve, 282 ; surface, 191 , 381 ; quartic surfaces, 397 Rationality, net of, 60 Ray-coordinates, 337 Reciprocal cones, 100; elements, 47; quadrics, 328; surfaces, 373 — of a cone, 101, 216; cylinder, 107 Rectangular cone, 102; coordinates, 2 ; generators of cone, 102 ; hyper- bolic cylinder, 106; hyperbolic paraboloid, 323 ; hyperboloid, 127, 266, 322; in non-euclidean geo- metry, 335 Reducible curve, 280; surface, 364 Regulus, 116; linear series, 347 Representation, parametric (see Para- metric) — of surface on plane, 191 Residual, 280 Revolution, surface of, 1 10 ; quadrics, 175 Richmond, H. W., 397 Right-handed system, 2 Ring-contact, 180, 234, 268 Roman surface, 398 Ruled surfaces, 114, 285, 379 ff.; cubics, 194, 382 ff.; quart ics, 385 Salmon, G., 260 Scalar product of vectors, 15 SchlAfli, L., 393 Schroter, H., 323 Sections of quadric, 199 Segre characteristics, 273 Self-conjugate linear complex, 351; tetrahedra, 130 Self -polar tetrahedron, 129; of two quadrics, 252 Sheaf of planes, 23 Signs of segments, 2 Simplex, 62, 349 Simultaneous invariants, 310 Singular linear complex, 347 ; linear congruence, 347, 349; line, 355; points and planes of quadratic complex, 354; surface of quadratic complex, 3S4, 358; system of quadrics, 273 Singularities of a surface, 373 4i6 INDEX Skew involution, 162 — lines, 23 ; shortest distance, 32 S„= space of n dimensions, 340 Special linear complex, 185, 347 Sphere, 74 ff. Sphero-conic, 259 Spheroid, no Stationary plane, 366 Steiner surface, 194, 379, 398 ff. Steinerian, 371 Stereographic projection, 85, 192, 342 Straight line, n (see Lines) Striction, line of, 304 Superabundant coordinates, 2, 28 Surfaces, algebraic, 36411.; ruled, 114, 285, 379 ff.; with °o a conies, 378 Sylvester's law of inertia, 353 Symmetry, 121 Tact-invariant, 317 Tangent-cone, 127 — lines of space-curve, 284; cubic curve, 292 — linear congruence, 355 — plane of surface, 212, 364; quad- ric, 123, 147; sphere, 80 — three-flat, 341 Tangential equations, 212 ff.; cone, 98, 217 ; cylinder, 106 ; plane curve, 216; space-curve, 284; quadric, 124, 214, 328; surface, 213, 377 Tangents, conjugate, 366 ; inflexional or principal, 365 Tetrahedra, mutually inscribed, 71, 72, 306; polar, 129 Tetrahedral complex, 263, 360 Tetrahedroid, 361 Tetrahedron, orthocentric, 43; of reference, 6a; self-conjugate, 130; self-polar, 129; of two quadrics, 252 ; volume, 34 Three-flat, 341 Tore (see Anchor-ring) Torsal line, 396 Transformation, affine, 322 ; Du- rational, 86; conformal, 86; of coordinates, 3, 37, 48; inverse, 37; linear, 47, 150, 321 ; orthogonal, 321 ; quadratic, 86; spherical,$6

Triangle of reference, 61

Triple orthogonal system, 237

Triple points, 378

Trisecants, 283, 288, 297, 302

Tritangent planes, 377; of cubic
surface, 391

Trope, 376

Umbilics, 207, 256
Unicursal curve, 283
Uniplanar node, 374
Unit-point, 48
Unode, 374

Vector-product, 15

Vectors, 14

Veronese, surface of, 400

Vertex of paraboloid, 140, 174

Virtual conic, 160; quadric, 121, 161 ;

sphere, 74
V„ 2 = quadric variety in S n+ i, 341,

343
Volume of tetrahedron, 34
Volume-coordinates, 69

Wave-surface, 361
Weddle surface, 397
Weight of invariant, 152

CAMBRIDGE: PRINTED BY W. LEWIS, M.A., AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS